EDNord magicolor 8650 User`s guide

EDNord magicolor 8650 User`s guide
A02E-9561-02A
1800843-001C
User's Guide
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Contents
1
Introduction
1.1
Energy Star®.................................................................................................................................... 1-3
What is an ENERGY STAR® Product? ............................................................................................. 1-3
1.2
Trademarks and copyrights ...........................................................................................................
License information ...........................................................................................................................
OpenSSL statement ..........................................................................................................................
NetSNMP License .............................................................................................................................
Kerberos............................................................................................................................................
Copyright...........................................................................................................................................
For EU member states only...............................................................................................................
1.3
1.4
1.5
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT............................................................................................
About Adobe Color Profile............................................................................................................
ICC Profile for TOYO INK Standard Color on Coated paper
(TOYO Offset Coated 2.0) .............................................................................................................
DIC STANDARD COLOR PROFILE LICENSE AGREEMENT ......................................................
Explanation of manual conventions ............................................................................................
Safety advices .................................................................................................................................
Sequence of action .........................................................................................................................
Tips..................................................................................................................................................
Special text markings ......................................................................................................................
1-10
1-11
Descriptions of paper ...................................................................................................................
User manuals .................................................................................................................................
Printed manual ................................................................................................................................
Documentation CD manual .............................................................................................................
1-18
1-18
1-18
1-18
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
1-4
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-8
1-8
1-9
1-13
1-14
1-16
1-16
1-16
1-16
1-17
Before using the machine
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.1.6
2.1.7
2.1.8
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.2.6
2.2.7
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.4
2.3.5
2.3.6
2.3.7
magicolor 8650
Part names and their functions...................................................................................................... 2-3
Options.............................................................................................................................................. 2-3
Outside of machine ........................................................................................................................... 2-5
Inside of machine .............................................................................................................................. 2-9
Finisher FS-S519/Output tray OT-602/Punch kit PK-515............................................................... 2-10
Saddle stitcher SD-505/Mailbin kit MT-502.................................................................................... 2-12
Finisher FS-609/Punch kit PK-501.................................................................................................. 2-14
Control panel................................................................................................................................... 2-16
Display panel ................................................................................................................................... 2-16
Power supply ................................................................................................................................. 2-17
Turning on the machine................................................................................................................... 2-17
Turning off the machine .................................................................................................................. 2-18
Automatically clearing settings (System Auto Reset)...................................................................... 2-18
Automatically conserving energy (Low Power mode) ..................................................................... 2-19
Automatically conserving energy (Sleep mode) .............................................................................. 2-19
Manually switching to Power Save mode ....................................................................................... 2-19
Power supply................................................................................................................................... 2-19
Paper .............................................................................................................................................. 2-20
Possible paper sizes ....................................................................................................................... 2-20
Paper types and paper capacities .................................................................................................. 2-21
Special paper .................................................................................................................................. 2-22
Precautions for paper...................................................................................................................... 2-23
Paper storage.................................................................................................................................. 2-23
Auto tray switch feature .................................................................................................................. 2-24
Order for selecting paper trays ....................................................................................................... 2-24
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Contents-1
3
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.5
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.6
2.6.1
Loading paper ................................................................................................................................
Loading paper into the tray 1 (bypass tray) .....................................................................................
Loading paper into tray 2/3/4/5.......................................................................................................
Loading paper into the tray 4 (LCT) .................................................................................................
Printer controller............................................................................................................................
Role of the printer controller ............................................................................................................
Printing flow.....................................................................................................................................
Operating environment .................................................................................................................
Compatible computers and operating systems ..............................................................................
Windows ..........................................................................................................................................
Macintosh ........................................................................................................................................
2-25
2-25
2-29
2-30
2-32
2-32
2-33
2-34
2-34
2-34
2-34
2.6.2
Compatible interfaces......................................................................................................................
Ethernet interface ............................................................................................................................
USB interface...................................................................................................................................
Connection diagram ........................................................................................................................
2-35
2-35
2-35
2-35
2.6.3
2.7
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.8
2.9
2.9.1
2.9.2
2.9.3
2.10
2.10.1
Printer drivers applicable to operating systems ..............................................................................
Setting up the system....................................................................................................................
Network connection ........................................................................................................................
Local connection .............................................................................................................................
Contents of CD-ROM ....................................................................................................................
Authentication Method..................................................................................................................
User authentication and account track ...........................................................................................
When user authentication and account track are synchronized .....................................................
When user authentication and account track are used separately .................................................
User Box functions ........................................................................................................................
Available User Box functions...........................................................................................................
Saving documents ...........................................................................................................................
Using document data ......................................................................................................................
2-36
2-37
2-37
2-37
2-38
2-39
2-39
2-40
2-40
2-41
2-41
2-41
2-42
2.10.2
Set-up for User Box functions......................................................................................................... 2-42
User box registration ....................................................................................................................... 2-42
2.10.3
User authentication.......................................................................................................................... 2-43
Machine authentication ................................................................................................................... 2-43
Account track .................................................................................................................................. 2-44
2.10.4
Limitation on user box registration .................................................................................................. 2-45
Public/personal/group user boxes .................................................................................................. 2-45
2.10.5
Authentication and accessible user boxes......................................................................................
When user authentication and account track settings are not specified ........................................
When only user authentication settings are specified .....................................................................
When only account track settings are specified..............................................................................
When user authentication and account track settings are specified and synchronized .................
When user authentication and account track settings are specified but not synchronized............
2-45
2-45
2-46
2-46
2-47
2-48
Network settings
3.1
Specifying general settings for TCP/IP-based communication .................................................. 3-3
TCP/IP Settings ................................................................................................................................. 3-3
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.3
3.4
3.4.1
Using PageScope Web Connection ...............................................................................................
TCP/IP Settings .................................................................................................................................
PSWC Settings ..................................................................................................................................
TCP Socket Setting ...........................................................................................................................
SSL/TLS Setting ................................................................................................................................
Logging in to Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection...........................................
Specifying network print settings ..................................................................................................
Specifying LPR/Port9100 print settings ............................................................................................
TCP/IP Settings .................................................................................................................................
LPD Setting........................................................................................................................................
RAW Port Number .............................................................................................................................
Contents-2
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
3-5
3-5
3-5
3-6
3-6
3-7
3-9
3-9
3-9
3-9
3-9
magicolor 8650
4
3.4.2
Specifying SMB print settings.........................................................................................................
TCP/IP Settings...............................................................................................................................
Print Setting.....................................................................................................................................
Direct Hosting Setting .....................................................................................................................
WINS Setting ...................................................................................................................................
3-10
3-10
3-11
3-12
3-13
3.4.3
Specifying IPP print settings ...........................................................................................................
TCP/IP Settings...............................................................................................................................
IPP Setting.......................................................................................................................................
IPP Authentication Setting ..............................................................................................................
3-14
3-14
3-15
3-16
3.4.4
Specifying IPPS print settings.........................................................................................................
TCP/IP Settings...............................................................................................................................
IPP Setting.......................................................................................................................................
SSL/TLS Setting..............................................................................................................................
IPP Authentication Setting ..............................................................................................................
3-16
3-17
3-17
3-17
3-17
3.4.5
Specifying Bonjour print settings .................................................................................................... 3-18
Bonjour Setting................................................................................................................................ 3-18
3.4.6
Specifying AppleTalk print settings................................................................................................. 3-19
AppleTalk Setting ............................................................................................................................ 3-19
3.4.7
Specifying Web Service Function settings......................................................................................
TCP/IP Settings...............................................................................................................................
Web Service Common Settings ......................................................................................................
Printer Settings................................................................................................................................
3-20
3-20
3-21
3-22
Installing the printer driver for Windows
4.1
Connection methods selectable in each operating system ........................................................ 4-3
Network connection (Ethernet).......................................................................................................... 4-3
USB interface .................................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.2
4.2.1
Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 ........................................................................................................
Windows Vista...................................................................................................................................
Windows NT 4.0 ................................................................................................................................
Installation using the wizard (Windows XP/Server 2003) ............................................................
Network connection (LPR/Port9100).................................................................................................
TCP/IP setting for this machine ........................................................................................................
RAW port number setting for this machine .......................................................................................
LPD setting for this machine .............................................................................................................
Printer driver installation using the Add Printer Wizard.....................................................................
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-6
4-6
4-6
4-6
4-6
4.2.2
Network connection (SMB) ...............................................................................................................
TCP/IP setting for this machine ........................................................................................................
SMB setting for this machine ............................................................................................................
Printer driver installation by specifying printers using the Add Printer Wizard .................................
4-8
4-8
4-8
4-8
4.2.3
Network connection (IPP or IPPS) ..................................................................................................
Specifying the TCP/IP setting for this machine...............................................................................
Specifying the IPP settings for this machine...................................................................................
Printer driver installation using the Add Printer wizard ...................................................................
4-10
4-10
4-10
4-10
4.2.4
4.3
4.3.1
Local connection .............................................................................................................................
Installation using the wizard (Windows Vista) ............................................................................
Network connection (LPR, Port9100, or SMB)................................................................................
Specifying the TCP/IP setting for this machine...............................................................................
RAW port number setting for this machine .....................................................................................
LPD setting for this machine ...........................................................................................................
SMB setting for this machine ..........................................................................................................
Printer driver installation by searching printers using the Add Printer Wizard................................
Printer driver installation by creating a port using the Add Printer Wizard .....................................
4-12
4-13
4-13
4-13
4-13
4-13
4-13
4-14
4-15
4.3.2
Network connection (IPP or IPPS) ..................................................................................................
Specifying the TCP/IP setting for this machine...............................................................................
Specifying the IPP settings for this machine...................................................................................
Printer driver installation using the Add Printer wizard ...................................................................
4-17
4-17
4-17
4-17
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Contents-3
5
4.3.3
Network connection (Web Service print) .........................................................................................
TCP/IP setting for this machine.......................................................................................................
Web Service settings for this machine ............................................................................................
Printer installation from the Network window..................................................................................
Printer driver installation by specifying the IP address using the Add Printer Wizard ....................
4-18
4-18
4-18
4-19
4-19
4.3.4
4.4
4.4.1
Local connection .............................................................................................................................
Installation using the wizard (Windows 2000) .............................................................................
Network connection (LPR/Port9100) ...............................................................................................
TCP/IP setting for this machine.......................................................................................................
RAW port number setting for this machine .....................................................................................
LPD setting for this machine ...........................................................................................................
Printer driver installation using the Add Printer Wizard ...................................................................
4-21
4-22
4-22
4-22
4-22
4-22
4-22
4.4.2
Network connection (SMB)..............................................................................................................
TCP/IP setting for this machine.......................................................................................................
SMB setting for this machine ..........................................................................................................
Printer driver installation using the Add Printer Wizard ...................................................................
4-23
4-23
4-23
4-24
4.4.3
Network connection (IPP or IPPS)...................................................................................................
Specifying the TCP/IP setting for this machine ...............................................................................
Specifying the IPP settings for this machine ...................................................................................
Printer driver installation using the Add Printer wizard....................................................................
4-25
4-25
4-25
4-25
4.4.4
4.5
4.5.1
Local connection .............................................................................................................................
Installation using the wizard (Windows NT 4.0) ..........................................................................
Network connection (LPR)...............................................................................................................
TCP/IP setting for this machine.......................................................................................................
LPD setting for this machine ...........................................................................................................
Printer driver installation using the Add Printer Wizard ...................................................................
4-26
4-27
4-27
4-27
4-27
4-27
4.6
Uninstalling the printer driver ....................................................................................................... 4-29
Installing the printer driver for Macintosh
5.1
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
Selectable connection methods.....................................................................................................
Installing the printer driver on Macintosh OSX 10.2/10.3/10.4 ....................................................
Installing the printer driver .................................................................................................................
Selecting and connecting the printer (OS 10.4).................................................................................
Specifying the Bonjour settings for this machine ..............................................................................
Adding a printer (Bonjour settings) ....................................................................................................
Specifying the AppleTalk settings for this machine...........................................................................
Specifying the AppleTalk settings for the computer .........................................................................
Adding a printer (AppleTalk settings).................................................................................................
Specifying the TCP/IP setting for this machine (LPR settings)..........................................................
LPD setting for this machine (LPR settings) ......................................................................................
Specifying the TCP/IP setting for the computer (LPR settings) ........................................................
Adding a printer (LPR settings)..........................................................................................................
Specifying the TCP/IP setting for this machine (IPP settings)...........................................................
IPP setting for this machine...............................................................................................................
Specifying the TCP/IP setting for the computer (IPP settings)..........................................................
Adding a printer (IPP settings) ...........................................................................................................
5.2.3
Selecting and connecting the printer (OS 10.2 and 10.3).................................................................. 5-8
Specifying the Bonjour settings for this machine (Rendezvous settings).......................................... 5-8
Adding a printer (Rendezvous settings)............................................................................................. 5-8
Specifying the AppleTalk settings for this machine........................................................................... 5-9
Specifying the AppleTalk settings for the computer ......................................................................... 5-9
Adding a printer (AppleTalk settings)................................................................................................. 5-9
Specifying the TCP/IP setting for this machine (LPR settings).......................................................... 5-9
LPD setting for this machine (LPR settings) ...................................................................................... 5-9
Specifying the TCP/IP setting for the computer (LPR settings) ...................................................... 5-10
Adding a printer (LPR settings)........................................................................................................ 5-10
Specifying the TCP/IP setting for this machine (IPP settings)......................................................... 5-10
IPP setting for this machine............................................................................................................. 5-10
Specifying the TCP/IP setting for the computer (IPP settings)........................................................ 5-11
Adding a printer (IPP settings) ......................................................................................................... 5-11
Contents-4
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
5-3
5-4
5-4
5-5
5-5
5-5
5-5
5-5
5-6
5-6
5-6
5-6
5-7
5-7
5-7
5-7
5-8
magicolor 8650
6
7
5.3
5.3.1
5.3.2
Mac OS 9.2 .....................................................................................................................................
Installing the printer driver...............................................................................................................
Selecting and connecting the printer ..............................................................................................
Specifying the AppleTalk settings for this machine ........................................................................
Specifying the AppleTalk settings for the computer .......................................................................
Selecting a printer (AppleTalk settings)...........................................................................................
Specifying the TCP/IP setting for this machine (LPR settings) .......................................................
LPD setting for this machine (LPR settings)....................................................................................
Specifying the TCP/IP setting for the computer (LPR settings) ......................................................
Adding a printer (LPR settings) .......................................................................................................
5-12
5-12
5-12
5-12
5-12
5-12
5-13
5-13
5-13
5-13
5.4
5.4.1
5.4.2
Uninstalling the printer driver....................................................................................................... 5-14
For Macintosh OS X ........................................................................................................................ 5-14
For Macintosh OS 9.2 ..................................................................................................................... 5-14
Print functions of the printer drivers for Windows
6.1
6.2
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.3
6.4
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.3
6.4.4
6.4.5
Printing operations.......................................................................................................................... 6-3
Initializing the PCL/PS printer driver ............................................................................................. 6-4
How to display the Properties screen ............................................................................................... 6-4
Configure tab..................................................................................................................................... 6-5
Settings tab ....................................................................................................................................... 6-6
Registration of the default settings ................................................................................................... 6-7
Common settings for the PCL/PS drivers..................................................................................... 6-8
Parameter details for the PCL/PS drivers..................................................................................... 6-9
Basic tab ........................................................................................................................................... 6-9
Layout tab ....................................................................................................................................... 6-11
Finish tab......................................................................................................................................... 6-13
Cover Mode tab .............................................................................................................................. 6-14
Stamp/Composition tab .................................................................................................................. 6-16
Editing watermark ........................................................................................................................... 6-18
Editing copy protect ........................................................................................................................ 6-19
Editing date/time and page number................................................................................................ 6-21
6.4.6
6.4.7
Quality tab ....................................................................................................................................... 6-22
Other tab ......................................................................................................................................... 6-23
Print functions of the printer driver for Macintosh
7.1
7.2
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.5.1
7.5.2
7.5.3
Printing operations for OS X .......................................................................................................... 7-3
Default settings for the OS X printer driver .................................................................................. 7-4
Options.............................................................................................................................................. 7-4
Registration of the default settings ................................................................................................... 7-5
Common settings for the OS X printer driver ............................................................................... 7-6
How to add a custom size for the OS X printer driver ................................................................. 7-7
Parameter details for the OS X printer driver ............................................................................... 7-8
Page Attributes.................................................................................................................................. 7-8
Copies & Pages................................................................................................................................. 7-9
Output Method ................................................................................................................................ 7-10
Checking the Output Method setting details .................................................................................. 7-11
7.5.4
7.5.5
7.5.6
7.5.7
7.5.8
Layout/Finish ...................................................................................................................................
Paper Tray/Output Tray...................................................................................................................
Cover Mode/Transparency Interleave .............................................................................................
Per Page Setting .............................................................................................................................
Stamp/Composition ........................................................................................................................
Editing copy protect ........................................................................................................................
Editing date/time .............................................................................................................................
Editing page number .......................................................................................................................
Editing header/footer.......................................................................................................................
7.5.9
Quality ............................................................................................................................................. 7-25
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
7-13
7-15
7-16
7-18
7-19
7-20
7-22
7-23
7-24
Contents-5
7.6
7.7
7.7.1
7.7.2
7.8
7.8.1
7.8.2
7.8.3
7.8.4
7.8.5
8
Printing operations for OS 9 .........................................................................................................
Default settings for the OS 9 printer driver .................................................................................
Options ............................................................................................................................................
Registration of the default settings..................................................................................................
Parameter details for the OS 9 printer driver ..............................................................................
Page Attributes ................................................................................................................................
Setting Custom Page Sizes .............................................................................................................
General ............................................................................................................................................
Layout (Pages per sheet) .................................................................................................................
Printer specific options (Finishing Options 1 to 5)...........................................................................
7-26
7-27
7-27
7-28
7-29
7-29
7-30
7-31
7-31
7-32
Function detail description
8.1
8.1.1
Proof print.........................................................................................................................................
Setting up the printer driver...............................................................................................................
For Windows......................................................................................................................................
For Macintosh OS X ..........................................................................................................................
8-3
8-3
8-3
8-4
8.1.2
8.2
8.2.1
Recalling a job from the control panel...............................................................................................
Secure print......................................................................................................................................
Setting up the printer driver...............................................................................................................
For Windows......................................................................................................................................
For Macintosh OS X ..........................................................................................................................
8-5
8-6
8-6
8-6
8-8
8.2.2
Recalling a job from the control panel............................................................................................... 8-9
When "SecurePrintAccess" is set to "Mode 1" ............................................................................... 8-10
When "SecurePrintAccess" is set to "Mode 2" ............................................................................... 8-11
8.3
8.3.1
Save in User Box............................................................................................................................
Setting up the printer driver.............................................................................................................
For Windows....................................................................................................................................
For Macintosh OS X ........................................................................................................................
8-12
8-12
8-12
8-14
8.3.2
8.4
8.4.1
Recalling a job from the control panel.............................................................................................
Save in Annotation User Box ........................................................................................................
Setting up the printer driver.............................................................................................................
For Windows....................................................................................................................................
For Macintosh OS X ........................................................................................................................
8-15
8-17
8-17
8-17
8-19
8.4.2
8.5
8.5.1
8.5.2
8.6
8.6.1
Recalling a job from the control panel.............................................................................................
Save in Encrypted PDF Box ..........................................................................................................
Specifying Encrypted PDF file .........................................................................................................
Recalling a job from the control panel.............................................................................................
Printing on a machine with the user authentication set up .......................................................
Setting up the printer driver.............................................................................................................
For Windows....................................................................................................................................
For Macintosh OS X ........................................................................................................................
8-20
8-22
8-22
8-23
8-24
8-25
8-25
8-27
8.7
8.7.1
Printing with the machine enabling the Account Track function..............................................
Setting up the printer driver.............................................................................................................
For Windows....................................................................................................................................
For Macintosh OS X ........................................................................................................................
8-29
8-29
8-29
8-31
8.8
8.8.1
8.8.2
8.9
8.9.1
8.9.2
Touch and Print..............................................................................................................................
Touch and Print operation procedure .............................................................................................
Recalling a job from the control panel.............................................................................................
Specifying a user-defined encryption passphrase .....................................................................
Settings of this machine ..................................................................................................................
Setting up the printer driver.............................................................................................................
For Windows....................................................................................................................................
For Macintosh OS X ........................................................................................................................
8-32
8-33
8-34
8-35
8-35
8-36
8-36
8-37
8.10
8.10.1
ICC profile settings........................................................................................................................
Setting up the printer driver.............................................................................................................
For Windows....................................................................................................................................
For Macintosh OS X ........................................................................................................................
8-39
8-39
8-39
8-40
Contents-6
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
9
10
8.11
8.11.1
Registering ICC profiles in the printer driver..............................................................................
Setting up the printer driver ............................................................................................................
For Windows ...................................................................................................................................
For Macintosh OS X ........................................................................................................................
8-41
8-41
8-41
8-43
8.12
8.12.1
Banner paper printing function .................................................................................................... 8-45
Copy paper...................................................................................................................................... 8-45
Applicable paper ............................................................................................................................. 8-45
8.12.2
8.12.3
8.12.4
Printer drivers and supported operating systems ........................................................................... 8-45
Setting up the printer driver ............................................................................................................ 8-45
Printing ............................................................................................................................................ 8-46
Settings for control panel
9.1
9.1.1
Control panel ...................................................................................................................................
Basic operations................................................................................................................................
Basic menu operations......................................................................................................................
Operations for changing numeric values ..........................................................................................
9-3
9-3
9-3
9-5
9.2
List of "Utility" menu parameters .................................................................................................. 9-7
Main Menu......................................................................................................................................... 9-7
Job Operation Menu ......................................................................................................................... 9-7
Paper Setting Menu........................................................................................................................... 9-8
User Setting Menu............................................................................................................................. 9-9
System Setting Menu ...................................................................................................................... 9-11
Admin. Settings Menu ..................................................................................................................... 9-13
Banner Printing Menu...................................................................................................................... 9-15
9.3
9.3.1
Parameters.....................................................................................................................................
Job Operation Menu .......................................................................................................................
User name input items ....................................................................................................................
Account name input items ..............................................................................................................
Document selection items...............................................................................................................
Printing items ..................................................................................................................................
9-16
9-16
9-16
9-16
9-16
9-17
9.3.2
9.3.3
Paper Settings Menu.......................................................................................................................
User Settings Menu.........................................................................................................................
Print Reports ...................................................................................................................................
Consumables ..................................................................................................................................
System Settings ..............................................................................................................................
Printer Settings................................................................................................................................
Font List...........................................................................................................................................
9-17
9-18
9-18
9-18
9-18
9-19
9-20
9.3.4
System Settings Menu ....................................................................................................................
System Settings ..............................................................................................................................
Network Settings.............................................................................................................................
Printer Settings................................................................................................................................
System Connection .........................................................................................................................
9-21
9-21
9-22
9-24
9-24
9.3.5
Admin. Settings Menu .....................................................................................................................
Security Settings .............................................................................................................................
User Box Settings ...........................................................................................................................
AuthDeviceSetting...........................................................................................................................
Expert Adjustment...........................................................................................................................
Option Settings ...............................................................................................................................
Firmware Update.............................................................................................................................
9-25
9-25
9-27
9-28
9-29
9-30
9-31
PageScope Web Connection
10.1
10.1.1
10.1.2
10.1.3
Using PageScope Web Connection.............................................................................................
Operating environment....................................................................................................................
Accessing PageScope Web Connection ........................................................................................
Web browser cache ........................................................................................................................
With Internet Explorer......................................................................................................................
With Netscape Navigator ................................................................................................................
With Mozilla Firefox .........................................................................................................................
10.1.4
Structure of pages........................................................................................................................... 10-5
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-3
10-3
10-3
10-4
10-4
10-4
10-4
Contents-7
10.2
10.2.1
Logging on and logging off...........................................................................................................
Login and logout operations............................................................................................................
When user authentication and account track settings are not specified ........................................
When user authentication and account track settings are specified...............................................
10.2.2
10.2.3
Logout.............................................................................................................................................. 10-9
Login .............................................................................................................................................. 10-10
Options that can be selected when logged on to PageScope Web Connection .......................... 10-10
Logging on as a public user .......................................................................................................... 10-10
Logging on as a registered user .................................................................................................... 10-11
Logging on to Administrator mode................................................................................................ 10-12
10.3
10.3.1
10.3.2
10.3.3
10.3.4
10.4
10.4.1
10.4.2
10.4.3
10.4.4
10.4.5
10.5
10.5.1
Overview of User mode...............................................................................................................
Information.....................................................................................................................................
Job.................................................................................................................................................
Box ................................................................................................................................................
Direct Print.....................................................................................................................................
Overview of Administrator mode ...............................................................................................
Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................
Security..........................................................................................................................................
Box ................................................................................................................................................
Print Setting ...................................................................................................................................
Network .........................................................................................................................................
Box settings .................................................................................................................................
Changing user box settings or deleting a user box.......................................................................
Open User Box ..............................................................................................................................
10.5.2
Creating a new user box................................................................................................................ 10-25
Create User Box ............................................................................................................................ 10-25
10.5.3
Changing system box settings or deleting system boxes............................................................. 10-27
Open System User Box ................................................................................................................. 10-27
10.5.4
Creating a new system user box ................................................................................................... 10-29
Create System User Box ............................................................................................................... 10-29
10.6
Importing or exporting setting information............................................................................... 10-30
Import/Export................................................................................................................................. 10-30
10.7
10.7.1
10.7.2
10.7.3
10.7.4
10.8
10.8.1
10.8.2
10.8.3
10.9
10.9.1
10.9.2
10.9.3
10.9.4
10.9.5
10.10
10.10.1
10.10.2
10.10.3
10.10.4
10.10.5
10.10.6
10.11
10.11.1
10.11.2
Specifying the date and time on this machine..........................................................................
Manual Setting...............................................................................................................................
TCP/IP Settings .............................................................................................................................
Time Zone......................................................................................................................................
Time Adjustment Setting ...............................................................................................................
Limiting users using this machine (Machine authentication) ..................................................
User Auth/Account Track ..............................................................................................................
User Registration ...........................................................................................................................
Account Track Registration ...........................................................................................................
Limiting users using this machine (Active Directory)...............................................................
TCP/IP Settings .............................................................................................................................
External Server Registration ..........................................................................................................
User Auth/Account Track ..............................................................................................................
Default Function Permission..........................................................................................................
Date/Time Setting ..........................................................................................................................
Limiting users using this machine (Windows domain/workgroup).........................................
TCP/IP Settings .............................................................................................................................
External Server Registration ..........................................................................................................
User Auth/Account Track ..............................................................................................................
Default Function Permission..........................................................................................................
Client Setting .................................................................................................................................
WINS Setting .................................................................................................................................
Limiting users using this machine (NDS)...................................................................................
External Server Registration ..........................................................................................................
User Auth/Account Track ..............................................................................................................
Contents-8
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-7
10-7
10-7
10-8
10-13
10-13
10-14
10-15
10-16
10-17
10-17
10-19
10-20
10-21
10-22
10-24
10-24
10-24
10-31
10-32
10-32
10-32
10-33
10-34
10-35
10-36
10-38
10-40
10-40
10-41
10-42
10-43
10-43
10-44
10-44
10-45
10-46
10-46
10-47
10-48
10-49
10-50
10-51
magicolor 8650
10.11.3
10.11.4
10.12
10.12.1
10.12.2
10.12.3
10.12.4
10.12.5
Default Function Permission .........................................................................................................
NetWare Setting ............................................................................................................................
Limiting users using this machine (LDAP) ................................................................................
TCP/IP Settings.............................................................................................................................
External Server Registration..........................................................................................................
User Auth/Account Track ..............................................................................................................
Default Function Permission .........................................................................................................
LDAP over SSL..............................................................................................................................
External Server Registration..........................................................................................................
Action for Invalid Certificate ..........................................................................................................
10-51
10-52
10-53
10-53
10-54
10-55
10-55
10-56
10-56
10-56
10.13
10.13.1
10.13.2
10.13.3
10.13.4
10.13.5
10.13.6
10.14
Creating a certificate for this machine for SSL-based communication.................................
Create a self-signed Certificate.....................................................................................................
Request a Certificate.....................................................................................................................
Install a Certificate.........................................................................................................................
Set an Encryption Strength ...........................................................................................................
Set Mode using SSL......................................................................................................................
Remove a certificate......................................................................................................................
Using SSL communication between Vista and this machine with
Web Service Function .................................................................................................................
Using SSL for communication from Vista to this machine with Web Service Function................
Using SSL for communication from this machine to Vista with Web Service Function................
TCP/IP Settings.............................................................................................................................
SSL/TLS Setting............................................................................................................................
Web Service Common Settings ....................................................................................................
Action for Invalid Certificate ..........................................................................................................
Performing IP address filtering ..................................................................................................
TCP/IP Settings.............................................................................................................................
IP Filtering .....................................................................................................................................
Communicating using IPv6.........................................................................................................
TCP/IP Setting...............................................................................................................................
10-57
10-58
10-60
10-62
10-64
10-65
10-66
10.17
10.17.1
10.17.2
10.17.3
10.17.4
10.17.5
10.18
10.18.1
10.18.2
10.18.3
10.19
10.19.1
10.19.2
10.19.3
10.19.4
Communicating using IPsec ......................................................................................................
TCP/IP Settings.............................................................................................................................
IPsec..............................................................................................................................................
IKE Setting.....................................................................................................................................
SA Setting .....................................................................................................................................
Peer ...............................................................................................................................................
Monitoring this machine using the SNMP manager ................................................................
TCP/IP Settings.............................................................................................................................
NetWare Setting ............................................................................................................................
SNMP Setting................................................................................................................................
Providing notification of the status of this machine (E-mail) ..................................................
TCP/IP Settings.............................................................................................................................
E-mail TX (SMTP) ..........................................................................................................................
Status Notification Setting ............................................................................................................
SMTP over SSL/Start TLS.............................................................................................................
E-mail TX (SMTP) ..........................................................................................................................
Action for Invalid Certificate ..........................................................................................................
10-75
10-75
10-76
10-77
10-78
10-79
10-80
10-80
10-81
10-82
10-84
10-84
10-85
10-87
10-88
10-88
10-89
10.19.5
10.19.6
SMTP Authentication ....................................................................................................................
POP before SMTP .........................................................................................................................
POP before SMTP .........................................................................................................................
E-mail RX (POP) ............................................................................................................................
10-90
10-90
10-90
10-91
10.19.7
POP over SSL ............................................................................................................................... 10-92
E-mail RX (POP) ............................................................................................................................ 10-92
Action for Invalid Certificate .......................................................................................................... 10-92
10.19.8
APOP Authentication..................................................................................................................... 10-93
10.14.1
10.14.2
10.14.3
10.14.4
10.14.5
10.14.6
10.15
10.15.1
10.15.2
10.16
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-67
10-67
10-68
10-68
10-68
10-68
10-69
10-70
10-70
10-71
10-72
10-73
Contents-9
11
10.20
10.20.1
10.20.2
10.20.3
10.20.4
10.21
10.21.1
10.21.2
10.21.3
10.21.4
10.21.5
10.22
10.22.1
Providing notification of the status of this machine (TRAP).................................................... 10-94
TCP/IP Settings ............................................................................................................................. 10-94
NetWare Setting ............................................................................................................................ 10-95
TRAP Setting ................................................................................................................................. 10-96
Status Notification Setting............................................................................................................. 10-96
Using the TCP Socket/OpenAPI/FTP server function .............................................................. 10-97
TCP/IP Settings ............................................................................................................................. 10-97
SSL/TLS Setting ............................................................................................................................ 10-97
TCP Socket Setting ....................................................................................................................... 10-98
OpenAPI Setting ............................................................................................................................ 10-99
FTP Server Setting....................................................................................................................... 10-100
Other items on the Maintenance tab ....................................................................................... 10-101
Using the timer function .............................................................................................................. 10-101
Power Save Setting ..................................................................................................................... 10-101
10.22.2
Resetting setting information....................................................................................................... 10-102
Network Setting Clear ................................................................................................................. 10-102
Reset............................................................................................................................................ 10-103
10.22.3
Registering the header or footer.................................................................................................. 10-104
Header/Footer Registration ......................................................................................................... 10-104
10.23
10.23.1
Other items on the Security tab ............................................................................................... 10-106
Specifying the auto logout time................................................................................................... 10-106
Auto Logout ................................................................................................................................. 10-106
10.23.2
Specifying the Administrator password....................................................................................... 10-107
Administrator Password Setting .................................................................................................. 10-107
10.24
10.24.1
Print Setting tab settings .......................................................................................................... 10-108
Specifying initial settings for the print function ........................................................................... 10-108
Basic Setting................................................................................................................................ 10-108
10.24.2
Specifying settings for PCL/PS/XPS print ...................................................................................
PCL Settings................................................................................................................................
PS Setting....................................................................................................................................
XPS Settings................................................................................................................................
10.24.3
Specifying the interface timeout.................................................................................................. 10-113
Interface Setting .......................................................................................................................... 10-113
10-110
10-110
10-111
10-112
Troubleshooting
11.1
11.2
11.2.1
11.2.2
11.2.3
11.2.4
11.2.5
11.2.6
11.2.7
11.2.8
11.2.9
11.2.10
11.2.11
11.2.12
11.2.13
11.2.14
11.2.15
11.3
11.3.1
11.3.2
11.3.3
Contents-10
When an error code appears ........................................................................................................ 11-3
When the message "Misfeed detected. XXXX Remove paper." appears ................................ 11-4
Paper misfeed indications ............................................................................................................... 11-4
Clearing a paper misfeed in the fusing unit ..................................................................................... 11-7
Clearing a paper misfeed in the main unit ..................................................................................... 11-10
Clearing a paper misfeed in the automatic duplex unit ................................................................. 11-13
Clearing a paper misfeed in the tray 1 (bypass tray) ..................................................................... 11-15
Clearing a paper misfeed in the paper transport section .............................................................. 11-17
Clearing a paper misfeed in tray 2................................................................................................. 11-19
Clearing a paper misfeed in tray 3................................................................................................. 11-22
Clearing a paper misfeed in paper feed cabinet (tray 4/5) ............................................................ 11-24
Clearing a paper misfeed in the tray 4 (LCT) ................................................................................. 11-26
To clear a banner paper misfeed................................................................................................... 11-28
Clearing a paper misfeed in finisher FS-519 ................................................................................. 11-32
Clearing a paper misfeed in the mailbin ........................................................................................ 11-35
Clearing a paper misfeed in the saddle stitcher ............................................................................ 11-37
To clear a paper misfeed in finisher FS-609.................................................................................. 11-38
When the message "Staple Jam Detection" appears .............................................................. 11-41
Clearing jammed staples in finisher FS-519 .................................................................................. 11-41
Clearing jammed staples in the saddle stitcher............................................................................. 11-43
To clear jammed staples in finisher FS-609 .................................................................................. 11-44
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
11.4
11.5
11.6
11.7
11.7.1
11.8
11.9
11.10
12
Replacing the toner cartridge ...................................................................................................... 12-3
To replace the toner cartridge......................................................................................................... 12-4
Replacing the waste toner box .................................................................................................... 12-6
To replace the waste toner box....................................................................................................... 12-7
Replacing an imaging unit ............................................................................................................ 12-9
To replace the imaging unit........................................................................................................... 12-11
Replacing the staple cartridge................................................................................................... 12-15
To replace the staple cartridge in the finisher FS-519 .................................................................. 12-15
To replace the staple cartridge in saddle stitcher ......................................................................... 12-17
To replace the staple cartridge for finisher FS-609....................................................................... 12-19
Emptying the punch scrap box .................................................................................................. 12-22
To empty the punch scrap box in the finisher FS-519.................................................................. 12-23
To empty the punch scrap box in the finisher FS-609.................................................................. 12-24
Care of the machine
13.1
13.1.1
13.1.2
13.1.3
13.1.4
13.2
14
11-47
11-47
11-47
11-48
11-49
11-49
11-50
11-53
Replacing consumables
12.1
12.1.1
12.2
12.2.1
12.3
12.3.1
12.4
12.4.1
12.4.2
12.4.3
12.5
12.5.1
12.5.2
13
When the message "Replenish paper" appears.......................................................................
When the message "Memory Overflow" appears ....................................................................
When the message "Replace XXXX soon." appears ...............................................................
When the message "Please replace XXXX." appears..............................................................
To continue printing in black .........................................................................................................
When the message "Remote Operation: Please do not turn off power." appears ...............
Simple troubleshooting...............................................................................................................
Main messages and their remedies...........................................................................................
Cleaning .........................................................................................................................................
Housing ...........................................................................................................................................
Control panel...................................................................................................................................
Electrostatic charger wire................................................................................................................
Print head ........................................................................................................................................
When the message "Time for periodic device check." appears...............................................
13-3
13-3
13-3
13-4
13-5
13-6
Specifications
14.1
14.1.1
14.1.2
14.1.3
14.1.4
14.1.5
14.1.6
14.1.7
14.1.8
14.1.9
14.1.10
14.1.11
14.1.12
14.2
14.2.1
14.2.2
magicolor 8650
Specifications ................................................................................................................................ 14-3
Main unit.......................................................................................................................................... 14-3
Automatic duplex unit ..................................................................................................................... 14-5
Paper feed cabinet PC-106............................................................................................................. 14-5
Paper feed cabinet PC-205............................................................................................................. 14-5
Paper feed cabinet PC-406............................................................................................................. 14-6
Finisher FS-519 ............................................................................................................................... 14-6
Punch kit PK-515 ............................................................................................................................ 14-7
Saddle stitcher SD-505 ................................................................................................................... 14-7
Output tray OT-602 ......................................................................................................................... 14-7
Mailbin kit MT-502........................................................................................................................... 14-8
Finisher FS-609 ............................................................................................................................... 14-8
Punch kit PK-501 ............................................................................................................................ 14-9
Consumable and replacement part life expectancy charts .................................................... 14-10
Consumable life expectancy ......................................................................................................... 14-10
Replacement part life expectancy................................................................................................. 14-10
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Contents-11
15
16
Authentication unit (Biometric type AU-101)
15.1
15.1.1
15.1.2
15.1.3
Safety information .........................................................................................................................
Important information ......................................................................................................................
For safe use .....................................................................................................................................
Regulation notices ...........................................................................................................................
USER INSTRUCTIONS FCC PART 15 - RADIO FREQUENCY DEVICES (For U.S.A. Users)..........
15.2
15.3
15.4
15.4.1
15.4.2
15.4.3
Product features ............................................................................................................................ 15-4
Part names and their functions .................................................................................................... 15-4
Using authentication unit (Biometric type) AU-101 .................................................................... 15-5
Positioning your finger ..................................................................................................................... 15-5
Machine settings ............................................................................................................................. 15-7
Registering users ........................................................................................................................... 15-10
Install version checking ................................................................................................................. 15-10
Setup ............................................................................................................................................. 15-11
Registering users ........................................................................................................................... 15-12
15.5
Care of authentication unit (Biometric type) AU-101 ............................................................... 15-18
Care of the housing ....................................................................................................................... 15-18
Care of the cover ........................................................................................................................... 15-18
15.6
15.7
Specifications............................................................................................................................... 15-19
Troubleshooting........................................................................................................................... 15-20
Authentication unit (IC card type AU-201)
16.1
16.1.1
16.1.2
16.1.3
17
15-3
15-3
15-3
15-3
15-3
Safety information .........................................................................................................................
Important information ......................................................................................................................
For safe use .....................................................................................................................................
Regulation notices ...........................................................................................................................
USER INSTRUCTIONS FCC PART 15 - RADIO FREQUENCY DEVICES (For U.S.A. Users)..........
INTERFERENCE-CAUSING EQUIPMENT STANDARD (ICES- 003 ISSUE 4)
(For Canada Users)..........................................................................................................................
16-3
16-3
16-3
16-3
16-3
16-4
16.2
16.3
16.4
16.4.1
16.4.2
16.4.3
Product features ............................................................................................................................ 16-4
Part names and their functions .................................................................................................... 16-4
Using authentication unit (IC card type) AU-201 ........................................................................ 16-5
Positioning the IC card .................................................................................................................... 16-5
Multifunctional product settings ...................................................................................................... 16-5
Registering users ............................................................................................................................. 16-8
Install version checking ................................................................................................................... 16-8
Setup ............................................................................................................................................... 16-9
Registering users ........................................................................................................................... 16-10
16.5
16.6
16.7
Care of authentication unit (IC card type) AU-201.................................................................... 16-16
Specifications............................................................................................................................... 16-17
Troubleshooting........................................................................................................................... 16-17
Installing options
17.1
17.2
17.3
17.3.1
17.3.2
17.4
17.4.1
17.4.2
Contents-12
Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 17-3
Installing the mount kit MK-713 ................................................................................................... 17-4
Installing the authentication unit (biometric type) AU-101 ........................................................ 17-6
Authentication unit (biometric type) components............................................................................ 17-6
Installing the authentication unit (biometric type) ............................................................................ 17-7
Installing the authentication unit (IC card type) AU-201 .......................................................... 17-10
Authentication unit (IC card type) components ............................................................................. 17-10
Installing the authentication unit (IC card type) ............................................................................. 17-11
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
18
19
Appendix
18.1
18.2
18.2.1
18.2.2
Configuration page........................................................................................................................
PPD driver (for applications) ........................................................................................................
PPD driver types .............................................................................................................................
About the PPD driver for applications.............................................................................................
To print ............................................................................................................................................
18-3
18-4
18-4
18-4
18-4
18.3
18.3.1
18.3.2
NetWare..........................................................................................................................................
Connection methods selectable for NetWare .................................................................................
NetWare Setting ..............................................................................................................................
For Remote Printer mode with NetWare 4.x bindery emulation .....................................................
For the print server mode with NetWare 4.x bindery emulation .....................................................
For NetWare 4.x Remote Printer mode (NDS).................................................................................
For NetWare 4.x/5.x/6 Print Server mode (NDS).............................................................................
For NetWare 5.x/6 Novell Distributed Print Service (NDPS) ...........................................................
18-5
18-5
18-5
18-6
18-6
18-7
18-7
18-8
18.3.3
18.3.4
18.4
18.4.1
18.4.2
18.4.3
18.4.4
18.4.5
18.4.6
NetWare Status ............................................................................................................................... 18-9
Windows Client Setting ................................................................................................................... 18-9
Tray Mapping Setting.................................................................................................................. 18-10
Tray mapping setting procedure ................................................................................................... 18-10
Creating tray mapping definition PRN file ..................................................................................... 18-10
Sending the PRN file ..................................................................................................................... 18-12
Restarting this machine................................................................................................................. 18-12
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................ 18-12
Returning the tray mapping setting to the default......................................................................... 18-13
Index
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Contents-13
Contents-14
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
1
Introduction
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Introduction
1
1
Introduction
Thank you for choosing this machine.
This manual contains details on the operation of the various functions of the machine, precautions on its use,
and basic troubleshooting procedures. In order to ensure that this machine is used correctly and efficiently,
carefully read this manual as needed.
In order to operate the machine safely and properly, be sure to read the Safety Information Guide.
The illustrations used in this manual may appear slightly different from views of the actual equipment.
1.1
Energy Star®
As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, we have determined that this
machine meets the ENERGY STAR® Guidelines for energy
efficiency.
What is an ENERGY STAR® Product?
An ENERGY STAR® product has a special feature that allows it to
automatically switch to a "low-power mode" after a period of
inactivity. An ENERGY STAR® product uses energy more efficiently,
saves you money on utility bills and helps protect the environment.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
1-3
Introduction
1
1.2
Trademarks and copyrights
KONICA MINOLTA, the KONICA MINOLTA logo, and The essentials of imaging are registered trademarks of
KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC.
PageScope and magicolor are registered trademarks or trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS
TECHNOLOGIES INC.
Netscape is a registered trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation in the United States and other
countries.
Mozilla and Firefox are trademarks of the Mozilla Foundation.
Novell and Novell NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. in the United States and other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
PowerPC is a trademark of IBM Corporation in the United States, or other countries, or both.
In regard to the Citrix access Partner Network Premier
KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. is a member of the Citrix access Partner Network.
The Citrix access Partner Network is a program that, in combination with a solution of Citrix, promotes and
develops solutions to provide the customers with better solutions.
Apple, Macintosh and Mac OS are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. Safari is a trademark of
Apple Computer, Inc.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat and PostScript are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company Limited.
CUPS and CUPS logo are registered trademark of Easy Software Products.
This machine and PageScope Box Operator are based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
Compact-VJE
Copyright 1986-2003 VACS Corp.
RC4® is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
RSA® is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc. RSA BSAFE® is a registered trademark or
trademark of RSA Security Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
License information
This product includes RSA BSAFE Cryptographic software from
RSA Security Inc.
All other product and brand names are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective companies or organizations.
1-4
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Introduction
1
OpenSSL statement
OpenSSL license
Copyright © 1998-2005 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that
the following conditions are met:
1.
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3.
All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.
(http://www.openssl.org/)"
4.
The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please
contact [email protected]
5.
Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their
names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
6.
Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit
(http://www.openssl.org/)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL
PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected]). This product
includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected]).
Original SSLeay license
Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected]) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young ([email protected]).
The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared
to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, Ihash, DES, etc.,
code; not just the SSL code.
The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that
the holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]).
Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this
package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library
used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual)
provided with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that
the following conditions are met:
1.
Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3.
All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement:
"This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected])"
The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic
related.
4.
If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application
code) you must include an acknowledgement:
"This product includes software written by Tin Hudson ([email protected])"
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
1-5
Introduction
1
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be
changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the
GNU Public Licence.]
NetSNMP License
Part 1: CMU/UCD copyright notice: (BSD like)
Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000
Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the University of California All Rights Reserved
Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and
without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that both
that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the name of
CMU and The Regents of the University of California not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to
distribution of the software without specific written permission.
CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALLWARRANTIES WITH
REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIEDWARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE
FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER
RESULTING FROM THE LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
Part 2: Networks Associates Technology, Inc copyright notice (BSD)
Copyright © 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that
the following conditions are met:
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology, Inc nor the names of its contributors may be
used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Part 3: Cambridge Broadband Ltd. copyright notice (BSD)
Portions of this code are copyright © 2001-2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd.
All rights reserved.
1-6
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Introduction
1
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that
the following conditions are met:
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd. may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER "AS IS" AND ANYEXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THEIMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Part 4: Sun Microsystems, Inc. copyright notice (BSD)
Copyright © 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, California 95054, U.S.A. All
rights reserved.
Use is subject to license terms below.
This distribution may include materials developed by third parties.
Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo and Solaris are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun
Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that
the following conditions are met:
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
Neither the name of the Sun Microsystems, Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Part 5: Sparta, Inc copyright notice (BSD)
Copyright © 2003-2004, Sparta, Inc All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that
the following conditions are met:
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
Neither the name of Sparta, Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
1-7
Introduction
1
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Part 6: Cisco/BUPTNIC copyright notice (BSD)
Copyright © 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network Center of Beijing University of Posts and
Telecommunications. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that
the following conditions are met:
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
Neither the name of Cisco, Inc, Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications, nor the names of
their contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Kerberos
Copyright © 1985-2005 by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology. All rights reserved.
permission notice
WITHIN THAT CONSTRAINT, permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice
appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
documentation, and that the name of M.I.T. not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution
of the software without specific, written prior permission. Furthermore if you modify this software you must
label your software as modified software and not distribute it in such a fashion that it might be confused with
the original MIT software.
M.I.T. makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is"
without express or implied warranty.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
THIS SOFTWARE IS NOT ORIGINAL MIT SOFTWARE, MODIFIED BY KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS
TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Copyright
© 2007 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. All Rights Reserved.
Note
User manual may not be reproduced in part or in full without permission.
KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. will not be held liable for any incidents caused
by using this printing system or user manual.
Information included in this user manual is subject to change without notice.
KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. maintains the copyright of the printer drivers.
1-8
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Introduction
1
For EU member states only
This symbol means: Do not dispose of this product together with
your household waste!
Please refer to the information of your local community or contact
our dealers regrading the proper handling of end-of-life electric and
electronic equipments. Recycling of this product will help to
conserve natural resources and prevent potential negative
consequences for the environment and human health caused by
inappropriate waste handling.
This product complies with RoHS (2002/95/EC) Directive.
This device is not intended for use at a video workstation in compliance with BildscharbV.
Das Gerät ist nicht fur die Benutzung am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz gemäß BildscharbV vorgesehen.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
1-9
Introduction
1
1.3
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
This package contains the following materials provided by KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES,
INC. (KMBT): software included as part of the printing system, the digitally-encoded machine-readable
outline data encoded in the special format and in the encrypted form ("Font Programs"), other software which
runs on a computer system for use in conjunction with the Printing Software ("Host Software"), and related
explanatory written materials ("Documentation"). The term "Software" shall be used to describe Printing
Software, Font Programs and/or Host Software and also include any upgrades, modified versions, additions,
and copies of the Software.
The Software is being licensed to you under the terms of this Agreement.
KMBT grants to you a non-exclusive sublicense to use the Software and Documentation, provided that you
agree to the following:
1.
You may use the Printing Software and accompanying Font Programs for imaging to the licensed
output de-vice(s), solely for your own internal business purposes.
2.
In addition to the license for Font Programs set forth in Section 1 ("Printing Software") above, you may
use Roman Font Programs to reproduce weights, styles, and versions of letters, numerals, characters
and symbols ("Typefaces") on the display or monitor for your own internal business purposes.
3.
You may make one backup copy of the Host Software, provided your backup copy is not installed or
used on any computer. Notwithstanding the above restrictions, you may install the on any number of
computers solely for use with one or more printing systems running the Printing Software.
4.
You may assign its rights under this Agreement to an assignee of all of Licensee’s right and interest to
such Software and Documentation ("Assignee") provided you transfer to Assignee all copies of such
Software and Documentation Assignee agrees to be bound by all of the terms and conditions of this
Agreement.
5.
You agree not to modify, adapt or translate the Software and Documentation.
6.
You agree that you will not attempt to alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile the
Software.
7.
Title to and ownership of the Software and Documentation and any reproductions thereof shall remain
with KMBT and its licensor.
8.
Trademarks shall be used in accordance with accepted trademark practice, including identification of
the trademark owner’s name. Trademarks can only be used to identify printed output produced by the
Software. Such use of any trademark does not give you any rights of ownership in that trademark.
9.
You may not rent, lease, sublicense, lend or transfer versions or copies of the Software Licensee does
not use, or Software contained on any unused media, except as part of the permanent transfer of all
Software and Documentation as described above.
10. IN NO EVENT WILL KMBT OR ITS LICENSOR BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL,
INCIDENTAL INDIRECT, PUNITIVE OR SPECIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS OR
LOST SAVING, EVEN IF KMBT HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR
FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY THIRD PARTY. KMBT OR ITS LICENSOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE
AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL
DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
11. Notice to Government End Users: The Software is a "commercial item," as that term is defined at 48
C.F.R.2.101, consisting of "commercial computer software" and "commercial computer software
documentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48
C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, all U.S. Government End Users acquire the Software with only
those rights set forth herein.
12. You agree that you will not export the Software in any form in violation of any applicable laws and
regulations regarding export control of any countries.
1-10
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Introduction
1.4
1
About Adobe Color Profile
ADOBE SYSTEMS INCORPORATED
COLOR PROFILE LICENSE AGREEMENT
NOTICE TO USER: PLEASE READ THIS CONTRACT CAREFULLY. BY USING ALL OR ANY PORTION OF
THE SOFTWARE YOU ACCEPT ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS SOFTWARE YOU ACCEPT
ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS OF
THIS AGREEMENT, DO NOT USE THE SOFTWARE.
1.
DEFINITIONS In this Agreement, "Adobe" means Adobe Systems Incorporated, a Delaware
corporation, located at 345 Park Avenue, San Jose, California 95110. "Software" means the software
and related items with which this Agreement is provided.
2.
LICENSE Subject to the terms of this Agreement, Adobe hereby grants you the worldwide, nonexclusive, nontransferable, royalty-free license to use, reproduce and publicly display the Software.
Adobe also grants you the rights to distribute the Software only (a) as embedded within digital image
files and (b) on a standalone basis. No other distribution of the Software is allowed; including, without
limitation, distribution of the Software when incorporated into or bundled with any application software.
All individual profiles must be referenced by their ICC Profile description string. You may not modify the
Software. Adobe is under no obligation to provide any support under this Agreement, including
upgrades or future versions of the Software or other items. No title to the intellectual property in the
Software is transferred to you under the terms of this Agreement. You do not acquire any rights to the
Software except as expressly set forth in this Agreement.
3.
DISTRIBUTION If you choose to distribute the Software, you do so with the understanding that you
agree to defend, indemnify and hold harmless Adobe against any losses, damages or costs arising from
any claims, lawsuits or other legal actions arising out of such distribution, including without limitation,
your failure to comply with this Section 3. If you distribute the Software on a standalone basis, you will
do so under the terms of this Agreement or your own license agreement which (a) complies with the
terms and conditions of this Agreement; (b) effectively disclaims all warranties and conditions, express
or implied, on behalf of Adobe; (c) effectively excludes all liability for damages on behalf of Adobe; (d)
states that any provisions that differ from this Agreement are offered by you alone and not Adobe and
(e) states that the Software is available from you or Adobe and informs licensees how to obtain it in a
reasonable manner on or through a medium customarily used for software exchange. Any distributed
Software will include the Adobe copyright notices as included in the Software provided to you by
Adobe.
4.
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY Adobe licenses the Software to you on an "AS IS" basis. Adobe makes
no representation as to the adequacy of the Software for any particular purpose or to produce any
particular result. Adobe shall not be liable for loss or damage arising out of this Agreement or from the
distribution or use of the Software or any other materials. ADOBE AND ITS SUPPLIERS DO NOT AND
CANNOT WARRANT THE PERFORMANCE OR RESULTS YOU MAY OBTAIN BY USING THE
SOFTWARE, EXCEPT FOR ANY WARRANTY, CONDITION, REPRESENTATION OR TERM TO THE
EXTENT TO WHICH THE SAME CANNOT OR MAY NOT BE EXCLUDED OR LIMITED BY LAW
APPLICABLE TO YOU IN YOUR JURISDICTION, ADOBE AND ITS SUPPLIERS MAKE NO
WARRANTIES, CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS OR TERMS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WHETHER
BY STATUTE, COMMON LAW, CUSTOM, USAGE OR OTHERWISE AS TO ANY OTHER MATTERS,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS, INTEGRATION,
SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. YOU MAY HAVE
ADDITIONAL RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION. The provisions of
Sections 4, 5 and 6 shall survive the termination of this Agreement, howsoever caused, but this shall
not imply or create any continued right to use the Software after termination of this Agreement.
5.
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY IN NO EVENT WILL ADOBE OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR
ANY DAMAGES, CLAIMS OR COSTS WHATSOEVER OR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, OR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST SAVINGS, EVEN IF AN ADOBE
REPRESENTATIVE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH LOSS, DAMAGES, CLAIMS
OR COSTS OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY THIRD PARTY. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS AND
EXCLUSIONS APPLY TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN YOUR JURISDICTION.
ADOBE’S AGGREGATE LIABILITY AND THAT OF ITS SUPPLIERS UNDER OR IN CONNECTION WITH
THIS AGREEMENT SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT PAID FOR THE SOFTWARE. Nothing
contained in this Agreement limits Adobe’s liability to you in the event of death or personal injury
resulting from Adobe’s negligence or for the tort of deceit (fraud). Adobe is acting on behalf of its
suppliers for the purpose of disclaiming, excluding and/or limiting obligations, warranties and liability
as provided in this Agreement, but in no other respects and for no other purpose.
6.
TRADEMARKS Adobe and the Adobe logo are the registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe in the
United States and other countries. With the exception of referential use, you will not use such
trademarks or any other Adobe trademark or logo without separate prior written permission granted by
Adobe.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
1-11
Introduction
1
7.
8.
9.
10.
1-12
TERM This Agreement is effective until terminated. Adobe has the right to terminate this Agreement
immediately if you fail to comply with any term hereof. Upon any such termination, you must return to
Adobe all full and partial copies of the Software in your possession or control.
GOVERNMENT REGULATIONS If any part of the Software is identified as an export controlled item
under the United States Export Administration Act or any other export law, restriction or regulation (the
"Export Laws"), you represent and warrant that you are not a citizen, or otherwise located within, an
embargoed nation (including without limitation Iran, Iraq, Syria, Sudan, Libya, Cuba, North Korea, and
Serbia) and that you are not otherwise prohibited under the Export Laws from receiving the Software.
All rights to use the Software are granted on condition that such rights are forfeited if you fail to comply
with the terms of this Agreement.
GOVERNING LAW This Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with the
substantive laws in force in the State of California as such laws are applied to agreements entered into
and to be performed entirely within California between California residents. This Agreement will not be
governed by the conflict of law rules of any jurisdiction or the United Nations Convention on Contracts
for the International Sale of Goods, the application of which is expressly excluded. All disputes arising
out of, under or related to this Agreement will be brought exclusively in the state Santa Clara County,
California, USA.
GENERAL You may not assign your rights or obligations granted under this Agreement without the prior
written consent of Adobe. None of the provisions of this Agreement shall be deemed to have been
waived by any act or acquiescence on the part of Adobe, its agents, or employees, but only by an
instrument in writing signed by an authorized signatory of Adobe. When conflicting language exists
between this Agreement and any other agreement included in the Software, the terms of such included
agreement shall apply. If either you or Adobe employs attorneys to enforce any rights arising out of or
relating to this Agreement, the prevailing party shall be entitled to recover reasonable attorneys’ fees.
You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement, understand it, and that it is the complete and
exclusive statement of your agreement with Adobe which supersedes any prior agreement, oral or
written, between Adobe and you with respect to the licensing to you of the Software. No variation of
the terms of this Agreement will be enforceable against Adobe unless Adobe gives its express consent,
in writing, signed by an authorized signatory of Adobe.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Introduction
1.5
1
ICC Profile for TOYO INK Standard Color on Coated paper (TOYO
Offset Coated 2.0)
This ICC Profile (TOYO Offset Coated 2.0) characterizes Japanese offset press on Coated paper and is fully
compatible with ICC profile format.
About "TOYO INK Standard Color on Coated paper"
This is the standard for color reproduction of sheet-fed offset press on Coated paper made by TOYO INK
MFG.CO., LTD. ("TOYO INK").
This standard is made from printing test with using TOYO INK’s sheet-fed offset printing inks and TOYO INK’s
own printing conditions.
"TOYO INK Standard Color on Coated paper" is compatible with "JAPAN COLOR".
Agreement
1.
The reproduction of images on a printer or a monitor using this ICC Profile do not completely match the
TOYO INK Standard Color on Coated paper.
2.
Any and all copyrights of this ICC Profile shall remain in TOYO INK; therefore you shall not transfer,
provide, rent, distribute, disclose, or grant any rights in this ICC Profile to any third party without the
prior written consent of TOYO INK.
3.
In no event will TOYO INK its directors, officers, employees or agents be liable to you for any
consequential or incidential, either direct or indirect, damages (including damages for loss of business
profits, business interruption, loss of business information, and the like) arising out of the use or inability
to use this ICC Profile.
4.
TOYO INK shall not be responsible for answering any question related to this ICC Profile.
5.
All company names and product names used in this document is the trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective holder.
This ICC Profile made by GretagMacbeth ProfileMaker and granted TOYO INK certain license to distribute
by GretagMacbeth AG.
TOYO Offset Coated 2.0 © TOYO INK MFG. CO., LTD. 2004
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
1-13
Introduction
1
1.6
DIC STANDARD COLOR PROFILE LICENSE AGREEMENT
IMPORTANT: PLEASE READ THIS STANDARD COLOR PROFILE LICENSE AGREEMENT ("LICENSE
AGREEMENT") CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE DIC STANDARD COLOR PROFILE, INCLUDING THE DIC
STANDARD COLOR SFC1.0.1, DIC STANDARD COLOR SFC1.0.2, DIC STANDARD COLOR SFM1.0.2, DIC
STANDARD COLOR SFU1.0.2, PROVIDED BY DIC HEREWITH, AND ANY CORRESPONDIMG ONLINE OR
ELECTRONC DOCUMENTATION AND ALL UPDATES OR UPGRADES OF THE ABOVE THAT ARE
PROVIDED TO YOU (COLLECTIVELY, THE "PROFILE").
THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU (EITHER AN INDIVIDUAL OR, IF
ACQUIRED BY OR FOR AN ENTITY, AN ENTITY) AND DAINIPPON INK & CHEMICALS, INC., A JAPANESE
COMPANY ("DIC"). THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT PROVIDES A LICENSE TO USE THE PROFILE AND
CONTAINS WARRANTY INFORMATION AND LIABILITY DISCLAIMERS. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO BE
BOUND BY ALL OF THESE TERMS, YOU MAY NOT USE THE PROFILE.
1.
License Grant
DIC grants you a gratis non-exclusive and non-transferable license to use the Profile and to allow your
employees and authorized agents, if any, to use the Profile, solely in connection with their work for you,
subject to all of the limitations and restrictions in this License Agreement.
2.
Ownership
The foregoing license gives you limited license to use the Profile. You will own the rights in the media
containing the recorded Profile, but DIC retains all right, title and interest, including all copyright and
intellectual property rights, in and to, the Profile and all copies thereof. All rights not specifically granted
in this License Agreement, including all copyrights, are reserved by DIC.
3.
Term
a. This License Agreement is effective until terminated.
b. You may terminate this License Agreement by notifying DIC in writing of your intention to terminate
this License Agreement and by destroying, all copies of the Profile in your possession or control.
c. DIC may terminate this License Agreement without prior notice to you if you fail to comply with any
of the terms and conditions of this License Agreement (either directly or through your employees or
agents), retroactive to the time of such failure to comply. In such event, you must immediately stop
using the Profile and destroy all copies of the Profile in your possession or control.
d. All provisions in this License Agreement relating to warranty disclaimers (Section 5) and the limitation
of liability (Section 6) shall survive any termination of this License Agreement.
4.
License Method and Restrictions
a. You may install and use the Profile on a single desktop computer; provided, however, that,
notwithstanding anything contrary contained herein, you may not use the Profile on any network system
or share, install or use the Profile concurrently on different computers, or electronically transfer the
Profile from one computer to another or over a network.
b. You may not make or distribute copies, fix, alter, merge, modify, adapt, sublicense, transfer, sell,
rent, lease, gift or distribute all or a portion of the Profile, or modify the Profile or create derivative works
based upon the Profile.
c. You acknowledge that the Profile is not intended for any usage which may cause death or physical
injury or environmental damage and agree not to use the Profile for such usage.
d. You shall not use the Profile to develop any software or other technology having the same primary
function as the Profile, including but not limited to using the Profile in any development or test
procedure that seeks to develop like software or other technology, or to determine if such software or
other technology performs in a similar manner as the Profile.
e. DIC and other trademarks contained in the Profile are trademarks or registered trademarks of DIC in
Japan and/or other countries. You may not remove or alter any trademark, trade names, product
names, logo, copyright or other proprietary notices, legends, symbols or labels in the Profile. This
License Agreement does not authorize you to use DIC’s or its licensors’ names or any of their respective
trademarks.
5.
WARRANTY DISCLAIMER
a. THE PROFILE IS PROVIDED TO YOU FREE OF CHARGE, AND ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS, IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE TERMS AND COONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. DIC
PROVIDES NO TECHNICAL SUPPORT, WARRANTIES OR REMEDIES FOR THE PROFILE.
b. DIC DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND REPRESENTATIONS, WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR
OTHERWISE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, TITLE AND QUIET ENJOYMENT.
YOU SHALL ASSUME AND BE FULLY LIABLE AND RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL RISKS IN CONNECTION
WITH YOUR USE OF THE PROFILE. DIC DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE PROFILE IS FREE OF
DEFECTS OR FLAWS OR WILL OPERATE WITHOUT INTERRUPTION, AND IS NOT RESPONSIBLE
FORCORRECTING OR REPAIRING ANY DEFECTS OR FLAWS, FOR FEE OR GRATIS. NO RIGHTS OR
REMEDIES WILL BE CONFERRED ON YOU UNLESS EXPRESSLY GRANTED HEREIN.
1-14
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Introduction
1
6.
7.
magicolor 8650
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
DIC SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, COVER OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USE EQUIPMENT OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS,
LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE), ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF, OR
INABILITY TO USE, THE PROFILE AND BASED ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY INCLUDING BREACH
OF CONTRACT, BREACH OF WARRANTY, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), PRODUCT LIABILITY
OR OTHERWISE, EVEN IF DIC OR ITS REPRESENTATIVES HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS ON LIABILITY SHALL APPLY TO ALL ASPECTS OF THIS LICENSE
AGREEMENT.
General
a. This License Agreement shall be governed and construed in accordance with the laws of Japan,
without giving effect to principles of conflict of laws. If any provision of this License Agreement shall be
held by a court of competent jurisdiction to be contrary to law, that provision will be enforced to the
maximum extent permissible, and the remaining provisions of this License Agreement will remain in full
force and effect. You hereby consent to the exclusive jurisdiction and venue of Tokyo District Court to
resolve any disputes arising under this License Agreement.
b. This License Agreement contains the complete agreement between the parties with respect to the
subject matter hereof, and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous agreements or understandings,
whether oral or written. You agree that any varying or additional terms contained in any written
notification or document issued by you in relation to the Profile licensed hereunder shall be of no effect.
c. The failure or delay of DIC to exercise any of its rights under this License Agreement or upon any
breach of this License Agreement shall not be deemed a waiver of those rights or of the breach.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
1-15
Introduction
1
1.7
Explanation of manual conventions
The marks and text formats used in this manual are described below.
Safety advices
6 DANGER
Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in fatal or critical injuries in fact
of electrical power.
%
Observe all dangers in order to prevent injuries.
7 WARNING
Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in serious injuries or property
damage.
%
Observe all warnings in order to prevent injuries and to ensure safe use of the machine.
7 CAUTION
Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in slight injuries or property
damage.
%
Observe all cautions in order to prevent injuries and to ensure safe use of the machine.
Sequence of action
1
The number 1 as formatted here indicates the first step of a
sequence of actions.
2
Subsequent numbers as formatted here indicate subsequent
steps of a sequence of actions.
Text formatted in this style provides additional assistance.
% Text formatted in this style describes the action that will
ensure the desired results are achieved.
?
An illustration inserted
here shows what operations
must be performed.
Tips
2
Note
Text highlighted in this manner contains useful information and tips to ensure safe use of the machine.
2
Reminder
Text highlighted in this manner contains information that should be reminded.
!
Detail
Text highlighted in this manner contains references for more detailed information.
1-16
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Introduction
1
Special text markings
[Stop] key
The names of keys on the control panel are written as shown above.
MACHINE SETTING
Display texts are written as shown above.
2
Note
The machine illustrations shown in this manual can vary and depend on the machine configuration.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
1-17
Introduction
1
1.8
Descriptions of paper
The descriptions used in this manual for paper is explained below.
Whenever paper dimension is mentioned in this manual, the value
shown as Y in the illustration refers to the width, and the value
shown as X refers to the length.
Lengthwise (w)
If the width (Y) of the paper is shorter than the length (X), the paper
has a vertical or portrait orientation, indicated by w.
Crosswise (v)
If the width (Y) of the paper is longer than the length (X), the paper
has a horizontal or landscape orientation, indicated by v.
1.9
User manuals
This machine is provided with printed manuals and PDF manuals on the Documentation CD.
Printed manual
Installation Guide
This manual contains procedure for installing the driver required in order to use the machine and procedure
for connecting the machine and computer.
Be sure to read this manual before using the machine.
Safety Information Guide
This manual contains notes and precautions that should be followed for safe use of the machine.
Be sure to read this manual before using the machine.
Documentation CD manual
User’s Guide (this manual)
This manual contains descriptions of the functions and machine maintenance procedures.
Refer to this manual for details on the paper, replacing consumables, and troubleshooting operations such
as clearing paper misfeeds.
1-18
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
2
Before using the machine
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Before using the machine
2
2
Before using the machine
2.1
Part names and their functions
2.1.1
Options
16
15
2
3
14
1
13
12
11
4
5
10
9
magicolor 8650
8
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
7
6
2-3
Before using the machine
2
No.
Part name
Description
1
Main unit
The data sent from the computer is printed.
Referred to as the "machine", the "main unit", or the "8650" throughout the
manual.
2
Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-101
Performs user authentication by scanning vein patterns in the finger.
To use the authentication unit (biometric type), an optional hard disk drive
HD-508 and local interface kit EK-603 must be installed.
3
Authentication unit (IC card
type) AU-201
Performs user authentication by reading the information registered on IC
cards.
To use the authentication unit (IC card type), an optional hard disk drive
HD-508 and local interface kit EK-603 must be installed.
4
Mount kit MK-711
Used for installing, local interface kit EK-603.
5
Mount kit MK-713
Used for banner printing.
6
Desk DK-505
Allows this machine to be set up on the floor.
Referred to as the "desk" throughout the manual.
7
Paper feed cabinet PC-106
The top tray can be loaded with up to 500 sheets of paper, and the bottom tray
can be used as storage.
Referred to as the "single paper feed cabinet" throughout the manual.
8
Paper feed cabinet PC-205
Both the top and bottom trays can each be loaded with up to 500 sheets of
paper.
Referred to as the "double paper feed cabinet" throughout the manual.
9
Paper feed cabinet PC-406
Can be loaded with up to 2,500 sheets of paper.
Referred to as the "tray 4 (LCT)" throughout the manual.
10
Finisher FS-519
Feeds out finished printed pages. The "Collate" setting (separating by copy
set), "Offset" setting (separating by pages), Staple settings ("Corner" and "2
position"), Center Staple setting, and Half-Fold setting are available.
11
Output tray OT-602
Installed onto finisher FS-519 to divide printed pages.
Referred to as the "output tray" throughout the manual.
12
Punch kit PK-515
Installed onto finisher FS-519 to allow hole punching to be used.
13
Mailbin kit MT-502
Installed onto finisher FS-519 to divide printed pages (only with computer
printing) and feed them into the appropriate tray assigned to a specific individual or group. Collects printed pages.
Referred to as the "mailbin kit" throughout the manual.
14
Saddle stitcher SD-505
Installed onto finisher FS-519 so that prints can be bound or folded at the center.
Referred to as the "saddle stitcher" throughout the manual.
15
Finisher FS-609
Feeds out finished printed pages. The "Collate" setting (separating by copy
set), "Offset" setting (separating by pages), and Staple settings ("Corner" and
"2 position") are available.
In order to install the finisher, the main unit must be installed on the desk, on
the tray 4 (LCT), on the single paper feed cabinet, or on the double paper feed
cabinet.
16
Punch kit PK-501
Installed onto finisher FS-609 to allow hole punching to be used.
*1
17
Local interface kit EK-603
18
Security kit SC-503*2
Installed to encode the data saved on the hard disk so that the hard disk can
be used more safely.
19
Hard disk drive HD-508*2
Must be installed when using Security Print, Save in User Box, Font Downloading, Color Profile, Direct Print (including Encrypted PDF User Box), or
PageScope Direct Print (Utility).
Areas available to users are as follows.
- Secure Print/Save in User Box: 31GB
- Font Downloading/Color Profile/Direct Print (including Encrypted PDF User
Box)/PageScope Direct Print (Utility): 3GB
If the message "Memory overflow" frequently appears while you are printing
using the Sort or Banner Printing functions, a hard disk will need to be installed.
Referred to as the "HDD" throughout the manual.
Used for connecting the authentication unit (biometric type) and the authentication unit (IC card type).
*1
Parts marked with an asterisk are to be installed to the mount kit, and therefore are not shown in the
illustration.
*2
2-4
Parts marked with an asterisk are internal options and therefore are not shown in the illustration.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Before using the machine
2
2
Reminder
To keep the features and quality of the machine, use the desk or paper feed cabinet to place the
machine on the floor.
2.1.2
Outside of machine
10
11
1
9
8
2
7
6
3
5
4
*The illustration above shows the main unit with the optional tray 4 (LCT) installed.
No.
Part name
Description
1
Automatic duplex unit
Turns over the paper for double-sided printing.
2
Tray 1 (bypass tray)
Used when printing onto paper with a size not loaded into a paper tray or onto
thick paper, OHP transparencies, postcards, envelopes, label sheets or banner paper.
Can be loaded with up to 150 sheets of plain paper, 20 sheets of thick paper 1,
thick paper 2, thick paper 3, thick paper 4, OHP transparencies, postcards, or
label sheets, 10 envelopes, or 10 sheets of banner paper.
3
Paper-empty indicator
Flashes in orange when very few pages remain in the paper tray, and lights up
when the tray is empty.
4
Tray 4 (LCT)
Can be loaded with up to 2,500 sheets of plain paper.
Can be loaded with up to 1,000 sheets of thick paper 1, thick paper 2 or thick
paper 3.
5
Tray release button
Press this button to pull out the tray 4 (LCT).
6
Tray 3
Can be loaded with up to 500 sheets of plain paper.
Can be loaded with up to 150 sheets of thick paper 1, thick paper 2 or thick
paper 3.
7
Tray 2
Can be loaded with up to 500 sheets of plain paper.
Can be loaded with up to 150 sheets of thick paper 1, thick paper 2 or thick
paper 3.
8
Power switch
Used to turn the machine on and off.
9
Front door
Opened when replacing the toner cartridge, waste toner box, or imaging unit,
or when cleaning the print head.
10
Output tray
Collects printed pages.
11
Control panel
Used to specify the various machine settings.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
2-5
Before using the machine
2
12
13
14
15
16
20
17
19
18
*The illustration above shows the main unit with the optional double paper feed cabinet installed.
2-6
No.
Part name
Description
12
Automatic duplex unit release lever
Used to open the automatic duplex unit door when clearing paper misfeeds.
13
Automatic duplex unit door
Opened when clearing paper misfeeds in the automatic duplex unit.
14
Upper right-side door release lever
Used to open the upper right-side door.
15
Center right-side door
Opened when clearing paper misfeeds from the paper transport section of
tray 3.
16
Center right-side door release lever
Used to open the center right-side door.
17
Lower right-side door
Opened when clearing paper misfeeds from the paper transport section of
tray 4 or 5.
18
Lower right-side door release lever
Used to open the Lower right-side door.
19
Tray 5/storage box
Used as the storage box when the single paper feed cabinet is installed.
Can be loaded with up to 500 sheets of plain paper when the double paper
feed cabinet is installed. Can be loaded with up to 150 sheets of thick paper 1,
thick paper 2 or thick paper 3.
20
Tray 4
Can be loaded with up to 500 sheets of plain paper.
Can be loaded with up to 150 sheets of thick paper 1, thick paper 2 or thick
paper 3.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Before using the machine
2
21
23
22
*The illustration above shows the main unit with the optional tray 4 (LCT) and mount kit (local interface kit)
installed.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
2-7
Before using the machine
2
24
25
26
*The illustration above shows the main unit with the optional double paper feed cabinet installed.
2-8
No.
Part name
Description
21
USB port (type A)
USB 2.0/1.1
Used for connecting the USB cable for the authentication unit (biometric type)
or the authentication unit (IC card type).
22
USB port (type B)
USB 2.0/1.1
Used for making connections when the machine is used as a USB printer.
23
Network connector
(10Base-T/100BaseTX/1000Base-T)
Used for connecting the network cable when this machine is used for network
printing.
24
Finisher connector
Used for connecting the finisher hookup cord.
25
Ozone filter
Collects the ozone generated in the machine.
26
Power cord
Supplies power to the machine.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Before using the machine
2.1.3
2
Inside of machine
11
1
10
2
9
3
8
4
5
7
No.
1
6
Part name
Description
Fusing unit upper cover
Opened when cleaning paper misfeeds in the fusing unit.
2
Fusing cover lever M2
Opened when cleaning paper misfeeds in the fusing unit.
3
Upper right-side door
Opened when clearing paper misfeeds from inside the main unit.
4
Unlock lever
Used when removing an imaging unit.
5
Imaging unit
Creates the print image.
6
Charger-cleaning tool
Used to clean the electrostatic charger wire, for example, when incorrect copies are produced.
7
Print head glass cleaning
tool
Used to clean the surface of the print head glass, for example, when replacing
the imaging unit.
8
Waste toner box
Collects used waste toner.
9
Total counter
Shows the total number of pages that have been printed.
10
Lock tub
Used when removing the toner cartridge.
11
Toner cartridges
There are four toner cartridges: cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y) and black (K).
The combination of the four toners generates full-color images.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
2-9
Before using the machine
2
2.1.4
Finisher FS-S519/Output tray OT-602/Punch kit PK-515
1
14
2
3
13
2-10
4
5
12
11
6
10
7
9
8
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Before using the machine
2
Finisher FS-519
No.
Part name
Description
1
Output tray 1
Collects printed pages.
2
Output tray 2
Collects printed pages.
3
Misfeed-clearing dial FN6
Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher.
4
Misfeed-clearing dial FN5
Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher.
5
Misfeed-clearing dial FN4
Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher.
6
Misfeed-clearing dial FN2
Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher.
7
Guide lever FN1
Raised when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher.
8
Punch scrap box FN3.1
Removed when emptying punch scraps that have accumulated from using the
Punch settings.
9
Guide lever FN3
Raised when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher.
10
Stapler
Moved to the front when clearing jammed staples.
11
Staple cartridge holder
Removed from the stapler when replacing the staple cartridge or clearing
jammed staples.
12
Dial
Turned to move the stapler to the front when clearing jammed staples.
13
Finisher release lever 1
Used to disconnect the finisher and move it from the main unit when clearing
paper misfeeds.
Output tray OT-602
No.
Part name
Description
14
Optional output tray
Collects printed pages.
Punch kit PK-515
No.
Part name
Description
15
Punch kit*
Punches holes for filing printed pages when the punch kit is installed onto finisher FS-519.
*
magicolor 8650
Parts marked with an asterisk are internal options and therefore are not shown in the illustration.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
2-11
Before using the machine
2
2.1.5
Saddle stitcher SD-505/Mailbin kit MT-502
2
3
1
Saddle stitcher SD-505
No.
2-12
Part name
Description
1
Output tray
Collects printed pages.
2
Misfeed-clearing door
Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the saddle stitcher.
3
Misfeed-clearing door release lever
Used to open the Misfeed-clearing door.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Before using the machine
2
9
4
5
6
7
8
Mailbin kit MT-502
No.
Part name
Description
4
Bin 4
Collects printed pages.
5
Bin 3
Collects printed pages.
6
Bin 2
Collects printed pages.
7
Bin 1
Collects printed pages.
8
Guide lever FN7
Moved when clearing paper misfeeds within the mailbin kit.
9
Misfeed-clearing door
Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the mailbin kit.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
2-13
Before using the machine
2
2.1.6
Finisher FS-609/Punch kit PK-501
2
1
3
13
12
11
4
10
5
9
8
7
6
Finisher FS-609
No.
2-14
Part name
Description
1
Output tray 1
Collects printed pages.
2
Upper cover
Opened when clearing paper misfeeds.
3
Horizontal transport unit
cover
Opened when clearing paper misfeeds from the horizontal transport unit.
4
Punch scrap box
Removed when emptying hole-punch waste that has accumulated from using
the Punch settings.
5
Misfeed-clearing guide
Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher.
6
Right-side door
Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher.
7
Output tray 2
Collects copies printed using the "Fold & Staple" setting.
8
Misfeed-clearing dial in folding section
Turned when clearing paper misfeeds in the folding section.
9
Staple cartridge holder
Removed from the stapler unit when clearing jammed staples or replacing the
staple cartridge.
10
Misfeed-clearing dial 1
Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher.
11
Misfeed-clearing dial 2
Turned when clearing jammed staples or replacing the staple cartridge, or for
moving the staple cartridge holder out to the front.
12
Stapler unit
Pulled out when clearing jammed staples or replacing the staple cartridge.
13
Front door
Opened when clearing paper misfeeds or jammed staples or when replacing
the staple cartridge.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Before using the machine
2
Punch kit PK-501
No.
Part name
Description
14
Punch kit*
Punches holes for filing printed pages when punch kit is installed onto finisher
FS-609.
*
Parts marked with an asterisk are internal options and therefore are not shown in the illustration.
Precautions for using the finisher:
Do not place objects on top of the finisher and below the paper output trays, otherwise the machine
may be damaged.
-
magicolor 8650
Do not place your hand below or rest your foot on top of the output trays for finisher.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
2-15
Before using the machine
2
2.1.7
Control panel
1
2
4
No.
2.1.8
3
Part name
Description
1
[Menu/Select] key
While the machine is waiting to receive data, press this key to display the settings menu.
If this key is pressed while a setting is displayed, that setting is selected.
2
[Cancel] key
Press this key to quit changing the settings in the menu.
3
Cursor keys
([+], [,], [*], [)])
The [+] and [,] keys switch among parameters of the "Utility" menu.
The [*] and [)] keys move the hierarchy of each Menu screen.
During numeric value entry, they move the position of changeable digit.
4
Display panel
Displays various screens and messages.
Display panel
1
2
3
No.
2-16
Part name
Description
1
LED line
The machine’s current status is indicated by the color and lighting/flashing of
the indicator.
Flashing in blue: Printing normally, Low Power mode, Sleep mode
Flashing in orange: Warning
Lit in orange: Stopping operating
2
Message area
Displays the status of the machine, setting, and warnings.
3
Toner supply indicators
Displays the amount of toner remaining.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Before using the machine
2
2.2
Power supply
2.2.1
Turning on the machine
1
Set the power switch to n.
2
Check that the display panel is turned on.
!
Detail
When the machine is turned on, the printer starts up and the message "Now warming up" appears. After
the message "Ready to Print" appears, a print job can be received.
The default settings, which are those that are selected immediately after the machine is turned on, can
be changed. For details, refer to "Settings for control panel" on page 9-3.
The factory defaults settings are the settings that were selected when this machine was sent from the
factory.
2
Note
Warming-up time is within 75 seconds at an ambient temperature of 73.4 °F (23 °C).
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
2-17
Before using the machine
2
2.2.2
Turning off the machine
1
Set the power switch to o.
2
Check that the display panel is turned off.
2
Reminder
When the power switch is turned off, then on again, wait at least 10 seconds to turn it on after turning
it off. If there is no wait period between turning the power switch off, then on again, the machine may
not function properly.
Do not turn off the machine with the power switch while it is making printing, otherwise a paper misfeed
may occur.
Do not turn off the machine with the power switch while a queued job or stored data is waiting to be
printed, otherwise the jobs will be deleted.
!
Detail
The following are cleared when the power switch is turned off.
Settings that have not been programmed
Jobs queued to be printed.
2.2.3
Automatically clearing settings (System Auto Reset)
If no operation is performed for a specified length of time while settings are being changed, settings that have
not been programmed are cleared and return to their defaults.
This is the system auto reset operation.
As the factory default, the system auto reset operation is performed after 1 minute.
!
Detail
The length of time until the system auto reset operation is performed and whether or not it is performed
can be set from "System Settings" menu. For details, refer to "System Settings" on page 9-21.
2-18
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Before using the machine
2.2.4
2
Automatically conserving energy (Low Power mode)
If no operation is performed for a specified length of time the machine automatically enters a mode where it
conserves energy.
This is the Low Power mode.
The machine can receive jobs even while it is in Low Power mode.
As the factory default, the machine enters Low Power mode after 15 minutes.
2
Note
When a print job is received, the machine recovers from Low Power mode and begins printing after it
has finished warming up.
The Low Power mode can also be canceled by pressing any key in the control panel.
!
Detail
The length of time until the machine enters Low Power mode can be changed. For details, refer to
"System Settings" on page 9-18.
2.2.5
Automatically conserving energy (Sleep mode)
If no operation is performed for a specified length of time, the machine automatically enters a mode where it
conserves energy.
This is the Sleep mode.
Although the machine conserves more energy in Sleep mode than in Low Power mode, the machine must
warm up when Sleep mode is canceled to begin printing again, therefore taking more preparation time than
Low Power mode.
As the factory default, the machine enters Sleep mode after 20 minutes.
2
Note
When a print job is received, the machine recovers from Sleep mode and begins printing after it has
finished warming up.
The Sleep mode can also be canceled by pressing any key in the control panel.
!
Detail
The length of time until the machine enters Sleep mode can be changed. For details, refer to "System
Settings" on page 9-18.
2.2.6
Manually switching to Power Save mode
Power Save mode can be manually specified from the control panel.
If "Immediately" is specified for "Entering Power Save" on the control panel, this machine stops all the
functions. However, the machine automatically returns from the Power Save mode when the control panel is
operated or data is being sent.
2.2.7
Power supply
Be sure to turn off the machine if it is not to be used for a long period of time, for example, overnight.
In order to ensure that no energy is being consumed, unplug the machine.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
2-19
Before using the machine
2
2.3
Paper
Use paper that meets the following specifications.
2.3.1
Possible paper sizes
Non-standard-sized paper:
Paper source
Paper width
Paper length
Tray 1 (bypass tray)*
90.0mm to 311.1mm
139.7mm to 1200.0mm
Tray 2
–
–
139.7mm to 311.1mm
148mm to 457.2mm
Tray 3
Single/Double paper feed
cabinets
Tray 4 (LCT)
Double-sided prints
*
Banner paper
Paper width: 210mm to 297mm
Paper length: 457.3mm to 1200mm
Standard-sized paper:
Paper source
Paper size
Tray 1 (bypass tray)*1
12 e 18 w*2 to Statement w/v (A3 w to B6 w, A6 w, 8 e 13 w*3, 16K w/v, 8K w)
Tray 2
11 e 17 w to Letter w/v, Statement w (A3 w to B5 w/v, A5 w, 8 e 13 w*3, 16K v,
8K w)
Tray 3
12 e 18 w*2 to Letter w/ v, Statement w (A3 w to B5 w/v, A5 w, 8 e 13 w*3, 16K v,
8K w)
Single/Double paper feed
cabinets
11 e 17 w to Letter w/v, Statement w (A3 w to B5 w/v, A5 w, 8 e 13 w*3, 16K v,
8K w)
Tray 4 (LCT)
Letter v (A4 v)
Double-sided prints
12 e 18 w*2 to Statement, 12-1/4 e 18 w, 4 e 6 w (A3 w to A5 w/v, 8 e 13 w*3,
16K w/v, 8K w)
*1
For thick paper 4, only A3 w, A4 v, 11 e 17 w and Letter v are available for printing.
*2 This is one size larger than A3. 12-1/4 e 18 is equivalent to 311.1 mm e 457.2 mm, and 12 e 18 is equivalent
to 304.8 mm e 457.2 mm.
*3
There are five Foolscap sizes: 220 e 330mm w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, and
8 e 13 w. Any one of these sizes can be selected. Changing this menu must be performed by a service
engineer.
2-20
*4
Statement w can be used with the North American (inch) model only.
*5
A5 w can be used with the European (metric) model only.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Before using the machine
2
Loaded equipment
Paper sizes that can be loaded
Finisher FS-519
Output tray 1, 2 and optional Output Tray
11 e 17 w, Letter w/v, Statement w/v, 12-1/4 e 18 w*2
(A3 w to B6 w, A6 w, 12-1/4 e 18 w)
"Group"/"Sort" settings: 11 e 17 w to Letter w/v (A3 w to A5 w)
Staple settings: 11 e 17 w to Letter w/v (A3 w to A5 w)
Punch settings*1:
2-hole: 11 e 17 w to Letter w/v
3-hole: 11 e 17 w, Letter v
4-hole: A3 w, A4 v, B5 v
Optional output tray
OT-602
2.3.2
Saddle stitcher SD-505
Fold & staple: 11 e 17 w, Letter w (A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, B5 w)
Mailbin kit MT-502
Letter v, Statement w (A4 v, B5 v, A5 w)
Finisher FS-609
Output tray 1:
"Group" setting: 11 e 17 w to Statement w/v, 12-1/4 e 18 w*2
(A3 w to B5 w/v, 12-1/4 e 18 w)
"Sort" setting: 11 e 17 w to Statement v (A3 w to A5 v)
Staple setting: 11 e 17 w to Letter w/v (A3 w to B5 w/v)
Punch settings*1:
2-hole: 11 e 17 w to Letter w/v
3-hole: 11 e 17 w, Letter v
4-hole: A3 w, A4 v
Output tray 2: 11 e 17 w, Letter w (A3 w to A4 w)
*1
Can be used when the optional punch kit is installed on the finisher.
*2
12-1/4 e 18 is equivalent to 311.1 mm e 457.2 mm, which is one size larger than A3.
Paper types and paper capacities
Paper type
Plain paper
Thick paper
1
Thick paper
2
Thick paper
3
Thick paper
4
Weight
60g/m2 to
90g/m2
91g/m2 to
150g/m2
151g/m2 to
209g/m2
210g/m2 to
256g/m2
257g/m2 to
271g/m2
Tray 1 (bypass tray)
150 sheets
20 sheets
20 sheets
20 sheets
20 sheets
Tray 2 and tray 3
500 sheets
150 sheets
150 sheets
150 sheets
–
Single/Double paper feed cabinet
500 sheets
150 sheets
150 sheets
150 sheets
–
Tray 4 (LCT)
2,500 sheets
1,000 sheets
1,000 sheets
1,000 sheets
–
Paper source
For printing with thick paper 3 (210 g/m2 to 256 g/m2) or thick paper 4 (257 g/m2 to 271 g/m2), print results
equivalent to those with in thick paper 1 or thick paper 2 are not guaranteed. Perform a test print to check
whether a satisfactory print result is obtained.
Paper type
Transparencies
Postcards
Envelopes
Label sheets
Banner paper
127g/m2 to
210g/m2
Paper source
Tray 1 (bypass tray)
20 sheets
20 sheets
10 sheets
20 sheets
10 sheets
Tray 2 and tray 3
–
–
–
–
–
Single/Double paper feed cabinet
–
–
–
–
–
Tray 4 (LCT)
–
–
–
–
–
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
2-21
Before using the machine
2
2.3.3
Special paper
Paper other than plain paper, such as OHP transparencies and colored paper, is called special paper. Be sure
to select a special paper setting for paper trays loaded with media such as OHP transparencies and colored
paper. If the paper type is not correctly selected, paper misfeeds may occur.
Paper type
Descriptions
Single Side Only
Select this setting when paper that should not be used with double-sided copying (for
example, when one side has already been printed on) is loaded as plain paper with a
weight of 60g/m2 to 90g/m2.
A paper tray with the "Single Side Only" setting selected is given priority when the "Auto" Paper setting is specified.
A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected during double-sided printing.
Special Paper
Select this setting when special paper, for example, high-quality paper, is loaded as
plain paper with a weight of 60g/m2 to 90g/m2.
A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the "Auto" Paper setting is specified.
Letterhead
Select this setting when paper already printed with a company name or preset text is
loaded as plain paper with a weight of 60g/m2 to 90g/m2.
A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the "Auto" Paper setting is specified.
Colored Paper
Select this setting when colored paper is loaded as plain paper with a weight of
60g/m2 to 90g/m2.
A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the "Auto" Paper setting is specified.
Transparency
Select this setting when OHP transparencies are loaded.
A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the "Auto" Paper setting is specified. When selecting OHP transparencies, select the "Gray Scale" Color
setting, and then select the paper type.
Thick 1
Select this setting when the thick paper that is loaded has a weight of 91g/m2 to
150g/m2.
A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the "Auto" Paper setting is specified.
Thick 2
Select this setting when the thick paper that is loaded has a weight of 151g/m2 to
209g/m2.
A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the "Auto" Paper setting is specified.
Thick 3
Select this setting when the thick paper that is loaded has a weight of 210g/m2 to
256g/m2.
A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the "Auto" Paper setting is specified.
Thick 4
Select this setting when the thick paper that is loaded has a weight of 257g/m2 to
271g/m2.
A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the "Auto" Paper setting is specified.
Envelope
Select these settings when envelopes are loaded.
A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the "Auto" Paper setting is specified.
Plain-2nd Side
Select these settings when loading paper that has already been printed on one side.
"2nd Side" can be selected only if plain paper, thick paper 1, thick paper 2, thick
paper 3 or thick paper 4 is loaded in the tray 1 (bypass tray).
Thick 1-2nd Side
Thick 2-2nd Side
Thick 3-2nd Side
Thick 4-2nd Side
2-22
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Before using the machine
2.3.4
2
Precautions for paper
Do not use the following types of paper.
Otherwise, decreased print quality, paper misfeeds or damage may result.
OHP transparencies that have already been fed through the machine (even if the transparency is still
blank)
Paper that has been printed on with a heat-transfer printer or an inkjet printer
Paper that is either extremely thick or extremely thin
Folded, curled, wrinkled, or torn paper
Paper that has been left unwrapped for a long period of time
Damp paper, perforated paper, or paper with punched holes
Extremely smooth or extremely rough paper, or paper with an uneven surface
Paper that has been treated, such as carbon-backed, heat-sensitive or pressure-sensitive paper
Paper that has been decorated with foil or embossing
Paper of a non-standard shape (not rectangular)
Paper that is bound with glue, staples or paper clips
Paper with labels attached
Paper with ribbons, hooks, buttons, etc., attached
Label sheets that easily peel
Label sheets with the backing sheets peeled off or glue exposed
Originally trimmed label sheets
Inappropriate label sheets
Punched-out label sheets with the
surface of the backing exposed
For envelopes, printing on the sealing parts is not warranted.
2.3.5
Paper storage
Store paper in a cool, dark location with little humidity.
If the paper becomes damp, paper misfeeds may occur.
Paper that has not been loaded should be kept wrapped or placed in a plastic bag and stored in a cool, dark
location with little humidity.
Store the paper laying flat, not standing on its edge. Curled paper may cause paper misfeeds.
Keep paper out of the reach of children.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
2-23
Before using the machine
2
2.3.6
Auto tray switch feature
If the selected paper tray runs out of paper while a job is being printed and a different paper tray is loaded
with paper meeting the following conditions, the other paper tray is automatically selected so printing can
continue. If the optional tray 4 (LCT) is installed, a maximum of 3,650 copies (with Letter v (A4 v) paper) can
be made continuously. (The paper tray is automatically switched only if the "Auto Tray Switch" parameter in
the "User Settings" menu is set to "ON".)
Operating conditions
The paper is the same size.
The paper is positioned in the same orientation.
The paper is the same type.
The paper trays are selected when the paper tray is automatically switched.
!
Detail
For details on the specifying the paper trays that are selected when the paper tray is automatically
switched, refer to "System Settings" on page 9-18.
2.3.7
Order for selecting paper trays
As a factory default, when a different paper tray is automatically selected, the next paper tray in the following
list is chosen.
When the standard tray is installed:
T2 (Tray 2) % T3 (Tray 3) % T1 (Tray 1 (bypass tray))
When single paper feed cabinet is installed:
T2 (Tray 2) % T3 (Tray 3) % T4 (Tray 4) % T1 (Tray 1 (bypass tray))
When double paper feed cabinet is installed:
T2 (Tray 2) % T3 (Tray 3) % T4 (Tray 4) % T5 (Tray 5) % T1 (Tray 1 (bypass tray))
When tray 4 (LCT) is installed:
T2 (Tray 2) % T3 (Tray 3) % T4 (Tray 4) % T1 (Tray 1 (bypass tray))
!
Detail
To change the order in which the paper trays are selected, refer to "System Settings" on page 9-18.
2-24
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Before using the machine
2
2.4
Loading paper
2.4.1
Loading paper into the tray 1 (bypass tray)
Paper can be fed manually through the tray 1 if you wish to print onto paper that is not loaded into a paper
tray, or if you wish to print onto thick paper 4, postcards, envelopes, OHP transparencies or label sheets.
!
Detail
For thick paper 4, only A3 w, A4 v, 11 e 17 w and Letter v are available for printing.
1
Open the tray 1.
–
When loading large-sized paper, pull out the tray
extension.
Tray
extension
2
With the side to be printed on facing down, insert the paper as much as possible into the feed slot.
3
Slide the lateral guides to fit the size of paper being loaded.
How is curled paper loaded?
% Flatten the paper before loading it.
?
How many sheets of paper and other media can be
loaded?
% Do not load so many sheets of plain paper that the top of
the stack is higher than the , mark.
?
Lateral guides
2
Note
If necessary, specify the paper size and paper type.
For details, refer to "Paper Settings Menu" on page 9-17.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
2-25
Before using the machine
2
2
Reminder
Push the paper guides firmly up against the edges of the paper.
If postcards are loaded, select "Thick 3".
If label sheets are loaded, select "Thick 1".
Printing on OHP transparencies is possible only in black. When selecting OHP transparencies, select
the "Gray Scale" from "Select Color" in "Quality" tab.
When loading postcards, load them in the w orientation, as shown in the illustration. Do not load
postcards in the v orientation.
A maximum of 20 postcards can be loaded into the tray 1.
When loading OHP transparencies, load them in the w orientation, as shown in the illustration. Do not
load OHP transparencies in the v orientation.
A maximum of 20 OHP transparencies can be loaded into the tray 1.
2-26
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Before using the machine
2
Before loading envelopes, press them down to make sure that all air is removed, and make sure that
the folds of the flaps are firmly pressed, otherwise the envelopes may become wrinkled or a paper
misfeed may occur.
When loading envelopes, load them with the flap side up, as shown in the illustration. If the envelopes
are loaded with the flap side down, a paper misfeed may occur. The flap side of envelopes cannot be
printed on.
A maximum of 10 envelopes can be loaded into the tray 1.
Flap side
When loading label sheets, load them in the w orientation, as shown in the illustration. Do not load label
sheets in the v orientation.
A maximum of 20 label sheets can be loaded into the tray 1.
Side to be printed on
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
2-27
Before using the machine
2
Be sure to load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces up.
2
Note
The image will be printed on the surface of the paper facing down when the paper is loaded into the
tray 1.
!
Detail
For details on the paper sizes, refer to "Paper" on page 2-20.
2-28
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Before using the machine
2.4.2
2
Loading paper into tray 2/3/4/5
The paper loading method is the same for trays 2, 3, 4 and 5.
The following describes the paper loading procedure for tray 2.
0
Tray 4/5 is an option.
1
Pull out tray 2.
Film
2
Slide the lateral guides to fit the size of paper to be loaded.
–
3
Load the paper into the tray so that the side of the paper to be
printed on (the side facing up when the package was
unwrapped) faces up.
–
magicolor 8650
Lateral guides
If the lateral guides are not positioned correctly for the
loaded paper, the paper size will not be correctly detected.
Be sure to adjust the lateral guides to the size of the loaded
paper.
, mark
Load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces down.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
2-29
Before using the machine
2
?
%
How is curled paper loaded?
Flatten the paper before loading it.
How many sheets of paper and other media can be loaded?
% Do not load so many sheets of plain paper that the top of the stack is higher than the , mark.
?
4
Close tray 2.
!
Detail
If special paper is loaded, the paper type setting must be specified. For details, refer to "Paper Settings
Menu" on page 9-17.
2
Reminder
Be careful not to touch the film.
For details on selecting the size and type of paper loaded in tray 2/3/4/5, refer to "Paper" on page 2-20.
To print on OHP transparencies, envelopes or postcards, use the tray 1 (bypass tray).
2.4.3
Loading paper into the tray 4 (LCT)
0
0
If the [Power] is turned off, the tray 4 (LCT) cannot be pulled out, even after the tray release button is
pressed. Be sure that the machine is turned on with the [Power].
Tray 4 (LCT) is an option.
1
Press the tray release button.
The tray 4 (LCT) slides out from the main unit slightly.
2
Pull out the tray 4 (LCT).
Film
2-30
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Before using the machine
3
2
Load the paper into the right side of the tray 4 (LCT) so that the
side of the paper to be printed on (the side facing up when the
package was unwrapped) faces up.
, mark
Film
–
Load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on
faces down.
– To print on OHP transparencies, thick paper 4, envelopes
or postcards, use the tray 1.
How is curled paper loaded?
% Flatten the paper before loading it.
?
4
Load the paper into the left side of the tray 4 (LCT) so that the
side of the paper to be printed on (the side facing up when the
package was unwrapped) faces up.
5
Close the tray 4 (LCT).
–
, mark
If special paper is loaded, the paper type setting must be specified. For details, refer to "Paper
Settings Menu" on page 9-17.
2
Reminder
Be careful not to touch the film.
Do not load so many sheets of paper that the top of the stack is higher than the , mark.
For details on the paper that can be loaded into the tray 4 (LCT), refer to "Paper" on page 2-20.
2
Note
If the machine has entered Low Power mode or Sleep mode, the tray 4 (LCT) cannot be pulled out, even
after the tray release button is pressed. Be sure to first cancel Low Power mode or Sleep mode.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
2-31
Before using the machine
2
2.5
Printer controller
The printer controller is a device for performing printing functions and network printing functions with this
machine.
2.5.1
Role of the printer controller
The printer controller processes printing data in this machine, which plays an important role in the printing
system. The computer provides connections through the printer controller, allowing printing from
applications. When using this machine as a network printer, you can print from applications on the computer.
Printing system
Computer
Machine
Printer
controller
The printer controller provides the following functions:
Printing data being sent from a printer driver on a computer
Support of network protocols including TCP/IP (IPv4/IPv6), IPX/SPX, and AppleTalk
Direct printing over a network using Web Service Printing (Windows Vista), SMB (Windows), LPR, and
IPP printing
Access to settings for this machine and the printer controller from a client computer over the network
(using a Web browser)
Control of the number of pages printed (the User Authentication and Account Track functions)
2-32
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Before using the machine
2.5.2
2
Printing flow
The following outlines the flow of operations for using this printing system.
The printer driver receives print commands from applications.
Data is transmitted to this machine over a USB interface when this machine is used via a USB connection,
or over an Ethernet interface (TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, or AppleTalk) when this machine is used via an Ethernet
connection. The data is then delivered from this machine to the printer controller that performs image
rasterization (development of output characters and images to bitmap data) and printed by the printing
mechanism of this machine.
Computer
Used with a USB
connection
Used with a
network connection
Application
Application
Printer driver
Printer driver
USB
Ethernet (TCP/IP,
IPX/SPX, or AppleTalk)
Machine
Print
Printer controller
PS/PCL processing (rasterizing)
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
2-33
Before using the machine
2
2.6
Operating environment
The following descriptions the system requirements for using this printing system and the interfaces used for
connection.
2.6.1
Compatible computers and operating systems
Check that the computer being connected meets the following conditions.
Windows
Item
Operating environment
Operating System
Windows NT Workstation/Server Version4.0 (Service Pack 6 or later), Windows 2000 Professional/Server (Service Pack 3 or later), Windows XP Home Edition/Windows XP Professional,
Windows XP Professional x64 Edition, Windows Vista Home Basic/Home
Premium/Ultimate/Business/Enterprise, Windows Vista Home Basic/Home Premium/Ultimate/Business/Enterprise x64 Edition, Windows Server 2003 Standard
Edition, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition
Processor
Processor recommended for the operating system or higher
Memory
Capacity recommended for the operating system
With sufficient memory resources in the operating system and application being used
Drive
CD-ROM
Web Browser (when
using PageScope
Web Connection)
Microsoft Internet Explorer Ver. 6 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled)
Netscape Navigator Ver. 7.02 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled)
Mozilla Firefox Ver. 1.0 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled)
Adobe® Flash® (plug-in ver. 7.0 or later required if Flash is selected as the display format)
Macintosh
2-34
Item
Operating environment
Operating System
Mac OS 9.2, Mac OS X 10.2.8, Mac OS X 10.3, or Mac OS X 10.4
Processor
PowerPC, Intel Processor
(Intel Processor for Mac OS X 10.4 only)
Memory
Capacity recommended for the operating system
Drive
CD-ROM
Web Browser (when
using PageScope
Web Connection)
Netscape Navigator Ver. 7.02 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled)
Mozilla Firefox Ver. 1.0 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled)
Adobe® Flash® (plug-in ver. 7.0 or later required if Flash is selected as the display format)
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Before using the machine
2.6.2
2
Compatible interfaces
The following interfaces can be used to connect this printing system to a computer.
Ethernet interface
Select to use this printing system via a network connection.
Supports 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, and 1000Base-T standards. In addition, the Ethernet interface supports
the TCP/IP (LPD/LPR, IPP, SMB), Web Service, IPX/SPX (NetWare), and AppleTalk (EtherTalk) protocols.
USB interface
Select to use this printing system via a USB connection.
The USB interface can be connected to a computer running Windows. A USB cable is required for
connection. Use a type A (4 pin, male) or type B (4 pin, male) USB cable. A USB cable measuring three meters
or less is recommended.
Connection diagram
The printer cables are connected to each port on this machine.
Machine (rear view)
Ethernet port (1000Base-T/100Base-TX/10Base-T)
USB port
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
2-35
Before using the machine
2
2.6.3
Printer drivers applicable to operating systems
In order to use this printing system, the printer driver must be installed.
The following lists the printer drivers included on the CD and the supported computer operating systems.
Select the required printer driver.
Printer driver
Page description
language
Supported operating systems
Konica Minolta
PCL Driver
(PCL driver)
PCL6
Windows NT Workstation/Server Version4.0 (Service Pack 6 or later)
Windows 2000 Professional/Server (Service Pack 3 or later), Windows XP
Home Edition/Windows XP Professional, Windows XP Professional x64
Edition, Windows Vista Home Basic/Home Premium/Ultimate/Business/Enterprise, Windows Vista Home Basic/Home Premium/Ultimate/Business/Enterprise x64 Edition, Windows Server 2003 Standard
Edition, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition
Konica Minolta
PostScript Driver
(PS driver)
PostScript3 Emulation
Windows 2000 Professional/Server (Service Pack 3 or later), Windows XP
Home Edition/Windows XP Professional, Windows XP Professional x64
Edition, Windows Vista Home Basic/Home Premium/Ultimate/Business/Enterprise, Windows Vista Home Basic/Home Premium/Ultimate/Business/Enterprise x64 Edition, Windows Server 2003 Standard
Edition, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition
PostScript PPD
driver (PS-PPD)
Mac OS 9.2 or later
Mac OS X 10.2.8, Mac OS X 10.3, or Mac OS X 10.4
2
Note
Select the page description language according to the application used for printing.
2-36
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Before using the machine
2.7
2
Setting up the system
In order to use this printing system, it must first be set up.
The setup procedure refers to a series of steps for connecting this machine to a computer and installing the
printer driver on the computer.
The setup procedure consists of the following steps.
2.7.1
Network connection
1
Connect this machine to a computer.
2
Make sure the computer is connected to the network.
3
Specify the IP address of the machine to connect it to the network.
4
Depending on the connection method and protocol, change the network settings of this machine.
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
5
Install the printer driver.
–
6
Specify the network port of the printer driver according to the connection method and protocol.
Install the screen fonts.
–
–
–
2.7.2
LPR: Enable LPD print in the LPD Setting screen.
Port9100: Enable the RAW port number (9100 at default), in the TCP/IP Setting screen.
SMB: Specify "Print Setting" in the SMB Setting screen.
IPP/IPPS: Enable IPP print in the IPP Setting screen. For IPPS print, install the certificate in advance.
Web Service: Enable the print function in the Web Service Settings screen.
Bonjour: Enable Bonjour in the Bonjour Setting screen.
AppleTalk: Enable AppleTalk in the AppleTalk Setting screen.
The CD-ROM contains the Latin TrueType fonts as screen fonts. The ScreenFont or Screen Fonts
folder in the CD-ROM contains the screen fonts.
Install the screen fonts after adding the operating system standard fonts. For details, refer to Help
of the operating system.
Macintosh fonts are compressed. Decompress them before installing.
Local connection
1
Connect this machine to a computer.
2
Install the printer driver.
3
Install the screen fonts.
–
–
The CD-ROM contains the Latin TrueType fonts as screen fonts. The ScreenFont or Screen Fonts
folder in the CD-ROM contains the screen fonts.
Install the screen fonts after adding the operating system standard fonts. For details, refer to Help
of the operating system.
2
Reminder
After installing the printer driver, perform test print to make sure that the connections are made
properly.
!
Detail
For details on applicable interfaces, refer to "Compatible interfaces" on page 2-35.
For details on network settings, refer to "Network settings" on page 3-3.
The procedure for installing the printer driver differs depending on the connection method, operating
system of the computer, and printer driver. For details, refer to "Installing the printer driver for Windows"
on page 4-3 and "Installing the printer driver for Macintosh" on page 5-3.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
2-37
Before using the machine
2
2
Note
To update an existing printer driver, delete the existing printer driver first. For details, refer to
"Uninstalling the printer driver" on page 4-29 and "Uninstalling the printer driver" on page 5-14.
If necessary, specify the interface timeout settings in the Utility mode on the control panel. For details,
refer to "Printer Settings" on page 9-24.
Installation of screen fonts is available only if the optional HDD is installed.
2.8
Contents of CD-ROM
The following CDs are available for printer controllers.
magicolor 8650 Driver CD
Application CD (PageScope Utilities)
Documentation CD
Each CD contains printer drivers (for Windows and Macintosh), utilities, document data such as User’s Guide
manuals and release notes, and screen fonts.
2
Note
In User’s Guide, locations of folders or files may not contain the root directory.
Be sure to use files contained in the EN (English) folder.
2-38
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Before using the machine
2.9
2
Authentication Method
Specify user authentication and account track settings in order to control the use of this machine.
User authentication settings are specified to manage individuals, and account track settings are specified to
manage groups and multiple users.
By specifying both user authentication and account track settings, the number of prints made by each
account can be managed for each individual user.
2
Note
On this machine, a total of 1,000 users and accounts can be registered if the optional HDD is installed,
or a total of 30 users and accounts can be registered if not.
When an authentication method is specified, the authentication information is required when printing.
To print with the user authentication or account track specified, the user name and password must be
entered. For details, refer to "Printing on a machine with the user authentication set up" on page 8-24
and "Printing with the machine enabling the Account Track function" on page 8-29.
When an authentication method is specified, the authentication screen appears when you attempt to
use the "Job Operation" function of this machine. To print with the user authentication or account track
specified, the user name and password must be entered to login. For details, refer to "Job Operation
Menu" on page 9-16.
When an optional authentication unit is installed, login via the authentication unit is available.
User authentication and account track can be specified without synchronizing.
2.9.1
User authentication and account track
User authentication and account track can be used to specify the following settings.
User Authentication
–
Limits on the available functions
–
Counters for printing by each user
–
Limits on using color or black printing and on the number of copies that can be set
–
Management of group user boxes and personal user boxes for each owner
–
Delete jobs of other users
Account Track
–
Counters for printing from each account
–
Limits on using color or black printing and on the number of copies that can be set
–
Operates the group box
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
2-39
Before using the machine
2
2.9.2
When user authentication and account track are synchronized
User 1
Account
Group A
User 2
Group B
This setup is used when the machine is used by multiple departments and the use by each employee is
managed by each department. With this setup, statistics can be maintained on each employee (each user)
and on each department (each account).
To manage the use of this machine in this way, specify the following authentication settings.
2.9.3
Parameter on Authentication Method screen
Settings
User Authentication
Select "ON (External Server)" or "ON (MFP)".
Account Track
Select "ON", and then specify the account name and
password.
Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track
Select "Synchronize".
Account Name (on User Registration screen)
Select an account name if "ON (MFP)" was selected.
When user authentication and account track are used separately
User 1
Account
Group A
User 2
Group B
Group C
This setup is used when the machine is used by multiple employees with each employee performing multiple
duties, which are to be totaled separately. With this setup, statistics can be maintained for each employee
(each user) and on each duty of the employee (each account). In addition, totals can be maintained on each
employee (each user) and each duty (each account) even if the same duty is performed by two different
employees.
To manage the use of this machine in this way, specify the following authentication settings.
2-40
Parameter on Authentication Method screen
Settings
User Authentication
Select "ON (External Server)" or "ON (MFP)".
Account Track
Select "ON", and then specify the account name and
password.
Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track
Select "Do Not Synchronize".
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Before using the machine
2.10
2
User Box functions
The User Box functions allow print data to be saved on the internal hard disk of the machine and printed later.
To save data to a box, create the box according to the purpose, and then save the data to the specified box.
2
Note
The User Box function is available only if a hard disk is installed on this machine.
2.10.1
Available User Box functions
Saving documents
Data can be saved to the following box:
User box
Description
Reference
Public User Box/Personal
User Box/Account User Box
To save document data, print the data by specifying a user box with
the Save in User Box function in the printer driver from the computer
on the network.
Based on user authentication or account track settings, access to
some boxes, such as personal and group user boxes, can be limited
to particular users.
p. 8-12
Annotation User Box
To save document data, print the data by specifying a user box with
the Save in User Box function in the printer driver from the computer
on the network.
Saved document data can be saved for later printing, with an image
of the date/time or an annotation number added.
p. 8-17
Secure Print Box
To save document data, print the data by selecting "Secure Print" in
the printer driver from the computer on the network.
p. 8-6
Encrypted PDF Box
To save document data, download the password-protected PDF file
using the Direct Print function of PageScope Web Connection.
p. 8-22
Touch & Print Box
To save document data, print the data after correctly specifying the
User Authentication settings from the printer driver with the optional
authentication unit AU-101 or 201 installed and with Touch & Print
User Box enabled.
p. 8-32
Computers
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
2-41
Before using the machine
2
Using document data
Documents saved in user boxes can be loaded by the "Job Operation" function of this machine.
The document saved in boxes can be used as follows:
User box
Description
Reference
Public/personal/group user
boxes
Saved documents can be printed. Multiple documents can be selected for printing.
Depending on user authentication and account track settings, use of
some boxes, such as personal and group user boxes, can be limited
to a particular user.
p. 8-15
Secure Print Box
Saved documents can be printed. To print the data, enter an ID and
password.
p. 8-9
Annotation user box
Document data saved can be printed or transmitted with an image of
the date/time or an annotation number.
p. 8-20
Encrypted PDF Box
Saved documents can be printed. To print documents, the preset
password is necessary.
p. 8-23
Touch & Print Box
This box appears when the optional authentication unit
(AU-101/AU-201) is installed and Touch&PrintUserBox is enabled.
By touching the authentication unit and logging on, documents being
sent for print jobs by the printer driver are printed.
-
Printouts
2.10.2
Set-up for User Box functions
Before using the User Box functions, the following settings should be specified.
User box registration
Create and register the user boxes where documents will be saved. User boxes that can be specified from a
computer on the network using PageScope Web Connection are as follows.
Public/personal/group user boxes (p. 10-25)
Annotation user box (p. 10-29)
2-42
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Before using the machine
2.10.3
2
User authentication
This machine can be specified so that an account or user name and a password must be entered in order to
use the "Job Operation" function of this machine.
Contact the administrator for authorized account or user name.
Machine authentication
%
Enter the user name and password to log in.
Job Operation
Enter User Name
Select User
Enter password.
Select Box
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
2-43
Before using the machine
2
Account track
%
Enter the account name and password to log in.
Job Operation
Enter Account Name
Enter password.
Select Box
!
Detail
With user authentication, the only boxes that are displayed are those accessible by the user that is
logged on. For details, refer to "Authentication and accessible user boxes" on page 2-45.
If "Prohibit Functions" in [Admin. Settings] is set to "Mode 2" and a user enters an incorrect password
the specified number of times, that user is locked out and can no longer use the machine. Contact the
administrator to cancel operation restrictions.
2-44
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Before using the machine
2.10.4
2
Limitation on user box registration
Public/personal/group user boxes
There are "public" user boxes, which can be used by more than one person, "personal" user boxes, which
can be used only by a single person, and group user boxes, which can be used only by authorized users in
the account track settings.
The followings are limitations for each box.
Before document data can be saved, a user box must be created for saving the data.
Up to 1,000 user boxes can be created.
Up to 200 documents can be saved in a single user box.
A total of 10,000 pages can be saved in all user boxes.
A total of 3,000 documents can be saved in all user boxes.
2.10.5
Authentication and accessible user boxes
When user authentication and account track settings have been applied, the accessible user boxes and the
access permissions change as shown below. Specify the user authentication and account track settings
according to the desired functions.
When user authentication and account track settings are not specified
Create and access
Public user box
Users can access all public user boxes.
User boxes created by users and the administrator are "public" user boxes.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
2-45
Before using the machine
2
When only user authentication settings are specified
Public user box
User 1
Personal user box
for user 1
Personal user box
for user 2
User 2
Accessible
Users can access all public user boxes and only personal user boxes that the user has created.
Personal user boxes cannot be accessed by other users.
If user authentication settings are canceled or if authentication method is changed, all personal user boxes
become public user boxes.
When only account track settings are specified
Account A
Public user box
Group user box
for account A
Account B
Group user box
for account B
Accessible
Users can access all public user boxes and only group user boxes for the account that the user belongs to.
If account track settings are canceled or if authentication method is changed, all group user boxes become
public user boxes.
2-46
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Before using the machine
2
When user authentication and account track settings are specified and synchronized
Account A
Account B
User 1
User 2
Since account name is synchronized with user names, group user boxes for accounts that the user does not
belong to cannot be accessed.
Public user box
Account A
Personal user
box for user 1
User 1
Account B
Group user box
for account A
Personal user
box for user 2
User 2
Group user box
for account B
Accessible
Users can access all public user boxes, only group user boxes for the account that the user belongs to, and
only personal user boxes that the user has created.
Personal user boxes cannot be accessed by other users.
If user authentication settings are canceled or if authentication method is changed, personal user boxes and
all group user boxes become public user boxes.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
2-47
Before using the machine
2
When user authentication and account track settings are specified but not synchronized
Account A
Account B
User 1
Since account name is not synchronized with user names, the account name and password must be entered
when logging on. A user can use different account name at each login, and therefore can access to each
group user box for the account.
Public user box
Personal user
box for user 1
User 1
Group user box
for account A
Group user box
for account B
Accessible
Accessible by entering the account name and password
Users can access all public user boxes and only personal user boxes that the user has created.
Personal user boxes cannot be accessed by other users.
A user can access to a particular group user box by entering the relevant account name and password when
logging on.
If user authentication settings are canceled or if authentication method is changed, personal user boxes and
all group user boxes become public user boxes.
2-48
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
3
Network settings
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Network settings
3
3
Network settings
3.1
Specifying general settings for TCP/IP-based communication
Specify settings to use this machine in a TCP/IP network environment. To use this machine by connecting to
the network, specify these settings in advance.
2
Reminder
In order to apply all changes to the network settings, turn off this machine, then on again.
When turning off the power switch and turning it on again, wait for 10 seconds or longer after poweroff, and then turn on the power again. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on
immediately after being turned off.
TCP/IP Settings
1
On the "Utility" menu of the control panel, select "System Settings" - "Network Settings" - "TCP/IP".
2
Specify the following settings.
2
Note
For details on the "Utility" menu operations, refer to "Control panel" on page 9-3.
Item
Definition
TCP/IP Settings
Select [ON].
IP Setting / Application
Method
Select whether the IP address is automatically acquired or
directly specified.
IP application method to
be used
IP Address
To directly specify the IP address, specify the IP address of
this machine.
IP address of this machine
Subnet Mask
To directly specify the IP address, specify the subnet mask
of the network to be connected.
Subnet mask of this machine
Default Gateway
To directly specify the IP address, specify the default gateway of the network to be connected.
Default gateway of this
machine
Dynamic DNS Settings
To automatically register the host name specified with [Host
Name] for the DNS server that supports the Dynamic DNS
function, select [ON].
Whether Dynamic DNS is
used
DNS Host Name
Specify the host name of this machine (up to 63 characters).
DNS Domain Name Auto
Retrieval
Select whether to automatically acquire the name of the DNS
domain.
This item is enabled when the DHCP is enabled.
Whether automatic acquisition is available with
DHCP
Default DNS Domain
Name
If not acquiring the DNS domain name automatically, specify
the domain name to which this machine belongs (up to 255
characters including the host name).
Default Domain Name
DNS Search Domain
Name 1 to 3
Specify the DNS search domain name (up to 253 characters).
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Prior confirmation
3-3
Network settings
3
3-4
Item
Definition
Prior confirmation
DNS Server Auto Obtain
Specify whether to automatically acquire the DNS server address.
This item is enabled when the DHCP is enabled.
Whether automatic acquisition is available with
DHCP
Priority DNS Server
If not automatically acquiring the DNS server address, specify the address of the priority DNS server.
Address of the server
Secondary DNS Server 1
and 2
Specify the address of an alternate DNS server.
Address of the server
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Network settings
3.2
3
Using PageScope Web Connection
Specify settings for using PageScope Web Connection. This manual describes how to specify settings
required for each operation using PageScope Web Connection.
PageScope Web Connection is a device management utility supported by the HTTP server integrated into
the printer controller. Using a Web browser on a computer connected to the network, machine settings can
be specified and the status of the machine can be checked. Some settings can be specified from the
computer instead of from the machine control panel.
%
Specify the settings according to the following flowchart.
TCP/IP Settings
PSWC Settings
TCP Socket Setting
Use with SSL?
Yes
No
SSL/TLS Setting
Finish
3.2.1
TCP/IP Settings
Specify settings to use this machine in a TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to "Specifying general settings for TCP/IP-based communication" on page 3-3.
3.2.2
PSWC Settings
1
On the "Utility" menu of the control panel, select "System Settings" - "Network Settings" - "HTTP
Server".
2
Specify the following setting.
2
Note
For details on the "Utility" menu operations, refer to "Control panel" on page 9-3.
Item
Definition
PSWC Settings
Select [ON].
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Prior confirmation
3-5
Network settings
3
3.2.3
TCP Socket Setting
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Network tab - "TCP Socket Setting".
2
Specify the following settings.
2
Note
For details on logging in to Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, refer to "Logging in to
Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection" on page 3-7.
3.2.4
Item
Definition
TCP Socket
(ASCII Mode)
To use in the Flash format, select the "TCP Socket (ASCII
Mode)" check box.
Port No.
(ASCII Mode)
Specify the port number.
Prior confirmation
SSL/TLS Setting
Specifying settings for SSL-based communication
For details, refer to "Creating a certificate for this machine for SSL-based communication" on page 10-57.
3-6
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Network settings
3.3
3
Logging in to Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection
To specify settings for this machine with PageScope Web Connection, Administrator mode must be logged
in. The following shows how to log in to Administrator mode.
!
Detail
When logged in to Administrator mode, the control panel of the machine is locked and cannot be used.
Depending on the status of the machine, you may not be able to log in to Administrator mode.
1
In the login page, select "Administrator", and then click the [Login] button.
–
If necessary, select the display language and format. If "When in warning, the dialog is displayed."
check box is selected, warning messages appear during operation after logging in.
2
Enter the password for the machine’s administrator.
3
Click the [OK] button.
The Administrator mode page appears.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
3-7
Network settings
3
2
Reminder
If "ProhibitFunctions" in [Admin. Settings] - [Security Details] is set to "Mode 2" and an incorrect
password is entered the specified number of times, it is no longer possible to log in to Administrator
mode. For details on authentication settings, refer to "Admin. Settings Menu" on page 9-25.
3-8
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Network settings
3
3.4
Specifying network print settings
3.4.1
Specifying LPR/Port9100 print settings
Specify settings for printing by using LPR or Port9100.
LPR printing is performed via the network using the LPR protocol. LPR printing is used in the UNIX-like OS.
Port9100 printing is performed via the network by directly specifying the RAW port (Port9100) of this machine
connected to the TCP/IP network as a printer of the print destination.
%
Specify the settings according to the following flowchart.
TCP/IP Settings
(1) LPR printing
(2) Port9100 printing
(1)
(2)
LPD Setting
RAW Port Number
Finish
!
Detail
To print data using LPR or Port9100, settings for the printer driver must be specified after these
settings. For details, refer to the "Installing the printer driver for Windows" on page 4-3.
TCP/IP Settings
Specify settings to use this machine in a TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to "Specifying general settings for TCP/IP-based communication" on page 3-3.
LPD Setting
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Network tab - "TCP/IP Setting" "TCP/IP Setting".
2
Specify the following setting.
Item
Definition
LPD
Select "Enable".
Prior confirmation
RAW Port Number
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Network tab - "TCP/IP Setting" "TCP/IP Setting".
2
Specify the following setting.
magicolor 8650
Item
Definition
RAW Port Number
Select the check box for the port to be used, and then
specify the RAW port number.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Prior confirmation
3-9
Network settings
3
3.4.2
Specifying SMB print settings
Specify settings for printing by using SMB.
The printer is sharable on the Windows network by using the SMB protocol. SMB printing is performed by
directly specifying this machine on the Windows network from the computer.
To specify a computer on another network using Windows name (NetBIOS name), a WINS server must be
used.
This machine supports the direct hosting service. To use SMB printing in the IPv6 environment, the Direct
Hosting setting must be enabled.
%
Specify the settings according to the following flowchart.
TCP/IP Settings
Print Setting
IPv6 environment?
No
Yes
Use the WINS server?
Direct Hosting Setting
Yes
No
WINS Setting
Finish
2
Note
For details on installing the printer driver, refer to "Installing the printer driver for Windows" on page 4-3.
TCP/IP Settings
Specify settings to use this machine in a TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to "Specifying general settings for TCP/IP-based communication" on page 3-3.
3-10
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Network settings
3
Print Setting
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Network tab - "SMB Setting" - "Print
Setting".
2
Specify the following settings.
Item
magicolor 8650
Definition
SMB Print
Select "ON".
NetBIOS Name
Specify the NetBIOS name with uppercase letters (up to
15 characters).
Print Service Name
Specify the print service name with uppercase letters (up
to 12 characters).
Workgroup
Specify the workgroup name with uppercase letters (up
to 15 characters).
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Prior confirmation
Workgroup to which
you belong
3-11
Network settings
3
Direct Hosting Setting
3-12
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Network tab - "SMB Setting" - "Direct
Hosting Setting".
2
Specify the following setting.
Item
Definition
Prior confirmation
Direct Hosting Setting
To use the direct hosting service, select "ON".
To communicate with the destination using an IPv6 address, select "ON".
Whether the IPv6 environment is available
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Network settings
3
WINS Setting
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Network tab - "SMB Setting" - "WINS
Setting".
2
Specify the following settings.
Item
magicolor 8650
Definition
Prior confirmation
WINS
To use the WINS server, select "ON".
Auto Obtain Setting
To automatically obtain the WINS server address, select
"Enable".
This item is enabled when the DHCP is enabled.
Whether automatic acquisition is available
with DHCP
WINS Server Address 1
and 2
Specify the WINS server address. (Format: "***.***.***.***",
Range for ***: 0 to 255)
Address of the server
Node Type Setting
Specify the name resolution method.
• B Node: Query by broadcast
• P Node: Query to WINS server
• M Node: Query in the order of broadcast, then WINS
server
• H Node: Query in the order of WINS server, then
broadcast
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
3-13
Network settings
3
3.4.3
Specifying IPP print settings
Specify settings for printing using IPP.
IPP printing is performed via the network using the IPP protocol. Using the HTTP protocol can transfer print
data to the printer on the network, and therefore also enabling output to a remote printer via the Internet.
%
Specify the settings according to the following flowchart.
TCP/IP Settings
IPP Setting
Allow?
Yes
No
IPP Authentication Setting
Finish
2
Note
For details on installing the printer driver, refer to "Installing the printer driver for Windows" on page 4-3.
TCP/IP Settings
Specify settings to use this machine in a TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to "Specifying general settings for TCP/IP-based communication" on page 3-3.
3-14
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Network settings
3
IPP Setting
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Network tab - "IPP Setting".
2
Specify the following settings.
magicolor 8650
Item
Definition
IPP Setting
Select "ON".
Accept IPP job
Select "ON".
Printer Name
Specify the printer name (up to 127 characters).
Printer Location
Specify the printer location (up to 127 characters).
Printer Information
Specify the printer information (up to 127 characters).
Printer URI
Displays the URI of the printer that can use IPP when
printing.
Support Operation
Specify the print operations supported by IPP.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Prior confirmation
3-15
Network settings
3
IPP Authentication Setting
3.4.4
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Network tab - "IPP Setting".
2
Specify the following settings.
Item
Definition
Prior confirmation
IPP Authentication Setting
To perform IPP printing, select the "IPP Authentication
Setting" check box.
Authentication Method
Specify the authentication method.
User Name
Specify the user name (up to 20 characters).
Password
Enter the password (up to 20 characters).
realm
Specify realm (up to 127 characters).
If the authentication method is digest, realm must be
specified.
Authentication method
Specifying IPPS print settings
Specify settings for printing using IPPS.
When performing IPP printing with this machine, communication between the computer and this machine is
encrypted using SSL. Encrypting communication using SSL improves security when printing using IPP.
%
Specify the settings according to the following flowchart.
TCP/IP Settings
IPP Setting
SSL/TLS Setting
Allow?
Yes
No
IPP Authentication Setting
Finish
2
Note
For details on installing the printer driver, refer to the "Installing the printer driver for Windows" on
page 4-3.
When specifying to use IPP printing in Windows Vista, enter "https://[Host Name].[Domain Name]/ipp".
For [Host Name] and [Domain Name], use the names specified in the DNS Host Name and Default DNS
Domain Name in the TCP setting. For details on the procedure, refer to "Specifying general settings for
TCP/IP-based communication" on page 3-3. Also, it is necessary that the computer is able to resolve
the names for this machine using DNS. Register this machine to the DNS server in advance, and specify
settings for DNS at the computer side.
When the certificate of this machine is not published by certificate authority, register the certificate of
this machine to Windows Vista as a certificate of "Trusted Root Certification Authorities" for "Local
Computer" in advance.
3-16
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Network settings
3
Before creating a certificate, correctly specify the DNS Host Name and Default DNS Domain Name
registered in the DNS server to this machine. Otherwise, IPPS connection cannot be established.
TCP/IP Settings
Specify settings to use this machine in a TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to "Specifying general settings for TCP/IP-based communication" on page 3-3.
IPP Setting
Specify settings for printing by using IPP.
For details, refer to "IPP Setting" on page 3-15.
SSL/TLS Setting
Encrypt communication with this machine using SSL.
For details, refer to "Creating a certificate for this machine for SSL-based communication" on page 10-57.
IPP Authentication Setting
Specify settings when authentication is used when printing using IPP.
For details, refer to "IPP Authentication Setting" on page 3-16.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
3-17
Network settings
3
3.4.5
Specifying Bonjour print settings
Specify settings for printing by connecting this machine to a Macintosh computer using Bonjour. When
connecting this machine to a Macintosh computer using Bonjour, the Bonjour settings must be specified.
2
Note
For details on installing the printer driver, refer to the "Installing the printer driver for Macintosh" on
page 5-3.
Bonjour Setting
3-18
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Network tab - "Bonjour Setting".
2
Specify the following settings.
Item
Definition
Bonjour
Select "ON".
Bonjour Name
Specify the Bonjour name that appears as the name of
the connected device (up to 63 characters).
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Prior confirmation
magicolor 8650
Network settings
3.4.6
3
Specifying AppleTalk print settings
Specify settings for printing by connecting this machine to a Macintosh computer using AppleTalk. When
connecting this machine to a Macintosh computer using AppleTalk, the AppleTalk settings must be specified.
2
Note
For details on installing the printer driver, refer to "Installing the printer driver for Macintosh" on
page 5-3.
AppleTalk Setting
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Network tab - "AppleTalk Setting".
2
Specify the following settings.
Item
Definition
AppleTalk
Select "ON".
Printer Name
magicolor 8650
Prior confirmation
*
Specify the printer name that appears on the selector (up
to 31 characters).
Zone Name *
Specify the zone name to which this machine belongs (up
to 31 characters).
Current Zone
Displays the current zone name.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
3-19
Network settings
3
3.4.7
Specifying Web Service Function settings
Specify settings for printing by using Web Service Function.
Printing is possible using the Web Service function newly installed in Windows Vista. The Web Service
Function detects this machine connected to the network, and then installs it as a WS-Printer. Specifying this
machine installed as a WS-Printer when printing from Windows Vista allows printing using HTTP for
communication.
%
Specify the settings according to the following flowchart.
TCP/IP Settings
Web Service Common Settings
Printer Settings
Finish
2
Note
For details on installing the printer driver, refer to "Installing the printer driver for Windows" on page 4-3.
TCP/IP Settings
Specify settings to use this machine in a TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to "Specifying general settings for TCP/IP-based communication" on page 3-3.
3-20
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Network settings
3
Web Service Common Settings
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Network tab - "Web Service Settings"
- "Web Service Common Settings".
2
Specify the following setting.
magicolor 8650
Item
Definition
Friendly Name
Specify setting for Friendly Name (up to 62 characters).
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Prior confirmation
3-21
Network settings
3
Printer Settings
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Network tab - "Web Service Settings"
- "Printer Settings".
2
Specify the following settings.
Item
Definition
Print Function
Printer Name
Select "ON".
*
Specify the printer name (up to 63 characters).
Printer Location *
Printer Information
3-22
Prior confirmation
Specify the printer location (up to 63 characters).
*
Specify the printer information (up to 63 characters).
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
4
Installing the printer driver for
Windows
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Installing the printer driver for Windows
4
4
Installing the printer driver for Windows
4.1
Connection methods selectable in each operating system
The connection method for this machine differs depending on the operating system of the computer. The
printer driver installation method also differs depending on the connection method.
This machine can be connected via a network or a USB interface. In network connection, the printer driver
installation method differs depending on the protocol to be used.
Network connection (Ethernet)
This machine is connected as a network printer.
This printing system supports 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, and 1000Base-T standards. In addition, the Ethernet
interface supports the TCP/IP (LPD/LPR, IPP, SMB), IPX/SPX (NetWare), and AppleTalk (EtherTalk)
protocols.
The applicable protocols differ depending on the operating system of the computer.
USB interface
This machine is connected as a local printer. The USB interface can be connected to a computer Windowscompatible computer.
4.1.1
Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003
Setup method
Connection method
Refer to
Connection
method that can
be set up with an
installer
Port9100
A network connection using the
PORT9100 print service. It uses a TCP/IP
protocol and the RAW printing port.
IPP/IPPS
A network connection using the IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) print service.
Printing via the Internet is possible with
the HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol)
of the TCP/IP protocol. IPPS is an IPP for
SSL encrypted communication.
* Select the connection method in
the course of installation. Select
"Normal Printing" for Port 9100 or
USB connection, "Internet Printing"
for IPP connection, or "Secure Printing" for IPPS connection.
USB
A connection using a USB port.
LPR
A network connection using the LPR
(Line Printer Remote) print service. It
uses a TCP/IP protocol and the LPR
printing port.
Port9100
A network connection using the
PORT9100 print service. It uses a TCP/IP
protocol and the RAW printing port.
SMB
A network connection using SMB (Server
Message Block) for sharing files or printers in Windows. It supports the TCP/IP
protocol.
IPP/IPPS
A network connection using the IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) print service.
Printing via the Internet is possible with
the HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol)
of the TCP/IP protocol. IPPS is an IPP for
SSL encrypted communication.
USB
A connection using a USB port.
USB
A connection using a USB port.
Connection
method that can
be set up with
the Add Printer
wizard
Connection
method that can
be set up with
plug-and-play
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
"Installation using the wizard (Windows XP/Server 2003)" on page 4-6
For Windows XP/Server 2003: "Local connection" on page 4-12
For Windows 2000: "Local connection" on page 4-26
4-3
Installing the printer driver for Windows
4
2
Note
Before using this machine in a network environment, the network settings must be specified for this
machine. For details, refer to the "Network settings" on page 3-3.
To install the printer driver under Windows 2000, XP, or Server 2003, log on using a user name that is
authorized by the administrator.
This manual describes the setup method of USB connection only using the Plug and Play.
4.1.2
Windows Vista
Setup method
Connection method
Refer to
Connection
method that can
be set up with an
installer
Port9100
A network connection using the
PORT9100 print service. It uses a TCP/IP
protocol and the RAW printing port.
IPP
A network connection using the IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) print service.
Printing via the Internet is possible with
the HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol)
of the TCP/IP protocol.
* Select the connection method in
the course of installation. Select
"Normal Printing" for Port 9100 or
USB connection, or "Internet Printing" for IPP connection.
USB
A connection using a USB port.
LPR
A network connection using the LPR
(Line Printer Remote) print service. It
uses a TCP/IP protocol and the LPR
printing port.
Port9100
A network connection using the
PORT9100 print service. It uses a TCP/IP
protocol and the RAW printing port.
SMB
A network connection using SMB (Server
Message Block) for sharing files or printers in Windows. It supports the TCP/IP
protocol.
IPP/IPPS
A network connection using the IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) print service.
Printing via the Internet is possible with
the HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol)
of the TCP/IP protocol. IPPS is an IPP for
SSL encrypted communication.
Web Service print
A connection supports Web Service
Function of Windows Vista, detects the
printer on the network automatically and
connects.
USB
A connection using a USB port.
USB
A connection using a USB port.
Connection
method that can
be set up with
the Add Printer
Wizard
Connection
method that can
be set up with
plug-and-play
"Installation using the wizard (Windows Vista)" on page 4-13
For Windows Vista: "Local connection" on page 4-21
2
Note
Before using this machine in a network environment, the network settings must be specified for this
machine. For details, refer to "Network settings" on page 3-3.
To install the printer driver under Windows Vista, log on as the Administrator.
Either of the installer or Add Printer Wizard can be used to install the PCL driver and PS driver.
When using Windows Vista, the IPPS connection can not be setup using the installer. For using IPPS
connection, setup the connection using the Add Printer Wizard. For details, refer to "Network
connection (IPP or IPPS)" on page 4-17.
4-4
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Installing the printer driver for Windows
4.1.3
4
Windows NT 4.0
Setup method
Connection method
Refer to
Connection
method that can
be set up with
the Add Printer
wizard
LPR
"Installation using the wizard (Windows NT 4.0)" on page 4-27
A network connection using the LPR print
service.
2
Note
Before using this machine in a network environment, the network settings must be specified for this
machine. For details, refer to the "Network settings" on page 3-3.
To install the printer driver under Windows NT 4.0, log on using a user name that is authorized by the
administrator.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
4-5
Installing the printer driver for Windows
4
4.2
Installation using the wizard (Windows XP/Server 2003)
4.2.1
Network connection (LPR/Port9100)
When using the LPR/Port9100 printing, specify the port during the printer driver installation process.
TCP/IP setting for this machine
Specify the IP address on TCP/IP Setting of this machine.
!
Detail
For details on specifying the IP address of this machine, refer to "Network settings" on page 3-3.
RAW port number setting for this machine
To use Port9100 printing, enable the RAW port number (9100 at default), in the TCP/IP Setting screen of this
machine.
!
Detail
For details on specifying the RAW port number of this machine, refer to the "Network settings" on
page 3-3.
LPD setting for this machine
To use LPR printing, enable LPD print on "LPD Setting" of this machine.
!
Detail
For details on the LPD settings of this machine, refer to the "Network settings" on page 3-3.
Printer driver installation using the Add Printer Wizard
2
Reminder
When installing on Windows XP or Server 2003, administrator permissions are required.
1
Insert the printer driver CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the computer.
2
Click the [Start] button, and then click "Printers and Faxes".
–
3
If "Printers and Faxes" does not appear in the Start menu, open Control Panel from the Start menu,
select "Printers and Other Hardware", and then click "Printers and Faxes".
For Windows XP, click "Add a printer" on the "Printer Tasks" menu.
For Windows Server 2003, double-click the "Add Printer" icon.
The Add Printer Wizard starts.
4
Click the [Next] button.
5
Select "Local printer attached to this computer", and then click the [Next] button.
– Clear the "Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer" check box.
The Select a Printer Port dialog box appears.
6
Click "Create a new port", and select "Standard TCP/IP Port" for "Type of port:".
7
Click the [Next] button.
The Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard starts.
4-6
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Installing the printer driver for Windows
4
8
Click the [Next] button.
9
In the "Printer Name or IP address" box, enter the IP address for this machine, and then click the [Next]
button.
–
–
If the Additional Port Information Required dialog box appears, go to step 10.
If the Finish dialog box appears, go to step 13.
10
Select "Custom", and then click the [Settings] button.
11
Change the settings according to the port, and then click the [OK] button.
–
–
–
For an LPR connection, select "LPR", and then enter "Print" in the "Queue name" box.
For a Port9100 connection, select "RAW", and then enter the RAW port number (9100 at default) in
the "Port Number" box.
The information entered here is case-sensitive.
12
Click the [Next] button.
13
Click the [Finish] button.
The Add Printer Wizard appears.
14
Click the [Have Disk] button.
15
Click the [Browse] button.
16
Specify the desired folder on the CD-ROM that contains the printer driver, and then click the [Open]
button.
–
17
Select the specified folder according to the printer driver to be used, the operating system, and the
language.
Printer drivers that can be selected:
Windows XP/Server 2003: PCL driver, PS driver
Click the [OK] button.
The "Printers" list appears.
18
Click the [Next] button.
19
Follow the on-screen instructions.
–
–
If the Windows Logo Testing or Digital Signature dialog box appears, click the [Continue] or [Yes]
button.
When using a network connection, perform a test print after the network settings have been
specified.
20
Click the [Finish] button.
21
When installation is complete, make sure that the icon of the installed printer appears in the Printers
and Faxes window.
22
Remove the CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive.
This completes the printer driver installation.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
4-7
Installing the printer driver for Windows
4
4.2.2
Network connection (SMB)
When using the SMB printing, specify the port by specifying the printer during the printer driver installation
process. Printers can be specified either by searching printers on the network, or by entering the printer
name.
TCP/IP setting for this machine
Specify the IP address in the TCP/IP Setting screen of this machine.
!
Detail
For details on specifying the IP address of this machine, refer to "Network settings" on page 3-3.
2
Note
To use SMB printing in the IPv6 environment, the "Direct Hosting Setting" must be enabled. For details,
refer to "Network settings" on page 3-3.
SMB setting for this machine
In "Print Setting" in the SMB Setting screen of this machine, specify the NetBIOS name, print service name,
and workgroup.
!
Detail
For details on the SMB settings of this machine, refer to "Network settings" on page 3-3.
Printer driver installation by specifying printers using the Add Printer Wizard
2
Reminder
When installing on Windows XP or Server 2003, administrator permissions are required.
1
Insert the printer driver CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the computer.
2
Click the [Start] button, and then click "Printers and Faxes".
–
3
If "Printers and Faxes" does not appear in the Start menu, open Control Panel from the Start menu,
select "Printers and Other Hardware", and then click "Printers and Faxes".
For Windows XP, click "Add a printer" on the "Printer Tasks" menu.
For Windows Server 2003, double-click the "Add Printer" icon.
The Add Printer Wizard starts.
4
Click the [Next] button.
5
Select "Local printer attached to this computer", and then click the [Next] button.
– Clear the "Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer" check box.
The Select a Printer Port dialog box appears.
6
Click "Create a new port", and select "Local Port" for "Type of port:"
7
In the "Enter a port name" box, enter "\\NetBIOS name\print service name".
–
8
Enter the same NetBIOS name and print service name those appear in "Print Setting" in the SMB
Setting screen of this machine.
Click the [OK] button.
The Add Printer Wizard appears.
4-8
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Installing the printer driver for Windows
4
9
Click the [Have Disk] button.
10
Click the [Browse] button.
11
Specify the desired folder on the CD-ROM that contains the printer driver, and then click the [Open]
button.
–
12
Select the specified folder according to the printer driver to be used, the operating system, and the
language.
Printer drivers that can be selected:
Windows XP/Server 2003: PCL driver, PS driver
Click the [OK] button.
The "Printers" list appears.
13
Click the [Next] button.
14
Follow the on-screen instructions.
–
–
If the Windows Logo Testing or Digital Signature dialog box appears, click the [Continue] or [Yes]
button.
When using a network connection, perform a test print after the network settings have been
specified.
15
Click the [Finish] button.
16
When installation is complete, make sure that the icon of the installed printer appears in the Printers
and Faxes window.
17
Remove the CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive.
This completes the printer driver installation.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
4-9
Installing the printer driver for Windows
4
4.2.3
Network connection (IPP or IPPS)
For IPP printing, specify the port during the printer driver installation process.
Specifying the TCP/IP setting for this machine
Specify the IP address of this machine.
!
Detail
For details on specifying the IP address of this machine, refer to "Network settings" on page 3-3.
Specifying the IPP settings for this machine
Enable IPP printing in "IPP Setting" of this machine.
!
Detail
For details on the IPP settings of this machine, refer to the "Network settings" on page 3-3.
To use IPPS printing, the certificate must be registered to this machine. For details, refer to "Creating
a certificate for this machine for SSL-based communication" on page 10-57.
Printer driver installation using the Add Printer wizard
2
Reminder
When installing on Windows XP or Server 2003, administrator permissions are required.
1
Insert the printer driver CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the computer.
2
Click the [Start] button, and then click "Printers and Faxes".
–
3
If "Printers and Faxes" does not appear in the "Start" menu, open the Control Panel from the "Start"
menu, select "Printers and Other Hardware", and then click "Printers and Faxes".
For Windows XP, click "Add a printer" on the "Printer Tasks" menu. For Windows Server 2003, doubleclick the "Add Printer" icon.
"Add Printer wizard" starts.
4
Click the [Next] button.
5
In the Local or Network Printer dialog box, select "A network printer, or a printer attached to another
computer", and then click the [Next] button.
6
In the Specify a Printer dialog box, select "Connect to a printer on the Internet or on a home or office
network".
7
In the "URL" field, enter the URL for this machine in the following format, and then click the [Next]
button.
–
–
4-10
http:// (IP_address_of_machine) /ipp Example: If the IP address of this machine is 192.168.1.20,
enter http://192.168.1.20/ipp.
When setting this machine for IPPS printing, enter "https:// (IP_address_of_machine) /ipp".
8
When the confirmation dialog box appears, click the [OK] button.
9
Click the [Have Disk] button.
10
Click the [Browse] button.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Installing the printer driver for Windows
11
Specify the desired folder on the CD-ROM that contains the printer driver, and then click the [Open]
button.
–
12
4
Select the specified folder according to the printer driver to be used, the operating system, and the
language. Printer drivers that can be selected: Windows XP/Server 2003: PCL driver, PS driver
Click the [OK] button.
The "Printer" list appears.
13
Click the [Next] button.
14
Follow the on-screen instructions.
–
If the Windows Logo Testing or Digital Signature dialog box appears, click the [Continue] or [Yes]
button.
15
Click the [Finish] button.
16
When the installation is completed, make sure that the icon of the installed printer appears in the
Printers and Faxes window.
17
Remove the CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive.
This completes the printer driver installation.
Once the settings for the printer have been specified, you can use the printer in the same way as a default
local printer.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
4-11
Installing the printer driver for Windows
4
4.2.4
Local connection
When this machine is connected via a USB port, the printer driver can be installed with plug-and-play.
2
Note
When a USB connection is used, the printer driver is installed easily with the Plug and Play feature.
However, it can be installed using the Add Printer Wizard. When using the Add Printer Wizard, select
the USB port to be connected in the Select a Printer Port dialog box.
1
Connect this machine to a computer using a USB cable, and then start up the computer.
–
Do not disconnect or connect the cable while the computer is starting up.
2
Insert the printer driver CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the computer.
3
Turn on the power switch of this machine.
The Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears.
–
–
4
If the Found New Hardware Wizard does not start up, turn off this machine, then on again.
When turning off the power, then on again, wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on again.
Otherwise, this machine may not function properly.
Select "Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)", and then click the [Next] button.
–
If the Windows connect to Windows Update dialog box appears, select "NO".
5
From "Search for the best driver in these locations," select "Include this location in the search", and
then click the [Browse] button.
6
Specify the desired folder on the CD-ROM that contains the printer driver, and then click the [Open]
button.
–
7
Select the specified folder according to the printer driver to be used, the operating system, and the
language.
Printers that can be selected:
Windows XP/Server 2003: PCL driver, PS driver
Click the [Next] button, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
–
If the Windows Logo Testing or Digital Signature dialog box appears, click the [Continue] or [Yes]
button.
8
Click the [Finish] button.
9
When the installation is completed, make sure that the icon of the installed printer appears in the
Printers and Faxes window.
10
Remove the CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive.
This completes the printer driver installation.
4-12
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Installing the printer driver for Windows
4.3
Installation using the wizard (Windows Vista)
4.3.1
Network connection (LPR, Port9100, or SMB)
4
In Windows Vista, the printer driver can be installed either by searching printers on the network, or by creating
a new printer port.
Specifying the TCP/IP setting for this machine
Specify the IP address of this machine.
!
Detail
For details on specifying the IP address of this machine, refer to "Network settings" on page 3-3.
RAW port number setting for this machine
To use Port9100 printing, enable the RAW port number (9100 at default), in the TCP/IP Setting screen of this
machine.
!
Detail
For details on specifying the RAW port number of this machine, refer to "Network settings" on page 3-3.
LPD setting for this machine
To use LPR printing, enable LPD print in the LPD Setting screen of this machine.
!
Detail
For details on the LPD settings of this machine, refer to the "Network settings" on page 3-3.
SMB setting for this machine
In "Print Setting" in the SMB Setting screen of this machine, specify the NetBIOS name, print service name,
and workgroup.
!
Detail
For details on the SMB settings of this machine, refer to the "Network settings" on page 3-3.
2
Note
To use SMB printing in the IPv6 environment, the "Direct Hosting Setting" must be enabled. For details,
refer to "Network settings" on page 3-3.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
4-13
Installing the printer driver for Windows
4
Printer driver installation by searching printers using the Add Printer Wizard
2
Note
When installing on Windows Vista, administrator permissions are required.
Printers will be found during installation. Connect this machine to the network, and then turn on the
power.
1
Insert the printer driver CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the computer.
2
Click the [Start] button, and then click "Control Panel".
3
From "Hardware and Sound", click "Printer".
– If Control Panel is displayed with Classic View, double-click "Printers".
The Printers window appears.
4
Click "Add a printer" from the toolbar.
The Add Printer window appears.
5
Click "Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer".
–
–
If the printer is not detected, turn off this machine, then on again.
When turning off the power, then on again, wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on again.
Otherwise, this machine may not function properly.
The connected printers are detected.
6
Select this machine from the list, and then click the [Next] button.
–
–
–
When using the LPR/Port9100 protocol, select the printer having its IP address.
When using an SMB connection, select the printer having its "\\NetBIOS name\print service name".
It may take some time to finish searching the entire list of printers.
7
Click the [Have Disk] button.
8
Click the [Browse] button.
9
Specify the desired folder on the CD-ROM that contains the printer driver, and then click the [Open]
button.
–
10
Select the specified folder according to the printer driver to be used, the operating system, and the
language. Printer drivers that can be selected: Windows Vista: PCL driver, PS driver
Click the [OK] button.
The "Printer" list appears.
11
Click the [Next] button.
12
Follow the on-screen instructions.
–
–
If the "User Account Control" window appears, click the [Continue] button.
If the Verify the publisher dialog box of Windows Security appears, click "Install this driver software
anyway".
13
Click the [Finish] button.
14
When the installation is completed, make sure that the icon of the installed printer appears in the
Printers window.
15
Remove the CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive.
This completes the printer driver installation.
4-14
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Installing the printer driver for Windows
4
Printer driver installation by creating a port using the Add Printer Wizard
2
Reminder
When installing on Windows Vista, administrator permissions are required.
Printers will be found during installation. Connect this machine to the network, and then turn on the
power.
1
Insert the printer driver CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the computer.
2
Click the [Start] button, and then click "Control Panel".
3
From "Hardware and Sound", click "Printer".
– If Control Panel is displayed with Classic View, double-click "Printers".
The Printers window appears.
4
Click "Add a printer" from the toolbar.
The Add Printer window appears.
5
Click "Add a local printer".
The Select a Printer Port dialog box appears.
6
Click "Create a new port", and select the port type.
–
–
When using an LPR/Port9100 connection, select "Standard TCP/IP Port".
When using an SMB connection, select "Local Port".
7
Click the [Next] button.
8
Specify the IP address and port.
–
–
9
When using an LPR/Port9100 connection, select "TCP/IP Device", and then enter the IP address.
When both LPR and Port9100 are enabled for this machine, the printer driver and the machine is
connected with LPR.
When using an SMB connection, enter "\\NetBIOS name\print service name" in the "Enter a port
name" box. Enter the same NetBIOS name and print service name those appear in "Print Setting"
in the SMB Setting screen of this machine.
Click the [Next] button.
–
–
If the Additional Port Information Required dialog box appears, go to step 10.
If the Install the printer driver dialog box appears, go to step 13.
10
Select "Custom", and then click the [Settings] button.
11
Change the settings according to the port, and then click the [OK] button.
–
–
–
12
For an LPR connection, select "LPR", and then enter "Print" in the "Queue name" box.
For a Port9100 connection, select "RAW", and then enter the RAW port number (9100 at default) in
the "Port Number" box.
The information entered here is case-sensitive.
Click the [Next] button.
The Install the printer driver dialog box appears.
13
Click the [Have Disk] button.
14
Click the [Browse] button.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
4-15
Installing the printer driver for Windows
4
15
Specify the desired folder on the CD-ROM that contains the printer driver, and then click the [Open]
button.
–
16
Select the specified folder according to the printer driver to be used, the operating system, and the
language.
Printer drivers that can be selected:
Windows Vista: PCL driver, PS driver
Click the [OK] button.
The "Printers" list appears.
17
Click the [Next] button.
18
Follow the on-screen instructions.
–
–
If the User Account Control window appears, click the [Continue] button.
If the Verify the publisher dialog box of Windows Security appears, click "Install this driver software
anyway".
19
Click the [Finish] button.
20
After installation is completed, make sure that the icon of the installed printer appears in the Printers
window.
21
Remove the CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive.
This completes the printer driver installation.
4-16
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Installing the printer driver for Windows
4.3.2
4
Network connection (IPP or IPPS)
For IPP printing, specify the network setting before installing the printer driver.
Specifying the TCP/IP setting for this machine
Specify the IP address of this machine.
!
Detail
For details on specifying the IP address of this machine, refer to "Network settings" on page 3-3.
Specifying the IPP settings for this machine
Enable IPP printing in "IPP Setting" of this machine.
!
Detail
For details on the IPP settings of this machine, refer to "Network settings" on page 3-3.
To use IPPS printing, the certificate must be registered to this machine. For details, refer to "Creating
a certificate for this machine for SSL-based communication" on page 10-57.
Printer driver installation using the Add Printer wizard
2
Reminder
When installing on Windows Vista, administrator permissions are required.
1
Insert the printer driver CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the computer.
2
Click the [Start] button, and then click "Control Panel".
3
From "Hardware and Sound", click "Printer".
– If Control Panel is displayed with Classic View, double-click "Printers".
The Printers window appears.
4
Click "Add a printer" from the toolbar.
The Add Printer window appears.
5
Click "Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer".
The connected printers are found.
6
In the window showing the search results, click "The printer that I want isn’t Listed".
7
In the "Select a shared printer by name" box, enter the URL for this machine in the following format,
and then click the [Next] button.
–
–
–
–
http:// (IP_address_of_machine) /ipp Example: If the IP address of this machine is 192.168.1.20,
enter http://192.168.1.20/ipp.
When specifying to use IPPS printing, enter "https:// < host name>.<domain name>/ipp".
For < host name>.<domain name>, specify the host name and the domain name registered for the
DNS server used.
When the certificate of this machine is not published by certificate authority, register the certificate
of this machine to Windows Vista as a certificate of "Trusted Root Certification Authorities" for
"Local Computer" in advance.
When registering a certificate to this machine, confirm that <host name>.<domain name> is
displayed as the common name of the certificate.
8
Click the [Have Disk] button.
9
Click the [Browse] button.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
4-17
Installing the printer driver for Windows
4
10
Specify the desired folder on the CD-ROM that contains the printer driver, and then click the [Open]
button.
–
11
Select the specified folder according to the printer driver to be used, the operating system, and the
language. Printer drivers that can be selected: Windows Vista: PCL driver, PS driver
Click the [OK] button.
The "Printer" list appears.
12
Click the [Next] button.
13
Follow the on-screen instructions.
–
–
If the "User Account Control" window appears, click the [Continue] button.
If the Verify the publisher dialog box of Windows Security appears, click "Install this driver software
anyway".
14
Click the [Finish] button.
15
When the installation is completed, make sure that the icon of the installed printer appears in the
Printers window.
16
Remove the CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive.
This completes the printer driver installation.
Once the settings for the printer have been specified, you can use it in the same way as a default local printer
is used.
4.3.3
Network connection (Web Service print)
In Windows Vista, Web Service print-supporting printers on the network can be located and installed.
2
Note
When the different kind of printer driver install after installing the printer driver, delete the installed
printer driver in advance.
For details, refer to "Uninstalling the printer driver" on page 4-29.
TCP/IP setting for this machine
Specify the IP address in the TCP/IP Setting screen of this machine.
!
Detail
For details on specifying the IP address of this machine, refer to "Network settings" on page 3-3.
Web Service settings for this machine
To use the Web Service print, enable the print function in the Web Service Settings screen of this machine.
!
Detail
For details on the Web Service settings of this machine, refer to "Network settings" on page 3-3.
4-18
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Installing the printer driver for Windows
4
Printer installation from the Network window
2
Reminder
When installing on Windows Vista, administrator permissions are required.
Printers will be found during installation. Connect this machine to the network, and then turn on the
power.
1
Turn on the power of the machine while it is connected to the network.
–
To allow printers to be detected during installation, the machine must be connected to the network.
2
To use the Web Service print, check that "Network discovery" is enabled in "Network and Sharing
Center" on the computer.
3
Insert the printer driver CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the computer.
4
Click the [Start] button, and then click "Network".
The Network window appears, showing the computers and devices on the network.
5
Select the device name of this machine, and then click "Install" from the toolbar.
The selected printer that supports the Web Service function is found, and then the Found New
Hardware Wizard dialog box appears.
–
6
If the User Account Control window appears, click the [Continue] button.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
–
–
–
The steps performed in the New Hardware Wizard dialog box are the same as those described in
"Printer driver installation by specifying the IP address using the Add Printer Wizard". For details,
refer to Steps 11 through 20 of "Printer driver installation by specifying the IP address using the Add
Printer Wizard" on page 4-19.
If the User Account Control window appears, click the [Continue] button.
If the Verify the publisher dialog box of Windows Security appears, click "Install this driver software
anyway".
Printer driver installation by specifying the IP address using the Add Printer Wizard
2
Reminder
When installing on Windows Vista, administrator permissions are required.
Printers will be found during installation. Connect this machine to the network, and then turn on the
power.
1
Turn on the power of the machine while it is connected to the network.
–
To allow printers to be detected during installation, the machine must be connected to the network.
2
To use the Web Service print, check that "Network discovery" is enabled in "Network and Sharing
Center" on the computer.
3
Insert the printer driver CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the computer.
4
Click the [Start] button, and then click "Control Panel".
5
From "Hardware and Sound", click "Printer".
– If Control Panel is displayed with Classic View, double-click "Printers".
The Printers window appears.
6
Click "Add a printer" from the toolbar.
The Add Printer window appears.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
4-19
Installing the printer driver for Windows
4
7
Click "Add a local printer".
The Select a Printer Port dialog box appears.
8
Click "Create a new port", and select the port type.
–
Select "Standard TCP/IP Port".
9
Click the [Next] button.
10
Select "Web Services Device" and enter the IP address.
The Web Service print-supporting printer corresponding to the entered IP address is found, and then
the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears.
11
Click "Locate and install driver software (recommended)".
12
If a message appears, requesting confirmation to search online, click "Do not search online".
13
Click "Browse my computer for driver software (advanced)".
14
Click the [Browse] button.
15
Specify the desired folder on the CD-ROM that contains the printer driver, and then click the [Open]
button.
–
Select the specified folder according to the printer driver to be used, the operating system, and the
language.
Printer drivers that can be selected:
Windows Vista: PCL driver, PS driver
16
Click the [Next] button.
17
Follow the on-screen instructions.
–
–
If the User Account Control window appears, click the [Continue] button.
If the Verify the publisher dialog box of Windows Security appears, click "Install this driver software
anyway".
18
Click the [Close] button.
19
After installation is completed, make sure that the icon of the installed printer appears in the Printers
window.
20
Remove the CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive.
This completes the printer driver installation.
4-20
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Installing the printer driver for Windows
4.3.4
4
Local connection
When this machine is connected via a USB port, the printer driver can be installed with plug-and-play.
2
Note
When a USB connection is used, the printer driver is installed easily with the Plug and Play feature.
However, it can be installed using the Add Printer Wizard. When using the Add Printer Wizard, select
the USB port to be connected in the Select a Printer Port dialog box.
1
Connect this machine to a computer using a USB cable, and then start up the computer.
–
2
Turn on the power switch of this machine.
The Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears.
–
–
3
Do not disconnect or connect the cable while the computer is starting up.
If the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box does not appear, turn off this machine, then on again.
When turning off the power, then on again, wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on again.
Otherwise, this machine may not function properly.
Click "Locate and install the driver software (recommended)".
–
If the disk is not available, click "I don’t have the disk. Show me other options". In the next window,
select "Browse my computer for driver software (advanced)", and then specify the desired printer
driver folder.
The dialog box prompting you to insert the disk appears.
4
Insert the printer driver CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the computer.
The information on the disk is retrieved. A list of software supporting this machine appears.
5
Specify the name of the desired printer driver, and then click the [Next] button.
–
6
Printer drivers that can be selected:
PCL driver, PS driver
Follow the on-screen instructions.
–
–
If the "User Account Control" window appears, click the [Continue] button.
If the dialog box of Windows Security appears, click "Install this driver software anyway".
7
When the installation is completed, click the [Close] button.
8
When the installation is completed, make sure that the icon of the installed printer appears in the
Printers window.
9
Remove the CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive.
This completes the printer driver installation.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
4-21
Installing the printer driver for Windows
4
4.4
Installation using the wizard (Windows 2000)
4.4.1
Network connection (LPR/Port9100)
When using the LPR/Port9100 printing, specify the port during the printer driver installation process.
TCP/IP setting for this machine
Specify the IP address in the TCP/IP Setting screen of this machine.
!
Detail
For details on specifying the IP address of this machine, refer to "Network settings" on page 3-3.
RAW port number setting for this machine
To use Port9100 printing, enable the RAW port number (9100 at default), in the TCP/IP Setting screen of this
machine.
!
Detail
For details on specifying the RAW port number of this machine, refer to "Network settings" on page 3-3.
LPD setting for this machine
To use LPR printing, enable LPD print in the LPD Setting screen of this machine.
!
Detail
For details on the LPD settings of this machine, refer to "Network settings" on page 3-3.
Printer driver installation using the Add Printer Wizard
2
Reminder
When installing on Windows 2000, administrator permissions are required.
1
Insert the printer driver CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the computer.
2
Click the [Start] button, point to "Settings", and then click "Printers".
3
Double-click "Add Printer".
The Add Printer Wizard starts.
4
Follow the on-screen instructions.
5
In the dialog box for specifying the connection method, select "Local printer", and then click the [Next]
button.
– Clear the "Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer" check box.
The Select a Printer Port dialog box appears.
6
Click "Create a new port", and select "Standard TCP/IP Port" for "Type of port:".
7
Click the [Next] button.
The Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard starts.
8
Click the [Next] button.
9
In the "Printer Name or IP address" box, enter the IP address for this machine, and then click the [Next]
button.
–
–
4-22
If the Additional Port Information Required dialog box appears, go to step 10.
If the Finish dialog box appears, go to step 13.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Installing the printer driver for Windows
10
Select "Custom", and then click the [Settings] button.
11
Change the settings according to the port, and then click the [OK] button.
–
–
–
4
For an LPR connection, select "LPR", and then enter "Print" in the "Queue name" box.
For a Port9100 connection, select "RAW", and then enter the RAW port number (9100 at default) in
the "Port Number" box.
The information entered here is case-sensitive.
12
Click the [Next] button.
13
Click the [Finish] button.
The Add Printer Wizard appears.
14
Click the [Have Disk] button.
15
Click the [Browse] button.
16
Specify the desired folder on the CD-ROM that contains the printer driver, and then click the [Open]
button.
–
17
Select the specified folder according to the printer driver to be used, the operating system, and the
language.
Printer drivers that can be selected:
Windows 2000: PCL driver, PS driver
Click the [OK] button.
The "Printers" list appears.
18
Click the [Next] button.
19
Follow the on-screen instructions.
–
When the Digital Signature dialog box appears, click the [Yes] button.
20
Click the [Finish] button.
21
After installation is completed, make sure that the icon of the installed printer appears in the Printers
window.
22
Remove the CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive.
This completes the printer driver installation.
4.4.2
Network connection (SMB)
When using the SMB printing, specify the port by specifying the printer during the printer driver installation
process.
TCP/IP setting for this machine
Specify the IP address in the TCP/IP Setting screen of this machine.
!
Detail
For details on specifying the IP address of this machine, refer to "Network settings" on page 3-3.
SMB setting for this machine
In "Print Setting" in the SMB Setting screen of this machine, specify the NetBIOS name, print service name,
and workgroup.
!
Detail
For details on the SMB settings of this machine, refer to "Network settings" on page 3-3.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
4-23
Installing the printer driver for Windows
4
Printer driver installation using the Add Printer Wizard
2
Reminder
When installing on Windows 2000, administrator permissions are required.
1
Insert the printer driver CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the computer.
2
Click the [Start] button, point to "Settings", and then click "Printers".
3
Double-click "Add Printer".
The Add Printer Wizard starts.
4
Follow the on-screen instructions.
5
In the dialog box for specifying the connection method, select "Local printer", and then click the [Next]
button.
– Clear the "Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer" check box.
The Select a Printer Port dialog box appears.
6
Click "Create a new port", and select "Local Port" for "Type of port:"
7
Click the [Next] button.
8
In the "Port Name" box, enter "\\NetBIOS name\print service name".
–
9
Enter the same NetBIOS name and print service name those appear in "Print Setting" in the SMB
Setting screen of this machine.
Click the [OK] button.
The Add Printer Wizard appears.
10
Click the [Have Disk] button.
11
Click the [Browse] button.
12
Specify the desired folder on the CD-ROM that contains the printer driver, and then click the [Open]
button.
–
13
Select the specified folder according to the printer driver to be used, the operating system, and the
language.
Printer drivers that can be selected:
Windows 2000: PCL driver, PS driver
Click the [OK] button.
The "Printers" list appears.
14
Click the [Next] button.
15
Follow the on-screen instructions.
–
When the Digital Signature dialog box appears, click the [Yes] button.
16
Click the [Finish] button.
17
After installation is completed, make sure that the icon of the installed printer appears in the Printers
window.
18
Remove the CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive.
This completes the printer driver installation.
4-24
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Installing the printer driver for Windows
4.4.3
4
Network connection (IPP or IPPS)
For IPP printing, specify the network setting before installing the printer driver.
Specifying the TCP/IP setting for this machine
Specify the IP address of this machine.
!
Detail
For details on specifying the IP address of this machine, refer to "Network settings" on page 3-3.
Specifying the IPP settings for this machine
Enable IPP printing in "IPP Setting" of this machine.
!
Detail
For details on the IPP settings of this machine, refer to "Network settings" on page 3-3.
To use IPPS printing, the certificate must be registered to this machine. For details, refer to "Creating
a certificate for this machine for SSL-based communication" on page 10-57.
Printer driver installation using the Add Printer wizard
2
Reminder
When installing on Windows 2000, administrator permissions are required.
1
Insert the printer driver CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the computer.
2
Click the [Start] button, and then click "Setup" - "Printer".
3
Double-click "Add Printer".
"Add Printer wizard" starts.
4
Click the [Next] button.
5
In the Local or Network Printer dialog box, select "Network printer", and then click the [Next] button.
6
In the Locate Your Printer dialog box, select "Connect to a printer on the Internet or on your intranet".
7
In the "URL" field, enter the URL for this machine in the following format, and then click the [Next]
button.
–
–
http:// (IP_address_of_machine)/ipp Example: If the IP address of this machine is 192.168.1.20,
enter http://192.168.1.20/ipp.
When setting this machine for IPPS printing, enter "https:// (IP_address_of_machine) /ipp".
8
When the confirmation dialog box appears, click the [OK] button.
9
Click the [Have Disk] button.
10
Click the [Browse] button.
11
Specify the desired folder on the CD-ROM that contains the printer driver, and then click the [Open]
button.
–
12
Select the specified folder according to the printer driver to be used, the operating system, and the
language. Printer drivers that can be selected: Windows 2000: PCL driver, PS driver
Click the [OK] button.
The "Printer" list appears.
13
magicolor 8650
Click the [OK] button.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
4-25
Installing the printer driver for Windows
4
14
Follow the on-screen instructions.
–
When the "Digital Signature" dialog box appears, click the [Yes] button.
15
Click the [Finish] button.
16
When the installation is completed, make sure that the icon of the installed printer appears in the
Printers and Faxes window.
17
Remove the CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive.
This completes the printer driver installation.
Once the settings for the printer have been specified, you can use the printer in the same way as a default
local printer.
4.4.4
Local connection
When this machine is connected via a USB port, the printer driver can be installed with plug-and-play.
2
Note
When a USB connection is used, the printer driver is installed easily with the Plug and Play feature.
However, it can be installed using the Add Printer Wizard. When using the Add Printer Wizard, select
the USB port to be connected in the Select a Printer Port dialog box.
1
Connect this machine to a computer using a USB cable, and then start up the computer.
–
Do not disconnect or connect the cable while the computer is starting up.
2
Insert the printer driver CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the computer.
3
Turn on the power switch of this machine.
The Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears.
–
–
If the Found New Hardware Wizard does not start up, turn off this machine, then on again.
When turning off the power, then on again, wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on again.
Otherwise, this machine may not function properly.
4
Select "Search for a suitable driver for my device (recommended)", and then click the [Next] button.
5
Select "Specify location", and then click the [Next] button.
6
Specify the desired folder on the CD-ROM that contains the printer driver, and then click the [Open]
button.
–
7
Select the specified folder according to the printer driver to be used, the operating system, and the
language. Windows 2000: PCL driver, PS driver
Click the [OK] button, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
–
When the "Digital Signature" dialog box appears, click the [Yes] button.
8
Click the [Finish] button.
9
When the installation is completed, make sure that the icon of the installed printer appears in the
Printers and Faxes window.
10
Remove the CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive.
This completes the printer driver installation.
4-26
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Installing the printer driver for Windows
4.5
4.5.1
4
Installation using the wizard (Windows NT 4.0)
Network connection (LPR)
When using the LPR printing, specify the port during the printer driver installation process.
TCP/IP setting for this machine
Specify the IP address in the TCP/IP Setting screen of this machine.
!
Detail
For details on specifying the IP address of this machine, refer to "Network settings" on page 3-3.
LPD setting for this machine
To use LPR printing, enable LPD print in the LPD Setting screen of this machine.
!
Detail
For details on the LPD settings of this machine, refer to "Network settings" on page 3-3.
Printer driver installation using the Add Printer Wizard
2
Reminder
When installing on Windows NT 4.0, administrator permissions are required.
To use the LPR port in Windows NT 4.0, Microsoft TCP/IP Print Services must be installed on the
computer.
1
Insert the printer driver CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the computer.
2
Click the [Start] button, point to "Settings", and then click "Printers".
3
Double-click "Add Printer".
The Add Printer Wizard starts.
4
Follow the on-screen instructions.
5
In the dialog box for specifying the connection method, select "This computer", and then click the
[Next] button.
6
Click the [Next] button.
A screen for specifying ports appears.
7
Click the [Add Port] button.
8
In the "Available Printer Ports" list, select "LPR Port", and then click the [New Port] button.
9
Enter the IP address of this machine in the "Address" box and "Print" in the "Queue Name" box, and
then click the [OK] button.
–
The information entered here is case-sensitive.
10
Select the created port, and then click the [Next] button.
11
Click the [Have Disk] button.
12
Click the [Browse] button.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
4-27
Installing the printer driver for Windows
4
13
Specify the desired folder on the CD-ROM that contains the printer driver, and then click the [Open]
button.
–
14
Select the specified folder according to the printer driver to be used, the operating system, and the
language.
Printer drivers that can be selected:
Windows NT 4.0: PCL driver
Click the [OK] button.
The "Printers" list appears.
15
Click the [Next] button.
16
Follow the on-screen instructions.
17
Click the [Finish] button.
18
After installation is completed, make sure that the icon of the installed printer appears in the Printers
window.
19
Remove the CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive.
This completes the printer driver installation.
4-28
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Installing the printer driver for Windows
4.6
4
Uninstalling the printer driver
If the printer driver was installed without using an installer, manually delete the printer driver.
1
Open the Printers window or Printers and Faxes window.
2
Select the icon of the printer to be deleted.
3
Press the [Delete] key on the computer keyboard to delete the printer driver.
4
Follow the on-screen instructions.
When the driver has been deleted, the icon disappears from the Printers window or the Printers and
Faxes window.
For Windows NT 4.0, this completes the driver uninstallation.
For Windows 2000/XP/Vista/Sever 2003, delete the printer driver in "Server Properties".
5
Open "Server Properties".
–
–
–
For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, click the "File" menu, and then click "Server Properties".
For Windows Vista, right-click space in the Printers window and click "Run as administrator", then
click "Server Properties".
If the User Account Control window appears, click the [Continue] button.
6
Click the Driver tab.
7
Select the printer driver to be deleted from the "Installed printer drivers" list, and then click the [Remove]
button.
–
–
For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, continue with step 9.
For Windows Vista, continue with step 8.
8
Select "Remove driver and driver package" on the deletion confirmation screen and then click the [OK]
button.
9
Click the [Yes] button on the deletion confirmation screen.
–
10
For Windows Vista, when the deletion confirmation screen is additionally displayed, click the
[Delete] button.
Close the opened screen and restart the computer.
– Be sure to restart the computer.
This completes the printer driver uninstallation.
2
Note
Even if the printer driver is deleted using the preceding method, the model information file will remain
in the computer for Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003. Therefore, when reinstalling the same version of
the printer driver, the driver may not be able to be overwritten. In this case, delete the following files.
"C: \WINDOWS\system32\spool\drivers\w32x86"
When you check folders and find a folder of the applicable model, delete it. However, if multiple drivers
are installed including the Konica Minolta driver and PostScript Konica Minolta driver, the model
information of all drivers is deleted. If other drivers are remaining, do not delete it.
Delete "oem*.inf" and "oem*.PNF" in "C:\WINDOWS\inf" folder (the asterisk "*" in the file name
indicates a number, and the number varies according to the environment of the computer).
Before deleting the files, open the INF file, check that the model name is described in the last several
lines, and then check that the file of the corresponding model is available. The PNF file is the same
number as the INF file.
In Windows Vista, when you have deleted a file using "Remove driver and driver package", this
operation is not required.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
4-29
4
4-30
Installing the printer driver for Windows
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
5
Installing the printer driver for
Macintosh
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Installing the printer driver for Macintosh
5
5
Installing the printer driver for Macintosh
5.1
Selectable connection methods
Macintosh OS can be used via a network connection. The following protocols are available.
Setup method
Connection method
Refer to
Connection
method that can
be set up with an
installer
Bonjour
A network connection using Bonjour and
Rendezvous.
AppleTalk
A network connection using AppleTalk.
LPR
A network connection using the LPR print
service.
"Installing the printer driver on Macintosh OSX 10.2/10.3/10.4" on
page 5-4
"Mac OS 9.2" on page 5-12
* Specify the connection method
when selecting the printer.
IPP
A network connection using the IPP print
service.
!
Detail
Before using this machine in a network environment, the network settings must be specified for this
machine. For details, refer to "Network settings" on page 3-3.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
5-3
Installing the printer driver for Macintosh
5
5.2
Installing the printer driver on Macintosh OSX 10.2/10.3/10.4
5.2.1
Installing the printer driver
1
Start up the Macintosh computer.
2
Insert the printer driver CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the computer.
–
3
Open the folder on the CD-ROM that contains the desired printer driver.
–
4
Select the specified folder according to the printer driver to be used, the operating system, and the
language.
Copy the driver file for the Mac OS version on the desktop.
–
–
–
5
Exit all running applications, if any.
OS X 10.2: KONICAMINOLTAmc865_102.pkg
OS X 10.3: KONICAMINOLTAmc865_103.pkg
OS X 10.4: KONICAMINOLTAmc865_103.pkg
Double-click the file copied on the desktop.
–
–
–
As prompted, enter the administrator name and password.
For the administrator name and password, contact your network administrator.
To quit the installation, click the [Cancel] button.
6
Click the [Continue] button and follow the on-screen instructions until the Easy Install dialog box
appears.
7
In the Easy Install dialog box, click the [Install] button.
–
When the printer driver is installed for the second and subsequent times, the [Install] button may
appear as the [Upgrade] button.
The printer driver is installed to the Macintosh computer. When the installation is completed, a message
appears.
8
Click the [Close] button.
This completes the printer driver installation.
Next, select a printer.
5-4
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Installing the printer driver for Macintosh
5.2.2
5
Selecting and connecting the printer (OS 10.4)
In OS 10.4, this machine can be connected with Bonjour, AppleTalk, LPR (LPD), or IPP.
After specifying the network setting for this machine, selecting this machine as the printer in Printer Setup
Utility or Print Center enables printing.
Specifying the Bonjour settings for this machine
Enable Bonjour in "Bonjour Setting", and then enter the Bonjour name.
!
Detail
For details on the Bonjour settings of this machine, refer to the "Network settings" on page 3-3.
Adding a printer (Bonjour settings)
1
Select "HDD" - "Applications" - "Utility" where the driver was installed, and then double-click "Printer
Setup Utility" or "Print Center" to open it.
2
When the Add Printer dialog box appears, click the [Add] button. When the printer list appears, click
the [Add] button.
–
–
–
If available printers have already been set up, the Add Printer dialog box does not appear.
If the printer is not detected, turn off this machine, then on again.
When turning off the power, then on again, wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on again.
Otherwise, this machine may not function properly.
The connected printers are detected.
3
From the "Printer Name" list, select the desired model name and connection (Bonjour).
4
Select "KONICA MINOLTA" in "Print Using", select the desired model from the list of models, and then
click the [Add] button.
If the selected printer is registered in the printer list, the setting procedure is completed.
2
Note
If the Installable Options window appears, proceed to change the option settings as necessary. For
details, refer to "Options" on page 7-4.
Specifying the AppleTalk settings for this machine
Enable AppleTalk in "AppleTalk Setting", and then enter the printer name.
!
Detail
For details on the AppleTalk settings of this machine, refer to "Network settings" on page 3-3.
Specifying the AppleTalk settings for the computer
Specify the AppleTalk settings for the Macintosh computer connected to this machine.
1
On the "Apple" menu, select "System Preferences".
2
Click the "Network" icon.
3
From "Show", select "Built-in Ethernet".
4
Click the AppleTalk tab, and then select the "Make AppleTalk Active" check box.
5
Click the close button at the upper left corner of the dialog box.
–
magicolor 8650
When the "Apply configuration changes?" message appears, click the [Apply] button.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
5-5
Installing the printer driver for Macintosh
5
Adding a printer (AppleTalk settings)
1
Select "HDD" - "Applications" - "Utilities" where the driver was installed, and then double-click "Printer
Setup Utility" or "Print Center" to open it.
2
When the Add Printer dialog box appears, click the [Add] button. When the printer list appears, click
the [Add] button.
–
–
–
If available printers have already been set up, the Add Printer dialog box does not appear.
If the printer is not detected, turn off this machine, then on again.
When turning off the power, then on again, wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on again.
Otherwise, this machine may not function properly.
The connected printers are detected.
3
From the "Printer Name" list, select the desired model name and connection (AppleTalk).
4
Select "KONICA MINOLTA" in "Print Using", select the desired model from the list of models, and then
click the [Add] button.
If the selected printer is registered in the printer list, the setting procedure is completed.
2
Note
If the Installable Options window appears, proceed to change the option settings as necessary. For
details, refer to "Options" on page 7-4.
Specifying the TCP/IP setting for this machine (LPR settings)
Specify the IP address of this machine.
!
Detail
For details on specifying the IP address of this machine, refer to "Network settings" on page 3-3.
LPD setting for this machine (LPR settings)
To use LPR printing, enable LPD print in the LPD Setting screen of this machine.
!
Detail
For details on the LPD settings of this machine, refer to "Network settings" on page 3-3.
Specifying the TCP/IP setting for the computer (LPR settings)
Specify the TCP/IP setting for the Macintosh computer connected to this machine.
1
On the "Apple" menu, select "System Preferences".
2
Click the "Network" icon.
3
From "Show", select "Built-in Ethernet".
4
Click the TCP/IP tab.
5
Select "Configure" items according to the settings for the network to which the Macintosh computer is
connected, and then specify the IP address and subnet mask.
6
Click the close button at the upper left corner of the dialog box.
–
5-6
When the "Apply configuration changes?" message appears, click the [Apply] button.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Installing the printer driver for Macintosh
5
Adding a printer (LPR settings)
1
Select "HDD" - "Applications" - "Utility" where the driver was installed, and then double-click "Printer
Setup Utility" or "Print Center" to open it.
2
When the Add Printer dialog box appears, click the [Add] button. When the printer list appears, click
the [Add] button.
– If available printers have already been set up, the Add Printer dialog box does not appear.
The "Printer Browser" appears.
3
Click the [IP Printer] button.
4
From "Protocol", select "LPD".
5
In "Address", enter the IP address of this machine.
6
Select "KONICA MINOLTA" in "Print Using", select the desired model from the list of models, and then
click the [Add] button.
If the selected printer is registered in the printer list, the setting procedure is completed.
2
Note
If the Installable Options window appears, proceed to change the option settings as necessary. For
details, refer to "Options" on page 7-4.
Specifying the TCP/IP setting for this machine (IPP settings)
Specify the IP address of this machine.
!
Detail
For details on specifying the IP address of this machine, refer to "Network settings" on page 3-3.
IPP setting for this machine
Enable IPP print in the IPP Setting screen of this machine.
!
Detail
For details on the IPP settings of this machine, refer to "Network settings" on page 3-3.
Specifying the TCP/IP setting for the computer (IPP settings)
Specify the TCP/IP setting for the Macintosh computer connected to this machine.
1
On the "Apple" menu, select "System Preferences".
2
Click the "Network" icon.
3
From "Show", select "Built-in Ethernet".
4
Click the TCP/IP tab.
5
Select "Configure" items according to the settings for the network to which the Macintosh computer is
connected, and then specify the IP address and subnet mask.
6
Click the close button at the upper left corner of the dialog box.
–
magicolor 8650
When the "Apply configuration changes?" message appears, click the [Apply] button.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
5-7
Installing the printer driver for Macintosh
5
Adding a printer (IPP settings)
1
Select "HDD" - "Applications" - "Utility" where the driver was installed, and then double-click "Printer
Setup Utility" or "Print Center" to open it.
2
When the Add Printer dialog box appears, click the [Add] button. When the printer list appears, click
the [Add] button.
– If available printers have already been set up, the Add Printer dialog box does not appear.
The "Printer Browser" appears.
3
Click the [IP Printer] button.
4
From "Protocol", select "IPP".
5
In "Address", enter the IP address of this machine. In "Queue", enter "ipp".
6
Select "KONICA MINOLTA" in "Print Using", select the desired model from the list of models, and then
click the [Add] button.
If the selected printer is registered in the printer list, the setting procedure is completed.
2
Note
If the Installable Options window appears, proceed to change the option settings as necessary. For
details, refer to "Options" on page 7-4.
5.2.3
Selecting and connecting the printer (OS 10.2 and 10.3)
In OS 10.2/10.3, this machine can be connected with Rendezvous, AppleTalk, LPR (LPD), or IPP.
After specifying the network setting for this machine, selecting this machine as the printer in Printer Setup
Utility or Print Center enables printing.
Specifying the Bonjour settings for this machine (Rendezvous settings)
Enable Bonjour in "Bonjour Setting", and then enter the Bonjour name.
!
Detail
For details on the Bonjour settings of this machine, refer to "Network settings" on page 3-3.
Adding a printer (Rendezvous settings)
1
Select "HDD" - "Applications" - "Utility" where the driver was installed, and then double-click "Printer
Setup Utility" or "Print Center" to open it.
2
When the Add Printer dialog box appears, click the [Add] button. When the printer list appears, click
the [Add] button.
–
3
If available printers have already been set up, the Add Printer dialog box does not appear.
Select "Rendezvous" for the connection method.
–
–
If the printer is not detected, turn off this machine, then on again.
When turning off the power, then on again, wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on again.
Otherwise, this machine may not function properly.
The connected printers are detected.
4
From the "Name" list, select the desired model name.
5
Select "KONICA MINOLTA" in "Printer Model", select the desired model from the list of model names,
and then click the [Add] button.
If the selected printer is registered in the printer list, the setting procedure is completed.
5-8
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Installing the printer driver for Macintosh
5
Specifying the AppleTalk settings for this machine
Enable AppleTalk in "AppleTalk Setting", and then enter the printer name.
!
Detail
For details on the AppleTalk settings of this machine, refer to "Network settings" on page 3-3.
Specifying the AppleTalk settings for the computer
Specify the AppleTalk settings for the Macintosh computer connected to this machine.
1
On the "Apple" menu, select "System Preferences".
2
Click the "Network" icon.
3
From "Show", select "Built-in Ethernet".
4
Click the AppleTalk tab, and then select the "Make AppleTalk Active" check box.
5
Click the close button at the top left of the dialog box.
–
When the "Apply configuration changes?" message appears, click the [Apply] button.
Adding a printer (AppleTalk settings)
1
Select "HDD" - "Applications" - "Utility" where the driver was installed, and then double-click "Printer
Setup Utility" or "Print Center" to open it.
2
When the Add Printer dialog box appears, click the [Add] button. When the printer list appears, click
the [Add] button.
–
3
If available printers have already been set up, the Add Printer dialog box does not appear.
Select "AppleTalk" for the connection method, and then select the zone to which this machine is
connected.
–
–
If the printer is not detected, turn off this machine, then on again.
When turning off the power, then on again, wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on again.
Otherwise, this machine may not function properly.
The connected printers are detected.
4
From the "Name" list, select the desired model name.
5
Select "KONICA MINOLTA" in "Printer Model", select the desired model from the list of model names,
and then click the [Add] button.
If the selected printer is registered in the printer list, the setting procedure is completed.
Specifying the TCP/IP setting for this machine (LPR settings)
Specify the IP address of this machine.
!
Detail
For details on specifying the IP address of this machine, refer to "Network settings" on page 3-3.
LPD setting for this machine (LPR settings)
To use LPR printing, enable LPD print in the LPD Setting screen of this machine.
!
Detail
For details on the LPD settings of this machine, refer to "Network settings" on page 3-3.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
5-9
Installing the printer driver for Macintosh
5
Specifying the TCP/IP setting for the computer (LPR settings)
Specify the TCP/IP setting for the Macintosh computer connected to this machine.
1
On the "Apple" menu, select "System Preferences".
2
Click the "Network" icon.
3
From "Show", select "Built-in Ethernet".
4
Click the TCP/IP tab.
5
Select "Configure" items according to the settings for the network to which the Macintosh computer is
connected, and then specify the IP address and subnet mask.
6
Click the close button at the upper left corner of the dialog box.
–
When the "Apply configuration changes?" message appears, click the [Apply] button.
Adding a printer (LPR settings)
1
Select "HDD" - "Applications" - "Utility" where the driver was installed, and then double-click "Printer
Setup Utility" or "Print Center" to open it.
2
When the Add Printer dialog box appears, click the [Add] button. When the printer list appears, click
the [Add] button.
–
If available printers have already been set up, the Add Printer dialog box does not appear.
3
Select "IP Printing" for the connection method.
4
For OS 10.3, from "Printer Type", select "LPD/LPR".
5
In "Printer Address", enter the IP address of this machine.
6
Select "KONICA MINOLTA" in "Printer Model", select the desired model from the list of model names,
and then click the [Add] button.
If the selected printer is registered in the printer list, the setting procedure is completed.
Specifying the TCP/IP setting for this machine (IPP settings)
Specify the IP address of this machine.
!
Detail
For details on specifying the IP address of this machine, refer to "Network settings" on page 3-3.
IPP setting for this machine
Enable IPP print in the IPP Setting screen of this machine.
!
Detail
For details on the IPP settings of this machine, refer to "Network settings" on page 3-3.
5-10
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Installing the printer driver for Macintosh
5
Specifying the TCP/IP setting for the computer (IPP settings)
Specify the TCP/IP setting for the Macintosh computer connected to this machine.
1
On the "Apple" menu, select "System Preferences".
2
Click the "Network" icon.
3
From "Show", select "Built-in Ethernet".
4
Click the TCP/IP tab.
5
Select "Configure" items according to the settings for the network to which the Macintosh computer is
connected, and then specify the IP address and subnet mask.
6
Click the close button at the upper left corner of the dialog box.
–
When the "Apply configuration changes?" message appears, click the [Apply] button.
Adding a printer (IPP settings)
1
Select "HDD" - "Applications" - "Utility" where the driver was installed, and then double-click "Printer
Setup Utility" or "Print Center" to open it.
2
When the Add Printer dialog box appears, click the [Add] button. When the printer list appears, click
the [Add] button.
–
If available printers have already been set up, the Add Printer dialog box does not appear.
3
Select "IP Printing" for the connection method.
4
For OS 10.3, from "Printer Type", select "IPP".
5
In "Printer Address", enter the IP address of this machine.
–
6
Leave "Queue Name" blank.
Select "KONICA MINOLTA" in "Printer Model", select the desired model from the list of model names,
and then click the [Add] button.
If the selected printer is registered in the printer list, the setting procedure is completed.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
5-11
Installing the printer driver for Macintosh
5
5.3
Mac OS 9.2
5.3.1
Installing the printer driver
After connected to a computer, this machine can be used as a printer by selecting a PostScript printer and
by specifying the printer description (PPD) file.
First, copy the printer description (PPD) file to the Macintosh computer.
1
Insert the printer driver CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the computer.
2
Open the folder on the CD-ROM that contains the desired printer driver.
–
3
Select the specified folder according to the printer driver to be used, the operating system, and the
language.
Select PPD file KONICAMINOLTAM8650UVxxx.ppd, and then copy it into the Printer Descriptions
folder in "System Folder" - "Extensions" of "Hard Disk".
This completes the printer driver installation.
5.3.2
Selecting and connecting the printer
In OS 9, this machine can be connected with AppleTalk or LPR (LPD).
Specify the network settings for this machine, and then select the printer.
Specifying the AppleTalk settings for this machine
Enable AppleTalk in "AppleTalk Setting", and then enter the printer name.
!
Detail
For details on the AppleTalk settings of this machine, refer to "Network settings" on page 3-3.
Specifying the AppleTalk settings for the computer
Specify the AppleTalk settings for the Macintosh computer connected to this machine.
1
On the "Apple" menu, select "Control Panel" - "AppleTalk".
2
From the "Connect via" drop-down list, select "Ethernet".
3
Click the close button at the upper left corner of the dialog box.
–
When the "Save changes to the current configuration?" message appears, click the [Save] button.
Selecting a printer (AppleTalk settings)
1
On the "Apple" menu, select "Chooser".
2
Make sure that "AppleTalk" is set to "Active", and then click the "LaserWriter" icon.
3
From the "Select a PostScript Printer" list, click the desired model name, and then click the [Create]
button.
A window for selecting a PostScript printer description (PPD) file appears.
4
Select the applicable PPD file, and then click the [Select] or [Open] button.
–
If a different PPD file has already been selected, click the [Setup] button in step 3, and then click the
[Select PPD] button from the window that is already displayed.
A window for specifying options appears.
5
Select options installed on this machine on the "Options Installed 1" and "Options Installed 2" windows.
6
Click the [OK] button.
The "selector" window appears again.
7
5-12
Close the "selector" window.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Installing the printer driver for Macintosh
5
Specifying the TCP/IP setting for this machine (LPR settings)
Specify the IP address of this machine.
!
Detail
For details on specifying the IP address of this machine, refer to "Network settings" on page 3-3.
LPD setting for this machine (LPR settings)
To use LPR printing, enable LPD print in the LPD Setting screen of this machine.
!
Detail
For details on the LPD settings of this machine, refer to "Network settings" on page 3-3.
Specifying the TCP/IP setting for the computer (LPR settings)
Specify the TCP/IP setting for the Macintosh computer connected to this machine.
1
On the "Apple" menu, select "Control Panel" - "TCP/IP".
2
From the "Connect via" drop-down list, select "Ethernet".
3
Select "Configure" items according to the settings for the network to which the Macintosh computer is
connected, and then specify the IP address and subnet mask.
4
Click the close button at the upper left corner of the dialog box.
–
When the "Save changes to the current configuration?" message appears, click the [Save] button.
Adding a printer (LPR settings)
1
Select "HDD" - "Applications" - "Utility", and then double-click "Desktop Printer Utility" to open it.
The New Desktop Printer window appears.
2
From "Printer", select "LaserWriter".
3
From "Create Desktop", select "Printer (LPR)".
The Untitled window appears.
4
Click the [Change] button for "PostScript™ Printer Description (PPD) File".
A window for selecting a PostScript printer description (PPD) file appears.
5
Select the applicable PPD file, and then click the [Select] button.
The Untitled window appears again.
6
Click the [Change] button for "LPR Printer Selection".
A window for entering the IP address appears.
7
In "Printer Address", enter the IP address of this machine, and then click the [OK] button.
The Untitled window appears again.
8
Click the [Create] button.
A window for saving the setting appears.
9
Enter a desktop printer name, and then click the [Save] button.
An icon for the LPR printer is created on the desktop.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
5-13
Installing the printer driver for Macintosh
5
5.4
Uninstalling the printer driver
If it becomes necessary to delete the printer driver, for example, when you want to reinstall the printer driver,
delete the driver according to the following procedure.
5.4.1
For Macintosh OS X
1
Open the [Printer Setup Utility] (or [Print Center]) located in "Applications" - "Utilities" of "Hard Disk".
2
Select the printer name to be deleted, and then click the [Delete] button.
The selected printer is deleted.
3
Close the printer list.
4
Drag the following file, which is located in "Library" - "Printers" - "PPDs" - "Contents" - "Resources" "en.lproj" of "Hard Disk", to the "Trash" icon.
–
–
5
Delete the unnecessary files from "Library" - "Printers".
–
–
6
"KONICAMINOLTAmc8650.gz"
"KONICAMINOLTAmc8650CK.gz"
Drag the "mc8650" folder, which is located in "Library" - "Printers" - "KONICA MINOLTA", to the
"Trash" icon.
For Mac OS 10.2, drag all the "KONICA MINOLTA mc8650" folders, which are located in "Library"
- "Printers" - "PPDPlugins", to the "Trash" icon.
Restart the computer.
This completes the printer driver uninstallation.
5.4.2
For Macintosh OS 9.2
1
Drag the printer icon on the desktop to the "Trash" icon.
2
Drag PPD file "KONICA MINOLTAM8650UVxxx.ppd", which is located in "System Folder" "Extensions" - "Printer Descriptions" of "Hard Disk", to the "Trash" icon.
The related printer driver files are deleted.
3
Restart the computer.
This completes the printer driver uninstallation.
5-14
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
6
Print functions of the printer
drivers for Windows
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Print functions of the printer drivers for Windows
6
Print functions of the printer drivers for Windows
6.1
Printing operations
6
Print jobs are specified from the application software.
1
Open the data in the application, click the [File] button, and then click "Print" from the menu.
–
2
If the menu is not available, click the [Print] button.
Check that the printer name has been selected in "Printer Name" or "Select Printer".
–
If the printer is not selected, click to select the printer.
–
The Print dialog box differs depending on the application.
3
Specify the print range and the number of copies to be printed.
4
Click the [Properties] or the [Preferences] button to change the printer driver settings as necessary.
–
–
5
By clicking the [Properties] button or the [Preferences] button in the Print dialog box, you can specify
the settings of each model in the printer driver dialog box that appears. For details, refer to
"Parameter details for the PCL/PS drivers" on page 6-9.
If the changed settings are not saved in the Print dialog box, the original settings are restored when
the application is quit.
Click the [Print] button.
The data indicator of this machine flashes.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
6-3
Print functions of the printer drivers for Windows
6
6.2
Initializing the PCL/PS printer driver
When you have installed the printer driver, you need to change the initialization condition such as options,
user authentication and account track functions and enable functions of the machine from the printer driver.
2
Reminder
If the model name, installed options, the User Authentication and Account Track functions are not
specified on the Configure tab, the option functions cannot be used from the printer driver. When
installing options, be sure to make the proper settings.
6.2.1
How to display the Properties screen
1
Open the Printers window or Printers and Faxes window.
–
–
–
–
–
2
6-4
For Windows 2000/NT 4.0, click the [Start] button, click "Settings", and then click "Printers".
For Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [Start] button, and then click "Printers and Faxes".
For Windows XP/Server 2003, if "Printers and Faxes" does not appear in the [Start] menu, open the
"Control Panel" from the [Start] menu, select "Printers and Other Hardware", and then click "Printers
and Faxes".
For Windows Vista, click the [Start] button to open the "Control Panel", select "Hardware and
Sound", and then click "Printers".
In Windows Vista, if Control Panel is displayed with Classic View, double-click "Printers".
Right-click the icon of the installed printer, and then click "Properties".
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Print functions of the printer drivers for Windows
6.2.2
6
Configure tab
The functions of this machine can be used from the printer driver if the model name used, installed options,
the User Authentication and Account Track functions are specified.
2
Reminder
Be sure to select a model and options from the "Device Option".
Match the "Encrypt. Passphrase" to that specified by "Driver Password Encryption Setting" of this
machine.
Item
Description
Device Option
Specifies the model name of this machine, options that are installed on this machine and
the status of the User Authentication and Account Track functions. Specify the status of
each item from the "Setting" dropdown list.
Paper Tray Information
Indicates the paper type specified for each tray.
Click the [Paper Tray Settings] button to specify the settings for each paper tray.
Acquire Device Information
Communicates with this machine to read the status of the installed options.
Acquire Settings
Specifies the conditions of the connection destination to execute Acquire Device Information.
Encrypt. Passphrase
Enter the encryption passphrase when it is defined by the user through communication
with this machine.
Software Tools
Starts up software tools such as PageScope Web Connection.
2
Note
The [Acquire Device Information] function cannot be used unless you are connected and able to
communicate with this machine.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
6-5
Print functions of the printer drivers for Windows
6
!
Detail
For the procedure for specifying "Encrypt. Passphrase" to be defined by the user, refer to "Specifying
a user-defined encryption passphrase" on page 8-35.
6.2.3
Settings tab
The default settings for displaying the confirmation messages or the dialog box for entering the authentication
settings can be changed.
Item
Description
EMF Spool
Select this check box when meta file (EMF) spool is required for use in its own system environment.
Display Constraint Message
Displays a message when functions that cannot be specified at the same time were enabled from the printer driver.
Display paper set in Print
Server Properties
Uses the paper that was added in [Server Properties] of the printer folder.
Verify Authentication
settings before printing
Verifies the authentication settings for this machine before printing and displays a message if the settings are not compatible.
Popup Authentication
Dialog when printing
Displays the User Authentication/Account Track dialog box when a print job is specified
to enter a user name or a department name.
Save Custom Size
Saves the custom paper sizes.
2
Note
"EMF Spool" and "Save Custom Size" are functions only for the PCL driver.
6-6
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Print functions of the printer drivers for Windows
6.2.4
6
Registration of the default settings
The settings specified for the functions of this machine when printing can only be applied while using the
application. When the application is quit, the settings return to their default settings.
When registering the settings, change the printer driver basic settings (default settings).
1
Open the Printers window or Printers and Faxes window.
–
–
–
–
–
2
For Windows 2000/NT 4.0, click the [Start] button, click "Settings", and then click "Printers".
For Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [Start] button, and then click "Printers and Faxes".
For Windows XP/Server 2003, if "Printers and Faxes" does not appear in the [Start] menu, open the
"Control Panel" from the [Start] menu, select "Printers and Other Hardware", and then click "Printers
and Faxes".
For Windows Vista, click the [Start] button to open the "Control Panel", select "Hardware and
Sound", and then click "Printers".
In Windows Vista, if Control Panel is displayed with Classic View, double-click "Printers".
Right-click the icon of the installed printer, and then click "Printing Preferences".
– For Windows NT 4.0, right-click the icon of the installed printer, and then click "Document Defaults".
The Printer Driver Preference dialog box appears.
3
Change the settings of the function, and then click the [OK] button to exit from the function.
The changed settings are applicable when the printer is used by all of the application software.
!
Detail
For the function and settings of the printer driver, refer to "Parameter details for the PCL/PS drivers" on
page 6-9.
The printer driver has the function to save the setting as "Favorite Setting". For details, refer to
"Common settings for the PCL/PS drivers" on page 6-8.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
6-7
Print functions of the printer drivers for Windows
6
6.3
Common settings for the PCL/PS drivers
The following describes the common settings and buttons that are displayed on all tabs.
Item
Description
OK
Click this button to close the dialog box and apply any settings that have been changed.
Cancel
Click this button to cancel any settings that have been changed and close the dialog box.
Help
Click this button to display the help for each item on the currently displayed dialog box.
Add (Favorite Setting)
Click this button to save the current settings and to view them at a later time.
Edit (Favorite Setting)
Click this button to change the saved settings.
Default
Click this button to return the default setting.
View
When the "Paper View" button is selected, a preview of the page layout as specified in the
current settings is displayed and a preview image of the print job can be checked.
When the "Printer View" button is selected, a printer figure is displayed showing any options, such as the paper tray, that are installed on this machine.
Paper
Printer Information
6-8
Printer
Starts up the PageScope Web Connection to confirm the printer information. This is available when communication with this machine is enabled.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Print functions of the printer drivers for Windows
6.4
6
Parameter details for the PCL/PS drivers
The print setting screen is the screen to set printer driver functions.
Click the [Properties] or [Preferences] button on the Print dialog box, or right-click the printer icon of the
"Printers" window or the "Printers and Faxes" window, and then specify "Print Setting" ("Document Defaults"
for Windows NT 4.0) to open it.
6.4.1
Basic tab
Function name
Option
Description
Original Orientation
Portrait, Landscape
Specifies the orientation of the original.
Original Size
Paper size registered as the standard paper size and non-standard
paper size.
Specifies the size of the original document.
Custom Size
Register the size.
Paper size registered as the standard paper size and non-standard
paper size available on this machine.
Specifies the output paper size. The original is automatically enlarged or reduced to the size specified
here when it differs from the "Original Size" setting
and "Zoom" is set to "Auto".
Custom Size
Custom sizes can be registered.
Paper Size
Zoom
25 to 400%
Specifies the enlargement and reduction ratio.
Paper Tray
Auto, Tray2-5, Tray1 (Bypass Tray),
Tray4 (LCT)
Selects the paper tray to be used.
The selectable items differ depending on the options
that are installed.
Paper Type
Paper type available on this machine.
Selects the paper type for printing.
Can be changed only when the paper tray is set to
"Auto". When the paper tray is not set to "Auto", the
paper type registered by "Paper Settings for Each
Tray" is effective.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
6-9
Print functions of the printer drivers for Windows
6
Function name
Option
Description
Output Method
Print
Prints immediately.
Secure Print
Saves the document to be printed in "Secure Print
User Box" of this machine. When printing, entering the
ID and password is required in the control panel of this
machine. Select this option when printing highly confidential documents.
Save in User Box
Saves the document to be printed in the user box on
this machine.
Save in User Box/Print
Saves the document in a box and prints at the same
time.
Proof Print
After one copy of the document has been printed, this
machine stops printing temporarily. Select this option
to avoid misprinting a large volume of print jobs.
[User Settings]
—
Specifies the ID and password, or the file name and
box number when performing "Secure Print" or "Save
in User Box".
[Authentication/Account Track]
—
Specifies the user name and password when performing user authentication, and the department name and
password when performing account track on this machine.
Copies
1 to 999
Specify the number of copies to be printed.
Collate
ON/OFF
Specifies whether to print multiple copies by collating
them.
Offset
ON/OFF
When printing multiple copies, shifts the output position of each set.
[Paper Settings for
Each Tray]
Paper Type Setting
Selects the paper tray to be specified.
The selectable items differ depending on the installed
options.
Paper Type
Selects the type of paper to be loaded onto the paper
tray.
2
Note
The paper size "12 e 18" is equivalent to 304.8 e 457.2 mm which is slightly larger than A3.
To print on paper sizes other than the standard sizes, be sure to set the custom paper sizes first. You
can register a non-standard size by selecting "Custom Size" from the paper size option or original size
option.
When "W" is selected for each standard paper size, the data can be centered and printed.
For example, if you want to center and print Letter / 8-1/2 e 11 size data on 11 e 17 size paper, specify
"LetterW / 8 1/2 e 11W" as the paper size and "Tray 1 (Bypass Tray)" as the paper tray with the printer
driver. To print, set 11 e 17 size paper on the specified tray of the machine ("Tray 1 (Bypass Tray)"),
select [Paper Settings] - [Tray 1] on the operation panel, specify "LetterW / 8-1/2 e 11W" for [Paper
Size], and then specify "11 e 17" for [X Size] and [Y Size].
Specify "Duplex Side 2" for "Paper Type" to print on the back side of a page. When "Duplex Side 2" is
specified, do not print on the back side of the paper that has been printed using any machine other than
this one. The results of print quality under this setting are not warranted.
When "Letterhead" is selected for "Paper Type", print speed is reduced, even with single-sided printing,
since the paper alignment operation is performed.
For details on Output Method, refer to "Function detail description" on page 8-3.
6-10
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Print functions of the printer drivers for Windows
6.4.2
6
Layout tab
Function name
Option
Description
Combination
2 in 1, 4 in 1, 6 in 1, 9 in 1, 16 in 1,
2 e 2, 3 e 3, 4 e 4
Prints multiple pages on one page, or prints one sheet
of an original document divided on multiple pages.
[Combination Details] allows you to specify the page
order and the presence of the border frame.
[Combination Details]
Combination
Selects the combination conditions.
Layout Order
Specifies the layout order. The layout order can be
specified when N in 1 is specified in "Combination".
Border
Specifies the presence and type of border lines. The
layout order can be specified when N in 1 is specified
in "Combination".
Overlap width line
Specifies the presence of a poster mode overlap. You
can specify it when N e N is specified in "Combination".
ON/OFF
Rotates 180° to print.
Skip Blank Pages
ON/OFF
Does not print blank pages in the data.
Chapters
ON/OFF
Specifies the page to be printed on the front side.
You can specify it when the print type is "2-Sided" or
"Booklet".
Entry (Page
Number)
—
Specifies the page to be printed on the front side
when "Chapters" is ON.
Rotate 180
Print Type
1-Sided, 2-Sided, Booklet
Specifies duplex printing and booklet printing.
Binding Position
Auto, Left Bind, Right Bind, Top
Bind
Specifies the binding position.
Binding Margin
ON/OFF
Specifies the binding margin. Click the [Binding Margin Settings] button to specify the margin values.
[Binding Margin
Settings]
Shift Mode
Selects how to process the image to prepare the binding margin.
Front Side/Back Side
Specifies the binding margin values. For 2-sided printing, clearing the "Same value for front and back sides"
check box allows you to set different values between
the front and back sides.
Unit
Selects the measurement unit that specifies the size.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
6-11
Print functions of the printer drivers for Windows
6
Function name
Option
Description
Image Shift
ON/OFF
Prints by shifting the entire print image. Click the [Image Shift Settings] button to specify the image shift
values.
[Image Shift Settings]
Units
Selects the measurement unit that specifies the size.
Front Side/Back Side
Specifies the shift direction and values. For 2-sided
printing, clearing the "Same value for front and back
sides" check box allows you to set different values between the front and back sides.
2
Note
"Combination" provides options "2 e 2, 3 e 3, 4 e 4" to print a sheet of document into multiple sheets
of paper. The function is only for the PCL driver.
The "Skip Blank Pages" function is only for the PCL driver.
The positions of binding margins vary according to the "Binding Position" setting.
6-12
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Print functions of the printer drivers for Windows
6.4.3
6
Finish tab
Function name
Option
Description
Staple
ON/OFF
Specifies stapling.
From the drop-down list, specify the number of staples and the stapling position.
Center Staple and
Fold
ON/OFF
Specifies to saddle stitch a printed document.
Punch
ON/OFF
Specifies hole punching.
From the drop-down list, specify the number of
punches and the position.
Fold
ON/OFF
Specifies folding.
Center Erase
ON/OFF
Does not print on the center fold line with Center Staple and Fold.
Output Tray
Default, Tray1-3, Bin 1-6
Specifies the tray where to output the printed pages.
The selectable items differ depending on the options
that are installed.
Paper Arrangement
Prioritize Arranging Papers, Prioritize Productivity
Specifies the method for adjusting the binding position for 2-sided print. The biding position is adjusted
after receiving all data for finishing priority. The data is
received and printed for productivity priority.
2
Note
The "Staple" function is available only if the optional finisher is installed.
The "Punch" function is available only when the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher.
"Center Staple and Fold" function is available only when optional finisher FS-609 or finisher FS-519 with
saddle kit is installed.
The "Fold" function is available only when optional finisher FS-519 and saddle kit are installed.
The "Center Erase" function is available only when optional finisher FS-609 is installed and the "Center
Staple and Fold" function is specified.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
6-13
Print functions of the printer drivers for Windows
6
6.4.4
6-14
Cover Mode tab
Function name
Option
Description
Front Cover
ON/OFF, Blank/Print
Attaches a front cover page.
You can specify it when "Auto" is not selected for the
paper tray.
Front Cover Tray
Tray2-5, Tray1 (Bypass Tray),
Tray4 (LCT)
Selects the paper tray for the cover.
The selectable items differ depending on the options
that are installed.
Back Cover
ON/OFF, Blank/Print
Attaches a back cover page.
You can specify it when "Auto" is not selected for the
paper tray.
Back Cover Tray
Tray2-5, Tray1 (Bypass Tray),
Tray4 (LCT)
Selects the paper tray for the back cover.
The selectable items differ depending on the options
that are installed.
Per Page Setting
ON/OFF
Inserts paper between pages and switches the paper
and tray for each page. [Edit List] allows you to create
a list by setting conditions by page.
[Edit List]
List Name
Selects the name of the list to be edited. The settings
are listed.
[Edit List Name..]
Renames a list.
[Up]/[Down]
Moves the selected condition row up or down. Move
the rows so that the page numbers are arranged in ascending order.
[Add]
Adds a condition. Conditions are specified in
"Add/Delete".
[Delete]
Deletes the selected condition row.
Page Number
Specifies the page numbers. To specify multiple pages, separate each page number with a comma or
specify the range using a hyphen.
Print Type
Specifies the print type from the "Change Setting"
drop-down list.
Paper Tray
Specifies the paper tray used for printing from the
"Change Setting" drop-down list.
Staple
Specifies the number of staples and the stapling position from the "Change Setting" drop-down list.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Print functions of the printer drivers for Windows
6
Function name
Option
Description
Transparency Interleave
ON/OFF, Blank
Outputs and inserts interleaves when printing overhead projector transparencies.
You can specify it when "Transparency" is selected for
the paper type.
Interleave Tray
Tray2-5, Tray4 (LCT)
Selects the paper tray for the transparency interleaves.
The selectable items differ depending on the options
that are installed.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
6-15
Print functions of the printer drivers for Windows
6
6.4.5
6-16
Stamp/Composition tab
Function name
Option
Description
Watermark
ON/OFF
Prints a watermark (text stamp) on the page being
printed. [Edit] allows you to add, change and delete
Watermarks.
[Edit]
—
For details, refer to "Editing watermark" on page 6-18.
Create Overlay File
ON/OFF
Create overlay data by checking this to print the original.
Print in Overlay
ON/OFF
Prints an original document on top of an overlay data
that was created separately. [Edit] allows you to
change the overlay printing method.
[Edit]
[Browse Files..]
Loads an overlay file.
[Delete]
Deletes the selected overlay.
Pages
Specifies the pages to be printed.
Overwrite
Specifies the sequence for printing the overlay on top
of the original document.
Copy Protect
ON/OFF
Prints a special pattern to prevent copying. [Edit] allows you to specify items, positions and the composition to be printed.
[Edit]
—
For details, refer to "Editing copy protect" on
page 6-19.
Date/Time
ON/OFF
You can print the date and time on a document. [Edit]
allows you to specify items, pages and positions to be
printed.
Page Number
ON/OFF
Prints the page number. [Edit] allows you to specify
items, pages and positions to be printed.
[Edit]
—
For details, refer to "Editing date/time and page
number" on page 6-21.
Header/Footer
Machine Setting 1-20
Print the header and footer. Select header/footer information from the list of the printer setting. [Edit] allows
you to specify items and pages to be printed.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Print functions of the printer drivers for Windows
6
Function name
Option
Description
[Edit]
Distribution Control Number
Prints the number of copies in the header and footer
when printing multiple copies.
[Edit]
Specifies the distribution control number conditions.
Pages
Specifies the pages to be printed.
Text Color
Specifies the text color used for printing.
2
Note
For Windows Vista x64, "Watermark" cannot be selected with any of the following functions at the same
time.
[User Authentication]
[Account Track]
[Per Page Setting]
[Verify Authentication settings before printing]
[Popup Authentication Dialog when printing]
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
6-17
Print functions of the printer drivers for Windows
6
Editing watermark
6-18
Item
Description
Watermark Name
Enter the name of the watermark.
Watermark Text
Enter the text to be printed as the watermark.
[Add]
Click to create a new watermark.
[Delete]
Click to delete the selected watermark.
Position
Specifies the vertical and horizontal positions. The watermark position can also be specified
by using the horizontal and vertical sliders in the dialog box.
Angle
Specifies the watermark print angle.
Font Name
Specifies the font.
Size
Specifies the size.
Style
Specifies the font style.
Frame
Specifies the frame style.
Text Color
Specifies the watermark text color.
Transparent
Prints the watermark as a transparent image.
1st Page Only
Prints the watermark on the first page only.
Repeat
Prints the watermark repeatedly on a single page.
Sharing
Specifies whether to register the watermark as public or private.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Print functions of the printer drivers for Windows
6
Editing copy protect
Item
Description
Characters
Embeds the selected character string in a pattern. A preregistered character string (common
stamp) or a character string registered on this machine (registered stamp) can be specified.
Date/Time
Embeds the selected date and time in a pattern. By clicking the
[Edit] button under "Format", you can specify the display type or the time format.
Serial Number
Embeds the serial number of this machine in a pattern.
Distribution Control
Number
Embeds the copy number in a pattern when printing multiple copies. By clicking the
[Edit] button under "Start Number", you can specify the start number or the display type.
Job Number
Embeds the print job number in a pattern for documents that are automatically paginated.
Text Size
Specifies the text size of a pattern.
Angle
Specifies the pattern angle.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
6-19
Print functions of the printer drivers for Windows
6
Item
Description
Copy Protect
Embeds a hidden pattern that appears on copies.
Stamp Repeat
Prints a text pattern.
The following settings are available when "Copy Protect" is selected.
Item
Description
Pattern
Specifies the embedding method of a pattern.
Pattern Overwrite
Specifies the order for printing a pattern on the original.
Background Pattern
Specifies the pattern background.
Text/Background
Color
Specifies the color of the pattern. The density and color contrast can be specified by clicking
the [Adjust Color] button.
The following settings are available when "Stamp Repeat" is selected.
Item
Description
Pattern Overwrite
Specifies the order for printing a pattern on the original.
Text Color
Specifies the color of the pattern. The density and color contrast can be specified by clicking
the
[Adjust Color] button.
2
Note
"Copy Protect" and "Stamp Repeat" cannot be selected at the same time.
Different setting items are available for "Copy Protect" and "Stamp Repeat".
6-20
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Print functions of the printer drivers for Windows
6
Editing date/time and page number
Item
Description
Format
Displays the format for the date and time to be printed. The display type or the time format can
be specified by clicking the [Edit] button.
Pages
Specifies the pages to print the date and time.
Text Color
Specifies the text color used for printing.
Print Position
Specifies the print position.
Starting Page
Specifies the page to start printing the page number.
Starting Page
Number
Specifies the start number for printing the page number.
Cover Mode
If cover pages are attached, specifies whether to print the page number on the front cover page
or the back cover page.
Text Color
Specifies the text color used for printing.
Print Position
Specifies the print position.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
6-21
Print functions of the printer drivers for Windows
6
6.4.6
6-22
Quality tab
Function name
Option
Description
Select Color
Full Color, Gray Scale, 2 Color
Specifies the color to be printed.
Quality Adjustment
—
Adjusts the image quality. You can select "Simple" to
adjust entire documents or "Detail" to adjust the text,
photos, figures, tables, and graphs in the original.
Color Settings
Document, Photo, DTP, Web,
CAD
Prints with a quality suitable for the selected original
document.
Document: Prints with a quality suitable for documents
with many characters.
Photo: Prints with a quality suitable for photos.
DTP: Prints with a quality suitable for documents produced using DTP.
Web: Prints with a quality suitable for Web page printing.
CAD: Prints with a quality suitable for CAD data printing.
Resolution
—
Indicates the resolution. You may not change this item.
Pattern
Fine, Coarse
Specifies the graphic pattern details.
Image Compression
Best Quality (quality priority),
Maximum Compression (speed
priority)
Specifies the compression ratio for a graphic image.
Glossy Mode
ON/OFF
Prints using a gloss finish.
Toner Save
ON/OFF
Controls the print density and saves the toner consumption.
Edge Enhancement
ON/OFF
Highlights the edge of characters, graphics and images
to make small characters more visible.
You can specify it when "Gray Scale" is selected for the
color.
Font Settings
—
Selects whether to use TrueType fonts or the printer
fonts when printing. Selects whether the fonts are downloaded to the printer as bitmap or outline.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Print functions of the printer drivers for Windows
6
2
Note
"2 Color" option of the "Select Color" is only for the PCL driver. "2 Color" option allows you to specify
a combination of two colors.
The "Pattern" and "Image Compression" functions are only for the PCL driver.
The PS driver allows you to manage the profile through "Quality Adjustment". For details, refer to "ICC
profile settings" on page 8-39.
6.4.7
Other tab
Function name
Option
Description
Excel Job Control
ON/OFF
When multiple Microsoft Excel sheets with different
page settings are printed at one time, the sheets may
be separated into single-sheet jobs depending on the
data they contain. When this function is selected, job
separation is minimized.
Remove White
Background
ON/OFF
When an overlay file is printed on top of Microsoft
PowerPoint data, white areas are removed so that the
white background of the PowerPoint data does not
hide the overlay file.
When the check is cleared, the background is not removed and is printed as is in the original data.
Thin Line Support
ON/OFF
When printing the document reduced, thin line may be
blurred. Select this function to prevent disappearing
the thin line.
Check Driver Version
—
Displays the printer driver version information.
2
Note
"Remove White Background" and "Thin Line Support" functions are is only for the PCL driver.
"Excel Job Control" and "Remove White Background" settings are not available for Windows XP
Professional x64, Windows Vista x64 and Windows Server 2003 x64.
"Excel Job Control" can be changed only when the printer driver setting dialog is displayed in the
"Printers" ("Printers and Faxes" for Windows XP/Server 2003) window.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
6-23
6
6-24
Print functions of the printer drivers for Windows
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
7
Print functions of the printer
driver for Macintosh
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Print functions of the printer driver for Macintosh
7
Print functions of the printer driver for Macintosh
7.1
Printing operations for OS X
7
Print jobs are specified from the application software.
1
Open the data in the application, click the [File] button, and then click "Print" from the menu.
– If the menu is not available, click the [Print] button.
The Print dialog box appears.
2
Check that an appropriate printer name has been selected by the "Printer".
–
–
–
If the selected printer is not appropriate, select an appropriate printer.
If the printer does not appear, select the printer with [Printer Setup Utility] or [Print Center]. For
details, see "Selecting and connecting the printer (OS 10.4)" on page 5-5, and "Selecting and
connecting the printer (OS 10.2 and 10.3)" on page 5-8.
The Print dialog box differs depending on the application.
3
Specify the print range and the number of copies to print.
4
Change the setting dialog box to change the printer driver settings as necessary.
–
5
When you change the "Copies & Pages" menu, another setting dialog box of the printer driver
appears and allows you to specify various functions. For details, refer to "Parameter details for the
OS X printer driver" on page 7-8.
Click the [Print] button.
The data indicator of this machine flashes.
2
Note
The printer driver setting changed on the Print dialog box is not saved and the original settings are
restored when the application is quit.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
7-3
Print functions of the printer driver for Macintosh
7
7.2
Default settings for the OS X printer driver
When you have installed the printer driver, you need to change the initialization condition such as options
before daily printing and enable functions of this machine from the printer driver.
2
Reminder
If the model name and installed options are not specified on the Printer Info dialog box, the option
functions cannot be used from the printer driver. When installing options, be sure to make the proper
settings.
7.2.1
Options
1
Open the [Printer Setup Utility] (or [Print Center]) located in "Applications" - "Utilities" of "Hard Disk",
and then select this machine.
2
From the [Printer] menu, select "Show Info".
The "Printer Info" dialog box appears.
7-4
3
Select "Installable Options".
4
Select the options that are installed on this machine.
5
Click the [Apply Changes] button, and then close the "Printer Info" dialog box.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Print functions of the printer driver for Macintosh
7.2.2
7
Registration of the default settings
The settings specified for the functions of this machine when printing can only be applied while using the
application. When the application is quit, the settings return to their default settings.
%
To register the settings, save the settings in the printer driver setting.
– For Mac OS X, you can register the paper setting as the default setting. To set other print functions,
save the setting with the "Presets" function and use them by calling them as required.
– In the "Page Setup" dialog box, select "Settings" and save the settings by selecting "Save as
Default".
–
–
In the "Print" dialog box, select "Presets" and save the printer driver functions by selecting "Save
As".
When use this setting, select from "Presets".
!
Detail
For the function and settings of the printer driver, refer to "Parameter details for the OS X printer driver"
on page 7-8.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
7-5
Print functions of the printer driver for Macintosh
7
7.3
Common settings for the OS X printer driver
The following describes the common settings that are displayed by the specific operations (Output Method,
Layout/Finish, Paper Tray/Output Tray, Cover Sheet/OHP Interleave, Per Page Setting, Stamp/Composition
and Quality) for this machine specified in the Print dialog box.
Item
Description
Paper View
A preview of the page layout as specified in the current settings is displayed and a preview image of the print job can be checked.
Detailed Information
Shows the current settings with text.
Printer Information
Displays the status of the installed options.
Default
Click this button to return to the default setting.
? (Help)
Click this button to display the help for each item on the currently displayed dialog box.
Cancel
Click this button to cancel any settings that have been changed and close the dialog box.
Print
Click this button to enable the changed settings for printing.
!
Detail
Click the [Acquire Device Information] button on the Printer Info dialog box to communicate with this
machine and read the status of the settings specified on this machine. This function is not available
unless the connection is enabled for communications with the machine.
7-6
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Print functions of the printer driver for Macintosh
7.4
7
How to add a custom size for the OS X printer driver
To print on paper sizes other than the standard sizes, register the custom paper size.
2
Note
The custom size that can be specified on this machine is as follows.
Width: 3.54 to 12.25 inches (90.0 to 311.1mm)
Height: 5.50 to 18.00 inches (139.7 to 457.2mm)
Banner printing is not supported.
1
In the [File] menu, select "Page Setup" (or "Paper Setup").
2
For Mac OS 10.4, select "Manage Custom Sizes" from the "Paper Size" list.
–
For Mac OS 10.2/10.3, select "Custom Paper Sizes" from "Settings".
3
Click the [+] button (OS 10.4) or the [Add] button (OS 10.2/10.3).
4
Enter the paper size name.
5
Specify settings for the following:
–
–
6
For Mac OS 10.4, continue with step 7.
–
7
Page size (paper size): Specifies the paper size.
Printer Margins: Specifies the paper margins.
For Mac OS 10.2/10.3, click the [Save] button.
Click the [OK] button.
This saves the custom paper size, which can be selected from the Paper Size drop-down list that is
displayed when "Page Attributes" is selected.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
7-7
Print functions of the printer driver for Macintosh
7
7.5
Parameter details for the OS X printer driver
The printer driver functions are specified in the following dialog boxes: In "Page Attributes" from the Page
Setup dialog box; In "Output Method", "Layout/Finish", "Paper Tray/Output Tray", "Cover Sheet/OHP
Interleave", "Per Page Setting", "Stamp/Composition", and "Quality" from the Print dialog box.
7.5.1
Page Attributes
%
In the [File] menu, select "Page Setup" (or "Paper Setup").
Function name
Option
Description
Paper Size
Paper size registered as the standard paper size and custom paper
size available on this machine.
Specifies the output paper size.
Orientation
Portrait, Landscape
Specifies the orientation of the original.
Scale
1 to 400%
Specifies the enlargement and reduction ratio.
2
Note
The paper size "12 e 18" is equivalent to 304.8 e 457.2mm which is slightly larger than A3.
To print on paper sizes other than the standard sizes, be sure to set the custom paper sizes in "Custom
Size Settings" first. For details on registering a non-standard paper size, refer to "How to add a custom
size for the OS X printer driver" on page 7-7.
When "W" is selected for each standard paper size, the data can be centered and printed.
For example, if you want to center and print Letter / 8-1/2 e 11 size data on 11 e 17 size paper, specify
"LetterW / 8 1/2 e 11W" as the paper size and "Tray 1 (Bypass Tray)" as the paper tray with the printer
driver. To print, set 11 e 17 size paper on the specified tray of the machine ("Tray 1 (Bypass Tray)"),
select [Paper Settings] - [Tray 1] on the operation panel, specify "LetterW / 8-1/2 e 11W" for [Paper
Size], and then specify "11 e 17" for [X Size] and [Y Size].
7-8
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Print functions of the printer driver for Macintosh
7.5.2
7
Copies & Pages
%
In the [File] menu, select "Print".
Function name
Option
Description
Copies
1 to 999
Specifies the number of copies to be printed.
Collated
ON/OFF
Do not specify this function.
Select "Output Method", and then specify "Collate".
Pages
—
Specifies the print range to print.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
7-9
Print functions of the printer driver for Macintosh
7
7.5.3
Output Method
Function name
Option
Description
Collate
ON/OFF
Specifies whether to print multiple copies by collating
them.
Offset
ON/OFF
When printing multiple copies, shifts the output position of each set.
Output Method
Print
Prints immediately.
Secure Print
Saves the document to be printed in "Secure Print
User Box" of this machine. When printing, entering the
ID and password is required in the control panel of this
machine. Select this option when printing highly confidential documents.
Save in User Box
Saves the document to be printed in the user box on
this machine.
Save in User Box and Print
Saves the document in a box and prints at the same
time.
Proof Print
After one copy of the document has been printed, this
machine stops printing temporarily. Select this option
to avoid misprinting a large volume of print jobs.
[User Authentication]
—
If the "User Authentication" settings have been specified on this machine, you must specify a user name
and password.
[Account Track]
—
If the "Account Track" settings have been specified on
this machine, you must specify a division name and
password.
[Detail Settings]
—
Displays the functions for which the setting details
have been specified.
!
Detail
For details on Output Method, refer to "Function detail description" on page 8-3.
7-10
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Print functions of the printer driver for Macintosh
7
Checking the Output Method setting details
By clicking the [Detail Settings] button, the "Output Method"functions for which detail settings have been
specified are shown.
The settings can be shown by clicking the [Expand All] button.
By selecting a function and clicking the [Settings] button, the dialog box for specifying the detailed settings
for the selected function appears.
Item
Description
Secure Print
This is the same dialog box that appears when you select "Output Method" and specify "Secure Print".
Save in User Box
This is the same dialog box that appears when you select "Output Method" and specify "Save
in User Box" or "Save in User Box and Print".
User Authentication
This is the same dialog box that appears when you select "Output Method" and select "User
Authentication" checkbox.
Account Track
This is the same dialog box that appears when you select "Output Method" and select "Account Track" checkbox.
Administrator Settings
Displays a dialog box to set an input dialog for authentication setting and change the encryption key.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
7-11
Print functions of the printer driver for Macintosh
7
Item
Description
Popup Authentication Dialog when
printing
Displays the User Authentication and Account Track dialog box when a print job is specified
and checks entry of a user name and a department name each time.
Encryption Passphrase
Specifies an encryption passphrase to use user-defined key to communicate with this machine. The encryption key for the entered characters is automatically created, which is to be
used for communication with this machine.
2
Note
Match the "Encryption Passphrase" to that specified by "Driver Password Encryption Setting" of this
machine.
!
Detail
For the procedure for specifying "Encryption Passphrase" to be defined by the user, refer to "Specifying
a user-defined encryption passphrase" on page 8-35.
7-12
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Print functions of the printer driver for Macintosh
7.5.4
7
Layout/Finish
You can switch between the Layout dialog box and the Finish dialog box.
2
Note
When printing a job that contains pages of different sizes and orientations with the "Poster Mode"
setting specified, images may be missing or overlapping when the document is printed.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
7-13
Print functions of the printer driver for Macintosh
7
Function name
Option
Description
Print Type
1-Side, 2-Sided, Booklet
Specifies duplex printing and booklet printing.
Binding Position
Left stitch, right stitch, top stitch
Specifies the binding position.
Poster Mode
2 e 2, 3 e 3, 4 e 4
Prints one sheet of an original divided on multiple pages. "Overlap with line" allows you to specify the presence of the border frame.
Overlap width line
ON/OFF
Specifies the presence of a poster mode overlap. This
setting can be specified when the "Poster Mode" setting is other than "OFF".
Rotate _180
ON/OFF
Rotates 180° to print.
Image Shift
ON/OFF
Prints by shifting the entire print image. The screen is
displayed when the setting is enabled and allows you
to set the detail of the shift length.
Front Side/Back Side
Specifies the shift direction and values. For 2-sided
printing, clearing the "Same Value for Front and Back
Sides" check box allows you to set different values
between the front and back sides.
ON/OFF
Specifies the page to be printed on the front side. The
screen is displayed when the setting is enabled and allows you to set the page.
You can specify it when the print type is "2-sided" or
"Booklet".
Page Number
Specifies the page to be printed on the front side
when "Chapters" is selected.
Staple
ON/OFF
Specifies stapling.
From the drop-down list, specify the number of staples and the stapling position.
Punch
ON/OFF
Specifies hole punching.
From the drop-down list, specify the number of
punches and the position.
Fold & Staple
Off, Center Staple & Fold, Half-Fold
Specifies to half fold and center staple.
Center Erase
ON/OFF
Does not print on the center fold line with Center Staple and Fold.
Paper Arrangement
Finishing Priority, productivity priority
Specifies the method for adjusting the binding position for 2-sided print. The biding position is adjusted
after receiving all data for finishing priority. When Productivity Priority is specified, the machine processes
data reception and printing concurrently.
Chapters
2
Note
"Staple" and "Saddle Stitch/Fold" functions are available only if the optional finisher is installed.
The "Punch" function is available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher.
The "Center Erase" function is available only when optional finisher FS-609 is installed and the "Center
Staple and Fold" function is specified.
7-14
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Print functions of the printer driver for Macintosh
7.5.5
7
Paper Tray/Output Tray
Function name
Option
Description
Paper Tray
Auto, Tray 2-5, Tray1 (Bypass Tray),
Tray4 (LCT)
Selects the paper tray to be used.
The selectable items differ depending on the options
that are installed.
Paper Type
Paper type available on this machine.
Selects the paper type for printing.
Can be changed only when the paper tray is set to
"Auto". When the paper tray is not set to "Auto", the
paper type registered by "Paper Settings for Each
Tray" is effective.
[Paper Settings for
Each Tray]
Paper Tray
Selects the paper tray to be specified.
The selectable items differ depending on the installed
options.
Paper Type
Selects the type of paper to be loaded onto the paper
tray.
Default, tray 1-3, bin 1-6
Specifies the tray where to output the printed pages.
The selectable items differ depending on the options
that are installed.
Output Tray
2
Note
Specify "Duplex Side 2" for "Paper Type" to print on the back side of a page. When "Duplex Side 2" is
specified, do not print on the back side of the paper that has been printed using any machine other than
this one. The results of print quality under this setting are not warranted.
When "Letterhead" is selected for "Paper Type", print speed is reduced, even with single-sided printing,
since the paper alignment operation is performed.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
7-15
Print functions of the printer driver for Macintosh
7
7.5.6
Cover Mode/Transparency Interleave
You can switch between the Cover Mode dialog box and the Transparency Interleave dialog box.
7-16
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Print functions of the printer driver for Macintosh
7
Function name
Option
Description
Front Cover
Off, Print, Blank
Attaches a front cover page.
You can specify it when "Auto" is not selected for the
paper tray.
Tray 2-5, Tray1 (Bypass Tray),
Tray4 (LCT)
Selects the paper tray for the cover page.
The selectable items differ depending on the options
that are installed.
Off, Print, Blank
Attaches a back cover page.
You can specify it when "Auto" is not selected for the
paper tray.
Tray 2-5, Tray1 (Bypass Tray), Tray4
(LCT)
Selects the paper tray for the back cover page.
The selectable items differ depending on the options
that are installed.
ON/OFF
Outputs and inserts interleaves when printing overhead projector transparencies.
You can specify it when "Transparency" is selected for
the paper type.
Tray 2-5, Tray4 (LCT)
Selects the paper tray for the transparency interleaves.
The selectable items differ depending on the options
that are installed.
Back Cover
Transparency
Interleave
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
7-17
Print functions of the printer driver for Macintosh
7
7.5.7
Per Page Setting
The print type and paper tray can be specified for each page. This function is convenient when changing the
paper tray during a print job to print multiple pages. The settings are added to the Per Page Setting list and
can be used as necessary.
7-18
Function name
Option
Description
Per Page Setting
ON/OFF
Inserts paper between pages and switches the paper
and tray for each page.
[Add]
—
Creates a conditioned list.
[Delete]
—
Deletes the list.
[Edit]
—
Edits the conditioned list.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Print functions of the printer driver for Macintosh
7.5.8
7
Stamp/Composition
Function name
Option
Description
Copy Protect
ON/OFF
Prints a special pattern to prevent copying. You can
specify items, positions and the composition to be
printed by clicking the [Settings] button.
[Settings]
—
For details, refer to "Editing copy protect" on
page 7-20.
Date/Time
ON/OFF
You can print the date and time on a document. You
can specify items, pages and positions to be printed
by clicking the [Settings] button.
[Settings]
—
For details, refer to "Editing date/time" on page 7-22.
Page Number
ON/OFF
Prints the page number. You can specify items, pages
and positions to be printed by clicking the [Settings]
button.
[Settings]
—
For details, refer to "Editing page number" on
page 7-23.
Header/Footer
Machine Setting 1-20
Prints the header and footer. Select header/footer information from the list specified in the printer. You can
specify items and pages to be printed by clicking the
[Settings] button.
[Settings]
—
For details, refer to "Editing header/footer" on
page 7-24.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
7-19
Print functions of the printer driver for Macintosh
7
Editing copy protect
7-20
Item
Description
Characters
Embeds the selected character string in a pattern. A preregistered character string (common
stamp) or a character string registered on this machine (registered stamp) can be specified.
Date/Time
Embeds the selected date and time in a pattern. By clicking the [Edit] button under "Format",
you can specify the display type or the time format.
Serial Number
Embeds the serial number of this machine in a pattern.
Distribution Control
Number
Embeds the copy number in a pattern when printing multiple copies. The start number or the
display type can be specified.
Job Number
Embeds the print job number in a pattern for documents that are automatically paginated.
Text Size
Specifies the text size of a pattern.
Angle
Specifies the pattern angle.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Print functions of the printer driver for Macintosh
7
The following settings are available when "Copy Protect" is selected.
Item
Description
Copy Protect
Embeds a hidden pattern that appears on unauthorized copies.
Pattern
Specifies the embedding method of a pattern.
Pattern Overwrite
Specifies the order for printing a pattern on the original.
Background Pattern
Specifies the pattern background.
Adjust Color
Specifies the color of the pattern.
The following settings are available when "Repeatable Stamp" is selected.
Item
Description
Repeatable Stamp
Prints a text pattern.
Pattern Overwrite
Specifies the order for printing a pattern on the original.
Adjust Color
Specifies the color of the pattern.
2
Note
"Copy Protect" and "Repeatable Stamp" cannot be selected at the same time.
Different setting items are available for "Copy Protect" and "Repeatable Stamp".
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
7-21
Print functions of the printer driver for Macintosh
7
Editing date/time
7-22
Item
Description
Format
Displays the format for the date and time to be printed.
Pages
Specifies the pages to print the date and time.
Text Color
Specifies the text color used for printing.
Print Position
Specifies the print position.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Print functions of the printer driver for Macintosh
7
Editing page number
Item
Description
Starting Page
Specifies the page to start printing the page number.
Starting Page
Number
Specifies the start number for printing the page number.
Cover Mode
If cover pages are attached, specifies whether to print the page number on the front cover
page or the back cover page.
Text Color
Specifies the text color used for printing.
Print Position
Specifies the print position.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
7-23
Print functions of the printer driver for Macintosh
7
Editing header/footer
7-24
Item
Description
Recall Header/Footer
Selects the header/footer settings registered in this machine.
Distribution Control
Number
Prints the number of copies in the header and footer when printing multiple copies. The start
number or the number of digits displayed can be specified.
Pages
Specifies the pages to print the header and footer.
Text Color
Specifies the text color used for printing.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Print functions of the printer driver for Macintosh
7.5.9
7
Quality
Function name
Option
Description
Select Color
Full Color, Gray Scale
Specifies the color to be printed.
Glossy Mode
ON/OFF
Prints using a gloss finish.
Toner Save
ON/OFF
Controls the print density and saves the toner consumption.
Edge Enhancement
ON/OFF
Highlights the edge of characters, graphics and images to make small characters more visible.
You can specify it when "Gray Scale" is selected for
the color.
Color Settings
Document, photo, DTP, Web, CAD
Prints with a quality suitable for the selected original
document.
Document: Prints with a quality suitable for documents with many characters.
Photo: Prints with a quality suitable for photos.
DTP: Prints with a quality suitable for documents produced using DTP.
Web: Prints with a quality suitable for Web page printing.
CAD: Prints with a quality suitable for CAD data printing.
Quality Adjustment
—
Adjusts the image quality. You can select "Simple" to
adjust entire documents or "Detail" to adjust the text,
photos, figures, tables, and graphs in the original. You
can also manage the profile.
!
Detail
For details on profile management, refer to "ICC profile settings" on page 8-39, and "Registering ICC
profiles in the printer driver" on page 8-41.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
7-25
Print functions of the printer driver for Macintosh
7
7.6
Printing operations for OS 9
Print jobs are specified from the application software.
1
Open the data in the application, click the [File] button, and then click "Print" from the menu.
– If the menu is not available, click the [Print] button.
The Print dialog box appears.
2
Check that an appropriate printer name has been selected by the "Printer".
–
–
–
If the selected printer is not appropriate, click to select an appropriate printer.
If the printer does not appear, select a printer from "Chooser". For details, refer to "Selecting and
connecting the printer" on page 5-12.
The Print dialog box differs depending on the application.
3
Specify the print range and the number of copies to print.
4
Change the setting screen to change the printer driver settings as necessary.
–
5
When you change the "General" menu, other setting screens of the printer driver appear and allows
you to specify various functions. For details, refer to "Parameter details for the OS 9 printer driver"
on page 7-29.
Click the [Print] button.
The data indicator of this machine flashes.
!
Detail
The printer driver setting changed on the Print dialog box is not saved and the original settings are
restored when the application is quit.
7-26
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Print functions of the printer driver for Macintosh
7.7
7
Default settings for the OS 9 printer driver
When you have installed the printer driver, you need to change the initialization condition such as options
before daily printing and enable functions of this machine from the printer driver.
2
Reminder
If the model name and installed options are not specified, the option functions cannot be used from the
printer driver. When installing options, be sure to make the proper settings.
7.7.1
Options
1
On the "Apple" menu, select "Chooser".
2
Select the printer name.
3
Click the [Setup] button.
4
Click the [Configure] button.
–
When the machine is specified as the LPR printer, double-click the LPR printer icon on the desktop,
select the "Printer" menu, and then click "Change Setup" to display the dialog box for option
settings.
The dialog box for option settings appears.
5
Set options installed on this machine in the Options Installed 1 and Options Installed 2 dialog boxes.
6
Click the [OK] button.
The "selector" window appears again.
7
Close the "selector" window.
2
Note
The option settings are displayed automatically the first time the printer driver is selected. For details,
refer to "Selecting and connecting the printer" on page 5-12.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
7-27
Print functions of the printer driver for Macintosh
7
7.7.2
Registration of the default settings
The settings specified for the functions of this machine when printing can only be applied while using the
application. When the application is quit, the settings return to their default settings.
!
Detail
For the function and settings of the printer driver, refer to "Parameter details for the OS 9 printer driver"
on page 7-29.
%
To register the settings, save the settings in the printer driver setting.
– For OS 9.2, select the Print dialog box and click the [Save Settings] button to save it.
2
Note
The settings cannot be saved from the Page Setup dialog box.
The "General" settings on the Print dialog box cannot be saved.
7-28
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Print functions of the printer driver for Macintosh
7.8
7
Parameter details for the OS 9 printer driver
The printer driver functions are specified in the Page Attributes dialog box called from the Page Setup dialog
box or the Layout/Finish dialog boxes called from the Print dialog box.
7.8.1
Page Attributes
%
In the [File] menu, select "Page Setup" (or "Paper Setup").
Item
Description
Paper
Specifies the output paper size.
Orientation
Specifies the orientation of the original.
Scale
Specifies the enlargement and reduction ratio.
2
Note
To print on paper sizes other than the standard sizes, be sure to set the custom paper sizes in "Custom
Size Settings" first. For details on registering a non-standard paper size, refer to "Setting Custom Page
Sizes" on page 7-30.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
7-29
Print functions of the printer driver for Macintosh
7
7.8.2
Setting Custom Page Sizes
Select "Custom Paper Sizes" on the Page Setting dialog box.
2
Note
The custom size that can be specified on this machine is as follows.
Width: 3.54 to 12.25 inches (90.0 to 311.1mm)
Height: 5.50 to 18.00 inches (139.7 to 457.2mm)
Banner printing is not supported.
1
In the [File] menu, select "Paper Setup" (or "Page Setup").
2
Select "Custom Page Sizes".
3
Click the [Add] button.
4
Specify settings for the following:
–
–
–
–
5
Paper size: Specifies the intended paper size.
Printer Margins: Specifies the paper margins.
Custom Page Size Name: Enter the registered name for the specified paper size and margins, and
then click the [OK] button.
Unit: Selects the specified unit.
Click the [OK] button.
This saves the custom page size, which can be selected from the "Paper" drop-down list in the Page
Attributes dialog box.
7-30
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Print functions of the printer driver for Macintosh
7.8.3
7
General
%
In the [File] menu, select "Print".
Item
Description
Copies
Specifies the number of copies to be printed.
Collated
Specifies whether to print multiple copies by collating them.
Pages
Specifies the print range to print.
Paper Source
Selects the paper tray to be used.
2
Note
When "Letterhead" is selected for "Paper Type", print speed is reduced, even with single-sided printing,
since the paper alignment operation is performed.
7.8.4
Layout (Pages per sheet)
%
Specify to print multiple pages on one page.
Item
Description
Pages per sheet
Allocates multiple pages in one page.
Layout direction
Specifies the document page order.
Border
Specifies the borders around pages.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
7-31
Print functions of the printer driver for Macintosh
7
7.8.5
Printer specific options (Finishing Options 1 to 5)
Specifies the printer specific options. These options are specified when functions of this machine such as
staple and punch are to be used.
7-32
Item
Description
Offset
Specifies offset.
Output Tray
Selects the output tray.
Binding Position
Selects the binding direction.
Print Type
Performs duplex printing.
Combination
Performs booklet printing.
Staple
Performs stapling.
Punch
Performs hole punching.
Fold
Performs folding.
Image Shift
Prints by shifting the entire print image.
Front Cover
Attaches a front cover page.
Front Cover Tray
Selects the paper tray for the front cover.
Back Cover
Attaches a back cover page.
Back Cover Tray
Selects the paper tray for the back cover.
Transparency Interleave
Inserts interleaves between transparencies.
Interleave Tray
Selects the paper tray for the transparency interleaves.
Output Method
Specifies whether to stop printing temporarily after one copy of the document has been printed, so that the proof print can be checked.
Resolution
Specifies the resolution.
Select Color
Specifies whether to print in color or gray scale.
Glossy Mode
Prints using a gloss finish.
Color Settings
Prints with a quality suitable for the original.
Color Matching
(Text)
Adjusts the color quality of the text in a document.
Pure Black (Text)
Specifies whether to enable pure black of the text in a document.
Screen (Text)
Specifies screening of the text in a document.
Color Matching
(Photo)
Adjusts the color quality of the photo in the original.
Pure Black (Photo)
Specifies whether to enable pure black of the photo in the original.
Screen (Photo)
Specifies screening of the photo in the original.
Smoothing (Photo)
Specifies smoothing of the photo in the original.
Color Settings
(Graphic)
Adjusts the color quality of a chart and graph in the original to the text or photo settings.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Print functions of the printer driver for Macintosh
7
Item
Description
Smoothing (Graphic)
Adjusts smoothing of a chart and graph in the original to the text or photo settings.
Toner Save
Controls the print density and saves the toner consumption.
Edge Enhancement
Highlights the edge of characters, graphics and images to make small characters more visible.
It can be specified when "Gray Scale" is selected for the color.
2
Reminder
The "Staple" and "Fold" functions are available only if the optional finisher is installed.
The "Punch" function is available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
7-33
7
7-34
Print functions of the printer driver for Macintosh
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
8
Function detail description
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Function detail description
8
8
Function detail description
8.1
Proof print
The proof print function is a feature used when printing out multiple copies. It allows the machine to output
one copy and pause before printing the remaining number of copies. This prevents copy errors from
occurring.
When printing, use the printer driver to specify Proof Print, and use the control panel to execute printing of
the remaining number of copies.
8.1.1
Setting up the printer driver
The following four printer drivers support setup of this feature:
Konica Minolta PCL Printer Driver for Windows
Konica Minolta PostScript Printer Driver for Windows
PostScript PPD Printer Driver for Mac OS X
PostScript PPD Printer Driver for Mac OS 9.2
Print with following settings specified:
Output Method: "Proof Print"
Number of Copies: Two or more
For Windows
1
Click the Basic tab.
2
Select "Proof Print" from options under "Output Method".
3
Specify the number of copies to be printed.
One copy is printed for checking.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
8-3
Function detail description
8
For Macintosh OS X
1
Display the "Output Method" dialog box.
2
Select "Proof Print" from options under "Output Method".
3
Specify the number of copies to be printed.
One copy is printed for checking.
2
Note
In OS 9.2, select "Output Method" in the "Finishing Option 3" dialog box.
8-4
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Function detail description
8.1.2
8
Recalling a job from the control panel
%
Press the [Menu/Select] key, and then the "Utility" menu appears. From this menu, select [Job
Operation] - [Proof print].
2
Note
For details on the "Utility" menu operations, refer to "Control panel" on page 9-3.
Proof Print
XXXX
All Documents
All Documents
document XXXX
Print
Print
Print
Simplex/Duplex
Print
Simplex/Duplex
Number of Copies
Print
Number of Copies
Print
1-Sided
2-Sided
XXX copies
Print
Simplex/Duplex
Number of Copies
Print
Print
2
Note
If the user authentication function has been specified on the machine, the screen to input the user name
appears after the Job Operation screen. Enter the user name and password.
If the Account Track function has been specified on the machine, the screen to input the department
name appears after the Job Operation screen. Enter the department name and password.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
8-5
Function detail description
8
8.2
Secure print
The secure print function saves print jobs in the secure print user box on the machine. As a job is output only
when the ID and password are entered from the control panel, it is helpful for outputting confidential
documents.
When printing, use the printer driver to specify Secure Print, and then use the control panel to execute
printing.
2
Note
The Secure print function is available only if a hard disk is installed on this machine.
8.2.1
Setting up the printer driver
The following three printer drivers support setup of this feature:
Konica Minolta PCL Printer Driver for Windows
Konica Minolta PostScript Printer Driver for Windows
PostScript PPD Printer Driver for Mac OS X
Print with the following setting specified:
Output Method: "Secure Print"
For Windows
8-6
1
Click the Basic tab.
2
Select "Secure Print" from the "Output Method" drop-down list.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Function detail description
3
Enter the ID and password.
–
4
8
When password rules are enabled on this machine, the passwords that can be used with Secure
Print are limited and the jobs are deleted when a password that does not comply with the password
rules is entered. For details on the password rules, refer to "Admin. Settings Menu" on page 9-25.
Print the document.
2
Reminder
The ID and password that are required to print a secured document can be preregistered in the User
Settings dialog box on the Basic tab. If the same ID and password always used, by preregistering them,
the dialog box for entering the ID and password will not appear when selecting "Secure Print".
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
8-7
Function detail description
8
For Macintosh OS X
1
Display the "Output Method" dialog box.
2
Select "Secure Print" from the "Output Method" drop-down list.
3
Enter the ID and password.
–
4
When password rules are enabled on this machine, the passwords that can be used with Secure
Print are limited and the jobs are deleted when a password that does not comply with the password
rules is entered. For details on the password rules, refer to "Admin. Settings Menu" on page 9-25.
Print the document.
2
Note
Select the "Save Settings" check box to save the specified settings. In addition, if the "Do not show this
window when setting" check box is selected, the dialog box does not appear when the function is
specified.
8-8
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Function detail description
8.2.2
8
Recalling a job from the control panel
"Secure Print" jobs are saved in the secure print user box. To print a secured document, the ID and password
that were specified in the printer driver are required.
%
Press the [Menu/Select] key, and then the "Utility" menu appears. From this menu, select [Job
Operation] - [Secure PrintBox].
2
Note
For details on the "Utility" menu operations, refer to "Control panel" on page 9-3.
When "Mode 1" is specified for "SecurePrintAccess", enter the ID, and then enter the password. When
"Mode 2" is specified for "SecurePrintAccess", enter the ID, select a document, and then enter the
password.
Secured documents are automatically deleted after a certain length of time has elapsed since their
registration. The default setting for this time is specified as 1 day, and the value can be specified in the
Administrator mode.
To manually delete a secured document that was printed, operate in the Administrator mode.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
8-9
Function detail description
8
When "SecurePrintAccess" is set to "Mode 1"
Secure PrintBox
Enter ID.
Enter password.
XXXX
All Documents
All Documents
document XXXX
Print
Print
Print
Simplex/Duplex
Print
Simplex/Duplex
Number of Copies
Print
Number of Copies
Print
1-Sided
2-Sided
XXX copies
Print
Simplex/Duplex
Number of Copies
Print
Print
2
Note
If the user authentication function has been specified on the machine, the screen to input the user name
appears after the Job Operation screen. Enter the user name and password.
If the Account Track function has been specified on the machine, the screen to input the department
name appears after the Job Operation screen. Enter the department name and password.
8-10
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Function detail description
8
When "SecurePrintAccess" is set to "Mode 2"
Secure PrintBox
Enter ID.
Select All
document XXXX
Enter password.
XXXX
All Documents
document XXXX
All Documents
Print
Print
Print
Simplex/Duplex
Print
Simplex/Duplex
Number of Copies
Print
Number of Copies
Print
1-Sided
2-Sided
XXX copies
Print
Simplex/Duplex
Number of Copies
Print
Print
2
Note
If the user authentication function has been specified on the machine, the screen to input the user name
appears after the Job Operation screen. Enter the user name and password.
If the Account Track function has been specified on the machine, the screen to input the department
name appears after the Job Operation screen. Enter the department name and password.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
8-11
Function detail description
8
8.3
Save in User Box
The Save in User Box function saves print jobs in the user box on the machine. Because a user box can be
specified from the control panel to output a job. This function is also useful for document distribution.
When printing, use the printer driver to specify "Save in User Box", and then use the control panel to execute
output.
2
Note
The User Box function is available only if a hard disk is installed on this machine.
User Box must be registered on this machine in advance. For details, refer to "Creating a new user box"
on page 10-25.
8.3.1
Setting up the printer driver
The following three printer drivers support setup of this feature:
Konica Minolta PCL Printer Driver for Windows
Konica Minolta PostScript Printer Driver for Windows
PostScript PPD Printer Driver for Mac OS X
Print with the following settings specified:
Output Method: "Save in User Box" or "Save in User Box/Print"
2
Note
To save in the user box and print at the same time, select "Save in User Box/Print".
For Windows
8-12
1
Click the Basic tab.
2
Select "Save in User Box" or "Save in User Box/Print" from the "Output Method" drop-down list.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Function detail description
8
3
Enter the file name of the document and the user box number for the save location.
4
Print the document.
2
Reminder
The file name and user box number that are required to save in a user box can be preregistered in the
User Settings dialog box on the Basic tab. If the same file name and user box number are always used
to save document, by preregistering them, the dialog box for entering the file name and user box
number will not appear when selecting "Save in User Box".
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
8-13
Function detail description
8
For Macintosh OS X
1
Display the "Output Method" dialog box.
2
Select "Save in User Box" or "Save in User Box/Print" from the "Output Method" drop-down list.
3
Enter the file name of the document and the user box number for the save location.
–
4
8-14
Select the "Save Settings" check box to save the specified settings. In addition, if the "Do not show
this window when setting" check box is selected, the dialog box does not appear when the function
is specified.
Print the document.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Function detail description
8.3.2
8
Recalling a job from the control panel
"Save in User Box" and "Save in User Box/Print" jobs are saved in a user box of the specified number.
To print a document saved in a user box, open the specified user box to retrieve the document. To call the
user box, press the [Menu/Select] key, and then the "Utility" menu appears. From this menu, select [Job
Operation]. Public User Box, Personal User Box, and Account User Box are available as user boxes. Select
the box where the box to which you saved the document is registered. If a password is specified for the user
box, the user box password is required.
2
Note
For details on the "Utility" menu operations, refer to "Control panel" on page 9-3.
Box documents are automatically deleted after a certain length of time has elapsed since their
registration. The default setting of this time is specified as 1 day, and the setting can be specified when
creating the user box.
Public User Box
Personal User Box
Account User Box
Select Box Number
Enter password. *
XXXX
All Documents
document XXXX
All Documents
Print
Print
Print
Simplex/Duplex
Print
Simplex/Duplex
Number of Copies
Print
Number of Copies
Print
1-Sided
2-Sided
XXX copies
Print
Simplex/Duplex
Number of Copies
Print
Print
* If a password is specified for the user box.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
8-15
Function detail description
8
2
Note
If the user authentication function has been specified on the machine, the screen to input the user name
appears after the Job Operation screen. Enter the user name and password.
If the Account Track function has been specified on the machine, the screen to input the department
name appears after the Job Operation screen. Enter the department name and password.
8-16
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Function detail description
8.4
8
Save in Annotation User Box
Print jobs can be saved in the Annotation User Box using the Save in User Box function. The Annotation User
Box is a system user box that can be used commonly by registered users.
When printing, use the printer driver to specify Save in User Box, and then use the control panel to execute
output.
2
Note
The Annotation User Box function is available only if a hard disk is installed on this machine.
The Annotation User Box must be registered on this machine in advance. For details, refer to "Creating
a new system user box" on page 10-29.
8.4.1
Setting up the printer driver
The following three printer drivers support setup of this feature:
Konica Minolta PCL Printer Driver for Windows
Konica Minolta PostScript Printer Driver for Windows
PostScript PPD Printer Driver for Mac OS X
Print with the following settings specified:
Output Method: "Save in User Box" or "Save in User Box/Print"
2
Note
To save in the user box and print at the same time, select "Save in User Box/Print".
For Windows
1
Click the Basic tab.
2
Select "Save in User Box" or "Save in User Box/Print" from the "Output Method" drop-down list.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
8-17
Function detail description
8
3
Enter the file name of the document and the Annotation user box number for the save location.
4
Print the document.
2
Reminder
The file name and user box number that are required to save in a user box can be preregistered in the
User Settings dialog box on the Basic tab. If the same file name and user box number are always used
to save document, by preregistering them, the dialog box for entering the file name and user box
number will not appear when selecting "Save in User Box".
8-18
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Function detail description
8
For Macintosh OS X
1
Display the "Output Method" dialog box.
2
Select "Save in User Box" or "Save in User Box/Print" from the "Output Method" drop-down list.
3
Enter the file name of the document and the Annotation user box number for the save location.
–
4
magicolor 8650
Select the "Save Settings" check box to save the specified settings. In addition, if the "Do not show
this window when setting" check box is selected, the dialog box does not appear when the function
is specified.
Print the document.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
8-19
Function detail description
8
8.4.2
Recalling a job from the control panel
"Save in User Box" and "Save in User Box/Print" jobs are saved in an Annotation user box of the specified
number.
To print a document saved in an Annotation user box, open the specified Annotation user box to retrieve the
document. To call the user box, press the [Menu/Select] key, and then the "Utility" menu appears. From this
menu, select [Job Operation] - [Annotation User Box]. Select the box where the box to which you saved the
document is registered. If a password is specified for the user box, the user box password is required.
2
Note
For details on the "Utility" menu operations, refer to "Control panel" on page 9-3.
Box documents are automatically deleted after a certain length of time has elapsed since their
registration. The default setting of this time is specified as 1 day, and the setting can be specified when
creating the user box.
Annotation User Box
Select Box Number
Enter password. *
XXXX
All Documents
document XXXX
All Documents
Print
Print
Print
Simplex/Duplex
Print
Simplex/Duplex
Number of Copies
Print
Number of Copies
Print
1-Sided
2-Sided
XXX copies
Print
Simplex/Duplex
Number of Copies
Print
Print
* If a password is specified for the user box.
8-20
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Function detail description
8
2
Note
If the user authentication function has been specified on the machine, the screen to input the user name
appears after the Job Operation screen. Enter the user name and password.
If the Account Track function has been specified on the machine, the screen to input the department
name appears after the Job Operation screen. Enter the department name and password.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
8-21
Function detail description
8
8.5
Save in Encrypted PDF Box
The Encrypted PDF Box is a function to save print jobs of the Encrypted PDF format in this machine.
To save in Encrypted PDF Box, specify the desired file on the Direct Print tab of the PageScope Web
Connection, and then execute output from the control panel.
2
Note
The Encrypted PDF Box function is available only if a hard disk is installed on this machine.
8.5.1
Specifying Encrypted PDF file
1
Save the encrypted PDF file in advance.
2
Specify the desired file in "Print" on the Direct Print tab of the PageScope Web Connection, and then
click the [Print] button.
The file is sent to the machine.
8-22
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Function detail description
8.5.2
8
Recalling a job from the control panel
The Encrypted PDF file is saved in the Encrypted PDF Box on this machine.
%
To print a document saved in a box, open the Encrypted PDF Box to retrieve the document.
– The PDF password is required when specifying a document.
2
Note
For details on the "Utility" menu operations, refer to "Control panel" on page 9-3.
Encrypted PDF Box
document XXXX
Print
Enter password.
Print
Print
2
Note
The screen to input the user name appears after the Job Operation screen. Enter the user name and
password.
If the Account Track function has been specified on the machine, the screen to input the department
name appears after the User Password screen. Enter the department name.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
8-23
Function detail description
8
8.6
Printing on a machine with the user authentication set up
When the user authentication function has been specified on the machine, a user name and password must
be entered when printing.
2
Reminder
To use the user authentication, "User Auth/Account Track" must be specified and user must be
registered in advance. For details, refer to "Limiting users using this machine (Machine authentication)"
on page 10-34.
If a print job is sent using a user name or password that is not valid for "Authentication Mode" on the
machine, or if a job is sent without setting up "User Authentication", the operation is not authenticated
by the machine and the job is canceled.
If the user authentication function is set up on the machine and the "ProhibitFunctions" in [Admin.
Settings]-[Security Details] is set to mode 2, the relevant user is locked and access may be blocked if
the authentication information is not entered correctly.
The following three printer drivers support setup of this feature:
Konica Minolta PCL Printer Driver for Windows
Konica Minolta PostScript Printer Driver for Windows
PostScript PPD Printer Driver for Mac OS X
2
Note
If printing is not allowed, printing cannot be performed even when used by a registered user. For details
on the user authentication details, consult the administrator of this machine.
If performing user authentication with an optional authentication unit, enter the user name and
password. For details, refer to "Touch and Print" on page 8-32.
8-24
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Function detail description
8.6.1
8
Setting up the printer driver
For Windows
1
Click the [Properties] button (or [Detail Setting] button) in the Print dialog box to display the Printing
Preferences dialog box.
2
Click the Basic tab.
3
Click the [Authentication/Account Track] button.
4
Select "Recipient User", and then enter the user name and password.
–
–
magicolor 8650
If the machine has been set to permit public users, "Public User" can be selected to access the
machine.
The password can also be preset in the printer driver as a default value so that it does not have to
set for each job.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
8-25
Function detail description
8
5
Click the [OK] button, and specify the desired settings, and then print the document.
–
If the entered user name is a name registered on the machine, the job is printed and counted as a
job for the specified user.
2
Reminder
If the user authentication settings are not specified on the Configure tab, user authentication cannot be
performed. If using the user authentication function, be sure to specify the settings on the Configure
tab. For details, refer to "Configure tab" on page 6-5.
If performing user authentication on a server, the server settings must be specified. Click the [User
Authentication Server Setting] button to select the server.
Click the [Verify] button to communicate with this machine and check whether authentication can be
performed with the user that was entered. This function is not available unless the connection is
enabled for communications with the machine.
8-26
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Function detail description
8
For Macintosh OS X
1
In the "File" menu, select "Print".
2
Select "Output Method".
3
Select the "User Authentication" check box.
4
Select "Recipient User", and then enter the user name and password.
–
magicolor 8650
If the machine has been set to permit public users, "Public User" can be selected to access the
machine.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
8-27
Function detail description
8
2
Note
Select the "Save Settings" check box to save the specified settings. In addition, if the "Do not show this
window when setting" check box is selected, the dialog box does not appear when the function is
specified.
If performing user authentication on a server, the server settings must be specified. Click the [User
Authentication Server Setting] button to select the server.
8-28
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Function detail description
8.7
8
Printing with the machine enabling the Account Track function
When the Account Track function is enabled on the machine, enter a department name (or a password) when
printing a job.
2
Reminder
To use the Account Track function, "User Auth/Account Track" must be specified and Account Track
must be registered in advance. For details, refer to "Limiting users using this machine (Machine
authentication)" on page 10-34.
If a print job is sent using a password that is not valid for the Account Track function on the machine,
or if a job is sent without specifying "Account Track", the machine does not authenticate the access
and the job is canceled. When the account track settings are specified on the machine, the
"ProhibitFunctions" in [Admin. Settings]-[Security Details] is set to mode 2, and the authentication
information is not entered correctly, the account may be locked and access may fail.
The following three printer drivers support setup of this feature:
Konica Minolta PCL Printer Driver for Windows
Konica Minolta PostScript Printer Driver for Windows
PostScript PPD Printer Driver for Mac OS X
2
Note
If printing is not allowed, printing cannot be performed even for a registered account.
For the Account Track function, contact the administrator of the machine.
8.7.1
Setting up the printer driver
For Windows
1
Click the [Properties] button (or [Detail Setting] button) in the Print dialog box to display the Printing
Preferences dialog box.
2
Click the Basic tab.
3
Click the [Authentication/Account Track] button.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
8-29
Function detail description
8
4
Enter the department name and password.
–
5
The password can also be preset in the printer driver as a default value so that it does not have to
set for each job.
Click the [OK] button, and specify the desired settings, and then print the document.
If the entered password is a password registered on this machine, the job is printed and counted as a
job for the account.
2
Reminder
If the account track settings are not specified on the Configure tab, account track cannot be performed.
If using the Account Track function, be sure to specify the settings on the Configure tab. For details,
refer to "Configure tab" on page 6-5.
Click the [Verify] button to communicate with this machine and check whether authentication can be
performed with the account that was entered. This function is not available unless the connection is
enabled for communications with the machine.
8-30
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Function detail description
8
For Macintosh OS X
1
In the "File" menu, select "Print".
2
Select "Output Method".
3
Select the "Account Track" check box.
4
Enter the department name and password.
2
Note
Select the "Save Settings" check box to save the specified settings. In addition, if the "Do not show this
window when setting" check box is selected, the dialog box does not appear when the function is
specified.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
8-31
Function detail description
8
8.8
Touch and Print
When an optional authentication unit (biometrics type) or authentication unit (IC card type) is used, simply
touching the authentication unit with the finger or an IC card enables user authentication and printing. This
function is referred to as the Touch and Print.
Also with this type of user authentication, to print via a computer, enter the user name and password in the
printer driver, just like when using common user authentication.
!
Detail
For details, refer to "Printing on a machine with the user authentication set up" on page 8-24.
2
Note
To use the Touch and Print function, the Touch and Print function must be set to ON in [Admin. Settings]
- [AuthDeviceSetting] - [Touch & Print] in the Utility mode accessed by pressing the [Menu/Select] key.
For details, refer to "AuthDeviceSetting" on page 9-28.
8-32
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Function detail description
8.8.1
8
Touch and Print operation procedure
1
Enter the user name and password in the printer driver, and then print.
2
–
For Windows:
–
For Macintosh OS X:
Touch the authentication unit of the machine.
Once the user is authenticated, the document is printed.
!
Detail
For details on the authentication unit, refer to "Authentication unit (Biometric type AU-101)" on
page 15-3 or "Authentication unit (IC card type AU-201)" on page 16-3.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
8-33
Function detail description
8
8.8.2
Recalling a job from the control panel
The jobs output by the Touch and Print function are saved in the Touch & Print Box on this machine and can
be manually retrieved by opening the Touch & Print Box.
When displaying the "Job Operation" menu, user name and password are required.
2
Note
For details on the "Utility" menu operations, refer to "Control panel" on page 9-3.
Touch and Print documents are automatically deleted after a certain length of time has elapsed since
their registration. The default setting for this time is specified as 1 day, and the value can be specified
in the Administrator mode.
Job Operation
Enter User Name
Select User
Enter password.
Touch & Print Box
All Documents
document XXXX
Print
Print
8-34
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Function detail description
8.9
8
Specifying a user-defined encryption passphrase
The machine and the printer driver communicate with each other by encrypting a user password, account
password or secure document password using a common encryption key.
Although an encryption passphrase for generating the encryption common key is preset as a default setting,
it can also be generated with a user-defined encryption passphrase.
When specifying a user-defined encryption passphrase, specify the same encryption passphrase for the
machine and the printer driver.
2
Note
If different values are used for the encryption passphrase for the machine and the printer driver, the
machine cannot decrypt the encrypted user password, account password or secure document
password. Then printing cannot be performed.
The encryption passphrase automatically generates the common encryption key. The common
encryption key cannot be specified directly.
8.9.1
Settings of this machine
%
Press the [Menu/Select] key, and then the "Utility" menu appears. From this menu, select [Admin.
Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Driver Encryption] - [Encryption Setting].
– To change the setting for "Encryption Passphrase", select "User-Defined", and then make an entry
for "Encryption Passphrase". To do without specifying a user definition for "Encryption
Passphrase", select "Factory Default".
2
Note
For details on the "Utility" menu operations, refer to "Control panel" on page 9-3.
Admin. Settings
Admin. Settings
Security Settings
Admin. Password
Admin. Sec. Levels
Security Details
EnhancedSecurity
HDD Settings
Driver Encryption
EncryptionSetting
EncryptionPassphrase
2
Note
When entering the encryption passphrase, use 20 alphanumeric characters. Specify the same
encryption passphrase for the machine and the printer driver.
An encryption key using a series of the same character is invalid.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
8-35
Function detail description
8
8.9.2
Setting up the printer driver
The following three printer drivers support setup of this feature:
Konica Minolta PCL Printer Driver for Windows (PCL driver)
Konica Minolta PostScript Printer Driver for Windows (PS driver)
PostScript PPD Printer Driver for Mac OS X
For Windows
1
Display the Properties screen.
–
To display the Properties window, open the Printers window or the Printers and Faxes window. In
that window, right-click the icon of the installed printer, and then click "Properties".
2
Click the Device Information tab.
3
Select the "Encryption Passphrase" check box and enter the encryption passphrase.
–
4
To do without specifying a user definition for "Encryption Passphrase", clear "Encryption
Passphrase".
Click the [OK] button.
2
Note
When entering the encryption passphrase, use 20 alphanumeric characters. Specify the same
encryption passphrase for the machine and the printer driver.
An encryption key using a series of the same character is invalid.
When SSL is enabled in OpenAPI and the printer driver can obtain the device information automatically,
it is also possible to obtain the common encryption key from this machine automatically.
8-36
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Function detail description
8
For Macintosh OS X
1
Display the Output Method dialog box.
2
Click the [Detail Settings] button.
The Detail Settings dialog box appears.
3
Select "Administrator Settings", and then click the [Settings] button.
The Administrator Settings dialog box appears.
4
Select the "Encryption Passphrase" check box and enter the encryption passphrase.
–
5
magicolor 8650
To do without specifying a user definition for "Encryption Passphrase", clear "Encryption
Passphrase".
Click the [OK] button.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
8-37
Function detail description
8
2
Note
When entering the encryption passphrase, use 20 alphanumeric characters. Specify the same
encryption passphrase for the machine and the printer driver.
An encryption key using a series of the same character is invalid.
8-38
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Function detail description
8.10
8
ICC profile settings
The printer driver has a function to specify ICC profiles registered on the machine when performing a print
job.
2
Note
To specify the default setting for the ICC profile registered on the machine, go to [Set ICC Profile].
To call [Set ICC Profile], press the [Menu/Select] key, and then the "Utility" menu appears. From this
menu, select [User Settings] - [Printer Settings] - [PS Settings] - [Set ICC Profile].
For details on the "Utility" menu operations, refer to "Control panel" on page 9-3.
In order to utilize the ICC profiles added to the machine, the ICC profiles on this machine must be
registered in the printer driver beforehand. For details, refer to "Registering ICC profiles in the printer
driver" on page 8-41.
8.10.1
Setting up the printer driver
The following two printer drivers support setup of this feature:
Konica Minolta PostScript Printer Driver for Windows (PS driver)
PostScript PPD Printer Driver for Mac OS X
For Windows
1
Display the Quality tab.
2
Click the [Quality Adjustment] button.
The Quality Adjustment dialog box appears.
3
Click the ICC Profile tab.
4
Click the [Detail] button and select a document type.
5
Select relevant items for "RGB Source", "Destination Profile", and "Simulation Profile", respectively.
– This enables to select ICC profiles registered in the printer driver.
When printing, color processing is performed according to the selected ICC profiles.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
8-39
Function detail description
8
6
Click the [OK] button.
For Macintosh OS X
1
Display the Quality dialog box.
2
Click the [Quality Adjustment] button.
The Quality Adjustment dialog box appears.
3
Select relevant items for "RGB Source", "Destination Profile", and "Simulation Profile" according to the
type of the document to be printed.
–
This enables to select ICC profiles registered in the printer driver.
When printing, color processing is performed according to the selected ICC profiles.
4
8-40
Click the [OK] button.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Function detail description
8.11
8
Registering ICC profiles in the printer driver
Additional ICC profiles downloaded and added to the machine can be registered in the printer driver.
A registered ICC profile can be specified when printing.
8.11.1
Setting up the printer driver
The following two printer drivers support setup of this feature:
Konica Minolta PostScript Printer Driver for Windows
PostScript PPD Printer Driver for Mac OS X
!
Detail
To register ICC profile in the machine, use the Download Manager (magicolor) application. For details,
refer to the Help for the application software.
For Windows
1
Click the Quality tab.
2
Click the [Quality Adjustment] button.
The Quality Adjustment dialog box appears.
3
Click the [Manage Profile] button.
–
The Color Profile Management function communicates with the machine to read ICC profiles
available to the machine. This function is not available unless the connection is enabled for
communications with the machine.
– If the machine is connected via the USB connector, it cannot read ICC profiles available to the
machine.
– Click [Download Manager], and the Download Manager (magicolor) application starts. This function
is only available when Download Manager (magicolor) is installed.
– Downloading of ICC profile is available only if the optional HDD is installed.
The Color Profile Management dialog box appears.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
8-41
Function detail description
8
4
Check that a list of available profiles that are additionally registered on the machine is displayed.
5
Click the tab and select a color profile type.
6
Select a desired profile from the "Available Profile" list, and then click the [Add Sel =>] button.
–
To register the current driver settings as a profile, click the [New] button, and then enter a file name
and a profile name.
– The profile name can be changed from "Edit".
The selected profile is added to "Driver Profile List". Then it can be selected in the Quality Adjustment
dialog box from ICC Profile entries.
7
8-42
Click the [OK] button.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Function detail description
8
For Macintosh OS X
1
Display the Quality dialog box.
2
Click the [Quality Adjustment] button.
The Quality Adjustment dialog box appears.
3
Click the [Manage Profile] button.
–
The Color Profile Management function communicates with the machine to read profiles available
to the machine. This function is not available unless the connection is enabled for communications
with the machine.
– Click [Download Manager], and the Download Manager (magicolor) application starts. This function
is only available when Download Manager (magicolor) is installed.
– For Download Manager for Macintosh OS X, download it from the Web site of Konica Minolta.
The Color Profile Management dialog box appears.
4
magicolor 8650
Check that a list of available profiles that are additionally registered on the machine is displayed.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
8-43
Function detail description
8
5
Select a color profile type from the drop-down list.
6
Select a desired profile from the "Available Profile" list, and then click the [Add Sel->] button.
–
To register the current driver settings as a profile, click [New], and then enter a file name and a profile
name.
– The profile name can be changed from "New/Edit".
The selected profile is added to "Driver Profile List". Then it can be selected in the Quality Adjustment
dialog box from profile entries.
7
8-44
Click the [OK] button.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Function detail description
8.12
8
Banner paper printing function
By specifying the banner print settings on the control panel, allows you to print on the paper up to 1,200mm
feeded from the tray 1 (bypass tray).
In the following section, setting long paper and printing on it is referred to as banner paper printing.
8.12.1
Copy paper
Applicable paper
8.12.2
Paper width
Paper length
Paper type
210 to 297mm
457.3 to 1,200.0mm
Thick paper 1, Thick paper 1 + Duplex 2nd Side, Thick paper2,
Thick paper2 + Duplex 2nd Side (127 to 210 g/m2)
Printer drivers and supported operating systems
The following drivers support banner paper printing:
Konica Minolta PCL Printer Driver (PCL driver)
Konica Minolta PostScript Printer Driver (Windows PS driver)
2
Note
Banner Printing does not support Macintosh OS 9.2/OS X.
8.12.3
Setting up the printer driver
Specify the output paper size as a custom paper size.
1
Click the Basic tab.
2
Select "Custom Size" from "Original Size" or "Paper Size".
The Custom Size Settings dialog box appears.
3
Specify the length and the width of the custom paper size according to the selected measurement unit.
4
Specify the paper type.
–
5
If necessary, specify the other settings.
Click the [OK] button.
2
Note
For the Konica Minolta PCL Printer Driver, custom size setting can also be preregistered on the Initial
Setting tab in the printer driver activated from the Windows "Printer" window ("Printers and Faxes" for
Windows XP/Server 2003).
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
8-45
Function detail description
8
8.12.4
Printing
To execute the Banner paper printing, press the [Menu/Select] key, and then the "Utility" menu appears. From
this menu, select [Banner Printing].
8-46
1
Press the [Menu/Select] key.
2
Select [Banner Printing], and then press the [Menu/Select] key.
3
Select [ON], and then press the [Menu/Select] key.
4
When finisher FS-609 is installed, slide the finisher away from this machine, and then load the banner
paper that can be used for the paper transport on the finisher.
5
Send and print the document data of the banner size via the computer.
6
Open the tray 1.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Function detail description
8
7
Install the mounting kit to the tray 1.
8
Erect the guide of the mounting kit.
9
With the side to be printed on facing down, insert the paper as much as possible into the feed slot.
–
Place in the tray as many sheets as the specified number of copies to be printed.
10
Slide the lateral guides of the tray 1 to fit the size of paper
being loaded.
11
If the following screen appears, press the [Menu/Select] key.
–
Note that when printing on non-standard size paper (post cards, envelopes, or other non-standard
size) using Tray 1 (bypass tray), you will need to reload the paper to reconfirm the size and type of
paper if you are sending document data after loading paper of non-standard size into Tray 1.
The data is printed.
To continue printing, send the document data via the computer.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
8-47
Function detail description
8
12
8-48
To finish printing the job, press the [Cancel] key, select [Yes], and then press the [Menu/Select] key. Not
to finish printing the job, select [No] to continue printing.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
9
Settings for control panel
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Settings for control panel
9
9
Settings for control panel
9.1
Control panel
The control panel allows you to print or delete jobs, specify default settings for paper, or change network
settings.
9.1.1
Basic operations
The following shows examples of changing settings on the control panel using the following functions.
Basic menu operations -> Printing Configuration Page
Operations for changing numeric values -> Displaying the Administrator Settings screen
Basic menu operations
Example: Printing Configuration Page
1
Press the [Menu/Select] key.
The Main Menu of the "Utility" menu appears.
2
Press the [,] key several times to select [User Settings], and then press the [Menu/Select] key.
The User Setting Menu appears.
3
Press the [,] key several times to select [Print Reports], and then press the [Menu/Select] key.
The Print Reports Menu appears.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
9-3
Settings for control panel
9
4
Press the [,] key several times to select [Configuration], and then press the [Menu/Select] key.
The Configuration Menu appears.
5
Press the [,] key several times to select the side to be printed on, and then press the [Menu/Select] key.
Printing starts.
2
Note
When "ON" is specified for [Admin. Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Admin. Sec. Levels], the password
is required to display the User Setting Menu.
The factory default password is "1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8".
Specify the password in [Admin. Password] accessed by selecting [Admin. Settings] - [Security
Settings].
When selecting a menu or item, you can press the [)] key instead of the [Menu/Select] key.
9-4
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Settings for control panel
9
Operations for changing numeric values
Example: Displaying the Administrator Settings screen
1
Press the [Menu/Select] key.
The Main Menu of the "Utility" menu appears.
2
Press the [,] key several times to select [Admin. Settings], and then press the [Menu/Select] key.
The password input screen appears.
3
Press the [+] or [,] key several times to display the character to be entered at the first character place.
Press the [+] key to switch the display in the order of "a, b, c...".
Press the [,] key to switch the display in the order of "9, 8, 7...".
Characters are displayed in the following order:
[+] abcde···xyzABCDE···XYZ!#$%&'()*,-./:;<=>[email protected][\]^_`{|}~0123456789 [,]
4
magicolor 8650
Press the [)] key to move the cursor to the second character place.
If an incorrect value was entered, press the [*] key to move the cursor, and then specify the correct
value.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
9-5
Settings for control panel
9
5
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to specify values for all digits of the password.
6
After entering the password, press the [Menu/Select] key.
The Admin. Settings Menu appears where the desired Administrator Setting parameter can be
changed.
2
Note
When selecting a menu or item, you can press the [)] key instead of the [Menu/Select] key.
To display the Admin. Settings Menu, the password is required.
The factory default password is "1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8".
Specify the password in [Admin. Password] accessed by selecting [Admin. Settings] - [Security
Settings].
9-6
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Settings for control panel
9.2
9
List of "Utility" menu parameters
The following outlines items displayed in the "Utility" menu.
The menu to be displayed differs depending on other parameters or whether options are installed.
Main Menu
Main Menu
Ready to Print
Meter Count
Job Operation
Paper Settings
User Settings
System Settings
Admin. Settings
Service Mode
Banner Printing
2
Note
[Meter Count] and [Service Mode] are the menus for adjusting and maintaining the printer used by your
service representative or the manufacturer. Users do not use them.
Job Operation Menu
Job Operation Menu
Job Operation
Public User Box
Personal User Box
Account User Box
Secure PrintBox
AnnotationUserBox
EncryptedPDFBox
Touch&PrintBox
ProofPrint
2
Note
If user authentication or account track settings are specified for the machine, the user name, account
name, and password are required to display "Job Operation Menu".
When a password is specified for each box, the password is required to display the box.
The ID and password are required to display [Secure PrintBox]. The time to enter the password differs
depending on the setting for [SecurePrintAccess]. When "Mode 1" is specified for [SecurePrintAccess],
enter the ID, and then enter the password. When "Mode 2" is specified for [SecurePrintAccess], enter
the ID, select a document, and then enter the password.
If an incorrect password is entered, the box does not appear.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
9-7
Settings for control panel
9
Paper Setting Menu
Paper Setting Menu
Paper Settings
Tray1
Paper Size
Paper Type
Tray2
Wide Paper Size
Paper Type
Tray3
Wide Paper Size
Paper Type
Tray4
Wide Paper Size
Paper Type
Tray5
Wide Paper Size
Paper Type
Tray4
Paper Type
2
Note
When "ON" is specified for [Admin. Sec. Levels] of [Admin. Settings], the password is required to
display the Paper Setting Menu.
The factory default password is "1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8".
Specify the password in [Admin. Password] accessed by selecting [Admin. Settings] - [Security
Settings].
If an incorrect password is entered, the Paper Setting Menu does not appear.
When the password became invalid due to an authentication failure and the machine enters the restrict
operation status, restart the machine.
When "Custom Size" or "Wide Paper Size" is selected for [Paper Size] of [Tray 1], specify a paper size
using a numeric value.
The paper tray to be displayed differs depending on the installed options.
9-8
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Settings for control panel
9
User Setting Menu
User Setting Menu
User Settings
Print Reports
Configuration
GDI Demo Page
Statistics Page
PS Font List
PCL Font List
Meter Count
Consumables
Consumables
System Settings
Language Setting
PowerSave Setting
Low Power Setting
SleepMode Setting
EnteringSleepMode
EnteringPowerSave
PaperTray Setting
AutoTraySelection
Tray Priority
AutoTray Switch
No Matching Paper
Output Settings
Print/Fax Output
Blank Page Print
Output Tray
Shift Each Job
Bin Assignment
Printer Settings
Basic Settings
PDL Setting
Number of Copies
OriginalDirection
Spool Setting
Paper Size Switch
Banner Sheet
BindingPos. Adjust
Paper Settings
Paper Tray
Paper Size
2-Sided Print
Binding Position
Staple
Punch
Banner Paper Tray
PCL Settings
Font Setting
Symbol Set
Font Size
pitch
CR/LF Mapping
PS Settings
Print PS Errors
Set ICC Profile
XPS Setting
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Verify XPS Sign.
9-9
Settings for control panel
9
2
Note
When "ON" is specified for [Admin. Sec. Levels] of [Admin. Settings], the password is required to
display the User Setting Menu.
Specify the password in [Admin. Password] accessed by selecting [Admin. Settings] - [Security
Settings].
The factory default password is "1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8".
If an incorrect password is entered, the User Setting Menu does not appear.
When the password became invalid due to an authentication failure and the machine enters the restrict
operation status, restart the machine.
[SleepMode Setting] is not displayed if [Restrict] is selected for [Don’t got to Sleep] in [Service Mode].
Changing this menu must be performed by a service engineer.
[Output Tray] and [Shift Each Job] appear when an optional finisher is installed.
[Bin Assignment] appears when the Mailbin kit is installed on the optional finisher.
9-10
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Settings for control panel
9
System Setting Menu
System Setting Menu
System Settings
System Settings
Date/Time Settings
Date Setting
Time Setting
Time Zone Setting
Time Adjustment
Daylight Saving
DST Setting
Saving Time
LCD Brightness
Management List
Job Settings List
Counter List
System Auto Reset
SysAutoReset Set
SysAutoReset Time
Network Settings
TCP/IP
TCP/IP Setting
IP Setting
IPv6
DNS Server
IP Filtering
IPsec
RAW Port Number
Host Name
DNS Domain
DynamicDNSSetting
NetWare
IPX
NetWare Print
UserAuth. Set NDS
HTTP Server
HTTPServerSetting
PSWC Setting
IPP Setting
IPP Auth. Setting
Accept IPP jobs
Support Info.
Printer Info.
SMB
Print Setting
WINS
Direct Hosting
Web Service
WebServiceSetting
SNMP
SNMP Setting
Printer Setting
SNMP v1/v2c(IP)
SNMP v3(IP)
SNMP v1(IPX)
UPD Port Number
SNMPv1v2cSetting
SNMP v3 Setting
TRAP Setting
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
9-11
Settings for control panel
9
System Setting Menu
System Settings
Network Settings
AppleTalk
AppleTalkSetting
Printer Name
Zone Name
Bonjour
Bonjour Setting
Bonjour Name
TCP Socket
TCP Socket
Detail Settings
Network Speed
TCP Socket ASCII
TimeAdjustmentSet
When InvalidCert.
Ping Confirmation
Printer Settings
USB Timeout
Network Timeout
Print XPS Errors
System Connection
OpenAPI Settings
Access Setting
Enable SSL
Authentication
PortNumberSetting
CallRemoteCenter
2
Note
When "ON" or "MINIMUM" is specified for [Admin. Sec. Levels] of [Admin. Settings], the password is
required to display the System Setting Menu.
The factory default password is "1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8".
Specify the password in [Admin. Password] accessed by selecting [Admin. Settings] - [Security
Settings].
If an incorrect password is entered, the System Setting Menu does not appear.
When the password became invalid due to an authentication failure and the machine enters the restrict
operation status, restart the machine.
[Date/TimeSettings] - [Time Adjustment] are displayed when "ON" is specified for "NTP Setting" which
is accessible by selecting [Network Settings] - [Detail Settings] - [TimeAdjustmentSet].
The parameters for [TCP/IP], [HTTP Server], [SNMP], [AppleTalk], and [Bonjour] are displayed when
"ON" is specified for [TCP/IP Setting], [HTTPServerSetting], [SNMP Setting], [AppleTalkSetting], and
[Bonjour Setting].
If the network settings are changed, restart the machine to apply changes.
When the power is turned off, then on, turn off the power, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn it on.
Otherwise, the machine may not operate correctly.
[OpenAPI Settings] - [SSL] are not displayed when the SSL certificate is not installed or "ON" is
specified for [EnhancedSecurity].
[CallRemoteCenter] is not displayed if center registration performed by selecting [Service Mode] [CS Remote Care] is not completed. Changing this menu must be performed by a service engineer.
9-12
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Settings for control panel
9
Admin. Settings Menu
Admin. Settings Menu
Admin. Settings
Security Settings
Admin. Password
Admin. Sec. Levels
Security Details
Password Rules
ProhibitFunctions
SecurePrintAccess
PrintDataCapture
DeleteJobHistory
Audit Log
EnhancedSecurity
HDD Settings
Format HDD
CheckHDDCapacity
OverwriteAllArea
Overwrite HDDdata
OverwritePriority
RegisterHDDLockPW
HDD EncryptionSet
Driver Encryption
EncryptionSetting
EncryptionPassphrase
User Box Settings
Delete User Box
DeleteSecurePrint
Delete Time
Secure PrintBox
EncryptedPDFBox
Touch&PrintBox
Doc. Hold Setting
AuthDeviceSetting
CardAuth. Settings
IC Card Type
Operation Setting
BioAuth. Settings
Beep Sound
Touch & Print
Touch&PrintUserBox
Operation Setting
Print
Expert Adjustment
PrinterAdjustment
Leading Edge Adj.
Centering
Leading (Duplex)
Centering (Duplex)
Vertical Adj.
EraseLeadingEdge
Finisher Adjust
Center Staple Pos
Half-Fold Pos.
DensityAdjustment
Thick/Yellow
Thick/Magenta
Thick/Cyan
Thick/Black
BlackImageDensity
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
9-13
Settings for control panel
9
Admin. Settings Menu
Admin. Settings
Expert Adjustment
Stabilization
Initialize+Stabi.
StabilizationOnly
ColorRegistration
Yellow
Magenta
Cyan
Test Pattern
Gradation Pattern
Halftone Pattern
Option Settings
HDD Installation
Punch OptionSet
Punch Kit Type
# of Holes
AuthDeviceSetting
Auth. Mode
Reading Timeout
Firmware Update
2
Note
To display the Admin. Settings Menu, the password is required.
Specify the administrator password in [Admin. Password] accessed by selecting [Admin. Settings] [Security Settings].
The factory default password is "1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8".
If an incorrect administrator password is entered, the Admin. Settings Menu does not appear.
When the password became invalid due to an administrator authentication failure and the machine
enters the restrict operation status, restart the machine.
[PrintDataCapture] is displayed when "OFF" is specified for [EnhancedSecurity].
[HDD Settings] and [User Box Settings] are displayed when a hard disk drive is installed.
[OverwritePriority] and [HDD EncryptionSet] are displayed when the Security kit is installed.
[EncryptionPassphrase] is displayed when [User-Defined] is specified for [EncryptionSetting].
[AuthDeviceSetting] is displayed when the authentication unit and HDD are installed.
[Finisher Adjust] is displayed when the finisher is installed.
[HDD Installation] is displayed when the hard disk drive is installed.
[Punch OptionSet] is displayed when the finisher is installed.
[Reading Timeout] is displayed when [Biometric] is specified for [Auth. Mode].
9-14
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Settings for control panel
9
Banner Printing Menu
Banner Printing
ON
OFF
Banner Printing
OK to quit?
2
Note
When the Finisher FS-609 is installed, after setting Banner Printing to "ON", a message that prompts
you to remove the finisher from the machine appears.
When a print job is sent on the Banner Printing screen, printing is performed. When the job is sent, a
message prompting you to load paper appears. Load paper of the appropriate size.
To return to the original state, press the [Cancel] key on the Banner Printing screen, and then select
"Yes" for [OK to quit?] or "OFF" for the [Banner Printing] menu.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
9-15
Settings for control panel
9
9.3
Parameters
9.3.1
Job Operation Menu
User name input items
Menu
Description
User Name
Enter the user name.
User Name List
Select the user name from the user name list displayed.
User Password
Enter the user password.
2
Note
The User name input items are displayed when using the User authentication function on the machine.
Account name input items
Menu
Description
Account Name
Type in the name for the account.
Account Password
Type in the password for the account.
2
Note
The Account name input items are displayed when using the User authentication function on the
machine.
Document selection items
Menu
Description
Public User Box
Select the document, and then print it.
When a password is specified, the password must be entered to select the box.
When there are multiple documents, select "All Documents" or individual document.
Personal User Box
Account User Box
Secure PrintBox
Select the document, and then print it. The ID and password must be entered.
AnnotationUserBox
Select the document, and then print it.
When a password is specified, the password must be entered to select the box.
When there are multiple documents, select "All Documents" or individual document.
EncryptedPDFBox
Select the document, and then print it. When executing printing, the password specified for the PDF must be entered.
Touch&PrintBox
Normally printing is executed when the user is authenticated. Selection of a document
in this box is not required.
Proof Print
Select the document, and then print it.
2
Note
[Personal User Box] is displayed when using the User authentication function on the machine.
[Account User Box] is displayed when using the Account Track function on the machine.
The User Box function is available only if a hard disk is installed on this machine.
9-16
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Settings for control panel
9
Printing items
When documents, one document from one box, are selected in the Job Operation Menu, the printing-related
menu appears.
Menu
Description
Default Setting
Print
Start printing.
–
Simplex/Duplex
Specify "2-Sided" or "1-Sided".
1-Side
Number of Copies
Specify the number of copies.
001
Center Staple Pos
Adjust the center binding position.
0
Half-Fold Pos.
Adjust the center folding position.
0
2
Note
[Center Staple Pos.] is displayed when "Center Staple and Fold" is specified for the printer driver.
[Half-Fold Pos.] is displayed when "Fold" is specified for the printer driver.
Settings for [Center Staple Pos] and [Half-Fold Pos.] vary depending on the finisher installed. When
FS-609 is installed, the values for position adjustment can only be specified. When FS-519 is installed,
the values for position adjustment can be specified for each paper size or paper type.
9.3.2
Paper Settings Menu
Menu
Description
Default Setting
Paper Size
Select the size of paper loaded in Bypass.
Auto Detect
Paper Type
Select the type of paper loaded in Bypass.
Plain Paper
Tray2-5
Wide Paper Size
Specify when using wide paper.
OFF
Paper Type
Select the type of paper loaded in Tray2-5.
Plain Paper
Tray4
Paper Type
Select the type of paper loaded in LCT.
Plain Paper
Tray1
2
Note
The paper tray to be displayed differs depending on the installed options.
Among the Paper Settings value, values marked with "-R" represent that the papers are set in the
transversal direction, and values marked with "W" represents the wide papers.
When "Custom Size" or "Wide Paper Size" is selected for [Paper Size] of [Tray 1], specify a paper size
using a numeric value.
When "Letterhead" is selected for "Paper Type", print speed is reduced, even with single-sided printing,
since the paper alignment operation is performed.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
9-17
Settings for control panel
9
9.3.3
User Settings Menu
Print Reports
Menu
Description
Configuration
Outputs a list of settings in the machine.
GDI Demo Page
Outputs a test page.
Statistics Page
Prints the statistics page including the number of copies.
PS Font List
Outputs the PS font list.
PCL Font List
Outputs the PCL font list.
Meter Count
Prints the Meter Count page.
Consumables
Prints the consumables information page.
Consumables
Menu
Description
Imaging Unit C
Displays the status of use.
Imaging Unit M
Imaging Unit Y
Imaging Unit K
Fusing Unit
TransferBelt Unit
System Settings
Menu
Description
Default
Setting
Language Setting
Select the language of the panel message.
English
Low Power Setting
Specify the desired length of time (between 2 and 240 minutes) until the machine enters Power Save mode.
15 minutes
SleepMode Setting
Select whether to enable the Sleep setting.
ON
EnteringSleepMode
Specify the desired length of time (between 2 and 240 minutes) until the machine enters Sleep mode.
20 minutes
EnteringPowerSave
As conditions for moving to the Power Save mode, select
"Normal" or "Immediately".
Immediately
AutoTraySelection
Specify the paper trays that are selected when the Auto Tray
Switch feature is performed.
T2, T3,
T4, T5
Tray Priority
Specify the priority for selecting the paper trays when the
Auto Tray Switch feature is performed.
T2, T3,
T4, T5
AutoTray Switch
Select whether or not a paper tray loaded with paper of the
same size is selected automatically when the paper tray becomes empty.
OFF
No Matching Paper
Select the operation that is performed when there is no paper of the corresponding size in the specified paper tray.
• Stop Printing: The machine stops operating. (Stop Printing)
• Switch Trays: The specified paper trays are selected in
the specified order of priority and, when the tray runs out
of paper, the next paper tray is selected. (Switch Trays)
Stop
Printing
PowerSave
Setting
PaperTray Setting
9-18
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Settings for control panel
9
Menu
Output Settings
Description
Default
Setting
Print Output
Select whether the machine waits until the first page of a
print job is received before starting to print or whether the
machine waits until all data is received before starting to
print.
Page
Print
Blank Page Print
Select whether or not to print a blank page if it is included.
Do Not
Print
Output Tray
Specify the priority for using the output trays of the finisher.
Finisher
Tray1
Shift Each Job
Select whether or not to use offset for each job.
ON
Bin Assignment
The output tray 1 of the finisher FS-519 can be specified as
mailbin 5, and the output tray 2 can be specified as
mailbin 6.
When an additional output tray is installed, the output tray 1
of the finisher FS-519 can be specified as mailbin 5 and the
additional output tray can be specified as mailbin 6.
Don’t
Set
2
Note
[SleepMode Setting] is not displayed if [Restrict] is selected for [Don’t got to Sleep] in [Service Mode].
Changing this menu must be performed by a service engineer.
[Output Tray] and [Shift Each Job] appear when an optional finisher FS-519 is installed.
[Bin Assignment] appears when the Mailbin kit is installed on the optional finisher FS-519.
Printer Settings
Menu
Basic Settings
Paper Settings
magicolor 8650
Description
Default Setting
PDL Setting
Specify the printer description language as "Auto",
"PCL", or "PS".
Auto
Number of Copies
Specify the number of copies to be printed (between
1 and 999).
001
OriginalDirection
Select the orientation of the print image.
Portrait
Spool Setting
Select whether or not a spool is used.
• ON: If another job is received while a job is being
performed, the next job is saved on the HDD.
• OFF: The print data is not saved on the HDD.
ON
Paper Size Switch
Select whether or not paper size substitutions
A4<=>Letter and A3<=>Ledger are permitted.
OFF
Banner Sheet
Select whether or not to print banner pages (front cover pages) containing the name of the sender and the
subject of the print job.
OFF
BindingPos. Adjust
Select whether to adjust the binding position for duplex printing.
• Finishing: All pages can be processed to an optimum condition because the machine adjusts the
binding positions after receiving the print data.
• Productivity: Printing is performed efficiently because the machine processes data reception and
printing concurrently.
• ControlAdjustment: The machine follows the settings specified in the printer driver without adjusting the binding position.
Finishing
Paper Tray
Select the paper tray that is to be used.
Auto
Paper Size
Select the size of paper that is to be used.
Letter
2-Sided Print
Select whether or not pages are printed on both sides.
OFF
Binding Position
Select the binding position for double-sided printing.
Left Bind
Staple
Select whether or not pages are to be stapled.
OFF
Punch
Select whether or not holes are to be punched in the
pages.
OFF
Banner PaperTray
Select the paper tray used to print banner pages.
Auto
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
9-19
Settings for control panel
9
Menu
PCL Settings
PS Settings
XPS Setting
Description
Default Setting
Font Setting
Specifies the font with the font number.
For details on font numbers and corresponding fonts,
refer to the "Font List" on the following page.
000
Symbol Set
Specify the symbol set to be used.
Roman-8
Font Size
Specify the font size to be used.
Scalable Font 12.00 point
Bitmap Font 10.00 pitch
Pitch
Specify the number of lines per page.
60Lines
CR/LF Mapping
Specify the substitution method for printing text data.
• CR=CR LF=LF: No substitution is performed.
• CR=CRLF LF=LF: CR is substituted with CR-LF.
• CR=CR LF=CRLF: LF is substituted with CR-LF.
• R=CRLF LF=CRLF: Substitute with CR-LF.
CR=CR LF=LF
Print PS Errors
Select whether or not error information is printed when
an error has occurred during PS rasterization.
OFF
Set ICC Profile
Select the default profile setting that is displayed in
the printer driver.
–
Verify XPS Sign.
Specify a setting to perform or not to perform digital
signature verification in XPS printing. When "ON" is
selected for signature verification, the document without a valid digital signature is not printed.
OFF
Font List
9-20
No.
Font Name
No.
Font Name
0
Courier
40
Helvetica BoldOblique
1
CG Times
41
Helvetica Narrow
2
CG Times Bold
42
Helvetica Narrow Bold
3
CG Times Italic
43
Helvetica Narrow Oblique
4
CG Times Bold Italic
44
Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique
5
CG Omega
45
Palatino Roman
6
CG Omega Bold
46
Palatino Bold
7
CG Omega Italic
47
Palatino Italic
8
CG Omega Bold Italic
48
Palatino Bold Italic
9
Coronet
49
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book
10
Clarendon Condensed
50
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi
11
Univers Medium
51
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book Oblique
12
Univers Bold
52
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi Oblique
13
Univers Medium Italic
53
ITC Bookman Light
14
Univers Bold Italic
54
ITC Bookman Demi
15
Univers Condensed Medium
55
ITC Bookman Light Italic
16
Univers Condensed Bold
56
ITC Bookman Demi Italic
17
Univers Condensed Medium Italic
57
New Century Schoolbook Roman
18
Univers Condensed Bold Italic
58
New Century Schoolbook Bold
19
Antique Olive
59
New Century Schoolbook Italic
20
Antique Olive Bold
60
New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic
21
Antique Olive Italic
61
Times Roman
22
Garamond Antiqua
62
Times Bold
23
Garamond Halbfett
63
Times Italic
24
Garamond Kursiv
64
Times Bold Italic
25
Garamond Kursiv Halbfett
65
ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic
26
Marigold
66
Symbol
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Settings for control panel
9.3.4
9
No.
Font Name
No.
Font Name
27
Albertus Medium
67
SymbolPS
28
Albertus Extra Bold
68
Wingdings
29
Arial
69
ITC Zapf Dingbats
30
Arial Bold
70
Courier Bold
31
Arial Italic
71
Courier Italic
32
Arial Bold Italic
72
Courier Bold Italic
33
Times New Roman
73
Letter Gothic
34
Times New Roman Bold
74
Letter Gothic Bold
35
Times New Roman Italic
75
Letter Gothic Italic
36
Times New Roman Bold Italic
76
CourierPS
37
Helvetica
77
CourierPS Bold
38
Helvetica Bold
78
CourierPS Oblique
39
Helvetica Oblique
79
CourierPS Bold Oblique
80-89
Line Printer 0N-12U
System Settings Menu
System Settings
Menu
Date/TimeSettings
Daylight Saving
Description
Default
Setting
Date Setting
Specify the date.
MM/DD/YY
YY
Time Setting
Specify the time.
xx:xx
Time Zone Setting
Specify the time zone.
00:00
Time Adjustment
Connect to the specified server to correct the time.
–
DST Setting
Select whether or not to use the daylight saving time.
OFF
Saving Time
Specify the correction time for the daylight saving
time.
60min
Adjust the LCD brightness within the range from -3 to
+3.
0
Job Settings List
The machine settings can be printed.
–
Counter List
Print the counter list for every account or user belonging to the account.
–
SysAutoReset Set
Specify whether to use the Sustem Auto Reset.
ON
SysAutoReset Time
Specify the setting (between 1 and 9 minutes) for the
desired length of time until the automatic system reset
operation is performed.
1Minute
LCD Brightness
Management List
System Auto Reset
2
Note
[Date/TimeSettings] - [Time Adjustment] are displayed when "ON" is specified for [Network Settings] [Detail Settings] - [TimeAdjustmentSet] - [NTP Setting].
[Management List] - [Counter List] appears when account track is enabled in this machine.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
9-21
Settings for control panel
9
Network Settings
When changing Network Setting items, PageScope Web Connection is useful. All items can be specified
using PageScope Web Connection.
2
Note
For details on settings for each network environment used, refer to "3 Network settings" or
"10 PageScope Web Connection".
Menu
TCP/IP
NetWare
HTTP Server
SMB
Web Service
9-22
Description
Default
Setting
TCP/IP Setting
Select whether or not TCP/IP is used.
ON
IP Setting
Select whether or not DHCP is used to automatically
acquire the IP address.
If "Manual Input" is selected, specify settings for "IP
Address", "Subnet Mask", and "Default Gateway".
Auto Setting
IPv6
Select whether or not IPv6 is used. If IPv6 is to be
used, specify the address.
–
DNS Server
Specify the DNS server settings.
–
IP Filtering
Specify the settings for IP address filtering.
–
IPsec
Specify system settings for communication using
IPsec.
–
RAW Port Number
Specify the RAW port number.
–
Host Name
Specify the host name.
–
DNS Domain
Specify the name of the DNS domain.
–
DynamicDNSSetting
Select whether or not dynamic DNS is enabled when
the DNS server being used is compatible with dynamic DNS functions.
OFF
IPX
Specify the IPX Setting.
–
NetWare Print
Specify the server conditions.
–
UserAuth. Set NDS
Select whether or not the user authentication setting
(NDS) is used.
ON
HTTPServerSetting
Select whether or not the http server settings are
used.
ON
PSWC Setting
Select whether or not PageScope Web Connection is
used.
ON
IPP Setting
Select whether or not IPP printing is used.
ON
IPP Auth. Setting
Select whether or not authentication is performed.
If IPP authentication is performed, select the authentication method.
Req-username
Accept IPP jobs
Select whether or not IPP jobs are permitted.
ON
Support Info.
Specify the print operations supported by IPP.
–
Printer Info.
Specify the printer information.
–
Print Setting
Specify the SMB print settings.
–
WINS
Specify the WINS function for SMB.
–
Direct Hosting
Specify whether or not Direct Hosting is used.
ON
WebServiceSetting
Specify settings for using the Web service.
–
Printer Setting
Specify the printer information.
–
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Settings for control panel
9
Menu
SNMP
AppleTalk
Bonjour
TCP Socket
Detail Settings
Description
Default
Setting
SNMP Setting
Select whether or not SNMP is used.
ON
SNMP v1/v2c(IP)
Select whether or not SNMP v1/v2c (IP) is used.
ON
SNMP v3(IP)
Select whether or not SNMP v3(IP) is used.
ON
SNMP v1(IPX)
Select whether or not SNMP v1 (IPX) is used.
ON
UDP Port Number
Specify the UDP port number.
161
SNMPv1v2cSetting
Specify the SNMP v1/v2c settings.
–
SNMP v3 Setting
Specify the SNMP v3 settings.
–
TRAP Settings
Specify settings for using the TRAP function.
–
AppleTalk Setting
Select whether or not AppleTalk is used.
OFF
Printer Name
Specify the name of the printer.
–
Zone Name
Specify the zone name.
–
Bonjour Setting
Select whether or not Bonjour is used.
ON
Bonjour Name
Specify the Bonjour name.
–
TCP Socket
Specify settings for using the TCP Socket function.
–
TCP Socket ASCII
Specify settings for using the TCP Socket (ASCII)
function.
–
Network Speed
Select the operating speed.
Auto Setting
TimeAdjustmentSet
Specify settings for the NTP server for which the time
is corrected.
–
When InvalidCert.
Specify the operation when the validity period for the
received certificate has expired.
If "Continue" is selected, processing continues even if
the date of the certificate is invalid.
If "Delete Job" is selected, the job is deleted if the date
of the certificate is invalid.
Continue
Ping Confirmation
Sends a ping to confirm a response.
–
2
Note
The parameters for [TCP/IP], [HTTP Server], [SNMP], [AppleTalk], and [Bonjour] are displayed when
"ON" is specified for [TCP/IP Setting], [HTTPServerSetting], [SNMP Setting], [AppleTalkSetting], and
[Bonjour Setting].
If the network settings are changed, restart the machine to apply changes.
When the power is turned off, then on, turn off the power, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn it on.
Otherwise, the machine may not operate correctly.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
9-23
Settings for control panel
9
Printer Settings
Menu
Description
Default
Setting
USB Timeout
Specify the length of time until a transmission timeout occurs.
60sec
Network Timeout
Specify the length of time until a transmission timeout occurs.
60sec
Print XPS Errors
Specify whether to print the error message when an error occurs during
XPS printing.
ON
System Connection
Menu
OpenAPI Settings
CallRemoteCenter
Description
Default
Setting
Access Setting
Select whether or not OpenAPI access is enabled.
Allow
Enable SSL
Select whether or not SSL is enabled.
ON
Authentication
Select whether or not user authentication is performed.
–
PortNumberSetting
Specify the port number.
50001
%
Transmits the status of the machine to the center.
2
Note
[OpenAPI Settings] - [SSL] are not displayed when the SSL certificate is not installed or "ON" is
specified for [EnhancedSecurity].
[CallRemoteCenter] is not displayed if center registration performed by selecting [Service Mode] [CS Remote Care] is not completed. Changing this menu must be performed by a service engineer.
9-24
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Settings for control panel
9.3.5
9
Admin. Settings Menu
Security Settings
Menu
Description
Default
Setting
Admin. Password
Changes the administrator password.
12345678
Admin. Sec. Levels
Define parameters opened to the user.
OFF: The password is required for [Admin. Settings]
and [Service Mode].
Minimum: The password is required for [System Setting], [Admin. Settings], and [Service Mode].
ON: The password is required for functions other than
[Job Operation] and [Banner Printing].
Minimum
Password Rules
Select whether or not password rules are applied.
OFF
ProhibitFunctions
Select the operations that are prohibited if user authentication failed.
Mode 1: Operations cannot be performed for a fixed
length of time.
Mode 2: When authentication has failed repeatedly,
the control panel can no longer be operated. The
number of times of failed authentication can be set between 1 and 5.
If operation of the control panel is restricted, touch
[Release], and then select the items whose operation
restrictions are canceled.
• Users & Accounts: Operations for user authentication and account track
• Secure File: Operations for confidential documents
• User Box: Operations for password-protected
boxes
• SNMP: Operations for SNMP v3 Write user authentication
• Time To Release: Specify the length of time until
prohibited operations are automatically unlocked.
The time can be set between 1 and 60 minutes.
Mode1
Time:5min
SecurePrintAccess
The operation method for confidential documents can
be viewed. If "Prohibited Functions" is set to "Mode
1", this parameter is set to "Mode 1". If "Prohibited
Functions" is set to "Mode 2", this parameter is set to
"Mode 2".
Mode 1: Type in the ID and password for the confidential document, and then select the document.
Mode 2: Enter the Secure Print ID, select the document, and then enter the password for authentication.
Mode1
PrintDataCapture
Select whether or not data for a print job can be captured.
Allow
DeleteJobHistory
The entire job log can be cleared.
–
Audit Log
Specify settings relating to handling of the Audit Log
function.
• Audit Log Setting: Select whether or not apply the
audit log setting.
• OverwriteAuditLog: Select whether or not to allow
overwriting of the audit log.
• Delete Audit Log: Select whether or not to erase
the audit log.
–
Settings necessary for applying enhanced security
mode appear. Select whether or not to apply enhanced mode settings when the necessary settings
are specified. Changing this menu must be performed
by a service engineer.
OFF
Security Details
EnhancedSecurity
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
9-25
Settings for control panel
9
Menu
HDD Settings
Driver Encryption
Description
Default
Setting
Format HDD
Format the hard disk.
–
CheckHDDCapacity
Information concerning the hard disk capacity is displayed.
–
OverwriteAllArea
Select this parameter to overwrite and delete all data
on the entire hard disk in the specified patterns for
mode 1 through mode 8 when returning the machine
from lease or disposing the machine in order to prevent disclosure of the data. Before performing this operation, contact your service representative.
Mode1
Ovewrite HDDdata
Specify whether or not to overwrite the temporary image data saved on the hard disk with all operations for
computer printing. By specifying a setting to overwrite
temporary data, the area of the hard disk where image
data is saved after printing or sending can be overwritten, and the data can be erased. This process prevents disclosure of image data on the hard disk.
OFF
OverwritePriority
Select whether encryption is overridden or overwrite is
overridden when data is overwritten.
Encrypt Priority
RegisterHDDLockPW
Specify the password for protecting data on the hard
disk.
–
HDD EncryptionSet
This setting appears when the optional Security kit is
installed. Specify an encryption passphrase to encrypt
data in the hard disk. When a setting is specified, all
data written to the hard disk is encrypted to protect it.
If the encryption key is changed, the hard disk will be
reformatted.
–
EncryptionSetting
The encryption password for the printer driver can be
changed.
Factory Default
EncryptionPassphrase
Set an encryption passphrase. Enter an encryption
passphrase in 20 characters.
–
2
Note
The administrator of this machine should change the administrator password to maintain security.
If the "Password Rules" parameter is set to "Enabled", only an 8-digit administrator password can be
specified.
[PrintDataCapture] is displayed when "OFF" is specified for [EnhancedSecurity].
[HDD Settings] is displayed when the hard disk drive is installed.
[OverwritePriority] and [HDD EncryptionSet] are displayed when the encryption infrastructure is
installed.
[EncryptionPassphrase] is displayed when [User-Defined] is specified for [EncryptionSetting].
!
Detail
The operation of the "Prohibited Functions" parameter applies to the following passwords.
User passwords, account passwords, user box passwords, passwords for confidential documents, and
the administrator password.
If the control panel cannot be operated even after touching [Release] from the "Prohibited Functions"
parameter to specify the items whose operation restrictions are canceled or if an operation is prohibited
from a failed attempt to authenticate the administrator password, restart the machine. Restart the
machine, wait for the time specified in "Release Time Settings", and then perform the administrator
authentication.
In order to use Audit Log or Log Management Utility, you must specify [ON] for [Audit Log Setting] in
advance.
9-26
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Settings for control panel
9
The overwrite method operates as follows:
Mode 1: Overwritten with 0x00.
Mode 2: Overwritten with random 1-byte numbers. % Overwritten with random 1-byte numbers. %
Overwritten with 0x00.
Mode 3: Overwritten with 0x00. % Overwritten with 0xff. % Overwritten with random 1-byte numbers.
% Verifies.
Mode 4: Overwritten with random 1-byte numbers. % Overwritten with 0x00. % Overwritten with 0xff.
Mode 5: Overwritten with 0x00. % Overwritten with 0xff. % Overwritten with 0x00. % Overwritten with
0xff.
Mode 6: Overwritten with 0x00. % Overwritten with 0xff. % Overwritten with 0x00. % Overwritten with
0xff. % Overwritten with 0x00. % Overwritten with 0xff. % Overwritten with random numbers.
Mode 7: Overwritten with 0x00. % Overwritten with 0xff. % Overwritten with 0x00. % Overwritten with
0xff. % Overwritten with 0x00. % Overwritten with 0xff. % Overwritten with 0xaa.
Mode 8: Overwritten with 0x00. % Overwritten with 0xff. % Overwritten with 0x00. % Overwritten with
0xff. % Overwritten with 0x00. % Overwritten with 0xff. % Overwritten with 0xaa. % Verifies.
2
Reminder
When the machine is turned off, then on again with the power switch, wait at least 10 seconds to turn
the machine on after turning it off. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately
after being turned off.
User Box Settings
Menu
Description
Default
Setting
Delete User Box
Delete the selected box.
–
DeleteSecurePrint
Delete all documents stored in secure print user boxes.
–
Secure PrintBox
Specify the length of time for secure print documents
to remain in before they are automatically deleted,
counting from the moment they are stored.
1day
EncryptedPDFBox
Select the length of time for encrypted PDF files to remain before they are automatically deleted, counting
from the moment they are stored.
1day
Touch&PrintBox
Specify the length of time from when print documents
are saved in Touch & Print Box until when they are automatically deleted.
1day
Specify to retain or to delete documents automatically
when they are printed.
ON
Delete Time
Doc.Hold
2
Note
[User Box Settings] is displayed when the hard disk drive is installed.
Even if "ON" is selected for [Document Hold Setting], documents saved in the Secure Print User Box,
Encrypted PDF User Box, or Touch & Print User Box are not stored.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
9-27
Settings for control panel
9
AuthDeviceSetting
Menu
CardAuth.Settings
BioAuth.Settings
Touch & Print
Description
Default
Setting
IC Card Type
Specify the type of installed IC card authentication
unit.
Felica
Operation Setting
Select whether only the card is required for authentication or password is required together with the card.
Card
Beep Sound
Select whether a sound is made when the user is authenticated by the biometric authentication.
ON
Operation Setting
Specify the biometric authentication operation.
1-to-many Auth.: Performs authentication when the
finger is placed. To use the Touch & Print function, select this option.
1-to-1 Auth.: Performs authentication when the user
name is entered and the finger is placed.
1-to-many
Auth.
Touch&PrintUserBox
Select whether or not to use the Touch & Print function
that works with the authentication unit.
ON
Print
When there are multiple jobs, select whether or not to
perform authentication for each job before printing or
print all jobs after performing authentication one time.
Batch Print
2
Note
[AuthDeviceSetting] is displayed when the authentication unit and HDD are installed.
[CardAuth.Settings] is displayed when the IC card authentication unit is installed.
[BioAuth.Settings] is displayed when the biometric authentication unit is installed.
!
Detail
To use biometric authentication, register the vein patterns in the finger in advance.
For details on specifying authentication settings for the authentication unit (biometric type) and on
registering finger vein patterns, refer to "Authentication unit (Biometric type AU-101)" on page 15-3 or
"Authentication unit (IC card type AU-201)" on page 16-3.
9-28
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Settings for control panel
9
Expert Adjustment
Menu
PrinterAdjustment
Finisher Adjust
DensityAdjustment
Description
Default
Setting
Leading Edge Adj.
Adjust the starting print position between -3.0 and
3.0mm at the leading edge of the paper (with respect
to the paper feed direction). Adjustments can be specified for each paper type.
0.0mm
Centering
Adjust the starting print position between -3.0 and
3.0mm at the left edge of the paper (with respect to the
paper feed direction). Adjustments can be specified
for each paper tray.
0.0mm
Leading (Duplex)
Adjust the starting print position between -3.0 and
3.0mm at the leading edge of the paper for the second
side during automatic double-sided copying. Adjustments can be specified for each paper tray.
0.0mm
Centering (Duplex)
Adjust the starting print position between -3.0 and
3.0mm at the left edge of the paper for the second side
during automatic double-sided copying. Adjustments
can be specified for each paper tray.
0.0mm
Vertical Adj.
Specify a zoom in the paper feed direction within the
range from -7 and +7.
0
EraseLeadingEdge
Specify the non-printing area of the leading edge of
the paper.
4mm
Center Staple Pos
Adjust the stapling position (between -10 and 10mm)
when printing with the "Center Staple & Fold" setting.
00mm
Half-Fold Pos.
Adjust the folding position (between -10 and 10mm)
when printing with the "Center Staple & Fold" setting.
00mm
Thick/Yellow
Adjust the image density for printing on thick paper or
transparencies. The density can be adjusted separately for each color (yellow, magenta, cyan and black for
a color image and the black image density). The higher
the setting, the darker the density.
Adjust the setting for yellow, magenta, cyan and black
between -5 and +5.
Adjust the setting for "Black Image Density" between 2 and +2.
0
Thick/Magenta
Thick/Cyan
Thick/Black
BlackImageDensity
Stabilization
Initialize+Stabi.
StabilizationOnly
ColorRegistration
Yellow
Magenta
0
0
0
Perform an image stabilization if the image is incorrect,
even after the gradation levels have been adjusted.
• Initialize+Stabi.: Perform a normal image stabilization.
• StabilizationOnly: Select when a good result was
not achieved after "Initialize+Stabi". was selected.
Initialize+Stabi.
Adjust the color registration if color shifts can be seen
in the print result.
0
Cyan
Test Pattern
0
0
0
Gradation Pattern
Print the test pattern of each color gradation.
–
Halftone Pattern
Print the test pattern of each halftone.
–
2
Note
If "Print" is selected for [PrinterAdjustment], test print is performed through which you can check the
set value.
[Finisher Adjust] is displayed when the finisher is installed.
Settings for [Center Staples Pos] and [Half-Fold Pos] in [Finisher Adjust] vary depending on the finisher
installed. When FS-609 is installed, the values for position adjustment can only be specified. When
FS-519 is installed, the values for position adjustment can be specified for each paper size or paper
type.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
9-29
Settings for control panel
9
Option Settings
Menu
Description
HDD Installation
Punch OptionSet
AuthDeviceSetting
Default
Setting
Select whether or not the hard disk is installed.
–
Punch Kit Type
Specify the presence and type of optional punch kit.
–
# of Holes
Specify the number of punch holes of the optional
punch kit.
–
Auth. Mode
Specify the presence and type (Card/Biometric) of authentication unit.
–
Reading Timeout
Specify the scanning timeout of biometric authentication unit within the range from 5 to 60 seconds.
10 seconds
2
Note
[HDD Installation] is displayed when the hard disk drive is installed.
[Punch OptionSet] is displayed when the finisher is installed.
[Reading Timeout] is displayed when [Biometric] is specified for [Auth. Mode].
9-30
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Settings for control panel
9
Firmware Update
When the update file for the firmware is provided, the firmware must be updated by selecting [Firmware
Update].
%
Select [Firmware Update] from the [Administrator Setting] submenu in the displayed "Utility" menu,
which appears when you press the [Menu/Select] key.
If [Start] is selected in [Firmware Update], firmware update starts, allowing you to transfer the update
file to this machine using FTP.
Firmware Update
Start
Cancel
Now initializing
Transfer the update file using FTP
After Send F/W
Push [Select] Key
Downloading
Download Completed
Reboot
2
Note
[Firmware Update] requires you to access the FTP server where the update data is stored. For details,
refer to "Using the TCP Socket/OpenAPI/FTP server function" on page 10-97
1
Press the [Menu/Select] key on the control panel of this machine.
2
Select [Admin. Settings], and then press the [Menu/Select] key.
3
Enter the administrator password, and then press the [Menu/Select] key.
4
Select Firmware Update, and then press the [Menu/Select] key.
5
Select Start, and then press the [Menu/Select] key.
The Firmware Update preparation begins.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
9-31
Settings for control panel
9
6
Access this machine, which is specified as the FTP server, and login.
–
–
7
If you use the Internet Explorer ver.6, you can login as follows.
In the "Address" bar, enter "ftp://<IP address of this machine>".
Select "Login As" from the "File" menu.
Enter User name and Password, and then click Log On.
User name: update
Password: update
Transfer the update file to the FTP server that you accessed.
–
You can start data transfer by moving the provided update file onto the FTP screen using drag-anddrop.
After data transfer, operate the control panel of this machine.
8
Press the [Menu/Select] key on the control panel of this machine.
Data download begins.
9
When downloading is completed, reboot this machine.
Updating is completed when the machine is rebooted.
10
After rebooted, press the [Menu/Select] key.
The machine is ready for use.
2
Note
If the [Firmware Update] is failed, the "Failed" message appears. Press the [Menu/Select] key, resume
the previous version firm, and then execute the [Firmware Update] again.
9-32
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
10
PageScope Web Connection
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
PageScope Web Connection
10
10
PageScope Web Connection
10.1
Using PageScope Web Connection
PageScope Web Connection is a device management utility supported by the HTTP server integrated into
the printer controller. Using a Web browser on a computer connected to the network, machine settings can
be specified and the status of the machine can be checked.
In addition to the convenience of specifying some settings from your computer instead of with the machine’s
control panel, text can easily be typed in.
10.1.1
10.1.2
Operating environment
Network
Ethernet (TCP/IP)
Computer applications
Supported Web browsers:
Microsoft Internet Explorer Ver. 6 or later
(JavaScript and Cookies enabled)
Netscape Navigator Ver. 7.02 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled)
Mozilla Firefox Ver. 1.0 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled)
Adobe® Flash® Player (Plug-in Ver. 7.0 or later required if "Flash" is selected as the
display format)
Accessing PageScope Web Connection
PageScope Web Connection can be used from a Web browser.
1
Start the Web browser.
2
In the "Address" bar, enter the IP address of this machine, and then press the [Enter] key.
–
http:// (IP_address_of_machine) /
Example: If the IP address of this machine is 192.168.1.20
http://192.168.1.20/
– If the machine is set to "use IPv6", enter an IPv6 address within [ ] when using a browser other than
Internet Explorer.
http://[IPv6_address_of_machine]/
Example: If the IPv6 address of this machine is fe80::220:6bff:fe10:2f16
http://[fe80::220:6bff:fe10:2f16]
– If the machine is set to "use IPv6" and Internet Explorer is being used, first edit the hosts file to
include "fe80::220:6bff:fe10:2f16IPv6 IPv6_MFP_1", and then specify the URL with the domain
name.
The User mode page that appears is for a user who has logged on.
!
Detail
If user authentication settings have been specified, the user name and password must be entered. For
details, refer to "Logging on as a registered user" on page 10-11.
For details on specifying the IP address of this machine, refer to the "Specifying general settings for
TCP/IP-based communication" on page 3-3.
PageScope Web Connection has Flash and HTML display formats. For details, refer to "Logging on and
logging off" on page 10-7.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-3
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.1.3
Web browser cache
The most recent information may not appear in the PageScope Web Connection pages because older
versions of pages are saved in the cache for the Web browser. In addition, problems may occur when the
cache is used.
When using PageScope Web Connection, disable the cache for the Web browser.
2
Reminder
The menus and commands may vary depending on the Web browser version. For details, refer to the
Help for the Web browser.
If the utility is used with the cache enabled and Administrator mode was timed out, the timeout page
may appear even when PageScope Web Connection is accessed again. In addition, since the
machine’s control panel remains locked and cannot be used, the machine must be restarted with the
power switch. In order to avoid this problem, disable the cache.
With Internet Explorer
1
On the "Tools" menu, click "Internet Options".
2
On the General tab, click the [Settings] button under "Temporary Internet files".
3
Select "Every visit to the page", and then click the [OK] button.
With Netscape Navigator
1
On the "Edit" menu, click "Preferences".
2
Under "Category" on the left, click "Advanced", then "Cache".
3
Under "Document in cache is compared to document on network:", select "Every time".
With Mozilla Firefox
10-4
1
On the "Tools" menu, click "Options".
2
Click "Privacy", and then click the [Settings] button at the bottom of the dialog box.
3
Select the "Cache" check box under "Private data", select the "Clear private data when closing Firefox"
check box under "Settings", and then click the [OK] button.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10.1.4
10
Structure of pages
The pages of PageScope Web Connection are constructed as shown below.
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
9
10
11
12
No.
Item
Description
1
Konica Minolta logo
Click the logo to go to the Konica Minolta Web site at the following
URL.
http://konicaminolta.com
2
PageScope Web Connection logo
Click the logo to display the version information for PageScope Web
Connection.
3
Logon user name
Displays the icon of the current mode and the name of the user who is
logged on (public, administrator, registered user or account). Click the
user name to display the name of the user who is logged on.
4
Status display
Displays icons and messages indicating the status of the machine. If
an error occurred, click the icon to display the error information (consumables, paper trays and registered user information) so that the status can be checked.
5
Message display
Displays the operating status of the machine.
6
[Logout] button
Click to log off from the current mode.
7
[Change Password] button
Click to go to the Change User Password page. (Refer to "Information"
on page 10-13.) This button appears only in User mode when a registered user is logged on.
8
[Help] button
Click to display the page specified as the online manual Web page. For
details on specifying the Web page, refer to "Information" on
page 10-13.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-5
PageScope Web Connection
10
No.
Item
Description
[Refresh] button
Click to update the displayed page.
10
Tabs
Select the category of the page to be displayed. The following tabs are
displayed in User mode.
• Information
• Job List
• User Box
• Direct Print
11
Menu
Information and settings for the selected tab are listed. The menu that
appears differs depending on the tab that is selected.
12
Information and settings
Displays details of the item selected in the menu.
9
!
Detail
The page that appears immediately after accessing the machine with PageScope Web Connection is
called the "User mode" page. This page appears when a user has logged on.
If user authentication settings have been specified, the user name and password must be entered. For
details, refer to "Logging on as a registered user" on page 10-11.
The PageScope Web Connection pages appear differently depending on the options installed on the
machine and the specified machine settings. For details on logging on as a different user or as the
administrator, refer to "Logging on and logging off" on page 10-7.
10-6
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.2
Logging on and logging off
10.2.1
Login and logout operations
When the machine is accessed with PageScope Web Connection, the logon page appears if user
authentication and account track settings have been specified on the machine. If user authentication and
account track settings have not been specified, the page for a public user appears. In order to log on as a
different user or as an administrator after logon, it is necessary to log off first, then log on again.
When user authentication and account track settings are not specified
1
The user logs in automatically as a public user.
2
To log in as an administrator, log out.
3
Log in again as an administrator.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-7
PageScope Web Connection
10
When user authentication and account track settings are specified
10-8
1
The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears. Enter the required information to log in.
2
To log in as a different user or an administrator, log out.
3
Log in again.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10.2.2
10
Logout
%
Click the [Logout] button in the upper right side of the window to display a logoff confirmation dialog
box.
– To return to the logon page again, click the [OK] button.
!
Detail
The logon page that appears differs depending on the authentication settings specified on the machine.
If a timeout occurs because no operation is performed for a set length of time while logged on or if the
authentication settings are changed from the machine’s control panel while logged on to User mode,
you will automatically be logged off.
For details on specifying the timeout periods for User mode and Administrator mode, refer to "Security"
on page 10-19.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-9
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.2.3
Login
Depending on the logon method used, PageScope Web Connection will be in User mode or Administrator
mode.
!
Detail
If you log in to PageScope Web Connection as an administrator in the User mode, it is possible to delete
jobs that cannot be done so in the Administrator mode.
The contents displayed by selecting "Flash" or "HTML" as the display format are the same.
Options that can be selected when logged on to PageScope Web Connection
If necessary, select the display language and format.
If "When in warning, the dialog is displayed." check box is selected, warning messages appear during
operation after logon.
If "Flash" is selected as the display format, the following items are automatically updated and displayed.
Status icons and messages
Status of "Paper Tray" in the page displayed when "Device Information" is selected on the Information
tab
Page display of the Job List tab
Flash Player is required in order to use the "Flash" features.
If screen reader software is used, we recommend selecting "HTML" as the display format. In an IPv6
environment, select "HTML".
Logging on as a public user
If user authentication settings have not been specified on the machine, logon will be as a public user.
%
10-10
In the logon page, select "Public user", and then click the [Login] button.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10
Logging on as a registered user
If user authentication settings have been specified on the machine, the name and password for a registered
user is required to log on.
%
In the logon page, enter the user name and the password, and then click the [Login] button.
– If account track settings have been specified, type in the account name and password.
– If external server authentication was selected, select server.
– To log on to PageScope Web Connection as the administrator in User mode, select "Administrator"
- "Administrator (User Mode)", and then enter the administrator password.
!
Detail
If "ProhibitFunctions" in [Admin. Settings] - [Security Details] is set to "Mode 2" and a user enters an
incorrect password the specified number of times, that user is locked out and can no longer use the
machine. Contact the administrator to cancel operation restrictions.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-11
PageScope Web Connection
10
Logging on to Administrator mode
In order to specify system and network settings, log on to Administrator mode.
%
In the logon page, select "Administrator", type in the administrator password, and then click the [Login]
button.
!
Detail
When logged on to Administrator mode, the control panel of the machine is locked and cannot be used.
Depending on the status of the machine, you may not be able to log on to Administrator mode.
If "ProhibitFunctions" in [Admin. Settings] - [Security Details] is set to "Mode 2" and an incorrect
password is entered the specified number of times, it is no longer possible to log on to Administrator
mode. For details on authentication settings, refer to "Admin. Settings Menu" on page 9-25.
The password input dialog box differs depending on the specified machine settings.
The default password is "12345678".
Specify the password in [Admin. Password] accessed by selecting [Admin. Settings] - [Security
Settings].
For details on the administrator password, refer to "Admin. Settings Menu" on page 9-25.
10-12
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10.3
10
Overview of User mode
By logging on to PageScope Web Connection in User mode, the following functions can be specified.
2
Note
For other details on the User mode, refer to the PageScope Web Connection Help on the PageScope
Utilities CD-ROM.
10.3.1
Information
This is the first page that appears when you access PageScope Web Connection.
Item
Description
Device Information
The current system configuration, options, consumables and counter values can be
displayed.
Online Assistance
Support information for the machine can be displayed.
Change User Password
The password for the user who is logged on can be changed.
Function Permission Information
Information on operations permitted by users and accounts can be displayed.
Network Setting Information
Network settings for the machine can be displayed.
Print Setting Information*
Settings for the printer controller of the machine can be displayed.
Print Information
Font and settings information can be printed.
*
magicolor 8650
Selecting "Print Setting Information" - "Macro list" displays a form (macro) to be used when printing from the host
computer.
You do not need to select this when printing using the printer driver from the computer.
Save the form (macro) on the machine using Font Management Utility contained on the application CD.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-13
PageScope Web Connection
10
2
Note
Display items related to Copy, Scan or Fax are not available for this machine.
10.3.2
10-14
Job
Item
Description
Current Jobs
The running job and queued jobs can be displayed.
Job History
The completed jobs can be displayed.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10.3.3
10
Box
Item
Description
Open User Box
A currently created public, personal or group user box can be opened to work on a
saved document or to change user box settings.
Create User Box
New user boxes can be created.
Open System User Box
System user boxes can be opened to work on a saved document or to change user
box settings.
This item appears when you have logged in as an administrator in the User mode.
Create System User Box
New system user boxes can be created.
This item appears when you have logged in as an administrator in the User mode.
2
Note
The Box tab appears only if the optional HDD is installed.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-15
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.3.4
10-16
Direct Print
Item
Description
Direct Print
Files that are saved in a computer can be specified and printed with this machine.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10.4
10
Overview of Administrator mode
By logging on to PageScope Web Connection in Administrator mode, the following functions can be
specified.
10.4.1
Maintenance
Item
Description
Meter Count
Counters managed by the machine can be displayed.
ROM Version
The ROM version can be displayed.
Import/Export
Machine settings can be saved as a file (exported), or settings can be written to the
machine (imported).
In addition, counter information and others can be exported as text files.
Status Notification Setting
Specify settings for sending a notification if a machine error occurred. Settings can be
specified for the destination of error notifications and the occasions when notifications
are sent.
Total Counter Notification
Setting
Specify the settings for sending notifications of the total counter by E-Mail and the EMail address where notifications are sent.
Machine Setting
The registered machine information can be changed.
Online Assistance
Specify the support information for the machine. To display this information, click the
Information tab in User mode, and then click "Online Assistance" in the menu.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-17
PageScope Web Connection
10
Item
Description
Date/Time Settings
Specify the date and time that are displayed on the machine.
Not available for this machine.
Timer Settings
Specify the power save functions.
Network TWAIN
Not available for this machine.
Reset
Resets the network settings or controller settings.
Header/Footer Registration
The list of headers/footers can be displayed, and they can be registered or edited.
2
Note
Display items related to Copy, Scan or Fax are not available for this machine.
10-18
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10.4.2
10
Security
Item
Description
Authentication
Specify user authentication and account track settings for the machine. To perform authentication, an external server and default function permission can also be specified.
User Registration
If user authentication settings are specified, users can be registered and their settings
can be changed.
Account Track Registration
If account track is specified, accounts can be registered and their settings can be
changed.
SSL/TLS Setting
Specify the settings for SSL/TLS. With SSL/TLS enabled, communication between this
machine and a client computer is encrypted to prevent passwords and messages being leaked.
Address Reference Setting
Not available for this machine.
Auto Logout
Specify the length of time until Administrator mode or User mode is automatically
logged off.
Administrator Password
Setting
Specify the password for logging on to PageScope Web Connection in the Administrator mode.
2
Note
A total of 1,000 User Authentications and Account Tracks can be registered on this machine if an
optional HDD is installed, or a total of 30 User Authentications and Account Tracks can be registered if
a HDD is not installed.
2
Note
"Administrator Password Settings" does not appear in the following cases:
No SSL certificate is installed.
The "EnhancedSecurity" Mode is enabled.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-19
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.4.3
Box
When logged on in Administrator mode, user boxes can be used without typing in the password.
Item
Description
Open User Box
A currently created public, personal or group user box can be opened to work on a
saved document or to change user box settings.
Create User Box
New user boxes can be created.
Open System User Box
System user boxes (Annotation User Box) can be opened to work on a saved document or to change user box settings.
Create System User Box
New annotation user boxes can be created.
2
Note
The Box tab appears only if the optional HDD is installed.
10-20
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10.4.4
10
Print Setting
Item
Description
Basic Setting
The default printer settings can be specified.
PCL Setting
The default settings for PCL mode can be specified.
PS Setting
The default settings for PS mode can be specified.
XPS Settings
The XPS print settings can be specified.
Interface Setting
The interface timeout can be specified.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-21
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.4.5
10-22
Network
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10
Item
Description
TCP/IP Setting
Specify the TCP/IP settings to connect the machine to the network.
E-Mail Setting
Specify the E-Mail TX/RX setting.
Display items related to the S/MIME function are not available for this machine.
LDAP Setting
Not available for this machine.
IPP Setting
Specify the settings for IPP printing.
FTP Setting
Specify the settings to use this machine as an FTP server.
"FTP TX Setting" is not available for this machine.
SNMP Setting
Specify the SNMP settings.
SMB Setting
Specify the settings for the WINS, and SMB print.
Web Service Settings
Specify the settings for print via the Web service.
"Scanner Settings" is not available for this machine.
Bonjour Setting
Specify the Bonjour settings.
NetWare Setting
Specify the NetWare settings.
AppleTalk Setting
Specify the AppleTalk settings.
Network Fax Setting
Not available for this machine.
WebDAV Settings
Not available for this machine.
Open API Setting
Specify OpenAPI settings.
TCP Socket Setting
Specify TCP Socket settings used for data transmissions between the computer application and this machine.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-23
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.5
Box settings
This section describes other items specifiable on the Box tab for the PageScope Web Connection.
From the Box tab, user boxes can be created and basic user box information can be viewed.
2
Note
The Box tab appears only if the optional HDD is installed.
10.5.1
Changing user box settings or deleting a user box
%
Change created user box settings or delete a user box.
!
Detail
In Administrator mode, user box settings can be changed and a user box can be deleted without
entering the user box password. In the user mode, files in the box can be operated.
Open User Box
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Box tab - "Open User Box".
2
Select the box to specify from the list or specify the box number, and then click the [OK] button.
3
Specify the following settings.
Item
Definition
[User Box Setting]
Changes the user box settings.
[Delete User Box]
Deletes the user box.
User Box Setting
Item
10-24
Definition
User Box Number
Displays the user box number.
User Box Name
Specify the user box name (up to 20 characters).
Index
Specify the indexing characters.
Auto Delete Document
Specify the period during which data in the user box is saved.
User Box Password is
changed.
To change the user box password, select the check box. Specify the current password
and the new password (up to 8 characters).
User Box Owner is
changed.
To change the user box owner, select this check box to select the box type.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10.5.2
10
Creating a new user box
Create a new user box.
!
Detail
Public user boxes can be created only, and they cannot be changed in Administrator mode. User Boxes
include Public User Boxes, Personal User Boxes for individual users that can be used when the user
authentication function is enabled, and Account User Boxes for accounts that can be used when the
Account Track function is enabled. Personal User Box and Account User Box can be created on the
Box tab in the User Mode. To create a Personal User Box, log in to the User Mode as the desired User
and create a box in the Box tab. To create an Account User Box, log in to the User Mode with the
desired Account and create a box in the Box tab. Procedure to create individual user boxes is the same
as in the Administrator mode.
Create User Box
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Box tab - "Create User Box".
2
Specify the following settings.
magicolor 8650
Item
Definition
User Box Number
Select the registration number of the box to be created ("Use opening number" or
"Direct Input").
User Box Name
Specify the user box name (up to 20 characters).
To specify the user box password, select the "Use Box Password" check box, and
then specify the password (up to 8 characters).
Index
Specify the indexing characters.
Type
Specify the user box type. Public user boxes can be created only, and they cannot
be changed in Administrator mode.
The following User Box Types are available.
Public User Box: Available for all users.
Personal User Box: Available for an individual user. This User Box can be used when
the user authentication function is available.
Account User Box: Available for an individual account. This User Box can be used
when the Account Track function is available.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-25
PageScope Web Connection
10
Item
Definition
Auto Delete Document
Specify the period during which data in the user box is saved.
!
Detail
If "Password Rules" is enabled, no password containing less than eight characters can be registered.
If you have already registered a user password containing less than eight characters, change it to one
using eight characters before enabling "Password Rules". For details on the password rules, refer to
"Admin. Settings Menu" on page 9-25.
10-26
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10.5.3
10
Changing system box settings or deleting system boxes
Change the settings for created system boxes (annotation user box) or delete the boxes.
!
Detail
annotation user box:
This is the box to print the saved document data with an image of the date/time and an annotation
number. You can set the character string added to the saved box and change it when you print a
document.
Open System User Box
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Box tab - "Open System User Box".
2
Click the [OK] button, select the box to specify from the list or specify the box number, and then click
the [OK] button.
3
Specify the following settings.
magicolor 8650
Item
Definition
[User Box Setting]
Changes the user box settings.
[Delete User Box]
Deletes the user box.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-27
PageScope Web Connection
10
"Annotation User Box" settings
10-28
Item
Definition
User Box Number
Displays the user box number.
User Box Name
Specify the user box name (up to 20 characters).
Auto Delete Document
Specify the period during which data in the user box is saved.
Change User Box Password
Change the user box password.
Change Count Up
To change the counting method, select the check box, and then specify the counting
method. If the user box contains documents, the setting cannot be specified.
Change Stamp Elements
To change the text, select the check box, and then specify settings for "Primary field",
"Secondary Field", "Date/Time", "Print Position", "Density", and "Number Type".
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10.5.4
10
Creating a new system user box
Create a new system user box.
Create System User Box
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Box tab - "Create System User Box".
2
Specify the following settings.
When "Annotation User Box" is selected
Item
Definition
User Box Number
Specify the registration number of the box to be created ("Use opening number" or "Direct
Input").
User Box Name
Specify the user box name (up to 20 characters).
To specify the user box password, select the "Use Box Password" check box, and then
specify the password (up to 8 characters).
Auto Delete Document
Specify the period during which data in the user box is saved.
Count Up
Select the counting method. If the user box contains documents, the setting cannot be
specified.
Stamp Elements
Specify settings for "Primary Field", "Secondary Field", "Date/Time Setting", "Print Position", "Density", and "Number Type"
!
Detail
If "Password Rules" is enabled, no password containing less than eight characters can be registered.
If you have already registered a user password containing less than eight characters, change it to one
using eight characters before enabling "Password Rules". For details on the password rules, refer to
"Admin. Settings Menu" on page 9-25.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-29
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.6
Importing or exporting setting information
Import or export setting information of this machine.
Machine settings can be saved (exported) from this machine to the computer, or can be written from the
computer to the machine (imported).
Import/Export
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Maintenance tab - "Import/Export".
2
Specify the following settings.
Item
Definition
Device Setting
Imports or exports device settings.
Audit Log
Exports the audit log information.
Counter
Exports the counter information.
User Information
Imports or exports user information.
When user authentication or account track is enabled, counter information for every
user or account can be exported as text files.
Authentication Data
When using an authentication unit (biometric type) on this machine, biometrics information can be imported or exported.
!
Detail
Exported files cannot be edited.
"Audit Log" and "Counter" are available only for exporting.
When importing or exporting authentication data, operate user registration information in the same way.
Operate the authentication data after operate the user authentication information.
"Audit Log" is available when audit log setting is enabled on this machine. For details, refer to "Security
Settings" on page 9-25.
10-30
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10.7
10
Specifying the date and time on this machine
Specify the date and time of the internal clock of this machine.
The following specification methods are available: manual specification and acquisition from the NTP server
via the network.
To make this machine log in to the Active Directory, it may be necessary to specify the date and time of this
machine.
%
Specify the settings according to the following flowchart.
Use NTP?
No
Yes
Manual Setting
TCP/IP Settings
Time Zone
Time Adjustment Setting
Finish
!
Detail
The following sections contain descriptions on the settings to make this machine log in to the Active
Directory. For details, refer to the respective sections.
"Limiting users using this machine (Active Directory)" on page 10-40
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-31
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.7.1
10.7.2
Manual Setting
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Maintenance tab - "Date/Time
Setting" - "Manual Setting".
2
Specify the following settings.
Item
Definition
Year
Enter the year.
Month
Enter the month.
Day
Enter the day.
Hour
Enter the hour.
Minute
Enter the minutes.
Time Zone
Select the time difference from GMT.
Daylight Saving Time
If necessary, specify the daylight saving time setting.
Prior confirmation
Time zone
TCP/IP Settings
Specify settings to use this machine in a TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to "Specifying general settings for TCP/IP-based communication" on page 3-3.
10.7.3
Time Zone
On the Manual Setting screen, specify setting for "Time Zone".
For details, refer to "Manual Setting" on page 10-32.
10-32
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10.7.4
10
Time Adjustment Setting
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Maintenance tab - "Date/Time
Setting" - "Time Adjustment Setting".
2
Specify the following settings.
magicolor 8650
Item
Definition
Time Adjustment
Setting
Select "ON".
NTP Server Address
Specify the NTP server address. (Format: "***.***.***.***",
Range for ***: 0 to 255)
If the DNS server is specified, the address can be specified using the host name.
This item can also be specified with IPv6.
Address of the server
Port Number
Default setting: 123
Specify the port number.
Port number for the
server
[Adjust]
Connects to the NTP server with the specified conditions
to adjust the time.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Prior confirmation
10-33
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.8
Limiting users using this machine (Machine authentication)
Specify settings for using this machine using machine authentication.
Specify user authentication and account track settings in order to control the use of this machine. User
authentication settings are specified to manage individuals, and account track settings are specified to
manage groups and multiple users. By specifying both user authentication and account track settings, the
number of prints made by each account can be managed for each individual user.
%
Specify the settings according to the following flowchart.
User Auth/Account Track
(1) User Authentication
(2) Account Track
(3) Synchronize user authentication and account track
(1)
(2)
(3)
User Registration
Account Track Registration
Account Track Registration
User Registration
Finish
2
Note
For (1) User Authentication, select "ON" for "General Settings" in [User Auth/Account Track].
For (2) Account Track, select "ON" for "Account Track" in [User Auth/Account Track].
For (3) Synchronize user authentication and account track, select "ON" for both "General Settings" and
"Account Track", and select "Synchronize" for "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track".
For details, refer to "User Auth/Account Track" on page 10-35.
10-34
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10.8.1
10
User Auth/Account Track
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Security tab - "Authentication" "User Auth/Account Track".
2
Specify the following settings.
Item
Definition
Prior confirmation
General Settings
Select "ON (MFP)".
Public User Access
Specify whether to allow public users.
Whether to allow public
users
Account Track
To use the account track function, select "ON".
Whether to use Account Track
Account Track Input
Method
To use the account track function, select the desired authentication method.
Synchronize User Authentication & Account
Track
To synchronize user authentication and account track
functions, select "Synchronize".
Number of Counters
Assigned for Users
To use the user authentication and account track, specify
the number of counters assigned for users.
When Number of Jobs
Reach Maximum
Specify the operation that is performed when the number
of copies or printouts have reached its maximum.
Whether to synchronize
the user authentication
and account track
functions
!
Detail
If "EnhancedSecurity" is set to "ON", the authentication method cannot be set to "OFF". In addition,
"Public User Access" is set to "Restrict".
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-35
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.8.2
10-36
User Registration
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Security tab - "User Registration" [New Registration].
2
Specify the following settings.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10
Item
Definition
No.
Enter the registration number.
User Name
Enter the user name.
E-mail Address
Not available for this machine.
User Password
Enter the password.
Retype User Password
Enter the password again.
Account Name
Register the account to which the user belongs. Before selecting the account name, register the account. When "Synchronize" of the user authentication and account is
specified, this item appears.
Function Permission
Specify whether to allow printing, user box operation, and
print from user box.
Display items related to Copy, Scan, External Memory or Fax
are not available for this machine.
Output Permission (Print)
Specify whether to allow color or black output when printing.
Output Permission (TX)
Not available for this machine.
Max. Allowance Set
Specify whether to limit the max. allowance of output.
Limiting Access to Destinations
Not available for this machine.
Prior confirmation
!
Detail
If "Password Rules" is enabled, no password containing less than eight characters can be registered.
If you have already registered a user password containing less than eight characters, change it to one
using eight characters before enabling "Password Rules". For details on the password rules, refer to
"Admin. Settings Menu" on page 9-25.
2
Note
A total of 1,000 User Authentications and Account Tracks can be registered on this machine if an
optional HDD is installed, or a total of 30 User Authentications and Account Tracks can be registered if
a HDD is not installed.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-37
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.8.3
Account Track Registration
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Security tab - "Account Track
Registration" - [New Registration].
2
Specify the following settings.
Item
Definition
No.
Enter the registration number.
Account Name
Enter the account name.
Password
Enter the password.
Retype Password
Enter the password again.
Output Permission
(Print)
Specify whether to allow color or black output when
printing.
Output Permission (TX)
Not available for this machine.
Max. Allowance Set
Displays whether to limit the max. allowance of output.
Prior confirmation
!
Detail
If "Password Rules" is enabled, no password containing less than eight characters can be registered.
If you have already registered a user password containing less than eight characters, change it to one
using eight characters before enabling "Password Rules". For details on the password rules, refer to
"Admin. Settings Menu" on page 9-25.
10-38
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10
2
Note
A total of 1,000 User Authentications and Account Tracks can be registered on this machine if an
optional HDD is installed, or a total of 30 User Authentications and Account Tracks can be registered if
a HDD is not installed.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-39
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.9
Limiting users using this machine (Active Directory)
Specify settings for limiting users of this machine using Active Directory.
To perform authentication using Active Directory of Windows Server, use this setting. This setting limits
functions available on a user basis.
%
Specify the settings according to the following flowchart.
TCP/IP Settings
External Server Registration
User Auth/Account Track
Default Function Permission
Date&Time Setting
Finish
10.9.1
TCP/IP Settings
Specify settings to use this machine in a TCP/IP network environment.
When using Active Directory, specify a DNS server synchronized with Active Directory in the DNS Server
Settings of this machine.
For details, refer to "Specifying general settings for TCP/IP-based communication" on page 3-3.
10-40
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10.9.2
10
External Server Registration
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Security tab - "Authentication" "External Server Registration" - [Edit].
2
Specify the following settings.
magicolor 8650
Item
Definition
No.
Displays the registration number.
External Server Name
Enter the name of the external authentication server (up
to 32 characters).
External Server Type
Select "Active Directory".
Default Domain Name
Enter the default domain name.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Prior confirmation
Default domain name
10-41
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.9.3
10-42
User Auth/Account Track
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Security tab - "Authentication" "User Auth/Account Track".
2
Specify the following settings.
Item
Definition
General Settings
Select "ON (External Server)".
Ticket Hold Time Setting (Active Directory)
Specify the ticket hold time.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Prior confirmation
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10.9.4
10
Default Function Permission
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Security tab - "Authentication" "Default Function Permission".
2
Specify the following settings.
Item
Definition
Copy
Limits functions available to authorized users on this machine. Specify whether to allow each function.
Display items related to Copy, Scan, External Memory or
Fax are not available for this machine.
Scan
Save to External Memory
Prior confirmation
Fax
Print
User Box
Print Scan/Fax from
User Box
10.9.5
Date/Time Setting
When using Active Directory, specify the date and time on this machine.
For details, refer to "Specifying the date and time on this machine" on page 10-31.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-43
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.10
Limiting users using this machine (Windows domain/workgroup)
Specify settings for limiting users of this machine using NTLM authentication.
To perform NTLM-based authentication without using Active Directory of Windows Server, use this setting.
This setting limits functions available on a user basis.
%
Specify the settings according to the following flowchart.
TCP/IP Settings
External Server Registration
User Auth/Account Track
Default Function Permission
Client Setting
Use the WINS server?
No
WINS Setting
Finish
This machine supports the direct hosting service. To execute NTLM authentication in the IPv6 environment,
the Direct Hosting setting must be enabled.
When the Direct Hosting setting is enabled, this machine acquires the IPv6 address of the Windows server
using the DNS server.
Prepare a DNS server and be sure to correctly specify the DNS settings of this machine.
10.10.1
TCP/IP Settings
Specify settings to use this machine in a TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to "Specifying general settings for TCP/IP-based communication" on page 3-3.
10-44
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10.10.2
10
External Server Registration
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Security tab - "Authentication" "External Server Registration" - [Edit].
2
Specify the following settings.
magicolor 8650
Item
Definition
No.
Displays the registration number.
External Server Name
Enter the name of the external authentication server (up
to 32 characters).
External Server Type
Select "NTLM v1" or "NTLM v2".
NTLMv2 is applied from Windows NT 4.0 (Service Pack
4).
Default Domain Name
Enter the default domain name.
Enter the default domain name in uppercase letters.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Prior confirmation
Default domain name
10-45
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.10.3
10.10.4
User Auth/Account Track
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Security tab - "Authentication" "User Auth/Account Track".
2
Specify the following setting.
Item
Definition
General Settings
Select "ON (External Server)".
Prior confirmation
Default Function Permission
Limits functions available to authorized users on this machine.
For details, refer to "Default Function Permission" on page 10-43.
10-46
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10.10.5
10
Client Setting
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Network tab - "SMB Setting" - "Client
Setting".
2
Specify the following setting.
Item
Definition
User Authentication
(NTLM)
Select "ON".
Prior confirmation
!
Detail
When "OFF" is specified for "User authentication (NTLM)", "NTLM v1" or "NTLM v2" cannot be selected
for External Server Type in External Server Registration.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-47
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.10.6
10-48
WINS Setting
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Network tab - "SMB Setting" - "WINS
Setting".
2
Specify the following settings.
Item
Definition
WINS
To use the WINS server, select "ON".
Auto Obtain Setting
To automatically obtain the WINS server address, select
"Enable".
This item is enabled when the DHCP is enabled.
Whether automatic acquisition is available
with DHCP
WINS Server Address 1
and 2
Specify the WINS server address. (Format: "***.***.***.***",
Range for ***: 0 to 255)
Address of the server
Node Type Setting
Specify the name resolution method.
• B Node: Query by broadcast
• P Node: Query to WINS server
• M Node: Query in the order of broadcast, then WINS
server
• H Node: Query in the order of WINS server, then
broadcast
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Prior confirmation
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10.11
10
Limiting users using this machine (NDS)
Specify settings for limiting users of this machine using NDS.
To perform NDS-based authentication using NetWare 5.1 or NetWare 6.0, use this setting. This setting limits
functions available on a user basis.
%
Specify the settings according to the following flowchart.
External |Server Setting
User Auth/Account Track
Default Function Permission
NetWare Setting
Finish
!
Detail
NDS is available only when IPX is used as the protocol. NDS is not available when IP is used.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-49
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.11.1
10-50
External Server Registration
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Security tab - "Authentication" "External Server Registration" - [Edit].
2
Specify the following settings.
Item
Definition
No.
Displays the registration number.
External Server Name
Enter the name of the external authentication server (up
to 32 characters).
External Server Type
Select "NDS".
Default NDS Tree
Name
Enter the default NDS tree name.
Default NDS Context
Name
Enter the default NDS context name.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Prior confirmation
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10.11.2
10.11.3
10
User Auth/Account Track
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Security tab - "Authentication" "User Auth/Account Track".
2
Specify the following setting.
Item
Definition
General Settings
Select "ON (External Server)".
Prior confirmation
Default Function Permission
Limits functions available to authorized users on this machine.
For details, refer to "Default Function Permission" on page 10-43.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-51
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.11.4
10-52
NetWare Setting
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Network tab - "NetWare Setting" "NetWare Setting".
2
Specify the following settings.
Item
Definition
IPX Setting
Select "ON".
Ethernet Frame Type
Specify the frame type to be used.
User Authentication
Setting
Select "ON".
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Prior confirmation
Frame type
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10.12
10
Limiting users using this machine (LDAP)
Specify settings for limiting users of this machine using the LDAP server.
To perform authentication using the LDAP server, use this setting. This setting limits functions available on a
user basis.
%
Specify the settings according to the following flowchart.
TCP/IP Settings
External Server Registration
User Auth/Account Track
Default Function Permission
Communicate with the
LDAP server using SSL?
Yes
No
LDAP over SSL
Finish
10.12.1
TCP/IP Settings
Specify settings to use this machine in a TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to "Specifying general settings for TCP/IP-based communication" on page 3-3.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-53
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.12.2
10-54
External Server Registration
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Security tab - "Authentication" "External Server Registration" - [Edit].
2
Specify the following settings.
Item
Definition
No.
Displays the registration number.
External Server Name
Enter the name of the external authentication server (up
to 32 characters).
External Server Type
Select "LDAP".
Server Address
Specify the LDAP server address. (Format: "***.***.***.***",
Range for ***: 0 to 255)
If the DNS server is specified, the address can be specified using the host name.
This item can also be specified with IPv6.
Address of the server
Port No.
Specify the port number.
Port number for the
server
Search Base
Specify the search starting point in a hierarchical structure placed on the LDAP server. Searches are performed
by also including the subdirectories lower than the starting point that was specified.
Timeout
Specify the maximum wait time for a search operation.
Authentication Method
Select the authentication method used for logging in to
the LDAP server.
Search Attribute
If "Digest-MD5" is selected as the authentication method, specify the search attribute.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Prior confirmation
Authentication method
for the server
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10.12.3
10.12.4
10
User Auth/Account Track
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Security tab - "Authentication" "User Auth/Account Track".
2
Specify the following setting.
Item
Definition
General Settings
Select "ON (External Server)".
Prior confirmation
Default Function Permission
Limits functions available to authorized users on this machine.
For details, refer to "Default Function Permission" on page 10-43.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-55
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.12.5
LDAP over SSL
External Server Registration
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Security tab - "Authentication" "External Server Registration" - [Edit].
2
Specify the following settings.
Item
Definition
Prior confirmation
Enable SSL
To encrypt communication between this machine and the
LDAP server using SSL, select the "Enable SSL" check
box.
Whether the sever
supports SSL
Port Number (SSL)
Specify the port number used in SSL communication.
Port number for the
server
Action for Invalid Certificate
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Security tab - "SSL/TLS Setting" "Action for Invalid Certificate".
2
Specify the following setting.
!
Detail
To specify settings for "Action for Invalid Certificate", create a certificate for this machine in advance.
For details, refer to "Creating a certificate for this machine for SSL-based communication" on
page 10-57.
10-56
Item
Definition
Action for Invalid Certificate
Specify the operation when the validity period for the received certificate has expired.
If "Continue" is selected, processing continues even if the
date of the certificate is invalid.
If "Delete the Job" is selected, the job is deleted if the date
of the certificate is invalid.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Prior confirmation
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10.13
10
Creating a certificate for this machine for SSL-based communication
Specify settings to create a certificate for this machine for SSL-based communication.
Creating a certificate for this machine encrypts communication from a client computer to this machine using
SSL in order to prevent disclosure of communication contents and password.
%
Specify the settings according to the following flowchart.
(1) Self-sign
(2) Issue by the certification
authority
(1)
(2)
Create a self-signed Certificate
Request a Certificate
Install a Certificate
Set an Encryption Strength
Set Mode using SSL
Finish
!
Detail
When specifying the following settings, communication from a client computer to this machine can be
encrypted using SSL. For details, refer to the respective sections.
"Using PageScope Web Connection" on page 3-5
"Specifying IPP print settings" on page 3-14
"Using SSL for communication from Vista to this machine with Web Service Function" on page 10-67
"Using the TCP Socket/OpenAPI/FTP server function" on page 10-97
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-57
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.13.1
10-58
Create a self-signed Certificate
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Security tab - "SSL/TLS Setting" "SSL/TLS Setting" - [Setup] - "Create a self-signed Certificate".
2
Specify the following settings.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10
Item
Definition
Common Name
Displays the IP address or domain name of the machine.
Organization
Enter the name of the organization or group used for creating
an organization certificate (up to 63 characters).
Organizational Unit
Enter the name of the account used for creating an account
certificate (up to 63 characters).
Locality
Enter the name of the locality used for creating a locality certificate (up to 127 characters).
State/Province
Enter the name of the state/province used for creating a
state/province certificate (up to 127 characters).
Country
When creating a country certificate, enter a two-character
country code regulated by ISO 3166.
United States: US, Great Britain: GB, Italy: IT, Australia: AU,
The Netherlands: NL, Canada: CA, Spain: ES, Czech Republic: CZ, China: CN, Denmark: DK, Germany: DE, Japan: JP,
France: FR, Belgium: BE, Russia: RU
Admin. E-mail Address
Enter the address for the administrator (up to 127 characters).
Validity Start Date
Enter the starting date for the period of validity. Displays the
date and time when this page was displayed.
Validity Period
Enter the number of days from the starting date for the period of validity for the certificate.
Encryption Strength
Specify the encryption method.
Mode using SSL/TLS
Specify the mode using SSL/TLS.
[OK]
Creates a self-signed certificate. It may take a few minutes
to create a certificate.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Prior confirmation
Address for the administrator
10-59
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.13.2
10-60
Request a Certificate
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Security tab - "SSL/TLS Setting" "SSL/TLS Setting" - [Setup] - "Request a Certificate".
2
Specify the following settings.
Item
Definition
Common Name
Displays the IP address or domain name of the machine.
Organization
Enter the name of the organization or group used for creating an organization certificate (up to 63 characters).
Organizational Unit
Enter the name of the account used for creating an account certificate (up to 63 characters).
Locality
Enter the name of the locality used for creating a locality
certificate (up to 127 characters).
State/Province
Enter the name of the state or province used for creating
a state/province certificate (up to 127 characters).
Country
When creating a country certificate, enter a two-character country code regulated by ISO 3166.
United States: US, Great Britain: GB, Italy: IT, Australia:
AU, The Netherlands: NL, Canada: CA, Spain: ES, Czech
Republic: CZ, China: CN, Denmark: DK, Germany: DE,
Japan: JP, France: FR, Belgium: BE, Russia: RU
Admin. E-mail Address
Specify the address for the administrator (up to 127 characters).
[OK]
Creates certificate signing request data.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Prior confirmation
Address for the administrator
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10
Item
Definition
Certificate Signing Request Data
Displays certificate signing request data.
[Save]
Saves certificate signing request data in the computer as a
file.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Prior confirmation
10-61
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.13.3
10-62
Install a Certificate
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Security tab - "SSL/TLS Setting""SSL/TLS Setting" - [Setup] - "Install a Certificate".
2
After requesting a certificate to the certification authority, install the certificate sent from the certification
authority on this machine.
Item
Definition
Install a Certificate
Paste text data sent from the certification authority.
[OK]
Moves to the Set an Encryption Strength and Set Mode
using SSL screen.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Prior confirmation
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10
Item
Definition
Encryption Strength
Specify the encryption method.
Mode using SSL/TLS
Specify the SSL/TLS application range.
[Install]
Installs the certificate.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Prior confirmation
10-63
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.13.4
10-64
Set an Encryption Strength
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Security tab - "SSL/TLS Setting" "SSL/TLS Setting" - [Setup] - "Set an Encryption Strength".
2
Specify the following setting.
Item
Definition
Encryption Strength
If necessary, change the set encryption strength. Specify
the encryption strength.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Prior confirmation
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10.13.5
10
Set Mode using SSL
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Security tab - "SSL/TLS Setting" "SSL/TLS Setting" - [Setup] - "Set Mode using SSL".
2
Specify the following setting.
magicolor 8650
Item
Definition
Mode using SSL/TLS
If necessary, change the set SSL/TSL application range.
Specify the SSL/TLS application range.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Prior confirmation
10-65
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.13.6
Remove a certificate
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Security tab - "SSL/TLS Setting""SSL/TLS Setting" - [Setup] - "Remove a Certificate".
2
If necessary, remove the certificate installed on this machine. To remove the installed certificate, click
[OK].
!
Detail
If "EnhancedSecurity" is set to "ON", the certificate cannot be removed.
10-66
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10.14
10
Using SSL communication between Vista and this machine with Web
Service Function
When using the Web Service function, execute SSL-based encryption of communication from a Windows
Vista-equipped computer to this machine. To perform SSL communication, both communications from the
computer to this machine and from this machine to the computer must be encrypted by SSL.
Perform settings for the following "Using SSL for communication from Vista to this machine with Web Service
Function" and "Using SSL for communication from this machine to Vista with Web Service Function".
10.14.1
Using SSL for communication from Vista to this machine with Web Service Function
When using the Web Service function, specify settings for SSL-based encryption of communication from a
Windows Vista-equipped computer to this machine. These settings ensure safer file transmission by
encrypting Web service-based communication using SSL.
%
Specify the settings according to the following flowchart.
TCP/IP Settings
SSL/TLS Setting
Web Service Common Settings
Finish
!
Detail
To encrypt communication from a Windows Vista-equipped computer to this machine using SSL, the
computer must be able to resolve the names for this machine using the DNS server. Register this
machine to the DNS server in advance, and specify settings for DNS at the computer side.
When the certificate of this machine is not published by certificate authority, register the certificate of
this machine to Windows Vista as a certificate of "Trusted Root Certification Authorities" for "Local
Computer" in advance.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-67
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.14.2
Using SSL for communication from this machine to Vista with Web Service Function
When using the Web Service function, specify settings for SSL-based encryption of communication from this
machine to a Windows Vista-equipped computer. These settings ensure safer file transmission by encrypting
Web service-based communication using SSL.
%
Specify the settings according to the following flowchart.
TCP/IP Settings
SSL/TLS Setting
*
Web Service Common Settings
Action for Invalid Certificate
Finish
* These items are already specified in "Using SSL for communication from this machine to Vista with
Web Service Function" on page 10-68.
!
Detail
To encrypt communication from this machine to a Windows Vista-equipped computer using SSL,
create a certificate at the computer side in advance to associate communication port of the computer
with the TCP/IP (Default setting: port number 5385).
10.14.3
TCP/IP Settings
Specify settings to use this machine in a TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to "Specifying general settings for TCP/IP-based communication" on page 3-3.
10.14.4
SSL/TLS Setting
Encrypt communication with this machine using SSL.
For details, refer to "Creating a certificate for this machine for SSL-based communication" on page 10-57.
10.14.5
10-68
Web Service Common Settings
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Network tab - "Web Service Settings"
- "Web Service Common Settings".
2
Specify the following settings.
Item
Definition
Friendly Name
Specify setting for Friendly Name (up to 62 characters).
SSL Setting
Select "ON".
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Prior confirmation
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10.14.6
10
Action for Invalid Certificate
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Security tab - "SSL/TLS Setting" "Action for Invalid Certificate".
2
Specify the following setting.
magicolor 8650
Item
Definition
Action for Invalid
Certificate
Specify the operation when the validity period for the received certificate has expired.
If "Continue" is selected, processing continues even if
the date of the certificate is invalid.
If "Delete the Job" is selected, the job is deleted if the
date of the certificate is invalid.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Prior confirmation
10-69
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.15
Performing IP address filtering
Specify settings for performing IP address filtering.
Performing IP address filtering limits access from specified IP addresses. Specify addresses from which this
machine is accessible and inaccessible.
%
Specify the settings according to the following flowchart.
TCP/IP Settings
IP Filtering
Finish
10.15.1
TCP/IP Settings
Specify settings to use this machine in a TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to "Specifying general settings for TCP/IP-based communication" on page 3-3.
10-70
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10.15.2
10
IP Filtering
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Network tab - "TCP/IP Setting" - "IP
Filtering".
2
Specify the following settings.
magicolor 8650
Item
Definition
Permit Access
To specify permitted addresses, select "Enable".
Set 1 to 5
Specify permitted addresses. (Format: "***.***.***.***",
Range for ***: 0 to 255)
Deny Access
To specify denied addresses, select "Enable".
Set 1 to 5
Specify denied addresses. (Format: "***.***.***.***", Range
for ***: 0 to 255)
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Prior confirmation
Permitted addresses
Denied addresses
10-71
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.16
Communicating using IPv6
Specifying settings for IPv6-based communication
To allocate the IPv6 address to this machine, use this setting. IPv6 can run simultaneously with IPv4.
However, Ipv6 does not run independently.
When using this machine under the IPv6 environment, there are the following restrictions.
SMB Print and NTLM Authentication are not available.
PageScope NDPS Gateway cannot be used.
DHCPv6 cannot be used.
IP filtering is not available.
The printer driver installer cannot be used.
PageScope Web Connection cannot be displayed with Flash.
2
Note
For details on direct hosting service, refer to "Direct Hosting Setting" on page 3-12.
10-72
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10
TCP/IP Setting
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Network tab - "TCP/IP Setting" "TCP/IP Setting".
2
Specify the following settings.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-73
PageScope Web Connection
10
Item
Definition
Prior confirmation
TCP/IP
Select "ON".
IPv6
Select "ON".
Auto IPv6 Setting
To automatically obtain the IPv6 address, select "ON".
Link-Local Address
Displays the link-local address generated from the MAC address.
Global Address
When not automatically obtain the IPv6 address, specify the
IPv6 global address.
IPv6 address
Prefix Length
When not automatically obtain the IPv6 address, specify the
IPv6 global address prefix length.
Prefix length
Gateway Address
When not automatically obtain the IPv6 address, specify the
IPv6 gateway address.
Gateway address
Whether to automatically
obtain the IPv6 address
!
Detail
If necessary, specify settings for DNS. For details, refer to "Specifying general settings for TCP/IPbased communication" on page 3-3.
10-74
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10.17
10
Communicating using IPsec
Specify settings for IPsec-based communication
Communicating using IPsec prevents falsification and disclosure of data by IP packet. This function ensure
safer communication even if transport or application that does not support encryption is used
%
Specify the settings according to the following flowchart.
TCP/IP Settings
IPsec
IKE Setting
SA Setting
Peer
Finish
10.17.1
TCP/IP Settings
Specify settings to use this machine in a TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to "Specifying general settings for TCP/IP-based communication" on page 3-3.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-75
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.17.2
10-76
IPsec
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Network tab - "TCP/IP Setting" "IPsec".
2
Specify the following setting.
Item
Definition
IPsec
Select "ON".
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Prior confirmation
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10.17.3
10
IKE Setting
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Network tab - "TCP/IP Setting" "IPsec" - "IKE" - [Edit].
2
Specify the following settings. (Up to four groups can be registered in "IKE".)
magicolor 8650
Item
Definition
Key Validity Period
Specify the validity period of a key generated when creating a control tunnel.
Diffie-Hellman Group
Select "Diffie-Hellman Group".
Encryption Algorithm
Select the encryption algorithm to be used when creating
a control tunnel.
Authentication Algorithm
Select the authentication algorithm to be used when creating a control tunnel.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Prior confirmation
10-77
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.17.4
10-78
SA Setting
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Network tab - "TCP/IP Setting" "IPsec" - "SA" - [Edit].
2
Specify the following settings. (Up to eight groups can be registered in "SA".)
Item
Definition
Lifetime After Establishing SA
Specify the validity period of a key generated when creating a communication tunnel.
Security Protocol
Select the security protocol.
ESP Encryption Algorithm
When "ESP" is selected for "Security Protocol", specify
the ESP encryption algorithm.
ESP Authentication Algorithm
When "ESP" is selected for "Security Protocol", specify
the ESP authentication algorithm.
AH Authentication Algorithm
When "AH" is selected for "Security Protocol", specify
the AH authentication algorithm.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Prior confirmation
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10.17.5
10
Peer
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Network tab - "TCP/IP Setting" "IPsec" - "Peer" - [Edit].
2
Specify the following settings. (Up to 10 peers can be registered in "Peer".)
magicolor 8650
Item
Definition
Perfect Forward
Secrecy
To increase the IKE strength, select "ON".
Peer
Specify the IP address of the peer.
Pre-Shared Key Text
Specify the Pre-Shared Key text shared with the peer.
Encapsulation Mode
Specify the operation mode of IPsec.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Prior confirmation
IP address of the peer
10-79
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.18
Monitoring this machine using the SNMP manager
Specify settings for monitoring this machine using a general SNMP manager.
SNMP manager-based communication with this machine allows acquisition, management, and monitoring
of the information of this machine via the network. SNMP runs in a TCP/IP or IPX/SPX environment.
In addition, use of the TRAP function of SNMP allows setting for notification of the status of this machine. For
details, refer to "Providing notification of the status of this machine (TRAP)" on page 10-94.
%
Specify the settings according to the following flowchart.
(1) Use TCP/IP
(2) Use IPX/SPX
(1)
(2)
TCP/IP Settings
NetWare Setting
SNMP Setting
Finish
10.18.1
TCP/IP Settings
Specify settings to use this machine in a TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to "Specifying general settings for TCP/IP-based communication" on page 3-3.
10-80
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10.18.2
10
NetWare Setting
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Network tab - "NetWare Setting" "NetWare Setting".
2
Specify the following settings.
magicolor 8650
Item
Definition
IPX Setting
Select "ON".
Ethernet Frame Type
Specify the frame type to be used.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Prior confirmation
Frame type
10-81
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.18.3
10-82
SNMP Setting
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Network tab - "SNMP Setting".
2
Specify the following settings.
Item
Definition
Prior confirmation
SNMP
Specifies whether to use the SNMP. If yes, specify
whether to use SNMP v1/v2 (IP), SNMP v3, and SNMP v1
(IPX).
SNMP v1 (IPX) can be specified only when IPX is enabled.
Protocol to be used
(TCP/IP or IPX/SPX)
UDP Port Setting
Default setting: 161
Specify the UDP port number.
SNMP v1/v2c Setting
Specify settings for using SNMP v1/v2c.
Read Community
Name
Specify the community name to be used for scanning (up
to 15 characters).
Write Community
Name
Specify the community name to be used for reading and
writing (up to 15 characters).
SNMP v3 Setting
Specify settings for SNMP v3.
Context Name
Specify the context name (up to 63 characters).
Discovery User Name
Specify the user name for detection (up to 32 characters).
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
magicolor 8650
10
Item
Definition
Read User Name
Specify the name of read only user (up to 32 characters).
Security Level
Specify the security level for read only user.
auth-password
Specify the read only user authentication password to be
used for authentication (up to 32 characters).
priv-password
Specify the read only user privacy password to be used
for privacy (encryption) (up to 32 characters).
Write User Name
Specify the reading/writing user name (up to 32 characters).
Security Level
Specify the security level for reading/writing user.
auth-password
Specify the reading/writing user authentication password
to be used for authentication (up to 32 characters).
priv-password
Specify the reading/writing user privacy password to be
used for privacy (encryption) (up to 32 characters).
Encryption Algorithm
Specify the encryption algorithm.
Authentication Method
Specify the authentication method.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Prior confirmation
10-83
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.19
Providing notification of the status of this machine (E-mail)
Specify settings for notifying the administrator of the machine status via E-mail.
Using this function provides notification for a specified address when a warning message occurs on this
machine.
Communication by combining POP before SMTP, APOP, SMTP authentication or encryption using SSL/TLS
is available.
%
Specify the settings according to the following flowchart.
TCP/IP Settings
E-mail TX (SMTP)
Status Notification Setting
Communicate with the
SMTP server using
SSL/TLS?
Yes
No
SMTP over SSL/Start TLS
POP before SMTP?
SMTP Authentication?
Yes
No
Yes
SMTP Authentication
No
POP before SMTP
(1) POP over SSL?
(2) APOP?
Yes
(1) POP over SSL
(2) APOP Authentication
Finish
10.19.1
TCP/IP Settings
Specify settings to use this machine in a TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to "Specifying general settings for TCP/IP-based communication" on page 3-3.
10-84
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10.19.2
10
E-mail TX (SMTP)
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Network tab - "E-mail Setting" "E-mail TX (SMTP)".
2
Specify the following settings.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-85
PageScope Web Connection
10
10-86
Item
Definition
E-mail TX Setting
Select "ON".
E-mail Notification
Select "ON".
SMTP Server Address
Specify the SMTP server address. (Format: "***.***.***.***",
Range for ***: 0 to 255)
If the DNS server is specified, the address can be specified
using the host name.
This item can also be specified with IPv6.
Address of the server
Port Number
Default setting: 25
Specify the port number.
Port number for the server
Connection Timeout
Specify the time period before the server connection times
out.
Max Mail Size
Select whether to limit the size of sent messages.
Server Capacity
To limit the maximum mail size, specify the max. allowance
of the mail size including the attached file.
Mails exceeding the maximum allowance are removed.
If a mail is separated, this setting is disabled.
Receiving limit of the
server
Admin. E-mail Address
Displays the administrator address.
If the administrator address is not specified, specify it at
"Machine Setting".
Address for the administrator
Binary Division
To divide the mail size, select "ON".
If the mail software used for receiving mails does not have
the mail restore function, the mails may not be read.
Restore function of the
mail soft
Divided Mail Size
To divide the mail, specify a divided mail size.
Receiving limit of the
server
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Prior confirmation
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10.19.3
10
Status Notification Setting
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Maintenance tab - "Status
Notification Setting" - "E-mail Address" - [Edit].
2
Specify the following settings.
magicolor 8650
Item
Definition
Prior confirmation
Notification Address
Specify the notification address.
Notification address
Replenish Paper Tray
Provides notification when a paper-out condition occurs.
JAM
Provides notification when a paper misfeed occurs.
PM Call
Provides notification when a periodic inspection is required.
Replace Staples
Provides notification when a staple-out condition occurs.
Replenish Toner
Provides notification when a toner-out condition occurs.
Finisher Tray Full
Provides notification when the finisher tray becomes full.
Service Call
Provides notification when a service call occurs.
Job Finished
Provides notification when the job is completed.
Hole-Punch Scrap Box
Full
Provides notification when hole-punch scraps must be
removed.
Waste Toner Box Full
Provides notification when the waste toner box must be
replaced.
Imaging Unit Yield
Provides notification when the imaging unit must be replaced.
Fusing Unit Yield
Provides notification when the fusing unit must be replaced.
Transfer Belt Unit Yield
Provides notification when the transfer belt must be replaced.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-87
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.19.4
SMTP over SSL/Start TLS
E-mail TX (SMTP)
10-88
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Network tab - "E-mail Setting" "E-mail TX (SMTP)".
2
Specify the following settings.
Item
Definition
Prior confirmation
Use SSL/TLS
To encrypt communication between this machine and the
SMTP server using SSL/TTS, select "SMTP over SSL" or
"Start TLS".
Whether the sever supports SSL or START
TLS
Port Number
Default setting: 25
If "Start TLS" is selected, specify the port number.
Port number for the
server
Port No. (SSL)
Default setting: 465
If "SMTP over SSL" is selected, specify the port number
to be used for SSL communication.
Port number for the
server
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10
Action for Invalid Certificate
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Security tab - "SSL/TLS Setting" "Action for Invalid Certificate".
2
Specify the following settings.
!
Detail
To specify settings for "Action for Invalid Certificate", create a certificate for this machine in advance.
For details, refer to "Creating a certificate for this machine for SSL-based communication" on
page 10-57.
Item
Definition
Action for Invalid Certificate
Specify the operation when the validity period for the received certificate has expired.
If "Continue" is selected, processing continues even if the
date of the certificate is invalid.
If "Delete the Job" is selected, the job is deleted if the date
of the certificate is invalid.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Prior confirmation
10-89
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.19.5
SMTP Authentication
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Network tab - "E-mail Setting" "E-mail TX (SMTP)".
2
Specify the following settings.
Item
Definition
Prior confirmation
SMTP Authentication
To perform SMTP authentication, select the "SMTP Authentication" check box.
Whether the sever requests SMTP
User ID
Specify the user ID for the SMTP authentication (up to
255 characters).
Password
Specify the password for the SMTP authentication (up to
128 characters).
Domain Name
Specify the domain name for the SMTP authentication
(up to 255 characters).
If the authentication method is Digest-MD5, the domain
name must be specified.
Authentication method
Authentication Settings
Specify whether to synchronize with user authentication.
When user authentication is performed, this item is displayed.
Whether to synchronize
the user authentication
!
Detail
A SMTP authentication method that is supported by the SMTP server and provided with the strongest
encryption strength is automatically selected from Digest-MD5, CRAM-MD5, PLAIN, and LOGIN.
If there is just one domain (realm) to which the user belongs, it is notified from the SMTP server at the
time of initial communication, and communication is automatically made using the domain name.
Therefore, no domain name setting on this machine is not required. If there are two domains or more
to which the user belongs, however, specify the domain name to which the user belongs.
10.19.6
POP before SMTP
POP before SMTP
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Network tab - "E-mail Setting" - "Email TX (SMTP)".
2
Specify the following settings.
Item
Definition
Prior confirmation
POP before SMTP
To perform POP before SMTP, select
"ON".
Whether the sever requires POP before SMTP authentication
POP before SMTP
Time
Specify the time period to access the
SMTP server after logging in to the POP
server.
Whether the POP server is different
from the SMTP server
!
Detail
If the POP server is different from the SMTP server, the POP server informs the SMTP server that it has
been logged in. Therefore, if the set POP before SMTP time is too short, messages may not be sent.
10-90
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10
E-mail RX (POP)
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Network tab - "E-mail Setting" "E-mail RX (POP)".
2
Specify the following settings.
magicolor 8650
Item
Definition
E-mail RX Setting
To perform POP before SMTP, select "ON".
POP Server Address
Specify the POP server address. (Format: "***.***.***.***",
Range for ***: 0 to 255)
If the DNS server is specified, the address can be specified using the host name.
This item can also be specified with IPv6.
Login Name
Enter the login name for the POP server (up to 63 characters).
Password
Specify the password for logging in to the POP server (up
to 15 characters).
Connection Timeout
Specify the time period before the server connection
times out.
Port Number
Default setting: 110
Specify the port number.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Prior confirmation
Address of the server
Port number for the
server
10-91
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.19.7
POP over SSL
E-mail RX (POP)
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Network tab - "E-mail Setting" "E-mail RX (POP)".
2
Specify the following settings.
Item
Definition
Prior confirmation
Use SSL/TLS
To encrypt communication between this machine and the
POPS server using SSL, select the "Use SSL/TLS" check
box.
Whether the sever supports SSL
Port No. (SSL)
Default setting: 995
Specify the port number used in SSL communication.
Port number for the
server
Action for Invalid Certificate
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Security tab - "SSL/TLS Setting" "Action for Invalid Certificate".
2
Specify the following settings.
!
Detail
To specify settings for "Action for Invalid Certificate", create a certificate for this machine in advance.
For details, refer to "Creating a certificate for this machine for SSL-based communication" on
page 10-57.
10-92
Item
Definition
Action for Invalid Certificate
Specify the operation when the validity period for the received certificate has expired.
If "Continue" is selected, processing continues even if the
date of the certificate is invalid.
If "Delete the Job" is selected, the job is deleted if the date
of the certificate is invalid.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Prior confirmation
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10.19.8
10
APOP Authentication
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Network tab - "E-mail Setting" "E-mail RX (POP)".
2
Specify the following settings.
Item
Definition
Prior confirmation
APOP Authentication
To encrypt the login name and password when logging in
to the POP server, select "ON".
Whether the sever requests APOP
!
Detail
When the POP server is logged in with APOP, the password is encrypted with Digest-MD5. If "ON" is
specified for APOP authentication, you cannot log in to the server if the POP server does not support
APOP.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-93
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.20
Providing notification of the status of this machine (TRAP)
Specify settings for notifying the administrator of the machine status using the TRAP function of SNMP.
Using this function provides notification for a specified IP address or IPX address when a warning message
occurs on this machine.
%
Specify the settings according to the following flowchart.
(1) Provide notification for an
IP address
(2) Provide notification for an
IPX address
(1)
(2)
TCP/IP Settings
NetWare Setting
TRAP Setting
Status Notification Setting
Finish
!
Detail
To use the TRAP function of SNMP, specify settings for SNMP in advance. For details, refer to
"Monitoring this machine using the SNMP manager" on page 10-80.
10.20.1
TCP/IP Settings
Specify settings to use this machine in a TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to "Specifying general settings for TCP/IP-based communication" on page 3-3.
10-94
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10.20.2
10
NetWare Setting
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Network tab - "NetWare Setting" "NetWare Setting".
2
Specify the following settings.
magicolor 8650
Item
Definition
IPX Setting
Select "ON".
Ethernet Frame Type
Specify the frame type to be used.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Prior confirmation
Frame type
10-95
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.20.3
10.20.4
TRAP Setting
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Network tab - "SNMP Setting".
2
Specify the following settings.
Item
Definition
Allow Setting
Select "Allow".
Trap Setting when Authentication Fails
Select whether to enable the TRAP function when authentication failed.
Prior confirmation
Status Notification Setting
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Maintenance tab - "Status Notification
Setting" - "IP (IPX) Address" - [Edit].
For details on the settings, refer to "Status Notification Setting" on page 10-87.
10-96
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10.21
10
Using the TCP Socket/OpenAPI/FTP server function
Specify settings for TCP Socket, OpenAPI, and FTP server of this machine.
TCP socket is used during data transmissions between the computer application and this machine.
To synchronize this machine with a different OpenAPI-based system, specify settings for OpenAPI.
This machine serves as an FTP server by specifying settings for the FTP server function of this machine. To
update a firmware or to use an application that synchronizes with this machine as an FTP client, use this
setting.
%
Specify the settings according to the following flowchart.
TCP/IP Settings
(1) TCP Socket
(2) OpenAPI
(3) FTP Server
(1)
(2)
(3)
Communicate using SSL?
Communicate using SSL?
FTP Server Setting
Yes
SSL/TLS Setting
SSL/TLS Setting
TCP Socket Setting
OpenAPI Setting
No
Finish
10.21.1
TCP/IP Settings
Specify settings to use this machine in a TCP/IP network environment.
For details, refer to "Specifying general settings for TCP/IP-based communication" on page 3-3.
10.21.2
SSL/TLS Setting
Specify settings for SSL-based communication.
For details, refer to "Creating a certificate for this machine for SSL-based communication" on page 10-57.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-97
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.21.3
TCP Socket Setting
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Network tab - "TCP Socket Setting".
2
Specify the following settings.
!
Detail
To use SSL/TLS, install the certificate in advance. For details, refer to "Creating a certificate for this
machine for SSL-based communication" on page 10-57.
Item
Definition
TCP Socket
Select the "TCP Socket" check box.
Port Number
Specify the port number.
Use SSL/TLS
To use SSL/TLS, select the "Use SSL/TLS" check box.
Port No. (SSL)
Specify the port number used in SSL communication.
Prior confirmation
Whether to use SSL/TLS
!
Detail
If "EnhancedSecurity" is set to "ON", the "Use SSL/TLS" check box is selected.
10-98
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10.21.4
10
OpenAPI Setting
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Network tab - "OpenAPI Setting".
2
Specify the following settings.
!
Detail
To use SSL/TLS, install the certificate in advance. For details, refer to "Creating a certificate for this
machine for SSL-based communication" on page 10-57.
Item
Definition
Port Number
Specify the port number.
Use SSL/TLS
To use SSL/TLS, select the "Use SSL/TLS" check box.
Port No. (SSL/TLS)
Specify the port number used in SSL communication.
Prior confirmation
Whether to use SSL/TLS
!
Detail
If "EnhancedSecurity" is set to "ON", the "Use SSL/TLS" check box is selected.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-99
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.21.5
FTP Server Setting
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Network tab - "FTP Setting" - "FTP
Server Setting".
2
Specify the following setting.
Item
Definition
FTP Server
Select "ON".
Prior confirmation
!
Detail
If "EnhancedSecurity" is set to "ON", "OFF" is selected.
10-100
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10.22
10
Other items on the Maintenance tab
This section describes other items specifiable on the Maintenance tab for the PageScope Web Connection.
10.22.1
Using the timer function
Specify settings for the timer function of this machine.
Settings for the power save function can be specified.
Power Save Setting
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Maintenance tab - "Timer Setting" "Power Save Setting".
2
Specify the following settings.
magicolor 8650
Item
Definition
Low Power Mode Setting
Specify the time period before the machine enters Low Power mode.
Sleep Mode Setting
Specify the time period before the machine enters Sleep mode.
Power Save Key
Manually specify the setting for the power save function (Low Power or Sleep mode).
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-101
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.22.2
Resetting setting information
Reset machine settings.
Network settings and controller settings can be reset.
Network Setting Clear
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Maintenance tab - "Reset" "Network Setting Clear".
2
To reset to the factory default network settings, click [Clear].
!
Detail
If "EnhancedSecurity" is set to "ON", this menu item does not appear.
10-102
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10
Reset
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Maintenance tab - "Reset" - "Reset".
2
To reset the controller, click [Reset].
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-103
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.22.3
Registering the header or footer
To print on this machine, register a text that can be printed as a header or footer.
The header or footer registered here can be selected in the printer driver.
Header/Footer Registration
10-104
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Maintenance tab - "Header/Footer
Registration" - [Edit].
2
Specify the following settings.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10
Item
Definition
No.
Displays the registration number.
Name
Specify the registration name.
Color
Specify the color.
Pages
Select the pages to be printed.
Size
Specify the size.
Date/Time Setting
Specify the date and time formats.
Distribution Number
Specify the distribution number text. Select the output format, and then specify the starting number.
Header/Footer
Specify whether to print the following items.
• Header String/Footer String (up to 40 characters each)
• Date/Time Setting
• Distribution Number
• Job Number
• Serial Number
• User Name/Account Name
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-105
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.23
Other items on the Security tab
This section describes other items specifiable on the Security tab for the PageScope Web Connection.
10.23.1
Specifying the auto logout time
Specify the length of time before Administrator mode or User mode is automatically logged out.
If no operation is performed for the length of time specified here, the user will automatically be logged out.
Auto Logout
10-106
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Security tab - "Auto Logout".
2
Specify the following settings.
Item
Definition
Admin. Mode Logout
Time
Specify the time period before the user is automatically logged out when no operation is performed for a certain period of time in Administrator mode.
User Mode Logout
Time
Specify the time period before the user is automatically logged out when no operation is performed for a certain period of time in the user mode.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10.23.2
10
Specifying the Administrator password
Specify the password for the machine’s administrator.
Administrator Password Setting
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Security tab - "Administrator
Password Setting".
2
Specify the following settings.
!
Detail
If "EnhancedSecurity" is set to "ON", this menu item does not appear.
If the certificate for this machine is not installed, this menu item does not appear.
Item
Definition
Administrator Password
Specify the administrator password (up to 8 characters).
Retype Administrator
Password
Enter the administrator password again for confirmation.
!
Detail
If "Password Rules" is enabled, no password containing less than eight characters can be registered.
If you have already registered a user password containing less than eight characters, change it to one
using eight characters before enabling "Password Rules". For details on the password rules, refer to
"Admin. Settings Menu" on page 9-25.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-107
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.24
Print Setting tab settings
This section describes other items specifiable on the Print Setting tab for the PageScope Web Connection.
On the Print Setting tab, specify settings for the print function of this machine.
10.24.1
Specifying initial settings for the print function
Specify initial settings for the print function.
Basic Setting
10-108
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Print Setting tab - "Basic Setting".
2
Specify the following settings.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10
Item
Definition
PDL Setting
Specify the PDL language.
Paper Tray
Specify the paper tray.
Output Tray
Specify the output tray.
2-Sided Print
Specify whether to perform 2-sided print.
Bind Direction
Specify the binding direction.
Staple
Specify whether to perform staple. If yes, specify the number of staples.
Punch
Specify whether to perform punch.
Number of Sets
Specifies the number of copies to be printed.
Default Paper Size
Specifies the paper size.
Original Direction
Select the original direction.
Spool Print Jobs in HDD
before RIP
Select whether to spool a print job to HDD.
Banner Sheet Setting
Specify whether to print the first page on the banner page.
Banner Sheet Paper Tray
Select the default paper tray used for printing the banner pages.
No Matching Paper in
Tray Setting
Specify whether to continue printing from a different paper tray when there is no paper of
the appropriate size in the specified paper tray.
A4/A3 <=> LTR/LGR
Auto Switch
Select whether to print an A4 (Letter)/A3 (Ledger) original in the same size with disregard
to image missing when the Letter (A4)/Ledger (A3) paper tray is selected.
Binding Direction Adjustment
Specify the binding direction adjustment method.
!
Detail
The staple function is available only if the optional finisher is installed.
The punch function is available only if the optional finisher and punch kit are installed.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-109
PageScope Web Connection
10
10.24.2
Specifying settings for PCL/PS/XPS print
Specify settings for PCL/PS/XPS print
PCL Settings
10-110
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Print Setting tab - "PCL Setting".
2
Specify the following settings.
Item
Definition
Symbol Set
Specify the symbol set.
Typeface
Select the internal font ("Resident Font") or downloaded font ("Download Font").
Font Size
Specify the font size.
Line/Page
Specify the number of lines per page.
CR/LF Mapping
Specify the text data CR/LF replacement method.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10
PS Setting
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Print Setting tab - "PS Setting".
2
Specify the following settings.
magicolor 8650
Item
Definition
PS Error Print
Specify whether to print error message when an error occurs during PS rasterization.
ICC Profile Settings
Specify the ICC profile.
Photo
Specify the default value of the profile when "Photo" is selected by the printer driver.
Text
Specify the default value of the profile when "Text" is selected by the printer driver.
Figure/Table/Graph
Specify the default value of the profile when "Figure/Table/Graph" is selected by the
printer driver.
Simulation Profile
Specify the default value of the ICC profile for simulation.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-111
PageScope Web Connection
10
XPS Settings
10-112
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Print Setting tab - "XPS Settings".
2
Specify the following settings.
Item
Definition
Verify XPS Digital
Signature
Specify whether to verify digital signature. When "ON" is selected, the document
without a valid digital signature is not printed.
Print XPS Errors
Specify whether to print error message when an error occurs during XPS print.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
PageScope Web Connection
10.24.3
10
Specifying the interface timeout
Specify the time period before the interfaced connection times out.
Interface Setting
1
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Print Setting tab - "Interface Setting".
2
Specify the following settings.
magicolor 8650
Item
Definition
Network Timeout
Specify the reception timeout for the network.
USB Timeout
Specify the USB timeout.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
10-113
PageScope Web Connection
10
10-114
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
11
Troubleshooting
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Troubleshooting
11
11
Troubleshooting
11.1
When an error code appears
There are three types of errors; errors that can be cleared by opening/closing the front door, errors that can
be cleared by turning the power off/on, and errors that cannot be cleared. Clear the error by following the onscreen instructions. If the error cannot be cleared or released, contact your service representative or the
manufacturer with the error code.
Example: Error that can be cleared by turning the power off/on (C-0001)
2
Reminder
Since the machine may be damaged, contact the service representative or the manufacturer according
to the procedure described below as soon as the call service representative screen appears.
1
Write down the trouble code (for example, C-0001) in the call service representative screen.
2
Use the power switch to turn off the machine.
3
Unplug the machine.
4
Contact the service representative or the manufacturer, and inform them of the trouble code.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
11-3
Troubleshooting
11
11.2
When the message "Misfeed detected. XXXX Remove paper." appears
If a misfeed occurs during printing, the message "Misfeed detected. XXXX Remove paper." appears and the
location of the misfeed is indicated in the screen. (misfeed location screen)
At this time, printing cannot continue until the misfeed is adequately cleared.
2
Note
The procedure for clearing misfed paper differs depending on where the misfeed occurs. Determine the
misfeed location, and then clear the misfeed according to the appropriate procedure.
11.2.1
Paper misfeed indications
21
13,14,15,16,17,18
8
10
1
7
3
4
5
2
*The illustration above shows the main unit with optional finisher FS-519, mailbin kit and the double paper
feed cabinet installed.
11-4
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Troubleshooting
11
19,20
11
6
*The illustration above shows optional finisher FS-519, saddle stitcher and the tray 4 (LCT) installed.
23
24
25
26
22
*The illustration above shows optional finisher FS-609 and the double paper feed cabinet installed.
No.
Code
Description
1
1001
A paper misfeed in the tray 1 (bypass tray) (p. 11-15)
2
1101
A paper misfeed in the tray 2 (p. 11-19)
3
1201
A paper misfeed in the tray 3 (p. 11-22)
4
1301
A paper misfeed in the tray 4 (p. 11-24)
5
1401
A paper misfeed in the tray 5 (p. 11-24)
6
1501
A paper misfeed in the tray 4 (LCT) (p. 11-26)
7
2001
A paper misfeed in the paper transport section (p. 11-17)
8
3001
A paper misfeed in the main unit (p. 11-10)
9
3201
A paper misfeed in the fusing unit (p. 11-7)
10
9201
A paper misfeed in the main unit (p. 11-10)
11
9301
A paper misfeed in the automatic duplex unit (p. 11-13)
12
9901
A paper misfeed in the main unit (p. 11-10)
13
7216
A paper misfeed in the finisher FS-519 (p. 11-32)
14
7218
A paper misfeed in the finisher FS-519 (p. 11-32)
15
7221
A paper misfeed in the finisher FS-519 (p. 11-32)
16
7225
A paper misfeed in the finisher FS-519 (p. 11-32)
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
11-5
Troubleshooting
11
11-6
No.
Code
Description
17
7243
A paper misfeed in the finisher FS-519 (p. 11-32)
18
7281
A paper misfeed in the finisher FS-519 (p. 11-32)
19
7284
A paper misfeed in the saddle stitcher (p. 11-37)
20
7285
A paper misfeed in the saddle stitcher (p. 11-37)
21
7290
A paper misfeed in the mailbin (p. 11-35)
22
7216
A paper misfeed in the finisher FS-609 (p. 11-38)
23
7218
A paper misfeed in the finisher FS-609 (p. 11-38)
24
7221
A paper misfeed in the finisher FS-609 (p. 11-38)
25
7225
A paper misfeed in the finisher FS-609 (p. 11-38)
26
7281
A paper misfeed in the finisher FS-609 (p. 11-38)
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Troubleshooting
11.2.2
11
Clearing a paper misfeed in the fusing unit
!
Detail
For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 11-4.
1
Pull up the upper right-side door release lever, and then open
the upper right-side door.
2
Slowly remove any misfed paper from the fusing unit.
magicolor 8650
–
–
Pull down any misfed paper from the fusing unit.
Toner that did not pass through the fusing unit may get on
your hands or clothes. Be extremely careful when
removing the paper.
–
If the paper cannot be removed by pulling it down, open
the fusing unit upper cover, and then pull it up.
–
If the paper is zigzag folded and jammed in the fusing unit,
open the fusing cover, and then remove the paper.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
11-7
Troubleshooting
11
3
Close the upper right-side door.
4
Pull out the tray being used.
5
Remove any misfed paper.
6
Close the tray.
7 CAUTION
The area around the fusing unit is extremely hot.
%Touching anything other than the indicated levers and dials may result in burns. If you get
burnt, immediately cool the skin under cold water, and then seek professional medical
attention.
Fusing unit
7 CAUTION
Precautions for toner spills
%
Be careful not to spill toner inside the machine or get toner on your clothes or hands.
%
If your hands become soiled with toner, immediately wash them with soap and water.
%
If toner gets in your eyes, immediately flush them with water, and then seek professional medical
attention.
11-8
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Troubleshooting
11
2
Reminder
If the paper is misfed as described below, contact your service representative or the manufacturer.
The paper is wrapped around the roller in the fusing unit.
The paper is folded or shredded by the roller in the fusing unit.
The paper that was removed tore and remains in the fusing unit.
Decreased image quality may result if the surface of the transfer belt or transfer roller is touched. Be
careful not to touch the surface of the transfer belt or the transfer roller.
Transfer belt
Transfer roller
Be careful not to touch the film with your hands.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
11-9
Troubleshooting
11
11.2.3
Clearing a paper misfeed in the main unit
!
Detail
For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 11-4.
1
Pull up the upper right-side door release lever, and then open
the upper right-side door.
2
Slowly remove any misfed paper from the main unit.
3
If the edge of the paper is around the timing roller, open the
internal cover M1.
4
Slowly remove any misfed paper from the timing roller.
–
11-10
Toner that did not pass through the fusing unit may get on
your hands or clothes. Be extremely careful when
removing the paper.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Troubleshooting
11
5
Close the upper right-side door.
6
Pull out the tray being used.
7
Remove any misfed paper.
8
Close the tray.
7 CAUTION
The area around the fusing unit is extremely hot.
%Touching anything other than the indicated levers and dials may result in burns. If you get
burnt, immediately cool the skin under cold water, and then seek professional medical
attention.
Fusing unit
7 CAUTION
Precautions for toner spills
%
Be careful not to spill toner inside the machine or get toner on your service or hands.
%
If your hands become soiled with toner, immediately wash them with soap and water.
%
If toner gets in your eyes, immediately flush them with water, and then seek professional medical
attention.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
11-11
Troubleshooting
11
2
Reminder
If the paper is misfed as described below, contact your service representative or the manufacturer.
The paper is wrapped around the timing roller.
The paper is folded or shredded by the timing roller.
Decreased image quality may result if the surface of the transfer belt or transfer roller is touched. Be
careful not to touch the surface of the transfer belt or the transfer roller.
Transfer belt
Transfer roller
Be careful not to touch the film with your hands.
11-12
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Troubleshooting
11.2.4
11
Clearing a paper misfeed in the automatic duplex unit
!
Detail
For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 11-4.
1
Open the door of the automatic duplex unit.
2
Slowly remove any misfed paper from the automatic duplex
unit.
3
Close the door of the automatic duplex unit.
4
Pull out the tray being used.
5
Remove any misfed paper.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
11-13
Troubleshooting
11
6
Close the tray.
2
Reminder
Be careful not to touch the film with your hands.
11-14
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Troubleshooting
11.2.5
11
Clearing a paper misfeed in the tray 1 (bypass tray)
!
Detail
For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 11-4.
1
Remove the paper from the tray 1.
2
Open the upper right-side door.
3
Open the internal cover M1.
4
Slowly remove any misfeed paper.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
11-15
Troubleshooting
11
5
Close the upper right-side door.
7 CAUTION
The area around the fusing unit is extremely hot.
%Touching anything other than the indicated levers and dials may result in burns. If you get
burnt, immediately cool the skin under cold water, and then seek professional medical
attention.
Fusing unit
7 CAUTION
Precautions for toner spills
%
Be careful not to spill toner inside the machine or get toner on your clothes or hands.
%
If your hands become soiled with toner, immediately wash them with soap and water.
%
If toner gets in your eyes, immediately flush them with water, and then seek professional medical
attention.
11-16
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Troubleshooting
11
2
Reminder
Decreased image quality may result if the surface of the transfer belt or transfer roller is touched. Be
careful not to touch the surface of the transfer belt or the transfer roller.
Transfer belt
Transfer roller
11.2.6
Clearing a paper misfeed in the paper transport section
!
Detail
For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 11-4.
1
Pull up the center right-side door release lever, and then open
the center right-side door.
2
Carefully remove any misfed paper.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
11-17
Troubleshooting
11
3
Close the center right-side door.
4
Pull out the tray being used.
5
Remove any misfed paper.
6
Close the tray.
2
Reminder
Be careful not to touch the film with your hands.
11-18
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Troubleshooting
11.2.7
11
Clearing a paper misfeed in tray 2
!
Detail
For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 11-4.
1
Pull up the upper right-side door release lever, and then open
the upper right-side door.
2
Open the internal cover M1.
3
Carefully remove any misfed paper.
4
Close the upper right-side door.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
11-19
Troubleshooting
11
5
Pull out tray 2.
6
Remove any misfed paper.
7
Close the tray.
7 CAUTION
The area around the fusing unit is extremely hot.
%Touching anything other than the indicated levers and dials may result in burns. If you get
burnt, immediately cool the skin under cold water, and then seek professional medical
attention.
Fusing unit
11-20
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Troubleshooting
11
7 CAUTION
Precautions for toner spills
%
Be careful not to spill toner inside the machine or get toner on your clothes or hands.
%
If your hands become soiled with toner, immediately wash them with soap and water.
%
If toner gets in your eyes, immediately flush them with water, and then seek professional medical
attention.
2
Reminder
Decreased image quality may result if the surface of the transfer belt or transfer roller is touched. Be
careful not to touch the surface of the transfer belt or the transfer roller.
Transfer belt
Transfer roller
Be careful not to touch the film.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
11-21
Troubleshooting
11
11.2.8
Clearing a paper misfeed in tray 3
!
Detail
For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 11-4.
11-22
1
Pull up the center right-side door release lever, and then open
the center right-side door.
2
Carefully remove any misfed paper.
3
Close the center right-side door.
4
Pull out tray 3.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Troubleshooting
11
5
Remove any misfed paper.
6
Close the tray.
2
Reminder
Be careful not to touch the film with your hands.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
11-23
Troubleshooting
11
11.2.9
Clearing a paper misfeed in paper feed cabinet (tray 4/5)
!
Detail
For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 11-4.
11-24
1
Pull up the lower right-side door release lever, and then open
the lower right-side door.
2
Carefully remove any misfed paper.
3
Close the lower right-side door.
4
Pull out paper tray.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Troubleshooting
11
5
Remove any misfed paper.
6
Close the tray.
2
Reminder
Be careful not to touch the film with your hands.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
11-25
Troubleshooting
11
11.2.10
Clearing a paper misfeed in the tray 4 (LCT)
!
Detail
For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 11-4.
11-26
1
Pull up the lower right-side door release lever, and then open
the lower right-side door.
2
Carefully remove any misfed paper.
3
Close the lower right-side door.
4
Press the tray release button, and then pull out the tray 4
(LCT).
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Troubleshooting
11
5
Remove any misfed paper.
6
Close the tray 4 (LCT).
2
Reminder
Be careful not to touch the film with your hands.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
11-27
Troubleshooting
11
11.2.11
To clear a banner paper misfeed
1
Pull up the upper right-side door release lever, and then open
the upper right-side door.
–
11-28
If the end of the paper cannot be seen or cannot be
grabbed, remove the paper in the direction of the arrow.
2
Open inside cover M1.
3
Remove any paper caught in the timing roller section.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Troubleshooting
11
4
Push up the fusing unit upper cover, and then remove any
misfed paper.
5
Open the fusing cover M2.
6
Remove any misfed paper.
7
Remove any paper caught in the fusing unit.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
11-29
Troubleshooting
11
11-30
8
Close the fusing cover M2.
9
Close the fusing unit upper cover.
10
Close the upper right-side door.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Troubleshooting
11
7 CAUTION
The area around the fusing unit is extremely hot.
%Touching anything other than the indicated levers and dials may result in burns. If you get
burnt, immediately cool the skin under cold water, and then seek professional medical
attention.
Fusing unit
7 CAUTION
Precautions for toner spills
%
Be careful not to spill toner inside the machine or get toner on your clothes or hands.
%
If your hands become soiled with toner, immediately wash them with soap and water.
%
If toner gets in your eyes, immediately flush them with water, and then seek professional medical
attention.
2
Reminder
If the paper is misfed as described below, contact your service representative or the manufacturer.
The paper is wrapped around the timing roller.
The paper is folded or shredded by the timing roller.
The paper is wrapped around the roller in the fusing unit.
The paper is folded or shredded by the roller in the fusing unit.
The paper that was removed tore and remains in the fusing unit.
Decreased image quality may result if the surface of the transfer belt or the transfer roller is touched.
Be careful not to touch the surface of the transfer belt or the transfer roller.
Transfer belt
Transfer roller
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
11-31
Troubleshooting
11
11.2.12
Clearing a paper misfeed in finisher FS-519
!
Detail
For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 11-4.
1
Pull the finisher release lever 1 to unlock the finisher.
2
Grab the finisher at "2", and then slide the finisher away from
the main unit.
–
11-32
To move the finisher away from the main unit, be sure to
grab it at "2". Do not grab the mailbins or saddle stitcher
to move the finisher, otherwise they may be damaged.
3
Open the front door.
4
Raise lever FN1, turn dial FN2, and then remove any paper.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Troubleshooting
5
11
Lower guide FN3, and then remove any paper.
–
6
If the punch kit is installed, pull out the punch scrap box
FN3.1.
Return guide FN3 to its original position.
–
If the punch kit is installed, insert the punch scrap box FN3.1 into its original position.
7
Turn dial FN4 to feed the paper, open the transport unit cover,
and then remove any paper.
8
Turn dial FN5 or dial FN6, and then remove any paper.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
11-33
Troubleshooting
11
9
Close the front door.
10
Return the finisher to its original position.
–
11-34
When returning the finisher to its original position, do not
grab the handle on the front door, the control panel, the
mail bins, or the saddle stitcher.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Troubleshooting
11.2.13
11
Clearing a paper misfeed in the mailbin
!
Detail
For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 11-4.
1
Open the front door.
2
Turn dial FN5 or dial FN6 to feed out the paper.
3
While pressing down lever FN7, remove any paper.
4
Pull lever FN8 to open the misfeed-clearing door.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
11-35
Troubleshooting
11
11-36
5
Remove any paper in the mailbin.
6
Close the misfeed-clearing door.
7
Close the front door.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Troubleshooting
11.2.14
11
Clearing a paper misfeed in the saddle stitcher
!
Detail
For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 11-4.
1
Open the front door.
2
Turn dial FN5 or dial FN6 to feed out the paper.
3
Remove all paper from the finishing tray.
4
Open the misfeed-clearing door, and then remove any paper.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
11-37
Troubleshooting
11
11.2.15
5
Close the misfeed-clearing door.
6
Close the front door.
To clear a paper misfeed in finisher FS-609
!
Detail
For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 11-4.
11-38
1
Slide the finisher away from the machine.
2
Open the horizontal transport unit cover, and then remove any
misfed paper.
3
Close the horizontal transport unit cover.
4
Open the front door of the finisher.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Troubleshooting
5
11
Turn misfeed-clearing dial 1 clockwise until the removal
indicator is completely blue.
Removal indicator
What should be done if misfeed-clearing dial 1 is turned
too far?
% Turn the misfeed-clearing dial 1 counterclockwise to finely
adjust it.
?
Misfeedclearing
dial 1
6
Open the upper cover of the finisher, and then remove any
paper in the feed section.
7
Close the upper cover.
8
Remove all paper fed into the output tray 1.
9
Open the misfeed-clearing guide for the finisher, and then
remove any misfed paper.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
11-39
Troubleshooting
11
10
Open the right-side door, and then remove any misfed paper
in the transport section.
11
If the paper could not be removed in step 10, turn the misfeedclearing dial in the folding section clockwise.
Feed the paper into the output tray 2, and then remove it.
12
Close the front door of the finisher.
13
Slide the finisher back against the machine.
Misfeedclearing dial in
the folding
section
2
Reminder
If the message "Misfeed detected." appears, be sure to open the front door, turn the misfeed-clearing
dial until the removal indicator is completely blue, and then remove the paper. If the paper is removed
with too much force, the finisher may be damaged.
Do not remove paper remaining in the transfer unit with too much force, otherwise the folding unit may
be damaged.
Be careful that your fingers are not pinched when the front door is closed.
11-40
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Troubleshooting
11.3
11
When the message "Staple Jam Detection" appears
If a staple jam occurs in the finisher, the message shown below appears.
2
Reminder
Be careful when clearing jammed staples since injuries may result.
11.3.1
Clearing jammed staples in finisher FS-519
!
Detail
For details on clearing misfed paper in the finisher, refer to "Clearing a paper misfeed in finisher FS-519"
on page 11-32.
1
Remove all paper from the finisher.
2
Open the front door.
3
Turn the dial to the left to move the stapler toward the front.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
11-41
Troubleshooting
11
4
Remove the staple cartridge holder.
–
Pull the staple cartridge holder toward you to remove it.
5
Raise the shutter of the staple cartridge holder, and then
remove one sheet of staples.
6
Return the shutter of the staple cartridge holder to its original position.
7
Insert the staple cartridge holder, sliding it along the rails in the
compartment.
–
8
Check that the staple cartridge holder is securely inserted
as far as possible.
Close the front door.
2
Reminder
If stapling still cannot be resumed, even after performing the above procedure, contact your service
representative or the manufacturer.
11-42
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Troubleshooting
11.3.2
11
Clearing jammed staples in the saddle stitcher
!
Detail
For details on clearing misfed paper in the finisher, refer to "Clearing a paper misfeed in finisher FS-519"
on page 11-32.
For details on clearing misfed paper in the saddle stitcher, refer to "Clearing a paper misfeed in the
saddle stitcher" on page 11-37.
1
Remove all paper from the finisher.
2
Raise the output tray, and then push down the staple cartridge
holder to remove it.
3
Raise the shutter of the staple cartridge holder, and then
remove one sheet of staples.
4
Return the shutter of the staple cartridge holder to its original position.
5
Insert the staple cartridge holder, and then push it up until it
locks into place.
–
6
magicolor 8650
When inserting the staple cartridge holder, be sure to
insert it so that it faces the correct direction.
Return the output tray to its original position.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
11-43
Troubleshooting
11
11.3.3
To clear jammed staples in finisher FS-609
2
Reminder
If the message "StaplesJamDetection" appears, perform the operation described below.
Do not forcibly remove the paper without performing the operation described below, otherwise the
staple unit may be damaged.
!
Detail
For details on clearing misfed paper in the finisher, refer to "To clear a paper misfeed in finisher FS-609"
on page 11-38.
1
Remove all paper from the finisher.
2
Open the front door of the finisher.
3
Slowly pull out the stapler unit as far as possible.
4
Turn misfeed-clearing dial 2 clockwise until the cartridge
removal indicators are aligned.
The staple cartridge moves to a position from where it can be
removed.
Removal position
What should be done if misfeed-clearing dial 2 is turned
too far?
% Turn the misfeed-clearing dial 2 counterclockwise to
adjust it so the cartridge removal indicators are aligned.
?
Misfeed-clearing dial 2
11-44
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Troubleshooting
11
5
Grasp both sides of the staple cartridge holder, lift it up, and
then pull it out.
6
Swing open the shutter of the staple cartridge.
7
Pull out toward you the two staples jammed at the end of the
staple cartridge.
Staple cartridge
holder
What happens if two staples are not removed?
% Stapling cannot continue correctly.
?
8
Return the shutter of the staple cartridge to its original position.
9
Insert the staple cartridge holder, making sure the tabs on the
holder slide along the rails in the compartment.
10
Insert the staple cartridge holder until it locks into place.
–
magicolor 8650
Check that the staple cartridge holder is securely installed.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
11-45
Troubleshooting
11
11
Carefully move the stapler unit back into its original position.
12
Close the front door.
2
Reminder
Do not remove paper with too much force, otherwise the folding unit may be damaged.
If stapling still cannot be resumed, even after performing the above procedure, contact your service
representative or the manufacturer.
11-46
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Troubleshooting
11.4
11
When the message "Replenish paper" appears
If a tray has run out of paper during printing, the message "Replenish paper" appears.
!
Detail
For details on loading paper, refer to "Loading paper into tray 2/3/4/5" on page 2-29, and "Loading
paper into the tray 4 (LCT)" on page 2-30, and "Loading paper into the tray 1 (bypass tray)" on
page 2-25.
11.5
When the message "Memory Overflow" appears
This message appears when memory space is not sufficient and the job being read was deleted.
Check the size of the data to be sent.
11.6
When the message "Replace XXXX soon." appears
When it is almost time to replace consumables or a part within this machine, a message similar to the one
shown below appears, warning about the replacement period.
!
Detail
When the message appears, replace the specified consumables or part.
After the message "Replace XXXX soon." appears, the message "Please replace XXXX." appears and
the machine stops operating.
The number of pages that can be printed after the message "Replace XXXX soon." appears and before
the message "Please replace XXXX." appears differs depending on the printing conditions, the
consumables and the part to be replaced.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
11-47
Troubleshooting
11
11.7
When the message "Please replace XXXX." appears
When it is time to replace consumables or a part within this machine, a message similar to the one shown
below appears.
If toner cartridges other than black are empty, printing can temporarily continue in black.
2
Note
When the message appears, replace the specified consumables or part.
2
Reminder
Dispose of the used consumables or parts according to your local regulations.
If you turn the power of this machine off and on, or you open and close the front cover more than five
times without touching [Continue] after a message prompting you to replace the toner appears, printing
will not be able to be continued in order to protect the machine.
11-48
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Troubleshooting
11.7.1
11
To continue printing in black
1
[Continue], and then press the [Menu/Select] key.
The message "B&W Printing" appears.
2
Select the job you want to print.
–
–
Selecting "Current Job Only" prints the current job in black and white.
Selecting "All Jobs" prints the all subsequent jobs in black and white.
2
Note
Even when outputting in color mode, the printing mode is automatically switched to black and white.
11.8
When the message "Remote Operation: Please do not turn off power."
appears
This message appears when the machine is being accessed in Administrator mode of PageScope Web
Connection.
2
Reminder
Do not turn off the machine while this message is displayed. After access to the machine with
PageScope Web Connection has ended, the Basic screen appears again.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
11-49
Troubleshooting
11
11.9
Simple troubleshooting
Main unit
Symptom
Possible cause
Remedy
The machine does not
start up when the power
switch is turned on.
Is no power supplied from the electrical outlet?
Correctly insert the power supply
plug into the electrical outlet.
The machine does not
start printing.
Is the right-side door of the machine open?
Securely close the right-side door
of the machine.
Is there no paper that matches the
document?
Load paper of the appropriate size
into the paper tray.
Was the print density changed
from the printer driver?
Check the printer driver setting.
Is the paper damp?
Replace the paper with new paper.
(See p. 2-29, p. 2-30 and p. 2-25.)
The printed output is too
dark.
Was the print density changed
from the printer driver?
Check the printer driver setting.
The printed output is blurry.
Is the paper damp?
Replace the paper with new paper.
(See p. 2-29, p. 2-30 and p. 2-25.)
There are dark specks or
spots throughout the printed output.
There are streaks in the
printed output.
Is the electrostatic charger wire
dirty?
Use the charger-cleaning tool to
clean the electrostatic charger
wire. (See p. 13-4.)
The image is not aligned
properly on the paper.
Are the lateral guides incorrectly
positioned against the edges of the
paper?
Slide the lateral guides against the
edges of the paper.
Was curled paper loaded into the
paper tray?
Flatten the paper before loading it.
Was paper that curls easily (as with
recycled paper) used?
Remove the paper from the paper
tray, turn it over, and then load it
again.
The printed output is too
light.
The printed page is curled.
Replace the paper with paper that
is not damp.
Finisher
Even though the paper
misfeed was cleared,
prints cannot be produced.
Are there paper misfeeds at other
locations?
Check the control panel for other
paper misfeed indications, and
then remove any misfed paper at
all other locations. (See p. 11-4.)
Printing is not possible
even though the password
is entered on a machine
with user authentication/account track set.
Did the message "Over Max Allowance Total Ctr for User Please delete job." appear?
Contact your administrator.
The finisher cannot be
used.
Is no power supplied to the connector?
Check that the cord is correctly inserted into the connector.
The pages cannot be stapled.
Have the staples run out?
Replace the staple cartridge. (See
p. 12-15.)
The pages that were fed
out were not uniformly
loaded and the punched
holes or staples are incorrectly positioned.
Is the paper curled?
Remove the paper from the paper
tray, turn it over, and then load it
again.
Is there a gap between the lateral
guides in the paper tray and the
side of the paper?
Slide the lateral guides in the paper
tray against the side of the paper
so that there is no gap.
Did the message "Punch Scrap
Box Full." appear?
Empty the punch scrap box.
Even though a Punch setting was selected, holes
are not punched. (when
Punch Kit is installed on
Finisher)
If any message other than those listed above appears, perform the operation described in the message.
If the problem is not corrected after the described operation is performed, contact your technical
representative or the manufacturer.
11-50
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Troubleshooting
Printer
driver
11
Symptom
Possible cause
Remedy
The message "No printers
are connected." or "Print
error" appears.
The printer driver selected for
printing is not compatible with the
printer controller.
Check the printer name selected.
The network cable, parallel cable,
or USB cable is disconnected.
Check that the cable is connected
properly.
Available memory space is not sufficient.
Perform a test print to check
whether printing is possible.
An error has occurred in this machine.
Check this machine’s control panel.
Available computer memory space
is not sufficient.
Perform a test print to check
whether printing is possible.
There is an error in the application
software settings.
Refer to the user’s manual of the
application software to check the
settings.
The file printing settings are incorrect.
Change the settings and try to print
again.
The printer driver selected for
printing is not compatible with the
printer controller.
Check the printer name selected.
The network cable, or USB cable is
disconnected.
Check that the cable is connected
properly.
An error has occurred in this machine.
Check this machine’s control panel.
A print job is queued in this machine, delaying printing.
Check the job order on the Active
Jobs list of the machine’s control
panel.
"Save in User Box" was selected
for the print job.
Check if the print job is stored on
the Box screen of this machine’s
control panel.
"Secure Print" was selected for the
print job.
Check if the print job is held on the
Secure Print User Box screen of
this machine’s control panel.
If the account track settings have
been applied, an unregistered account name (or password) may
have been entered.
Enter the correct account name (or
password).
Available computer memory space
is not sufficient.
Perform a test print to check
whether printing is possible.
The connection of this machine to
the network is not yet established
(while connecting to a network).
Consult with the network administrator.
A printer driver setting cannot be selected.
Some functions cannot be combined.
Do not try to select settings that
are not available.
The "Conflicts" message
with "Unable to Select" or
"Function Canceled" appears.
An incorrect combination of functions has been specified.
Check the settings and specify the
functions correctly.
Printing is not performed
as specified.
Incorrect settings are specified.
Check each setting in the printer
driver.
A postscript error appears.
The machine does not
start printing although the
print job was completed on
the computer.
The watermark cannot be
printed.
magicolor 8650
A combination of functions, although possible in the printer driver, is not possible with this
machine.
The paper size, orientation, and
other settings specified in the application have priority over those
specified in the printer driver.
Enter the correct settings in the application.
The watermark is not correctly set.
Check the watermark settings.
The watermark density is set to a
level that is too low.
Check the density settings.
Watermarks cannot be printed in
graphics applications.
No watermark can be printed in
this case.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
11-51
Troubleshooting
11
11-52
Symptom
Possible cause
Remedy
The staple function cannot
be specified.
Stapling is not possible if "Paper
Type" is set to "Thick" or "Transparency".
Check each setting in the printer
driver.
For stapling, an optional finisher
must be installed.
Install the required optional finisher
and enable it using the printer driver.
Stapling cannot be performed.
Stapling is not possible if the document contains pages of different
sizes.
Check the document.
The stapling position is not
as expected.
The orientation setting is not correct.
Check the stapling position in the
printer driver setup dialog box.
The hole punch function
cannot be specified.
Hole punching cannot be specified
if "Booklet" is selected or paper
not compatible with the finisher is
used.
Check each setting in the printer
driver.
The punch kit must be installed on
optional finisher FS-519 or FS-609.
Install the required optional finisher
and enable it using the printer driver.
The pages are not
punched.
Printed pages may be fed out without being punched if the paper is
loaded into the paper source with
an incorrect orientation.
Check the orientation setting.
The hole punch position is
not as expected.
The orientation setting is not correct.
Check the punch position on the
Layout tab of the printer driver setup dialog box.
The form is not printed
properly.
Available computer memory space
is not sufficient.
Simplify the form to reduce the
data size.
The image is not printed
properly.
Available computer memory space
is not sufficient.
Simplify the image to reduce the
data size.
Paper is not fed from the
specified paper source.
Paper will not be fed from the
specified paper source if that paper source is loaded with paper of
a different size or orientation.
Load the paper source with paper
of the appropriate size and orientation.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Troubleshooting
11.10
11
Main messages and their remedies
Message
Cause
Remedy
Set correct paper
Check paper Size
Check paper Type
Paper of a suitable size is not loaded
in a paper tray.
Either select a different size or feed
paper of a suitable size from the
tray 1 (bypass tray).
Capacity Over XXXX Remove Paper
Since the maximum amount of papers for the indicated finisher output
tray has been exceeded, the machine
is unable to make prints.
Remove all papers from the indicated
tray.
Account Name
Account track settings have been
specified. Prints cannot be made unless an account name and its correct
password are entered.
Type in your account name and password. (See p. 8-29.)
Over Max Allowance Total Ctr for
User
Please delete job.
The limit on the number of prints that
can be made has been reached.
Contact your administrator.
Door open
Please close.
Since a machine door or cover is
open or an option is not installed correctly, the machine is unable to make
prints.
Make sure that all doors and covers
are closed and that all options are installed correctly.
IU not installed
Please set IU. [X]
The imaging unit is not installed correctly.
Toner Not Installed
Please set Toner Cartridge. [X]
The indicated toner cartridge is not
installed correctly.
Reinstall the supplies or parts, or
contact your technical representative.
No Waste Toner Box
Please install Waste Toner Box.
The waste-toner box is not installed
correctly.
Replenish paper
The indicated tray has run out of paper.
Load paper into the indicated tray.
(See p. 2-29, p. 2-30 and p. 2-25.)
Toner low.
Replace when indicate [X]
The toner for the indicated color is
about to run out.
Prepare to replace the toner cartridge
according to your maintenance
agreement.
Toner Empty
Since the toner for the indicated color
has run out, the machine is unable to
make prints.
Replace the toner cartridge according to your maintenance agreement.
Replace Staple cartridge
The staples have run out.
Replace the staple cartridge.
(See p. 12-15.)
Misfeed detected.
XXXX Remove paper.
Since a paper misfeed occurred, the
machine is unable to make prints.
Clear the paper misfeed.
(See p. 11-4.)
HDD Password Error
The password is incorrect.
Register the correct password.
Encryption pass Err
The encryption key is incorrect.
Register the correct encryption key,
or format the HDD.
Trouble C-xxxx
(Excluding the following C-255X)
The machine malfunctioned and is
unable to make prints.
Inform your service representative of
the code displayed on the display
panel.
Trouble C-2551
Contact Service
Occurs when printing in black and
white continues if the cyan toner cartridge is empty.
Replace with a new cyan toner cartridge.
Trouble C-2553
Contact Service
Occurs when printing in black and
white continues if the magenta toner
cartridge is empty.
Replace with a new magenta toner
cartridge.
Trouble C-2555
Contact Service
Occurs when printing in black and
white continues if the yellow toner
cartridge is empty.
Replace with a new yellow toner cartridge.
Trouble C-2557
Contact Service
Occurs when printing in black and
white continues if the black toner cartridge is empty.
Replace with a new black toner cartridge.
INCORRECT IU
IF YOU CHOOSE TO CONTINUE %
Unapproved imaging unit is installed.
Printing can be continued but print
result is not guaranteed.
Replace with an approved imaging
unit.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
11-53
Troubleshooting
11
Message
Cause
Remedy
INCORRECT TONER
IF YOU CHOOSE TO CONTINUE %
Unapproved toner cartridge is installed.
Printing can be continued but print
result is not guaranteed.
Replace with an approved toner cartridge.
If any message other than those listed above appears, perform the operation described in the message.
11-54
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
12
Replacing consumables
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Replacing consumables
12
12
Replacing consumables
12.1
Replacing the toner cartridge
When the toner is about to run out, an advanced warning message similar to the one shown below appears.
!
Detail
When the message appears, prepare to replace the toner cartridge.
When the toner is empty, a message similar to the one shown below appears, warning that the toner cartridge
should be replaced.
2
Note
After the message appears, the machine stops operating. Replace the toner cartridge. Do not replace
the toner cartridge for any color not indicated in the message.
If toner other than black is empty, printing can continue in black.
Select [Continue], and then touch [Menu/Select]. For details, refer to "To continue printing in black" on
page 11-49.
If you turn the power of this machine off and on, or you open and close the front cover more than five
times in the mode used to continue printing in black, printing will not be able to be continued in order
to protect the machine (C-255X error). For details, refer to "Main messages and their remedies" on
page 11-53.
!
Detail
For details on replacing the toner cartridge, refer to "To replace the toner cartridge" on page 12-4.
7 CAUTION
Handling toner and the toner cartridges
%
Do not throw toner or the toner cartridge into a fire.
%
Toner expelled from the fire may cause burns.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
12-3
Replacing consumables
12
7 CAUTION
Precautions for toner spills
%
Be careful not to spill toner inside the machine or get toner on your clothes or hands.
%
If your hands become soiled with toner, immediately wash them with soap and water.
%
If toner gets in your eyes, immediately flush them with water, and then seek professional medical
attention.
12.1.1
To replace the toner cartridge
The procedure for replacing any of the toner cartridges (yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C) or black (K)) is the
same.
Example: Replacing the black toner cartridge
2
Note
Be careful about the installation location of the toner cartridges, since it is different for other colors.
The shape of the black toner cartridge is different from the shapes of the toner cartridges for the other
colors.
1
Open the machine’s front door.
–
Check that a toner cartridge of the same color as the one
to be replaced has been prepared.
2
Pull up the locking tab of the empty toner cartridge to unlock
it. Pull out the toner cartridge as far as possible, and then pull
it up to remove it.
3
Prepare the new toner cartridge.
–
Make sure that the toner cartridge is the same color as the label in the cartridge compartment.
Can a toner cartridge of a different color be installed?
% The toner cartridge of a color different than the one that was removed cannot be installed. If the
wrong toner cartridge is installed with extreme force, the machine may be damaged.
?
12-4
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Replacing consumables
4
Remove the new toner cartridge from its packaging, and then
shake the cartridge up and down 5 to 10 times.
–
5
12
The toner within the toner cartridge may have become
compacted. If it has, be sure to shake the toner cartridge
until the toner is mostly broken up before installing the
cartridge.
Align the toner cartridge with the slots in the machine, and
then insert the cartridge until the locking tab locks into place.
–
When inserting the new toner cartridge, fully insert it until it
snaps into place.
6
Slowly pull out the charger-cleaning tool as far as possible.
Next, slowly push in the charger-cleaning tool as far as
possible.
Repeat the above operations three times.
7
Close the front door.
2
Reminder
When replacing a toner cartridge, be sure to clean the electrostatic charger wire corresponding to the
color of the replaced toner cartridge.
Dispose of the used toner cartridge according to your local regulations.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
12-5
Replacing consumables
12
12.2
Replacing the waste toner box
When it is almost time to replace the waste toner box, the message shown in the following illustration
appears, warning about the replacement period.
2
Note
When the message appears, prepare to replace the waste toner box.
!
Detail
The number of prints that can be made from the time that the message "Replace Waste Toner soon."
appears until the time that the message "Waste Toner Box Full Please replace the Waste Toner Box."
appears differs depending on the specified print settings and the consumables/parts.
When it is time to replace the waste toner box, the message "Waste Toner Box Full Please replace the Waste
Toner Box." appears and the machine stops operating.
12-6
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Replacing consumables
12.2.1
12
To replace the waste toner box
1
Open the machine’s front door.
2
Lift up and remove the waste toner box.
3
Install the new waste toner box.
4
Close the front door.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
12-7
Replacing consumables
12
7 CAUTION
Handling toner and the waste toner box
%
Do not throw toner or the waste toner box into a fire.
%
Toner expelled from the fire may cause burns.
7 CAUTION
Precautions for toner spills
%
Be careful not to spill toner inside the machine or get toner on your clothes or hands.
%
If your hands become soiled with toner, immediately wash them with soap and water.
%
If toner gets in your eyes, immediately flush them with water, and then seek professional medical
attention.
2
Reminder
Do not tilt the removed waste toner box, otherwise waste toner may spill.
Dispose of the used toner cartridge according to your local regulations.
12-8
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Replacing consumables
12.3
12
Replacing an imaging unit
When it is almost time to replace an imaging unit, an advanced warning message similar to the one shown
below appears.
2
Note
When the message appears, prepare to replace the imaging unit.
When the time to replace the imaging unit is reached, an advanced warning message similar to the one shown
below appears.
2
Note
When the message appears, replace the imaging unit.
If it is time to replace an imaging unit other than the black imaging unit, printing can continue in black.
Select [Continue], and then touch [Menu/Select].
!
Detail
For details on replacing the imaging unit, refer to "To replace the imaging unit" on page 12-11.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
12-9
Replacing consumables
12
2
Reminder
Be sure to replace the imaging unit only after the message "IU needs to be replaced. [x]" appears. In
addition, do not replace the imaging unit of any color other than the one indicated in the message on
the message window.
12-10
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Replacing consumables
12.3.1
12
To replace the imaging unit
1
Set the power switch to o.
Check that the control panel is turned off.
2
Open the front door.
–
3
Check that an imaging unit of the same color as the one to
be replaced has been prepared.
Press down to release the unlock lever of the imaging unit to
be replaced.
K
PUS
H
K
4
Pull the imaging unit towards you to remove it.
5
Remove the imaging unit from its packaging.
–
–
magicolor 8650
The imaging unit can easily be damaged by light. Leave the
imaging unit in the black protective bag until immediately
before it is to be installed.
Do not hold the top part of the imaging unit, otherwise the
PC drum may be damaged, resulting in decreased image
quality.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
12-11
Replacing consumables
12
12-12
6
Peel off the tape, and then remove the packing material.
7
Remove the imaging unit from the black protective bag.
8
Tilt the imaging unit to the left and lightly shake it twice in the
direction of the tilt, and then tilt the unit to the right and lightly
shake it twice in the direction of the tilt.
9
Peel off the tape.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Replacing consumables
12
10
Remove the packing material and securing material.
11
Align the + mark of the imaging unit and the , mark of the
machine. Insert the imaging unit into the machine.
–
–
–
Make sure that the imaging unit is the same color as the
label on the imaging unit compartment.
Do not insert the imaging unit into its compartment at an
angle.
Make sure that the imaging unit is fully inserted into its
compartment.
12
Lift up and slowly pull out the handle of the protective sheet
for the PC drum.
13
Push the imaging unit until it bottoms.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
12-13
Replacing consumables
12
14
Close the front door.
15
Insert the used imaging unit into the empty black protective
bag and box of the new imaging unit.
16
Set the power switch "n".
17
Adjust the image stabilization.
–
For details on adjusting the image stabilization, refer to "Expert Adjustment" on page 9-29.
7 CAUTION
Precautions for toner spills
%
Be careful not to spill toner inside the machine or get toner on your clothes or hands.
%
If your hands become soiled with toner, immediately wash them with soap and water.
%
If toner gets in your eyes, immediately flush them with water, and then seek professional medical
attention.
2
Reminder
Be careful not to touch the PC drum.
Dispose of the used imaging units according to your local
regulations.
12-14
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Replacing consumables
12.4
12
Replacing the staple cartridge
When the staple cartridge is empty, the message "Replace Staple Cartridge" appears.
Replace the staple cartridge.
2
Reminder
Be sure to replace the staple cartridge only after the message appears, otherwise the machine may be
damaged.
12.4.1
To replace the staple cartridge in the finisher FS-519
1
Open the front door.
2
Remove the staple cartridge holder.
–
–
3
magicolor 8650
Pull the staple cartridge holder toward you to remove it.
Only touch the blue parts of the staple cartridge.
Remove the empty cartridge from the staple cartridge holder.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
12-15
Replacing consumables
12
4
Load the new staple cartridge into the staple cartridge holder.
–
5
Insert the staple cartridge holder along the rails in the
compartment until it snaps into place.
–
6
Do not remove the remaining staples, otherwise the
machine will not be able to staple after the cartridge is
replaced.
Check that the staple cartridge holder is securely installed.
Close the front door.
2
Reminder
Replace the staple cartridge only after the message has appeared.
If the staple cartridge is replaced before the message appears, the machine may be damaged.
12-16
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Replacing consumables
12.4.2
12
To replace the staple cartridge in saddle stitcher
1
Raise the output tray, and then push down the staple cartridge
holder and remove it.
2
Press in the area marked "PUSH" to unlock the staple
cartridge holder.
3
Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple cartridge
holder.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
12-17
Replacing consumables
12
4
Load the new staple cartridge into the staple cartridge holder.
5
Slowly pull off the seal.
6
Insert the staple cartridge holder, and then push it up until it
locks into place.
–
7
12-18
When inserting the staple cartridge holder, be sure to
insert it so that it faces the correct direction.
Return the output tray to its original position.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Replacing consumables
8
12.4.3
12
Pull the handle of the misfeed-clearing door to open it, and
then close it.
To replace the staple cartridge for finisher FS-609
1
Open the front door of the finisher.
2
Slowly pull out the stapler unit as far as possible.
Stapler unit
3
magicolor 8650
Grasp both sides of the staple cartridge holder, lift it up, and
then pull it out.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Staple cartridge holder
12-19
Replacing consumables
12
4
Press the button marked "PUSH" on the side of the staple
cartridge holder.
Staple cartridge
holder
Staple case
The staple case is released.
5
Pull up the staple case.
6
Remove the staple cartridge from the staple case.
Staple
cartridge
7
Load the new staple cartridge into the staple cartridge holder.
–
8
12-20
Fully insert the staple cartridge as far as possible.
Press the staple case down.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Replacing consumables
12
9
Peel the tape off of the staple cartridge.
10
Insert the staple cartridge holder, making sure the tabs on the
holder slide along the rails in the compartment.
11
Insert the staple cartridge holder until it locks into place.
–
Check that the staple cartridge holder is securely installed.
12
Carefully move the stapler unit back into its original position.
13
Close the front door.
2
Reminder
Replace the staple cartridge only after the message has appeared.
If the staple cartridge is replaced before the message appears, the machine may be damaged.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
12-21
Replacing consumables
12
12.5
Emptying the punch scrap box
If the punch scrap box in the punch kit installed on the finisher becomes full, the message shown below
appears.
12-22
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Replacing consumables
12.5.1
12
To empty the punch scrap box in the finisher FS-519
Follow the procedure described below to empty the punch scrap box.
1
Open the front door.
2
Pull out the punch scrap box FN3.1.
3
Empty the punch scrap box.
4
Insert the punch scrap box into its original position.
5
Close the front door.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
12-23
Replacing consumables
12
12.5.2
To empty the punch scrap box in the finisher FS-609
Follow the procedure described below to empty the punch scrap box.
12-24
1
Slide the finisher away from the machine.
2
Pull out the punch scrap box.
3
Empty the punch scrap box.
4
Insert the punch scrap box into its original position.
5
Slide the finisher back against the machine.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
13
Care of the machine
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Care of the machine
13
13
Care of the machine
13.1
Cleaning
This section describes the procedures for cleaning each part.
13.1.1
Housing
%
Clean the surface of the housing by wiping it with a soft cloth
dampened with a mild household detergent.
2
Reminder
Be sure to turn off the machine (set the power switch to o) before cleaning it. For details on how to turn
off the machine, refer to "Turning off the machine" on page 2-18.
Never use solvents, such as benzene or thinner, to clean the housing.
13.1.2
Control panel
%
Clean the control panel by wiping it with a soft, dry cloth.
2
Reminder
Pressing too hard on a key in the control panel may damage it. In addition, never use a mild household
detergent, glass cleaner, benzene or thinner to clean the control panel.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
13-3
Care of the machine
13
13.1.3
Electrostatic charger wire
If the electrostatic charger wire is dirty, streaks will appear though the printed images. If this occurs, follow
the procedure described below to clean the electrostatic charger wire.
13-4
1
Open the machine’s front door.
2
Slowly pull out the charger-cleaning tool as far as possible.
Next, slowly push in the charger-cleaning tool as far as
possible.
Repeat the above operations three times.
3
Securely insert the charger-cleaning tool, and then close the front door.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Care of the machine
13.1.4
13
Print head
If the print head becomes dirty, decreased print quality may result. If this occurs, clean the print head
according to the following procedure.
1
Open the machine’s front door.
2
Remove the print head glass cleaning tool from the front door
of the machine.
3
Insert the print head glass cleaning tool into the print head
cleaning opening, pull it out, and then repeat this back-andforth movement twice or three times.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
13-5
Care of the machine
13
13.2
When the message "Time for periodic device check." appears
If the message "Time for periodic device check." appears, contact service representative or the
manufacturer.
13-6
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
14
Specifications
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Specifications
14
14
Specifications
14.1
Specifications
14.1.1
Main unit
Specifications
Type
Desktop/Freestanding printer
Photoconductor
OPC
Copying system
Laser electrostatic copy method
Developing system
Dry-type dual-component HMT developing method
Fusing system
Roller fixing
Paper types
Plain paper 60g/m2 to 90g/m2,
thick paper 1 91g/m2 to 150g/m2,
thick paper 2 151g/m2 to 209g/m2,
thick paper 3 210g/m2 to 256g/m2,
thick paper 4 257g/m2 to 271g/m2*, OHP transparencies*,
postcards*, letterheads, colored paper, envelopes*, label sheets*,
banner paper 127g/m2 to 210g/m2*
Duplex: Plain paper 64g/m2 to 90g/m2,
thick paper1/2/3 91g/m2 to 256g/m2
*Can only be fed through the tray 1 (bypass tray).
Print sizes
Tray 1 (bypass tray)*:
12 e 18 w*4 to Statement w/v, 4 e 6 w, A3 w to B6 w, A6 w, banner paper,
8 e13 w*3, 16K w/v, 8K w
Width: 90mm to 311.1mm;
length: 139.7mm to 1,200mm
*For thick paper 4, only A3 w, A4 v, 11 e 17 w and Letter v are available for printing.
Tray 2:
11 e 17 w to Letter w/v, Statement w*1, A3 w to B5 w/v, A5 w*2, 8 e 13 w*3,
16K v, 8K w
Tray 3:
12 e 18 w*4 to Letter w/v, Statement w*1, A3 w to B5 w/v, A5 w*2, 8 e 13 w*3,
16K v, 8K w
Paper tray capacity
Tray 1 (bypass tray):
Plain paper: 150 sheets; thick paper 1/2/3/4, OHP transparencies, postcards,
label sheets: 20 sheets; envelopes: 10 sheets; banner paper: 10 sheets
Tray 2 and tray 3:
Plain paper: 500 sheets; thick paper 1/2/3: 150 sheets
Print output tray capacity
Plain paper: 250 sheets
Thick paper: 10 sheets
OHP transparencies: 1 sheet
Warm-up time
The time from when the power switch is turned on, until the machine is ready to
begin making prints (at room temperature 73.4 °F (23 °C)).
75 seconds or less
Image loss width
Leading edge: 4.2mm; trailing edge: 3mm; rear edge: 3mm; front edge: 3mm
First Print time
5.9 seconds or less (monochrome and Letter (A4) paper)
Print speed
Full color: 35 ppm (single-sided), 35 sides/min. (double-sided)
Black: 35 ppm (single-sided), 35 sides/min. (double-sided)
(when printing on Letter v (A4 v))
RAM
1,024 MB
Hard disk (option)
60 GB
Interface
Ethernet port (1,000Base-T/100Base-TX/10Base-T)
USB 2.0
Frame type
Ethernet 802.2
Ethernet 802.3
Ethernet II
Ethernet SNAP
Supported protocols
TCP/IP (IPv4/IPv6), BOOTP, ARP, ICMP, DHCP, AutoIP, SNMP, FTP, LPR/LPD,
RAW Socket, SMB over TCP/IP, IPP, HTTP, POP, SMTP, LDAP, NTP, SSL,
IPX/SPX, AppleTalk, Bonjour, NetBEUI, DPWS, IPsec, DNS, DynamicDNS
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
14-3
Specifications
14
Specifications
Printer language
PCL5e/c Emulation
PCL XL ver 2.1 Emulation
PostScript 3 Emulation (3016)
XPS ver.1.0
Operating environment conditions
Temperature 50 to 86 °F (10 to 30 °C)
Humidity 15% to 85% RH
Resolution
Data processing
600 e 600 dpi
Printing
1800 dpi equivalent e 600 dpi
Printer fonts
<PCL>
Latin 80 Fonts
<Postscript 3 Emulation>
Latin 137 Fonts
Compatible computers
IBM PC or compatible, and Macintosh (PowerPC or Intel Processor)
(Intel Processor is Mac OS X 10.4 only)
Printer
driver
Konica Minolta
PCL Driver
(PCL driver)
Windows NT Workstation /Server Version4.0 (Service Pack 6 or later)
Windows 2000 Professional /Server (Service Pack 3 or later)
Windows XP Home Edition/Professional, Windows XP Professional x64 Edition
Windows Vista Home Basic/Home Premium/Ultimate/Business/Enterprise, Windows Vista Home Basic/Home Premium/Ultimate/Business/Enterprise x64 Edition
Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition
Konica Minolta
PostScript Driver
(PS driver)
Windows 2000 Professional /Server (Service Pack 3 or later)
Windows XP Home Edition/Professional, Windows XP Professional x64 Edition
Windows Vista Home Basic/Home Premium/Ultimate/Business/Enterprise, Windows Vista Home Basic/Home Premium/Ultimate/Business/Enterprise x64 Edition
Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition
PostScript PPD
driver (PS-PPD)
Mac OS 9.2 or later
Mac OS X 10.2.8, Mac OS X 10.3, or Mac OS X 10.4
Utility
PageScope Web Connection
Compatible Web browsers:
Microsoft Internet Explorer Ver. 6 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled)
Netscape Navigator Ver. 7.02 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled)
Mozilla Firefox Ver. 1.0 or later (JavaScript and Cookies enabled)
Adobe® Flash® (Plug-in Ver. 7.0 or later required if "Flash" is selected as the display format)
Operating environment for
MetaFrame
The operation of this driver has been confirmed only in the following environments.
Server OS: Windows 2000 Advanced server/ Windows 2003 Enterprise Server
MetaFrame: Citrix® MetaFrame® Presentation Server 3.0
Citrix® MetaFrame® Presentation Server 4.0
Client OS: Windows 2000/Windows XP
ICAClient: ICA32bit
* For operating in an environment other than those described, contact your service
representative or the manufacturer.
Power requirements
AC120 V, 12 A, 60 Hz
AC220-240 V, 8 A, 50/60 Hz
Power consumption
1,500 W or less
Dimensions
643mm (W) e 708mm (D) e 637mm (H)
Space
Weight
requirements*5
When finisher FS-519 and saddle stitcher are installed
1668mm (W) e 1168mm (D)
When finisher FS-608 is installed
1719mm (W) e 1168mm (D)
Approx. 79 kg
*1
Statement w can be used with the North American (inch) model only.
*2
A5 w can be used with the European (metric) model only.
*3 There are five Foolscap sizes: 220 e 330mm w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w and
8 e 13 w. Any one of these sizes can be selected. Changing this menu must be performed by a service
engineer.
*4
12 e 18 is equivalent to 304.8mm e 457.2mm, which is one size larger than A3.
*5
The indicated space requirements represent the space required to open the paper trays.
In order to incorporate improvements, these product specifications are subject to change without notice.
14-4
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Specifications
14.1.2
14
Automatic duplex unit
Specifications
Paper types
Plain paper 64g/m2 to 90g/m2, thick paper 1 91 g/m2 to 150 g/m2, thick paper 2 151g/m2 to
209g/m2, thick paper 3 210g/m2 to 256g/m2
Paper sizes
12 e 18 w*1 to Statement w, 12-1/4 e 18 w*1, A3 w to A5 w/v, 8 e 13 w*2, 8K w, 16K w/v
Width: 139.7mm to 311.1mm; length: 148mm to 457.2 mm
Power requirements
Supplied from main unit
*1 This is one size larger than A3. 12-1/4 e 18 is equivalent to 311.1 mm e 457.2 mm, and 12 e 18 is equivalent
to 304.8 mm e 457.2 mm.
*2
There are five Foolscap sizes: 220 e 330mm w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w and
8 e 13 w. Any one of these sizes can be selected. Changing this menu must be performed by a service
engineer.
14.1.3
Paper feed cabinet PC-106
Specifications
Paper types
Plain paper 60g/m2 to 90g/m2
Thick paper 1 91g/m2 to 150g/m2
Thick paper 2 151g/m2 to 209g/m2
Thick paper 3 210g/m2 to 256g/m)
Paper sizes
11 e 17 w to Letter w/v, Statement w*1, A3 w to B5 w/v, A5 w*2, 8 e 13 w*3, 16K v, 8K w
Tray paper capacity
Tray 4; Plain paper: 500 sheets, thick paper 1/2/3: 150 sheets
Power requirements
Supplied from main unit
Power consumption
Less than 15 W
Dimensions
600mm (W) e 578mm (D) e 301mm (H)
Weight
Approx. 24 kg
Unit structure
1 paper tray
*1
Statement w can be used with the North American (inch) model only.
*2
A5 w can be used with the European (metric) model only.
*3
There are five Foolscap sizes: 220 e 330mm w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w and
8 e 13 w. Any one of these sizes can be selected. Changing this menu must be performed by a service
engineer.
14.1.4
Paper feed cabinet PC-205
Specifications
Paper types
Plain paper 60g/m2 to 90g/m)
Thick paper 1 91g/m2 to 150g/m)
Thick paper 2 151g/m2 to 209g/m2
Thick paper 3 210g/m2 to 256g/m2
Paper sizes
11 e 17 w to Letter w/v, Statement w*1, A3 w to B5 w/v, A5 w*2, 8 e 13 w*3, 16K v, 18K w
Tray paper capacity
Upper tray (Tray 4); Plain paper: 500 sheets, thick paper 1/2/3: 150 sheets
Lower tray (Tray 5); Plain paper: 500 sheets, thick paper 1/2/3: 150 sheets
Power requirements
Supplied from main unit
Power consumption
Less than 15 W
Dimensions
600mm (W) e 578mm (D) e 301mm (H)
Weight
Approx. 28 kg
Unit structure
2 paper trays
*1
Statement w can be used with the North American (inch) model only.
*2
A5 w can be used with the European (metric) model only.
*3
There are five Foolscap sizes: 220 e 330mm w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w and
8 e 13 w. Any one of these sizes can be selected. Changing this menu must be performed by a service
engineer.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
14-5
Specifications
14
14.1.5
Paper feed cabinet PC-406
Specifications
14.1.6
Paper types
Plain paper 60g/m2 to 90g/m2
Thick paper 1 91g/m2 to 150g/m2
Thick paper 2 151g/m2 to 209g/m2
Thick paper 3210g/m2 to 256g/m2
Paper sizes
Letter v, A4 v
Tray paper capacity
Plain paper: 2,500 sheets, thick paper 1/2/3: 1,000 sheets
Power requirements
Supplied from main unit
Power consumption
Less than 45 W
Dimensions
600mm (W) e 578mm (D) e 301mm (H)
Weight
Approx. 28 kg
Finisher FS-519
Specifications
*
14-6
Finishing trays
Finishing tray 1, finishing tray 2
Feed settings
"Sort (each set of prints)", "Group (each page of prints)", "Offset/Sort", "Offset/Group", and
"Staple"
Paper types
Finishing tray 1, finishing tray 2:
"Sort", "Group":
Plain paper 60g/m2 to 90g/m2, thick paper 91g/m2 to 271g/m2, OHP, postcards, envelopes,
label sheets, letter heads
"Offset /Sort", "Offset /Group":
Plain paper 60g/m2 to 90g/m2, thick paper 91g/m2 to 271g/m2
"Staple" settings:
Plain paper 160g/m2 to 90g/m2, thick paper 91g/m2 to 209g/m2
Paper sizes
11 e 17 w, Letter w/v, Statement w/v, 12-1/4 e 18 w*, A3 w to B6 w, A6 w
Paper capacity
Output tray 1:
Plain paper 60g/m2 to 90g/m2: 200 sheets
Thick paper 91g/m2 to 271g/m2, OHP, postcards, envelopes, or label sheets, letterheads:
20 sheets
Output tray 2:
Plain paper 60g/m2 to 90g/m2: 1,000 sheets of Letter w (A4 w) or smaller, or 500 sheets of
Legal w (B4 w) or larger
Thick paper 91g/m2 to 271g/m2, OHP, postcards, envelopes, or label sheets, letterheads:
20 sheets
Amount of shift
30mm
Staple settings
Paper sizes (no. of bound pages): 11 e 17 w to Letter w/v, A3 w to A5 v (Plain paper: 2 sheets
to 50 sheets)
Power requirements
Supplied from main unit
Power consumption
Less than 66 W
Dimensions
352mm (W) e 471mm (D) e 573mm (H)
When the tray is pulled out: 435mm (W)
Weight
Approx. 33.2 kg
Consumables
Staples SK-602 (containing 5,000 staples) e 1
12-1/4 e 18 is equivalent to 311.1 mm e 457.2 mm, which is one size larger than A3.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Specifications
14.1.7
14
Punch kit PK-515
Specifications
14.1.8
Punched holes
2, 3, 4
Paper types
Plain paper 60g/m2 to 90g/m2,
thick paper 91g/m2 to 256g/m2
Paper sizes
2-hole: 11 e 17 w to Letter w/v
3-hole: 11 e 17 w, Letter v
4-hole: A3 w, A4 v, B5 v
Power requirements
Supplied from finisher
Dimensions
114mm (W) e 461mm (D) e 106mm (H)
Weight
Approx. 1.9 kg
Saddle stitcher SD-505
Specifications
14.1.9
Number of bins
1 bin
Paper types
Plain paper 60g/m2 to 90g/m2,
thick paper 91g/m2 to 209g/m2
Paper sizes
11 e 17 w, Letter w, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, B5 w
Paper capacity
Plain paper 60g/m2 to 90g/m2: Maximum 200 sheets or 20 sets
Staple settings
Number of bound pages: 2 to 15 sheets
Dimensions
445mm (W) e 478mm (D) e 203mm (H)
When the tray is pulled out: 576mm (W) e 281mm (H)
Weight
7.4 kg
Consumables
MS-2C cartridge (for 2,000) e 1
Power requirements
Supplied from finisher
Output tray OT-602
Specifications
Number of bins
1 bin
Paper type
Finishing tray 1, finishing tray 2:
"Sort", "Group":
Plain paper 60g/m2 to 90g/m2, thick paper 91g/m2 to 271g/m2, OHP, postcards, envelopes,
label sheets, letter heads
"Offset /Sort", "Offset /Group":
Plain paper 60g/m2 to 90g/m2, thick paper 91g/m2 to 271g/m2
"Staple" settings:
Plain paper 60g/m2 to 90g/m2, thick paper 91g/m2 to 209g/m2
Paper size
11 e 17 w, Letter w/v, Statement w/v, 12-1/4 e 18 w*, A3 w to B6 w, A6 w
Paper capacity
Plain paper 60g/m2 to 90g/m2: 200 sheets
Thick paper 91g/m2 to 271g/m2, postcards, envelopes, OHP, or label sheets, letterheads: 20
sheets
Dimensions
282mm (W) e 368mm (D) e 57mm (H)
Weight
0.7 kg
*
magicolor 8650
12-1/4 e 18 is equivalent to 311.1 mm e 457.2 mm, which is one size larger than A3.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
14-7
Specifications
14
14.1.10
Mailbin kit MT-502
Specifications
14.1.11
Number of bins
4 bins
Paper types
Plain paper 60g/m2 to 90g/m2
Paper sizes
Letter v, Statement w, A4 v, B5 v, A5 w
Paper capacity
Maximum 125 sheets per bin
Dimensions
340mm (W) e 509mm (D) e 387mm (H)
Weight
Approx. 8 kg (unit weight)
Power requirements
Supplied from finisher
Finisher FS-609
Specifications
Output trays
Output tray 1, output tray 2
Settings
Normal settings: "Group", "Sort", "Offset/Group", "Offset/Sort", "Offset/Staple", and "Saddle
Staple"
Paper types
Output tray 1:
"Group/Sort" setting: Plain paper 60g/m2 to 90g/m2,
thick paper 91g/m2 to 256g/m2, envelopes,
OHP, label sheets
"Offset/Sort" setting, "Offset/Group" setting: Plain paper 60g/m2 to 90g/m2
Staple: Plain paper 60g/m2 to 90g/m2
Output tray 2:
Plain paper 60g/m2 to 90g/m2
Paper sizes
Output tray 1:
"Group" setting:11 e 17 w to Statement w/v, 12-1/4 e 18 w*1, A3 w to B5 w/v
"Sort" setting: 11 e 17 w to Statement v, A3 w to A5 v
"Staple" setting: 11 e 17 w to Letter w/v, A3 w to B5 w/v
Output tray 2: 11 e 17 w, Letter w, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w
Paper capacity
Output tray 1:
Plain paper 60g/m2 to 90g/m2: 1,000 sheets of Letter w (A4 w) size paper or smaller, or 500
sheets of Legal w (B4 w) size paper or larger
Thick paper 91g/m2 to 256g/m2, envelopes,
OHP, label sheets: 20 sheets
Output tray 2:
10 prints (6 to 15 bound pages)*2
20 prints (2 to 5 bound pages)
Amount of shift
20mm
Staple settings
Output tray 1:
Paper sizes (no. of bound pages): Letter w/v (A4 w/v, B5 w/v) (2 to 50 pages),
11 e 17 w, Legal w (A3 w, B4 w) (2 to 25 pages)
Output tray 2:
Paper sizes (no. of bound pages): 11 e 17 w, Letter w (A3 w, B4 w, A4 w) (2 to 15 pages)
Power requirements
Supplied from main unit
Power consumption
Less than 65 W
Dimensions
601mm (W) e 603mm (D) e 933mm (H)
Weight
Approx. 42 kg (including the horizontal transport unit)
Consumables
Staples MS-5D (5,000 staples for stapling 50 sheets) e 1
*1
12-1/4 e 18 is equivalent to 311.1 mm e 457.2 mm, which is one size larger than A3.
*2
The number of pages that can be bound together differs depending on the paper weight. If 64g/m2 paper
is used, 6 to 15 pages can be bound together. If 80g/m2 paper is used, 6 to 10 pages can be bound together.
14-8
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Specifications
14.1.12
14
Punch kit PK-501
Specifications
Number of punched
holes
2, 3, 4
Paper types
Plain paper 60g/m2 to 90g/m2,
thick paper 91g/m2 to 209g/m2
Paper sizes
2-hole: 11 × 17 w to Letter w/v
3-hole: 11 × 17 w, Letter v
4-hole: A3 w, A4 v
Power requirements
Supplied from finisher
Dimensions
90mm (W) e 560mm (D) e 170mm (H)
Weight
Approx. 3 kg
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
14-9
Specifications
14
14.2
Consumable and replacement part life expectancy charts
14.2.1
Consumable life expectancy
Item
Average life expectancy
Toner cartridge
Black (K)
Original toner cartridge: An average of 9,000 pages (intermittent printing: 4P/J)
Replacement toner cartridge: An average of 26,000 pages (intermittent printing: 4P/J)
Toner cartridge
Yellow (Y)
Magenta (M)
Cyan (C)
Original toner cartridge: An average of 6,000 pages (intermittent printing: 4P/J)
Replacement toner cartridge: An average of 20,000 pages (intermittent printing: 4P/J)
Imaging unit
Black (K)
An average of 120,000 pages (intermittent printing: 4P/J)
Imaging unit
Yellow (Y)
Magenta (M)
Cyan (C)
An average of 90,000 pages (intermittent printing: 4P/J)
Waste toner box
An average of 50,000 pages (intermittent printing: 4P/J)
Staples
Finisher FS-519
5,000 (per cartridge)
Staples
Saddle stitcher
2,000 (per cartridge)
Staples
Finisher FS-609
5,000 (per cartridge)
The values shown above indicate the number of pages for simplex printing using A4/Letter-size media with
5% coverage.
The actual life may differ (be shorter) depending on the printing conditions (coverage, paper size, etc.),
differences in the printing method, such as continuous printing (when print jobs of four pages are most
appropriate for consumables) or intermittent printing (when print jobs of one page are often printed), or the
type of paper used, for example, thick paper. In addition, the life will be affected by the temperature and
humidity of the operating environment.
14.2.2
Replacement part life expectancy
Item
Average life expectancy
Tray 1 (bypass tray)
Paper take-up rollers
Approx. 200,000 pages
Paper separation roller ass’y
Approx. 200,000 pages
Tray 2/3
Paper take-up rollers
14-10
Approx. 300,000 pages
Paper separation roller ass’y
Approx. 300,000 pages
Pickup roller
Approx. 300,000 pages
Transfer roller unit
Approx. 150,000 pages
Transfer belt unit (Ozone filter)
Approx. 150,000 pages
Fusing unit
Approx. 400,000 pages
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
15
Authentication unit
(Biometric type AU-101)
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Authentication unit (Biometric type AU-101)
15
15
Authentication unit (Biometric type AU-101)
15.1
Safety information
15.1.1
Important information
When using the authentication unit (biometric type), observe the following precautions in addition to the
safety information in the Safety Information Guide.
Authentication unit (biometric type) is optional. It is sold or permitted to use as it is.
This product is designed, manufactured and intended for general business use. Do not use it for
applications requiring high reliability and which may have an extreme impact on lives and property.
(Applications requiring high reliability: Chemical plant management, medical equipment management
and emergency communications management)
Use with other authentication devices is not guaranteed.
In order to incorporate improvements in the product, the specifications concerning this product are
subject to change without notice.
15.1.2
For safe use
7 CAUTION
When using the authentication unit (biometric type), observe the following precautions.
%
Do not this product near water, otherwise it may be damaged.
%
Do not cut, damage, modify or forcefully bend the USB cable. A malfunction may occur as a result of a
damaged or cut USB cable.
%
Do not disassembly this device, otherwise it may be damaged.
15.1.3
Regulation notices
USER INSTRUCTIONS FCC PART 15 - RADIO FREQUENCY DEVICES (For U.S.A. Users)
FCC: Declaration of Conformity
Product Type
Authentication Unit (Biometric Type)
Product Name
AU-101
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference, and this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
2
Note
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interface by one or
more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
15-3
Authentication unit (Biometric type AU-101)
15
7 WARNING
The design and production of this unit conform to FCC regulations, and any changes or modifications
must be registered with the FCC and are subject to FCC control.
%
Any changes made by the purchaser or user without first contacting the manufacturer will be subject
to penalty under FCC regulations.
15.2
Product features
This device is a biometric authentication system that performs user authentication by scanning vein patterns
in a finger. Print job operations can be authenticated with finger vein patterns when using machines with user
authentication settings specified.
15.3
Part names and their functions
Rear view
1
2
3
Top view
No.
Part name
Description
1
Status indicator
Indicates this device’s status.
2
Security slot
Used for connecting the security cable to prevent thefts.
(complies with the security cable standards of the Kensington Computer Products Group)
3
USB port (type mini-B)
Used to connect a USB cable (mini-B plug).
The status of this device is indicated by a status indicator and tone.
15-4
Status indicator
Device status
Lit (green)
Standing by/authentication completed
Flashing (green)
Authenticating/scanning
Lit (red)
Authentication failed/scanning failed
Off
This device is not detected.
Tone
Device status
One short beep
Starting to scan
One short beep
Retrying after authentication failed
One short beep
Authentication completed
Two short beeps
Authentication failed
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Authentication unit (Biometric type AU-101)
15.4
15
Using authentication unit (Biometric type) AU-101
In order to use this device, user finger vein patterns must first be registered with the machine. A registered
user can print a print job after completing authentication with their finger vein patterns. The following
procedures describe how to specify the necessary settings on the machine and register users.
2
Note
Align the index finger with the indentation and notch in the scanner, and then position the finger so that
the tip lightly touches the edge of the scanner. Place your thumb and middle finger down to hold this
device in place on both sides, and avoid moving the index finger being used for authentication.
2
Reminder
Do not place any object other than your finger in the scanner of this device while scanning, otherwise
the device may malfunction.
Do not disconnect the cable connecting the device to the computer while scanning, otherwise the
system may become unstable.
15.4.1
Positioning your finger
1
Lightly stretch out your fingers, and then position the finger to
be registered or authenticated on this device.
2
Align the tip of the finger with the notch, and lightly position the
finger so that the tab can be felt at the tip of the finger.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
15-5
Authentication unit (Biometric type AU-101)
15
2
Note
If registration or authentication is not possible, check for the following. Remove the finger from this
device, and then reposition it correctly.
15-6
The finger should not
be positioned too far
forward or backward.
The finger should not be
positioned at an angle.
The finger should not
be positioned out of
line to the left or right.
The middle section of the
finger is not positioned
off the scanner.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Authentication unit (Biometric type AU-101)
15.4.2
15
Machine settings
To use the authentication unit (biometric type), an optional HDD and local interface kit must be installed.
1
From the "Main Menu" on the control panel, display the Admin. Settings screen.
–
For details on displaying the Admin. Settings screen, refer to "Operations for changing numeric
values" on page 9-5.
2
From the Auth Device Setting screen, select "Bio Auth. Setting", and then press the [Menu/Select] key.
3
Specify the settings for "Beep Sound" and "Operation Setting".
–
magicolor 8650
For "Beep Sound", specify whether or not to raise an electric sound when scan of the vein patterns
in the finger is successfully completed.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
15-7
Authentication unit (Biometric type AU-101)
15
–
For "Operation Setting", specify the print method after registration.
1-to-many Auth.: Documents can be printed by specifying the user name and password in the printer
driver, and placing the finger on the authentication unit.
1-to-1 Auth.: Documents can be printed if the specified user name and password in the printer driver
are correct. If "1-to-1 Auth." is selected, the Touch & Print function cannot be used.
4
Press the [*] key twice.
The Auth Device Setting screen appears again.
5
Select [Touch & Print], and then press the [Menu/Select] key.
6
Specify the settings for "Touch & Print User Box" and "Print".
–
–
15-8
If "OFF" is selected for "Touch & Print User Box", the Touch & Print function cannot be used.
If "ON" is selected for "Touch & Print User Box", "1-to-1 Auth." cannot be selected.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Authentication unit (Biometric type AU-101)
–
15
For "Print", specify the printing method for the Touch & Print function.
Print All Jobs.:
Select this setting to print all documents after completed authentication once when multiple documents
are saved in the Touch & Print user box.
Print Each Job.:
Select this setting to print one document saved in the Touch & Print user box each time authentication
is completed.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
15-9
Authentication unit (Biometric type AU-101)
15
15.4.3
Registering users
To register users, connect this machine to a computer, and use PageScope Data Administrator.
Install version checking
1
From the "Help" menu of PageScope Data Administrator, select "Version".
2
Click [Plug-in Version].
3
In [Plug-in information list], check the plug-in version of PageScope Data Administrator.
2
Note
For a "3.x" version machine, this software is not available. Install "4.x".
If PageScope Data Administrator V3.x is installed, it is removed when V4.x is installed.
2
Note
This software is available for a "4.x" plug-in version machine.
!
Detail
Registered user data is stored on the hard disk of the machine. If the user authentication method on the
machine is changed or the hard disk is reformatted, the registered user data is erased.
2
Note
In order to use PageScope Data Administrator, settings must be specified on the machine and the setup
procedure must be performed. The setup procedure includes installing this device’s BioDriver(USBDriver), then installing PageScope Data Administrator Bio Plugin.
2
Reminder
PageScope Data Administrator ver. 4.0 or later must first be installed on the computer. For details on
the operating environment and installation procedure for PageScope Data Administrator, refer to the
user manual for the PageScope Data Administrator.
15-10
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Authentication unit (Biometric type AU-101)
15
Setup
1
Turn off the machine with the power switch, and then disconnect this device from the machine.
2
Install BioDriver(USB-Driver).
Plug the cable from this device into the USB port on the computer.
The Found New Hardware Wizard starts.
3
Select "Yes, now and every time I connect a device", and then click [Next].
4
Insert the application CD-ROM included with this device into the CD-ROM drive of the computer.
5
Select "Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)", and then click [Next].
6
Select the "Include this location in the search" check box, check that the application CD-ROM appears
as a location to be searched, and then click [Next].
–
If the application CD-ROM does not appear as a location to be searched for the driver, click
[Browse], select the BioDriver (USB-Driver) folder on the CD-ROM, and then click [OK].
The installation begins.
7
Click [Finish].
8
Repeat steps 5 through 7.
The installation of BioDriver (USB-Driver) is completed.
9
Install PageScope Data Administrator Bio Plugin.
Open the DA_Bio_Plugin folder on the application CD-ROM, and then click "setup.exe".
10
Select the language, and then click [OK].
The installer starts up.
11
Follow the instructions that appear on the screen to complete the installation.
12
Click [Next].
13
Select "I accept the terms of the license agreement", and then click [Next].
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
15-11
Authentication unit (Biometric type AU-101)
15
14
Click [Install].
15
Click [Finish].
PageScope Data Administrator Bio Plugin is installed, and the setup is completed.
Registering users
!
Detail
In order to register users with PageScope Data Administrator, this device must be connected to the
USB port of the computer, and the computer and the machine must be connected over a network.
USB
Network
8650
Computer
This device
2
Note
When the machine is turned off, then on again with the power switch, wait at least 10 seconds to turn
the machine on after turning it off. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately
after being turned off.
Hold the plug when plugging and unplugging the USB cable, otherwise the cable may be damaged.
2
Reminder
Do not connect other USB devices to the same port where this device is connected. If enough USB
power is not provided, this device may not operate correctly.
When using a USB hub, be sure to use a self-powered USB hub that can provide 500 mA or more.
After connecting this device, wait at least 5 seconds before operating it.
15-12
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Authentication unit (Biometric type AU-101)
1
15
If this device is connected to the machine, turn off the machine with the power switch, and then
disconnect this device.
–
If this device is connected to the computer, continue with step 4.
2
Turn on the machine with the power switch.
3
Connect this device to the USB port of the computer installed with PageScope Data Administrator.
4
Start up PageScope Data Administrator, and then import the device information for the machine.
–
For details on importing the device information, refer to the user manual for PageScope Data
Administrator.
The Device information pane appears.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
15-13
Authentication unit (Biometric type AU-101)
15
5
Select "User authentication settings" in the Function selection pane, and then click [Add].
6
Select a template, and then click [OK].
The User settings dialog box appears.
15-14
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Authentication unit (Biometric type AU-101)
7
Type in the user name and password, click the Vein Authentication tab, and then click [Import].
–
8
magicolor 8650
If desired, type in the e-mail address.
Position the finger on this device, and then click [Start reading].
–
9
15
Scan the finger vein pattern three times, removing and repositioning the same finger each time.
Click [Register].
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
15-15
Authentication unit (Biometric type AU-101)
15
10
Click [OK].
–
11
Click [Export to the device].
–
15-16
Repeat steps 5 through 10 until all users have been registered.
To change the registered data, select the user name, and then click [Edit].
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Authentication unit (Biometric type AU-101)
12
15
Click [Write].
The registered user data is specified on the machine.
13
Click [OK].
14
Disconnect this device from this USB port of the computer.
15
Turn off the machine with the power switch, connect this device, and then turn on the machine with the
power switch.
!
Detail
PageScope Data Administrator is equipped with a batch copy feature that allows the registered user
data to be specified on multiple machines specified to be used with this device.
2
Note
When the machine is turned off, then on again with the power switch, wait at least 10 seconds to turn
the machine on after turning it off. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately
after being turned off.
Hold the plug when plugging and unplugging the USB cable, otherwise the cable may be damaged.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
15-17
Authentication unit (Biometric type AU-101)
15
15.5
Care of authentication unit (Biometric type) AU-101
2
Reminder
Before cleaning this device, disconnect it from the machine. If a force is applied to the USB port, it may
be damaged.
When cleaning this device, do not allow water to enter the device, otherwise the system may be
damaged.
Never use organic solvents, such as benzene or alcohol, to clean this device, otherwise it may be
damaged.
2
Note
When disconnecting or connecting this device, turn off the machine with the power switch, and then
wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on again. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned
on immediately after being turned off.
Hold the plug when plugging and unplugging the USB cable, otherwise the cable may be damaged.
Care of the housing
Frequency: Once a month, or when it is dirty
%
Wipe the housing with a soft, dry cloth. If the housing cannot be cleaned by wiping it, wash it with a
cloth dampened with a mild detergent and wrung out well. After the housing is cleaned, rinse the cloth
and wring it out well before wiping off the detergent.
Care of the cover
Frequency: Once a month, or when it is dirty or covered with fingerprints
%
15-18
Clean the scanner with a soft cloth. If it is extremely dirty,
remove the dirt before cleaning it.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Authentication unit (Biometric type AU-101)
15.6
15
Specifications
Specifications
Product name
Authentication unit (Biometric type) AU-101
Compatible finger width
10 mm to less than 25mm
Interface
USB 2.0
Dimensions
Approx. 78 mm (W) e 95mm (D) e 55 mm (H)
Weight
Approx. 150 g (not including the USB cable)
Power consumption
DC 5 V, 500 mA
Environment conditions
(when operating)
Temperature
50 to 86 °F (10 to 35 °C)
Humidity
10 to 80 % (Must be no condensation)
Environment conditions
(when not operating)
Temperature
14 to 140 °F (-10 to 60 °C)
Humidity
10 to 80 % (Must be no condensation)
Computer
Processor
PC/AT compatible, 1 GHz or more
Memory
128 MB or more
Hard disk drive
Available hard disk space: 100 MB or more
Supported operating systems
magicolor 8650
Monitor
800 e 600 pixels, 16-bit color or more
Network
TCP/IP protocol
Application
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 (Service Pack 1) or later
Microsoft .NET Framework (Service Pack 1) or later
Interface
USB 1.1 or later
Windows 2000 Professional (Service Pack 4)
Windows XP Professional Edition (Service Pack 2)
Windows Vista Business/Enterprise
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
15-19
Authentication unit (Biometric type AU-101)
15
15.7
Troubleshooting
If a problem occurs while running the system, refer to the following.
15-20
Condition
Possible cause
Remedy
The USB cable is connected between this device and the machine,
but the status indicator is not lit in
green.
The USB port of the machine may
be malfunctioning.
Turn the machine off with the power
switch and temporarily disconnect the
USB cable from this device or the machine before connecting it again and
waiting 10 seconds before turning on
the machine with the power switch.
The USB cable is connected between this device and the computer,
but the status indicator is not lit in
green.
The USB port of the computer may
be malfunctioning.
Restart the computer.
Is the driver for this device correctly
installed?
Refer to "Registering users" on
page 15-10, and check if the driver is
correctly installed on the computer.
A tone does not sound from the machine when scanning begins and
when authentication is completed.
Has the tone setting on the machine
been set to "OFF"?
Refer to "Machine settings" on
page 15-7, and set the tone setting to
"ON".
The message "Failed to Auth." appears on the machine.
With this device, the scanning time
is limited for each scan. This message appears if scanning is not possible within the limited period of
time.
For details on the scanning time,
consult with your administrator.
The message "Failed to read data.
Place your finger once again and
click the [Start reading] button." appears on a computer where registration failed.
With this device, the scanning time
is limited to five seconds for each
scan. This message appears if scanning is not possible within the fivesecond time period.
Refer to "Positioning your finger" on
page 15-5 and check how to position
the finger for authentication and scanning in order to complete scanning
within the limited period of time.
Correctly position the finger to be
scanned on the scanner, and do not
move the finger until the scanning results are received.
If the area of the finger to be scanned
is dirty or chapped, a correct image
cannot be created and scanning may
not be completed. Wash your hands
and try scanning again, or try to correct chapped fingers.
If the area of the finger to be scanned
is too wide or too thin (outside of the
finger width range of 10mm to 25mm,
a correct image cannot be created
and scanning may not be completed.
Try widening your finger or inserting it
deeper or less deep into the scanner.
Scanning does not begin.
Is the finger correctly positioned?
Refer to "Positioning your finger" on
page 15-5 and check how to position
the finger for authentication and scanning.
Correctly position the finger to be
scanned on the scanner, and do not
move the finger until the scanning results are received.
If the area of the finger to be scanned
is dirty or chapped, a correct image
cannot be created and scanning may
not be completed. Wash your hands
and try scanning again, or try to correct chapped fingers.
If the area of the finger to be scanned
is too wide or too thin (outside of the
finger width range of 10mm to 25mm,
a correct image cannot be created
and scanning may not be completed.
Try widening your finger or inserting it
deeper or less deep into the scanner.
Was the machine restarted after this
device was connected to it?
Turn the machine off with the power
switch and temporarily disconnect the
USB cable from this device or the machine before connecting it again and
waiting 10 seconds before turning on
the machine with the power switch.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Authentication unit (Biometric type AU-101)
15
Condition
Possible cause
Remedy
The Add New Hardware Wizard
starts when this device is connected
to the computer.
Is this device connected to the same
USB port used when the driver was
installed?
If this device is connected to a USB
port different from the one used when
the driver was installed, the Add New
Hardware Wizard may start. Use the
same USB port used when the driver
was installed.
If the problem is not corrected after the described operation is performed, contact your technical
representative or the manufacturer.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
15-21
15
15-22
Authentication unit (Biometric type AU-101)
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
16
Authentication unit
(IC card type AU-201)
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Authentication unit (IC card type AU-201)
16
16
Authentication unit (IC card type AU-201)
16.1
Safety information
16.1.1
Important information
When using the authentication unit (IC card type), observe the following precautions in addition to the safety
information in the Safety Information Guide.
Authentication unit (IC card type) is optional. It is sold or permitted to use as it is.
This product is designed, manufactured and intended for general business use. Do not use it for
applications requiring high reliability and which may have an extreme impact on lives and property.
(Applications requiring high reliability: Chemical plant management, medical equipment management
and emergency communications management)
Use with other authentication devices is not guaranteed.
In order to incorporate improvements in the product, the specifications concerning this product are
subject to change without notice.
Do not store the IC card within 1-1/2(40mm) of the card scanning area.
16.1.2
For safe use
7 CAUTION
When using the authentication unit (IC card type), observe the following precautions
%
Do not this product near water, otherwise it may be damaged.
%
Do not cut, damage, modify or forcefully bend the USB cable. A malfunction may occur as a result of a
damaged or cut USB cable.
%
Do not disassembly this device, otherwise it may be damaged.
16.1.3
Regulation notices
USER INSTRUCTIONS FCC PART 15 - RADIO FREQUENCY DEVICES (For U.S.A. Users)
FCC: Declaration of Conformity
Product Type
Authentication Unit (Biometric Type)
Product Name
AU-201
(This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.) Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of this device.
2
Note
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interface by one or
more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
16-3
Authentication unit (IC card type AU-201)
16
7 WARNING
The design and production of this unit conform to FCC regulations, and any changes or modifications
must be registered with the FCC and are subject to FCC control.
%
Any changes made by the purchaser or user without first contacting the manufacturer will be subject
to penalty under FCC regulations.
INTERFERENCE-CAUSING EQUIPMENT STANDARD (ICES- 003 ISSUE 4) (For Canada Users)
(This device complies with RSS-Gen of IC Rules.) Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of this device.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
16.2
Product features
This device is an IC card authentication system that performs user authentication by IC cards. Print job
operations can be authenticated with IC cards when using machines with user authentication settings
specified.
16.3
Part names and their functions
1
16-4
2
No.
Part name
Description
1
Card scanning area
Position the IC card on this area.
2
USB cable
Used for connecting this device to the machine.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Authentication unit (IC card type AU-201)
16.4
16
Using authentication unit (IC card type) AU-201
In order to use this device, user IC card IDs must first be registered with the machine. A registered user can
print a print job after completing authentication with their IC card IDs. The following procedures describe how
to specify the necessary settings on the machine and register users.
2
Reminder
Do not disconnect the USB cable while this device is being used, otherwise the system may become
unstable.
16.4.1
Positioning the IC card
%
Place the IC card horizontally on the card scanning area.
2
Reminder
Do not store the IC card within 40 mm of the card scanning area.
16.4.2
Multifunctional product settings
To use the authentication unit (IC card type), an optional HDD and local interface kit must be installed.
1
From the "Main Menu" on the control panel, display the Admin. Settings screen.
–
2
magicolor 8650
For details on displaying the Admin. Settings screen, refer to "Operations for changing numeric
values" on page 9-5.
From the Auth Device Setting screen, select [Card Auth. Setting], and then press the [Menu/Select] key.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
16-5
Authentication unit (IC card type AU-201)
16
3
Specify the settings for "IC Card Type" and "Operation Setting".
–
For "IC Card Type", specify the IC card type to be used.
–
For "Operation Setting", specify the print method after registration.
Card: Documents can be printed by specifying the user name and password in the printer driver, and
placing the card on the authentication unit.
Card + Password: Documents can be printed if the specified user name and password in the printer
driver are correct. If "Card + Password" is selected, the Touch & Print function cannot be used.
4
Press the [*] key twice.
The Auth Device Setting screen appears again.
5
16-6
Select [Touch & Print], and then press the [Menu/Select] key.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Authentication unit (IC card type AU-201)
6
16
Specify the settings for "Touch & Print User Box" and "Print".
–
–
If "OFF" is selected for "Touch & Print User Box", the Touch & Print function cannot be used.
If "ON" is selected for "Touch & Print User Box", "Card + Password" cannot be selected.
–
For "Print", specify the printing method for the Touch & Print function.
Print All Jobs.:
Select this setting to print all documents after completed authentication once when multiple documents
are saved in the Touch & Print user box.
Print Each Job.:
Select this setting to print one document saved in the Touch & Print user box each time authentication
is completed.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
16-7
Authentication unit (IC card type AU-201)
16
16.4.3
Registering users
To register users, connect this machine to a computer, and use PageScope Data Administrator.
Install version checking
1
From the "Help" menu of PageScope Data Administrator, select "Version".
2
Click [Plug-in Version].
3
In [Plug-in information list], check the plug-in version of PageScope Data Administrator.
2
Note
For a "3.x" version machine, this software is not available. Install "4.x".
If PageScope Data Administrator V3.x is installed, it is removed when V4.x is installed.
2
Note
This software is available for a "4.x" plug-in version machine.
!
Detail
Registered user data is stored on the hard disk of the machine. If the user authentication method on the
machine is changed or the hard disk is reformatted, the registered user data is erased.
2
Note
In order to use PageScope Data Administrator, settings must be specified on the machine and the setup
procedure must be performed. The setup procedure includes installing this device’s IC Card Driver
(USB-Driver), then installing PageScope Data Administrator IC Card Plugin.
2
Reminder
PageScope Data Administrator ver. 4.0 or later must first be installed on the computer. For details on
the operating environment and installation procedure for PageScope Data Administrator, refer to the
user manual for the PageScope Data Administrator.
16-8
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Authentication unit (IC card type AU-201)
16
Setup
1
Turn off the machine with the power switch, and then disconnect this device from the machine.
2
Install IC Card Driver (USB-Driver).
Plug the cable from this device into the USB port on the computer.
The Found New Hardware Wizard starts.
3
Select "Yes, now and every time I connect a device", and then click [Next].
4
Insert the application CD-ROM included with this device into the CD-ROM drive of the computer.
5
Select "Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)", and then click [Next].
6
Select the "Include this location in the search" check box, check that the application CD-ROM appears
as a location to be searched, and then click [Next].
–
If the application CD-ROM does not appear as a location to be searched for the driver, click
[Browse], select the IC Card Driver (USB-Driver) folder on the CD-ROM, and then click [OK].
The installation begins.
7
Click [Finish].
The installation of IC Card Driver (USB-Driver) is completed.
8
Install PageScope Data Administrator IC Card Plugin.
Open the IC_Card_Plugin folder on the application CD-ROM, and then click "setup.exe".
9
Select the language, and then click [OK].
The installer starts up.
10
Follow the instructions that appear on the screen to complete the installation.
11
Click [Next].
12
Select "I accept the terms of the license agreement", and then click [Next].
13
Click [Install].
14
Click [Finish].
Data Administrator IC Card Plugin is installed, and the setup is completed.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
16-9
Authentication unit (IC card type AU-201)
16
Registering users
!
Detail
In order to register users with PageScope Data Administrator, this device must be connected to the
USB port of the computer, and the computer and machine must be connected over a network.
USB
Network
Machine
Computer
This device
2
Note
When the machine is turned off, then on again with the power switch, wait at least 10 seconds to turn
the machine on after turning it off. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately
after being turned off.
Hold the plug when plugging and unplugging the USB cable, otherwise the cable may be damaged.
2
Reminder
Do not connect other USB devices to the same port where this device is connected. If enough USB
power is not provided, this device may not operate correctly.
When using a USB hub, be sure to use a self-powered USB hub that can provide 500 mA or more.
After connecting this device, wait at least 5 seconds before operating it.
16-10
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Authentication unit (IC card type AU-201)
1
16
If this device is connected to the machine, turn off the machine with the power switch, and then
disconnect this device.
–
If this device is connected to the computer, continue with step 4.
2
Turn on the machine with the power switch.
3
Connect this device to the USB port of the computer installed with PageScope Data Administrator.
4
Start up PageScope Data Administrator, and then import the device information for the machine.
–
For details on importing the device information, refer to the user manual for PageScope Data
Administrator.
The Device information pane appears.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
16-11
Authentication unit (IC card type AU-201)
16
5
Select "User authentication settings" in the Function selection pane, and then click [Add].
6
Select a template, and then click [OK].
The User settings dialog box appears.
16-12
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Authentication unit (IC card type AU-201)
7
Type in the user name and password, and then click the IC card authentication tab.
–
8
The card ID can also be registered by selecting "Input the card ID directly".
Click [OK].
–
magicolor 8650
If desired, type in the e-mail address.
Position the IC card on this device, and then click [Start reading].
–
9
16
Repeat steps 5 through 9 until all users have been registered.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
16-13
Authentication unit (IC card type AU-201)
16
10
Click [Export to the device].
–
11
To change the registered data, select the user name, and then click [Edit].
Click [Write].
The registered user data is specified on the machine.
12
16-14
Click [OK].
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Authentication unit (IC card type AU-201)
16
13
Disconnect this device from this USB port of the computer.
14
Turn off the machine with the power switch, connect this device, and then turn on the machine with the
power switch.
!
Detail
PageScope Data Administrator is equipped with a batch copy feature that allows the registered user
data to be specified on multiple machines specified to be used with this device.
2
Note
When the machine is turned off, then on again with the power switch, wait at least 10 seconds to turn
the machine on after turning it off. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately
after being turned off.
Hold the plug when plugging and unplugging the USB cable, otherwise the cable may be damaged.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
16-15
Authentication unit (IC card type AU-201)
16
16.5
Care of authentication unit (IC card type) AU-201
2
Reminder
Before cleaning this device, disconnect it from the machine. If a force is applied to the USB port, it may
be damaged.
When cleaning this device, do not allow water to enter the device, otherwise the system may be
damaged.
Never use organic solvents, such as benzene or alcohol, to clean this device, otherwise it may be
damaged.
2
Note
When disconnecting or connecting this device, turn off the machine with the power switch, and then
wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on again. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned
on immediately after being turned off.
Hold the plug when plugging and unplugging the USB cable, otherwise the cable may be damaged.
Frequency: Once a month, or when it is dirty
%
16-16
Wipe this device with a soft, dry cloth. If this device cannot be cleaned by wiping it, wash it with a cloth
dampened with a mild detergent and wrung out well. After this device is cleaned, rinse the cloth and
wring it out well before wiping off the detergent.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Authentication unit (IC card type AU-201)
16.6
16
Specifications
Specifications
Product name
Authentication unit (IC card type) AU-201
Dimensions
Approx. 92 mm (W) e 64mm (D) e 16 mm (H)
Weight
Approx. 120 g
Power requirements
Through USB port
Environment conditions
(when operating)
Temperature
32 to 104 °F (0 to 40 °C)
Humidity
20 to 85% (Must be no condensation)
Environment conditions
(when not operating)
Temperature
-4 to 122 °F (-20 to 50 °C)
Humidity
20 to 85% (Must be no condensation)
Radio waves classification
Induced reading/writing communication equipment
Compatible card
Contactless IC card compliant with ISO 14443 Type A and
Felica
Computer
Processor
PC/AT compatible, 1 GHz or more
Memory
128 MB or more
Hard disk drive
Available hard disk space: 100 MB or more
Monitor
800 e 600 pixels, 16-bit color or more
Network
TCP/IP protocol
Application
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 (Service Pack 1) or later
Microsoft .NET Framework (Service Pack 1) or later
Interface
USB 1.1 or later
Supported operating systems
16.7
Windows 2000 Professional (Service Pack 4)
Windows XP Professional Edition (Service Pack 2)
Windows Vista Business/Enterprise
Troubleshooting
If a problem occurs while running the system, refer to the following.
Condition
Possible cause
Remedy
The message appears on a computer where registration failed.
With this device, the scanning time
is limited to 10 seconds. This message appears if scanning was not
possible within the limited period of
time.
Refer to "Positioning the IC card" on
page 16-5 and check how to position
the IC card in order to complete scanning within the limited period of time.
The message "Failed to Auth." appears on the machine.
If "Card Authentication + Password"
was selected:
Is the password typed in correctly?
Check the password, and type it in
correctly.
Scanning does not begin.
Was the machine restarted after this
device was connected to it?
Turn the machine off with the power
switch and temporarily disconnect the
USB cable from this device or the machine before connecting it again and
waiting 10 seconds before turning on
the multifunctional product with the
power switch.
The Add New Hardware Wizard
starts when this device is connected
to the computer.
Is this device connected to the same
USB port used when the driver was
installed?
If this device is connected to a USB
port different from the one used when
the driver was installed, the Add New
Hardware Wizard may start. Use the
same USB port used when the driver
was installed.
If the problem is not corrected after the described operation is performed, contact your technical
representative or the manufacturer.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
16-17
16
16-18
Authentication unit (IC card type AU-201)
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
17
Installing options
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Installing options
17
17
Installing options
17.1
Introduction
This chapter describes how to install the following options.
Option
Description
Mount kit MK-713
Can be loaded with banner paper up to 47-1/4 (1,200 mm) in length.
Authentication unit (biometric type)
AU-101
Performs user authentication by scanning vein patterns in the finger.
To use the authentication unit (biometric type), an optional hard disk drive
HD-508 and local interface kit EK-603 must be installed.
Authentication unit (IC card type)
AU-201
Performs user authentication by reading the information registered on IC
cards.
To use the authentication unit (IC card type), an optional hard disk drive
HD-508 and local interface kit EK-603 must be installed.
2
Reminder
Damage to this machine resulting from use of options other than genuine parts or recommended parts
is not covered by the warranty.
Before installing an option, be sure to turn off the machine and unplug the power cord.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
17-3
Installing options
17
17.2
Installing the mount kit MK-713
Installing the mount kit MK-713 allows you to load banner paper up to 47-1/4 (1,200 mm) in length.
17-4
1
Open the tray 1.
2
Install the mount kit to the tray 1.
3
Erect the guide of the mount kit.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Installing options
17
2
Note
Do not open the tray extension. If it is already open, close it.
For details on printing on banner paper, refer to "Banner paper printing function" on page 8-45.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
17-5
Installing options
17
17.3
Installing the authentication unit (biometric type) AU-101
2
Note
Before installing the authentication unit (biometric type), access "Authentication" on this machine, and
then select "ON (MFP)" for "General Settings".
For details on specifying authentication settings, refer to "User Auth/Account Track" on page 10-42.
17.3.1
Authentication unit (biometric type) components
1
3
17-6
2
4
5
6
No.
Part name
Quantity
1
Authentication unit
1
2
USB cable
1
3
Velcro fastening A (hook)
1
4
Velcro fastening B (loop)
1
5
Velcro fastening C (hook)
1
6
Velcro fastening D (loop)
1
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Installing options
17.3.2
17
Installing the authentication unit (biometric type)
1
Use the power switch to turn off the machine, and then unplug the machine.
2
If necessary, use the included Velcro fastenings (A, B, C, and D) to secure the authentication unit to the
working table.
3
Connect the USB cable to the authentication unit.
4
Connect the USB cable to the machine.
5
Insert the power supply plug of the machine into the electrical outlet, and then turn on the machine.
6
Press the [Menu/Select] key.
7
Press the [,] key several times to select [Admin. Settings], and then press the [Menu/Select] key.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
17-7
Installing options
17
17-8
8
Type in the password, and then press the [Menu/Select] key.
9
Press the [,] key several times to select [Option Settings], and then press the [Menu/Select] key.
10
Press the [,] key several times to select [AuthDeviceSetting], and then press the [Menu/Select] key.
11
Press the [Menu/Select] key.
12
Press the [,] key several times to select [Biometric] and then press the [Menu/Select] key.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Installing options
17
13
Press the [Cancel] key.
14
Turn the machine off, then on again.
!
Detail
For details on using the authentication unit (biometric type) AU-101, refer to "Authentication unit
(Biometric type AU-101)" on page 15-3.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
17-9
Installing options
17
17.4
Installing the authentication unit (IC card type) AU-201
2
Note
Before installing the authentication unit (IC card type), access "Authentication" on this machine, and
then select "ON (MFP)" for "General Settings".
For details on specifying authentication settings, refer to "User Auth/Account Track" on page 10-42.
17.4.1
Authentication unit (IC card type) components
1
2
3
17-10
4
No.
Part name
Quantity
1
Authentication unit
1
2
Ferrite core
1
3
Velcro fastening A (hook)
3
4
Velcro fastening B (loop)
3
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Installing options
17.4.2
17
Installing the authentication unit (IC card type)
1
Use the power switch to turn off the machine, and then unplug the machine.
2
Wind the USB cable around the ferrite core twice and connect
the cable to the authentication unit.
3
If necessary, use the included Velcro fastenings (A and B) to secure the authentication unit to the
working table.
4
Connect the USB cable to the machine.
5
Insert the power supply plug of the machine into the electrical outlet, and then turn on the machine.
6
Press the [Menu/Select] key.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
17-11
Installing options
17
17-12
7
Press the [,] key several times to select [Admin. Settings], and then press the [Menu/Select] key.
8
Type in the password, and then press the [Menu/Select] key.
9
Press the [,] key several times to select [Option Settings], and then press the [Menu/Select] key.
10
Press the [,] key several times to select [AuthDeviceSetting], and then press the [Menu/Select] key.
11
Press the [Menu/Select] key.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Installing options
17
12
Press the [,] key several times to select [Card] and then press the [Menu/Select] key.
13
Press the [Cancel] key.
14
Turn the machine off, then on again.
2
Reminder
Mount the ferrite core at a location approx. 2-1/4 (60 mm) away from the authentication unit.
!
Detail
For details on using the authentication unit (IC card type) AU-201, refer to "Authentication unit (IC card
type AU-201)" on page 16-3.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
17-13
Installing options
17
17-14
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
18
Appendix
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Appendix
18
18
Appendix
18.1
Configuration page
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
18-3
Appendix
18
18.2
PPD driver (for applications)
18.2.1
PPD driver types
The PPD driver contains the PPD information for Mac OS 9 and applications.
Driver for applications: Install the driver when using applications such as Adobe PageMaker that require the
PPD driver.
18.2.2
About the PPD driver for applications
PPD registration destination (example: Adobe PageMaker)
For PageMaker 6.0
Copy the PPD file to RSR\CPPD4, which is under the folder to which PageMaker is installed.
For PageMaker 6.5/7.0
Copy the PPD file to RSRC\<Language>\PPD4, which is under the folder to which PageMaker is
installed.
To print
18-4
1
Select [File], then [Print].
2
From the "Model" box in the print dialog box, select this machine.
3
Specify "Paper Setting" or "Features" for the printer.
4
To print, click the [Print] button.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Appendix
18
18.3
NetWare
18.3.1
Connection methods selectable for NetWare
The following protocols are available for NetWare.
NetWare version
Protocol used
Connection method
NetWare 4.x
IPX
Bindery Pserver
Nprinter/Rprinter
NetWare 5.x
IPX
NDS Pserver
Nprinter/Rprinter
TCP/IP
NDPS
IPX
NDS Pserver
TCP/IP
NDPS
NetWare 6.x
2
Note
For details on the NetWare functions, refer to the NetWare operation manual of the NetWare.
Before using this machine in a NetWare environment, the network settings must be specified for this
machine. For details, refer to "NetWare Setting" on page 18-5.
18.3.2
NetWare Setting
Specify settings for printing in a NetWare environment. Before printing in the NetWare environment, settings
for using this machine in the NetWare environment must be specified.
%
magicolor 8650
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Network tab - "NetWare Setting" "NetWare Setting".
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
18-5
Appendix
18
Settings are different depending on the environment used. Specify the settings according to the following
procedures.
For Remote Printer mode with NetWare 4.x bindery emulation
0
Before using bindery emulation, check that bindery emulation is compatible with the NetWare server.
1
From a client computer, log in to NetWare with the Administrator permission as Bindery.
2
Start up Pconsole.
3
From the "Available Options" list, select "Quick Setup", and then press the [Enter] key.
4
Enter the appropriate names in the "Print Server Name", "Printer Name", and "Print Queue Name"
fields, select "Other/Unknown" from the "Printer type" field, and then save the specified settings.
5
Press the [Esc] key to quit Pconsole.
6
Use the NetWare server console to load PSERVER.NLM.
%
Next, specify the following settings for "NetWare Setting".
Item
Definition
IPX Setting*
Select "ON".
Ethernet Frame Type*
Specify the frame type to be used.
NetWare Print Mode*
Select "NPrinter/Rprinter".
Print Server Name*
Specify the printer server name to allow it to serve as Nprinter/Rprinter (up to 63 characters).
Printer Number*
Enter the Nprinter/Rprinter printer number.
Prior confirmation
Frame type
Print server name registered in step 4
For the print server mode with NetWare 4.x bindery emulation
18-6
0
0
Before using bindery emulation, check that bindery emulation is compatible with the NetWare server.
To use the printer server mode, the IPX protocol must be loaded on the NetWare server.
1
From a client computer, log in to NetWare with the Administrator permission as Bindery.
2
Start up Pconsole.
3
From the "Available Options" list, select "Quick Setup", and then press the [Enter] key.
4
Enter the appropriate names in the "Print Server Name", "Printer Name", and "Print Queue Name"
fields, select "Other/Unknown" from the "Printer type" field, and then save the specified settings.
5
Press the [Esc] key to quit Pconsole.
%
Next, specify the following settings for "NetWare Setting".
Item
Definition
IPX Setting*
Select "ON".
Ethernet Frame Type*
Specify the frame type to be used.
NetWare Print Mode*
Select "PServer".
Print Server Name*
Specify the printer server name to allow it to serve as Pserver
(up to 63 characters).
Print Server Password*
If necessary, specify the password for the printer server (up
to 63 characters).
Polling Interval*
Specify an interval to make queries for jobs.
Bindery/NDS Setting
Select "NDS/Bindery".
File Server Name
Specify the priority file server name for Bindery mode (up to
47 characters).
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Prior confirmation
Frame type
Print server name registered in step 4
magicolor 8650
Appendix
18
For NetWare 4.x Remote Printer mode (NDS)
1
Log in to NetWare as an administrator from a client computer.
2
Start up NWadmin.
3
Select either the organization or organizational unit container that offers the print service, and then click
"Print Services Quick Setup" on the "Tools" menu.
4
Enter the appropriate names in the "Print Server Name", "Printer Name", "Print Queue Name", and
"Print Queue Volume" fields, select "Other/Unknown" from the "Printer type" field, and then save the
specified settings.
5
Use the NetWare server console to load PSERVER.NLM.
%
Next, specify the following settings for "NetWare Setting".
Item
Definition
IPX Setting*
Select "ON".
Ethernet Frame Type*
Specify the frame type to be used.
NetWare Print Mode*
Select "NPrinter/Rprinter".
Print Server Name*
Specify the printer server name to allow it to serve as Nprinter/Rprinter (up to 63 characters).
Printer Number*
Enter the Nprinter/Rprinter printer number.
Prior confirmation
Frame type
Print server name registered in step 4
For NetWare 4.x/5.x/6 Print Server mode (NDS)
0
To use the printer server mode, the IPX protocol must be loaded on the NetWare server.
1
Log in to NetWare as an administrator from a client computer.
2
Start up NWadmin.
3
Select either the organization or organizational unit container that offers the print service, and then click
"Print Services Quick Setup (non-NDPS)" on the "Tools" menu.
4
Enter the appropriate names in the "Print Server Name", "Printer Name", "Print Queue Name", and
"Print Queue Volume" fields, select "Other/Unknown" from the "Printer type" field, and then click
[Create].
%
Next, specify the following settings for "NetWare Setting".
Item
Definition
IPX Setting*
Select "ON".
Ethernet Frame Type*
Specify the frame type to be used.
NetWare Print Mode*
Select "PServer".
Print Server Name*
Specify the printer server name to allow it to serve as PServer (up to 63 characters).
Print Server Password*
If necessary, specify the password for the printer server (up
to 63 characters).
Polling Interval*
Specify an interval to make queries for jobs.
Bindery/NDS Setting
Select "NDS".
NDS Context Name
Specify the NDS context name connected with the print
server (up to 191 characters).
NDS Tree Name
Specify the NDS tree name connected with the printer server
(up to 63 characters).
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Prior confirmation
Frame type
Print server name registered in step 4
18-7
Appendix
18
For NetWare 5.x/6 Novell Distributed Print Service (NDPS)
0
0
18-8
Before specifying settings for NDPS, check that the NDPS broker and NDPS manager have been
created and loaded.
Also, check that the TCP/IP protocol is specified in the NetWare server, the IP address is specified for
this machine, then this machine is running.
1
Log in to NetWare as an administrator from a client computer.
2
Start up NWadmin.
3
Right -click "Organization" or "Organizational unit" container where a printer agent is created, and then
select "NDPS Printer" on the "Create" submenu.
4
In the "NDPS Printer Name" box, enter the "printer name".
5
In the "Printer Agent Source" column, select "Create a New Printer Agent", and then click "Create".
6
Check the printer agent name, and then in the "NDPS Manager Name" box, browse through the NDPS
manager names, and register it.
7
In "Gateway Types", select "Novell Printer Gateway", and then register it.
8
In the "Configure Novell DPS for Printer Agent" window, select "(None)" for the printer type and "Novell
Port Handler" for the port handler type, and then register the settings.
9
In "Connection type", select "Remote (LPR on IP)", and then register it.
10
Enter the IP address set for this machine as the host address, enter "Print" as the printer name, and
then click the "Finish" button to register the settings.
11
The printer driver registration screen appears. Select "None" for each operating system to complete the
registration.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Appendix
18.3.3
18
NetWare Status
%
18.3.4
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select the Network tab - "NetWare Setting" "NetWare Status".
– NetWare connection status can be checked, if necessary.
Windows Client Setting
Install the printer driver using the Add Printer Wizard for an Window client who uses a printer.
2
Reminder
When installing on NT4.0/2000/XP/Vista/Server 2003, administrator permissions are required.
1
Insert the printer driver CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the computer.
2
Open the Printers window or Printers and Faxes window.
3
Perform "Add a printer" or "Add Printer".
Add Printer Wizard starts.
4
In the port settings, browse the network, and specify the name of the created queue (or NDPS printer
name).
5
From the printer model list, specify the desired folder on the CD-ROM that contains the printer driver.
–
6
magicolor 8650
Select the specified folder according to the printer driver to be used, the operating system, and the
language. Printer drivers that can be selected: Windows 2000/XP/Vista/Server 2003: PCL driver, PS
driver Windows NT4.0: PCL driver
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
18-9
Appendix
18
18.4
Tray Mapping Setting
The actual paper source mapping against the value specified by the paper tray command included in the PCL
command can be changed.
This machine uses the following HP-compatible commands when specifying the paper tray.
PCL5: "PAPER SOURCE" command
PCL XL: "MEDIA SOURCE" command
18.4.1
Tray mapping setting procedure
Briefly, setting procedure for tray mapping is as follows.
1
Create a tray mapping definition PRN file.
2
Send the tray mapping definition PRN file to the MFP.
3
Turn off the power of this machine, then on again, and check the operation.
2
Note
This function is available only if the optional HDD is installed.
18.4.2
Creating tray mapping definition PRN file
1
Create a text file that includes the mapping information for each tray.
2
Use a text editor such as Notepad to create the following contents.
3
After completion, save the file with any desired file name.
Format
Common parts requiring no modification
.....(1)
.....(2)
18-10
Change this part
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Appendix
18
Item
Description
(1) Tray mapping information definition for PCL5
Description for only one of PCL5/PCLXL is acceptable.
(Descriptions for both are not required.)
(2) Tray mapping information definition for PCLXL
(3) PCLID for Auto Tray
(4) PCLID for Tray 1
(bypass tray)
Cannot be omitted even if some trays (Tray 6, for example) do not actually exist.
Be sure to describe definitions for all of (3) to (9).
(5) PCLID for Tray 2
(6) PCLID for Tray 3
(7) PCLID for Tray 4
(8) PCLID for Tray 5
(9) PCLID for Tray 6
2
Note
The order of (1) and (2) can be reverse.
If multiple definition lines exist for one PCL, the definition in the latter line is applied.
Lines not starting with "HPTRAY5E=" or "HPTRAYXL=" are ignored.
Specifiable PCLID
PCL5
Auto Tray
1 - 255
Other than Auto Tray
1 - 6, 8 - 255
*
PCLXL
Auto Tray
1 - 255
Other than Auto Tray
2 - 255
*
Common
PCLID (7) for Auto Tray cannot be used for any tray other than Auto Tray.
PCLID (1) for Auto Tray cannot be used for any tray other than Auto Tray.
No change of PCLID
*
-1
Returns to the factory default.
Definition example
PCL5: Reverse the PCLID for Tray 2 and Tray 4.
PCLXL: Change the PCLID for Tray 3 to "10".
In such case, the description should be as follows.
magicolor 8650
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
18-11
Appendix
18
18.4.3
18.4.4
Sending the PRN file
1
Send the PRN file created in "Creating tray mapping definition PRN file" on page 18-10 to this machine
using the lpr command.
2
Start the command prompt, and then execute the following command.
lpr –S (IP address of this machine) –P printer (PRN file created in "Creating tray mapping definition PRN
file" on page 18-10)
Restarting this machine
%
Turn off the main power of this machine, then on again.
The settings are enabled after restarting.
2
Note
When the power is turned off, then on, turn off the power, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn it on.
Otherwise, the machine may not operate correctly.
18.4.5
Troubleshooting
After turning on the power, the settings are checked.
When any error is found during checking, all the settings are disabled (initial settings are kept valid).
Even if an error exists, no error message appears.
Possible error causes are as follows.
Actual number of trays is less than the number of trays defined.
HPTRAY5E=1, 2
A PCLID that is not a number is defined.
HPTRAY5E=1, 2, 3, A, 5, 6, 8
A PCLID that is out of available range is defined.>
HPTRAY5E=1, 2, 3, 500, 5, 6, 8
A redundant PCLID is defined.
HPTRAY5E=1, 2, 3, 2, 5, 6, 8
The PCLID for Auto Tray is specified for any other tray.
HPTRAY5E=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
18-12
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Appendix
18.4.6
18
Returning the tray mapping setting to the default
%
To return the entire tray mapping settings to the factory default, specify "-1" for PCLID of each tray.
Factory default of PCLID
Command
PJL
PCL5
PCL XL
PCL XL
Actual paper source
MEDIASOURCE
<Esc>&l#H
MediaSource
Wording *
Follow print control
AUTO
7
2
Bypass (manual) feed
MANUALFEED
2
2
4
3
Tray 1
Paper feed from the 1st tray
TRAY1
1
4
Tray 2
Paper feed from the 2nd tray
TRAY2
5
5
Tray 3
Paper feed from the 3rd tray
TRAY3
8
7
Tray 4
Bypass (manual) feed
Tray 1
(Bypass tray)
Paper feed from the 4th tray
TRAY4
9
8
Tray 5
Paper feed from LCT
TRAY3
8
7
Tray 4 (LCT)
*
magicolor 8650
"Wording" represents a tray name displayed on the printer driver.
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
18-13
Appendix
18
18-14
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
19
Index
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
Index
19
19
Index
Numerics
2-Sided Print 9-19
A
Accept IPP jobs 9-22
Access Setting 9-24
Accessing 10-3
Account name 9-16
Account Track 6-10, 7-10, 8-29, 10-35
Account track 2-45, 10-8
Account Track Registration 10-38
Account User Box 8-15, 9-16
Action for Invalid Certificate 10-56
Active Directory 10-40
Add Printer 4-6, 4-8, 4-10, 4-14, 4-15, 4-17, 4-19,
4-22, 4-24, 4-25, 4-27
Admin. Password 9-25
Admin. Sec. Levels 9-25
Admin. Settings Menu 9-13, 9-25
Administrator mode 3-7, 10-12, 10-17
Administrator password 10-12, 10-107
Annotation User Box 8-17
Annotation user box 10-27
AnnotationUserBox 9-16
APOP Authentication 10-93
AppleTalk 5-3, 5-5, 5-9, 5-12, 9-23
AppleTalk Setting 3-19, 9-23
Audit Log 9-25
AuthDeviceSetting 9-28
Authentication 6-10, 9-24
Authentication unit 8-32
Authentication unit (Biometric type AU-101) 15-3
Authentication unit (IC card type AU-201) 16-3
Auto Logout 10-106
Auto tray switch 2-24
Automatic duplex unit 2-5, 11-13, 14-5
AutoTray Switch 9-18
AutoTraySelection 9-18
B
Back Cover 6-14, 7-17
Banner paper 2-20, 11-28
Banner paper printing 8-45
Banner PaperTray 9-19
Banner Printing Menu 9-15
Banner Sheet 9-19
Basic operations 9-3
Basic Setting 10-108
Basic Settings 9-19
Basic tab 6-9
Beep Sound 9-28
Bin Assignment 9-19
magicolor 8650
Binding Margin 6-11
Binding Position 6-11, 7-14, 7-32, 9-17, 9-19
BindingPos. Adjust 9-19
BioAuth.Settings 9-28
Blank Page Print 9-19
Bonjour 5-3, 5-5, 5-8, 9-23
Bonjour Name 9-23
Bonjour Setting 3-18, 9-23
Booklet printing 6-11, 7-14, 7-32
Border 7-31
Box 10-15, 10-20
C
Call service representative 11-3
CallRemoteCenter 9-24
CardAuth.Settings 9-28
Center Erase 6-13, 7-14
Center Staple and Fold 6-13
Center Staple Pos 9-29
Centering 9-29
Certificate 10-57
Changing numeric values 9-5
Chapters 6-11, 7-14
CheckHDDCapacity 9-26
Cleaning 13-3
Client Setting 10-47, 18-9
Collate 6-10, 7-10
Collated 7-9, 7-31
Color Matching 7-32
Color Settings 6-22, 7-25, 7-32
ColorRegistration 9-29
Combination 6-11, 7-32
Common settings 6-8, 7-6
Compatible computers 2-34
Configuration 9-18
Configuration page 18-3
Configure tab 6-5
Connection diagram 2-35
Connection methods 4-3
Consumables 9-18, 12-3
Control panel 2-16, 9-3, 13-3
Copies 6-10, 7-9, 7-31
Copies & Pages 7-9
Copy Protect 6-16, 7-19
Counter List 9-21
Cover Mode tab 6-14
Cover Mode/Transparency Interleave 7-16
CR/LF Mapping 9-20
Create a self-signed Certificate 10-58
Create Overlay File 6-16
Create System User Box 10-29
Create User Box 10-25
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
19-3
Index
19
Custom Page Size 7-30
Custom paper size 7-7
Custom Size 6-9, 8-45
Custom size 7-7
Expert Adjustment 9-29
Exporting 10-30
External Server Registration 10-41
D
Finish tab 6-13
Finisher Adjust 9-29
Finisher FS-519 2-10, 11-32, 11-41, 12-15, 12-23,
F
Date and time 10-31
Date Setting 9-21
Date/Time 6-16, 7-19
Date/time 6-21, 7-22
Date/TimeSettings 9-21
Daylight Saving 9-21
Default Function Permission 10-43
Default settings 6-7, 7-4, 7-27
Delete Time 9-27
Delete User Box 9-27
DeleteJobHistory 9-25
DeleteSecurePrint 9-27
DensityAdjustment 9-29
Detail Settings 9-23
Device Option 6-5
Direct Hosting 9-22
Direct Hosting Setting 3-12
Direct Print 8-22, 10-16
Display panel 2-16
DNS Domain 9-22
DNS Server 9-22
Doc.Hold 9-27
Driver Encryption 9-26
DST Setting 9-21
Duplex printing 6-11, 7-14, 7-32
DynamicDNSSetting 9-22
E
Edge Enhancement 6-22, 7-25, 7-33
Editing copy protect 6-19, 7-20
Editing header/footer 7-24
Editing watermark 6-18
Electrostatic charger wire 13-4
E-mail RX (POP) 10-91
E-mail TX (SMTP) 10-85, 10-88
Enable SSL 9-24
Encrypt. Passphrase 6-5
Encrypted PDF Box 8-22
EncryptedPDFBox 9-16, 9-27
Encryption Passphrase 7-12
Encryption passphrase 8-35
EncryptionPassphrase 9-26
EncryptionSetting 9-26
EnhancedSecurity 9-25
EnteringPowerSave 9-18
EnteringSleepMode 9-18
EraseLeadingEdge 9-29
Ethernet 2-35
19-4
14-6
Finisher FS-609 2-14, 11-38, 11-44, 12-19, 12-24,
14-8
Finishing Options 7-32
Finishing Priority 7-14
Fold 6-13, 7-32
Fold & Staple 7-14
Fold Position 9-17
Font List 9-20
Font Setting 9-20
Font Settings 6-22
Font Size 9-20
Format HDD 9-26
Front Cover 6-14, 7-17, 7-32
FTP server 10-97
FTP Server Setting 10-100
Fusing unit 11-7
Fusing unit area 2-9
G
GDI Demo Page 9-18
General 7-31
Glossy Mode 6-22, 7-25, 7-32
H
Half-Fold Pos. 9-29
HDD EncryptionSet 9-26
HDD Settings 9-26
Header/Footer 6-16, 7-19
Header/Footer Registration 10-104
Host Name 9-22
Housing 13-3
HTTP Server 9-22
HTTPServerSetting 9-22
I
IC Card Type 9-28
ICC profile 8-39
ICC profiles 8-41
IKE Setting 10-77
Image Compression 6-22
Image Shift 6-12, 7-14, 7-32
Imaging unit 12-9
Importing 10-30
Information 10-13
Initial settings 10-108
Initializing 6-4
Inside of machine 2-9
Install a Certificate 10-62
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Index
19
Installing 5-4, 5-12
Interface Setting 10-113
Interfaces 2-35
IP address filtering 10-70
IP Filtering 9-22, 10-71
IP Setting 9-22
IPP 3-14, 4-3, 4-10, 4-17, 4-25, 5-3, 5-7
IPP Auth. Setting 9-22
IPP Authentication Setting 3-16
IPP Setting 3-15, 9-22
IPPS 3-16, 4-3, 4-10, 4-17, 4-25
IPsec 9-22, 10-75, 10-76
IPv6 9-22, 10-72
IPX 9-22
Memory 11-47
Menu operations 9-3
Menu/Select 9-3
Message 11-47, 11-48, 11-49, 11-53
Meter Count 9-18
Misfeed 11-4
J
4-17, 4-18, 4-22, 4-23, 4-25, 4-27
Network print 3-9
Network Setting Clear 10-102
Network Settings 9-22
Network settings 3-3
Network Speed 9-23
Network Timeout 9-24
Network window 4-19
No Matching Paper 9-18
Notification 10-84, 10-94
Number of Copies 9-17, 9-19
Job 10-14
Job Operation Menu 9-7, 9-16
Job Settings List 9-21
L
Language Setting 9-18
Layout (Pages per sheet) 7-31
Layout direction 7-31
Layout tab 6-11
Layout/Finish 7-13
LCD Brightness 9-21
LCT 2-5, 11-26
LDAP 10-53
LDAP over SSL 10-56
Leading 9-29
Leading Edge Adj. 9-29
Linux 18-4
List of "Utility" menu parameters 9-7
Local connection 2-37, 4-12, 4-21, 4-26
Login 10-7, 10-10
Logout 10-7, 10-9
Low Power mode 2-19
Low Power Setting 9-18
LPD 4-6, 4-13, 4-22, 4-27, 5-6, 5-9, 5-13
LPD Setting 3-9
LPR 3-9, 4-3, 4-6, 4-13, 4-22, 4-27, 5-3, 5-6, 5-9,
5-13
M
Machine authentication 10-34
Macintosh 2-34, 5-3
Mailbin kit MT-502 2-12, 11-35, 14-8
Main Menu 9-7
Main unit 11-10, 14-3
Maintenance 10-17
Maintenance tab 10-101
Manage Profile 8-41
Manage the profile 6-23, 7-25
Management List 9-21
Manual conventions 1-16
Manual Setting 10-32
magicolor 8650
N
NDS 10-49
NetBIOS Name 3-11
NetWare 9-22, 18-5
NetWare Print 9-22
NetWare Setting 10-52, 18-5
Network 10-22
Network connection 2-37, 4-6, 4-8, 4-10, 4-13,
O
Offset 6-10, 7-10, 7-32
OpenAPI 10-97
OpenAPI Setting 10-99
OpenAPI Settings 9-24
Operating environment 2-34, 10-3
Operating System 2-34
Operation Setting 9-28
Options 2-3, 7-4, 7-27
Orientation 7-8, 7-29
Original Orientation 6-9
Original Size 6-9
OriginalDirection 9-19
OS 9 7-26
OS 9.2 5-12
OS X 7-3
OS X 10.2 5-4
OS X 10.3 5-4
OS X 10.4 5-4
Other tab 6-23
Output Method 6-10, 7-10, 7-32
Output Settings 9-19
Output Tray 6-13, 7-15, 7-32, 9-19
Output tray OT-602 2-10, 14-7
Overlap width line 7-14
OverwriteAllArea 9-26
OverwritePriority 9-26
Ovewrite HDDdata 9-26
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
19-5
Index
19
P
Page Attributes 7-8, 7-29
Page Number 6-16, 7-19
Page number 6-21, 7-23
Pages 7-9, 7-31
Pages per sheet 7-31
PageScope Web Connection 3-5, 10-3
Paper 1-18, 2-20, 2-25, 2-29, 2-30, 7-29, 11-47
Paper Arrangement 6-13, 7-14
Paper capacities 2-21
Paper feed cabinet PC-106 14-5
Paper feed cabinet PC-205 14-5
Paper feed cabinet PC-406 14-6
Paper Setting Menu 9-8
Paper Settings 9-19
Paper Settings for Each Tray 6-10, 7-15
Paper Size 6-9, 7-8, 9-19
Paper Size Switch 9-19
Paper Source 7-31
Paper storage 2-23
Paper Tray 6-9, 7-15, 9-19
Paper Tray Information 6-5
Paper Tray/Output Tray 7-15
Paper Type 6-9, 7-15
Paper types 2-21
PaperTray Setting 9-18
Parameter detail 7-29
Parameter details 6-9, 7-8
Parameters 9-16
Part name 2-3
Password Rules 9-25
Pattern 6-22
PCL 2-36
PCL driver 2-36, 6-4
PCL Font List 9-18
PCL Settings 9-20, 10-110
PDL Setting 9-19
Peer 10-79
Per Page Setting 6-14, 7-18
Periodic device 13-6
Personal User Box 8-15, 9-16
Ping Confirmation 9-23
Pitch 9-20
Plug-and-play 4-12, 4-21, 4-26
POP before SMTP 10-90
Port9100 3-9, 4-3, 4-6, 4-13, 4-22
PortNumberSetting 9-24
Poster Mode 7-14
PostScript 2-36
Power Save mode 2-19
Power Save Setting 10-101
Power supply 2-17
PowerSave Setting 9-18
PPD 5-12
PPD driver 2-36, 18-4
19-6
Print 6-10, 7-10, 9-17, 9-28
Print head 13-5
Print in Overlay 6-16
Print Output 9-19
Print PS Errors 9-20
Print Reports 9-18
Print Service Name 3-11
Print Setting 9-22, 10-21
Print Setting tab 10-108
Print Type 6-11, 7-14, 7-32
Print XPS Errors 9-24
PrintDataCapture 9-25
Printer cables 2-35
Printer controller 2-32
Printer description 5-12
Printer driver 2-36
Printer driver for Macintosh 7-3
Printer drivers for Windows 6-3
Printer Info 7-4
Printer Info. 9-22
Printer Setting 9-22
Printer Settings 9-19, 9-24
PrinterAdjustment 9-29
Printing flow 2-33
Printing operations 6-3, 7-3, 7-26
Productivity priority 7-14
ProhibitFunctions 9-25
Proof Print 6-10, 7-10, 9-16
Proof print 7-32, 8-3
Properties screen 6-4
PS driver 2-36, 6-4
PS Font List 9-18
PS Setting 10-111
PS Settings 9-20
PSWC Setting 9-22
PSWC Settings 3-5
Public user 10-10
Public User Box 8-15, 9-16
Punch 6-13, 7-14, 7-32, 9-19
Punch kit PK-501 2-14, 14-9
Punch kit PK-515 2-10, 14-7
Punch scrap 12-22
Pure Black 7-32
Q
Quality 7-25
Quality Adjustment 6-22, 7-25
Quality tab 6-22
R
RAW Port Number 3-9, 9-22
Recalling a job 8-5, 8-9, 8-15, 8-20, 8-23, 8-34
Registered user 10-11
RegisterHDDLockPW 9-26
Registering the header or footer 10-104
Remove a certificate 10-66
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Index
19
Rendezvous 5-3, 5-8
Request a Certificate 10-60
Reset 10-103
Resetting setting information 10-102
Resolution 6-22, 7-32
Rotate _180 7-14
Rotate 180 6-11
S
SA Setting 10-78
Saddle stitcher SD-505 2-12, 11-37, 11-43, 12-17,
14-7
Save in User Box 6-10, 7-10, 8-12
Save in User Box and Print 7-10
Save in User Box/Print 6-10, 8-12
Saving Time 9-21
Scale 7-8, 7-29
Screen 7-32
Secure Print 6-10, 7-10
Secure print 8-6
Secure print user box 8-9
Secure PrintBox 8-9, 9-16, 9-27
SecurePrintAccess 8-10, 8-11, 9-25
Security 10-19
Security Details 9-25
Security Settings 9-25
Security tab 10-106
Select Color 6-22, 7-25, 7-32
Selecting the printer 5-5, 5-8, 5-12
Set an Encryption Strength 10-64
Set ICC Profile 9-20
Set Mode using SSL 10-65
Setting information 10-30
Setting up 2-37
Settings tab 6-6
Setup method 4-3
Shift Each Job 9-19
Simplex/Duplex 9-17
Skip Blank Pages 6-11
Sleep mode 2-19
SleepMode Setting 9-18
SMB 3-10, 4-3, 4-8, 4-13, 4-23, 9-22
Smoothing 7-32
SNMP 9-23
SNMP manager 10-80
SNMP Setting 10-82
Special paper 2-22
Spool Setting 9-19
SSL communication 10-67
SSL-based communication 10-57
Stabilization 9-29
Stamp/Composition 7-19
Stamp/Composition tab 6-16
Staple 6-13, 7-14, 7-32, 9-19, 11-41
Staple cartridge 12-15
Staple jam 11-41
magicolor 8650
Statistics Page 9-18
Status Notification Setting 10-87
Structure of pages 10-5
Support Info. 9-22
Symbol Set 9-20
SysAutoReset Set 9-21
SysAutoReset Time 9-21
System Auto Reset 2-18, 9-21
System box 10-27
System Connection 9-24
System Setting Menu 9-11
System Settings 9-18, 9-21
System Settings Menu 9-21
T
TCP Socket 9-23
TCP Socket Setting 3-6, 10-98
TCP/IP 9-22
TCP/IP Setting 9-22
TCP/IP Settings 3-3
Test Pattern 9-29
Thin Line Support 6-23
Time Adjustment 9-21
Time Adjustment Setting 10-33
Time Setting 9-21
Time Zone 10-32
Time Zone Setting 9-21
TimeAdjustmentSet 9-23
Timeout 10-113
Timer 10-101
Toner cartridge 12-3
Toner Save 6-22, 7-25, 7-33
Touch & Print 9-28
Touch and Print 8-32
Touch&PrintBox 9-16, 9-27
Touch&PrintUserBox 9-28
Transparency Interleave 6-15, 7-17, 7-32
TRAP 10-94
TRAP Settings 9-23
Tray 9-17
Tray 1 2-5, 9-17
Tray 1 (bypass tray) 2-25, 11-15
Tray 2 2-5, 2-29, 11-19
Tray 3 2-5, 2-29, 11-22, 11-24
Tray 4 2-5, 2-29, 9-17, 11-24
Tray 4 (LCT) 2-30
Tray 5 2-29
Tray Priority 9-18
Trouble code 11-3
Troubleshooting 11-50
U
UDP Port Number 9-23
Uninstalling 4-29, 5-14
USB 2-35, 4-3, 4-21
USB Timeout 9-24
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
19-7
Index
19
User Auth 10-35
User Authentication 7-10
User authentication 2-43, 2-45, 8-24, 10-8
User box 10-24
User Box Settings 9-27
User mode 10-13
User name 9-16
User Registration 10-36
User Setting Menu 9-9
User Settings Menu 9-18
UserAuth. Set NDS 9-22
User-defined 8-35
Using the TCP Socket 10-97
Utility menu 9-7
V
Verify XPS Sign. 9-20
Vertical Adj. 9-29
W
Waste toner box 12-6
Watermark 6-16
Web browser 10-3
Web Service 9-22
Web Service Common Settings 3-21
Web Service Function 3-20, 10-67
WebServiceSetting 9-22
When InvalidCert. 9-23
Windows 2-34
Windows 2000 4-22
Windows NT 4.0 4-27
Windows Server 2003 4-6
Windows Vista 4-13
WINS 9-22
WINS Setting 3-13, 10-48
Workgroup 3-11
X
XPS Setting 9-20
XPS Settings 10-112
Z
Zone Name 9-23
Zoom 6-9
19-8
EDNord - Istedgade 37A - 900 Aalborg - telefon 9633 3500
magicolor 8650
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement